Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 13-00222 - 750 S 2nd E - Rexburg LDS Temple - Locker Rm RemodelM A H U H [ for the Construction of: Remodel Rexburg 2.5 Wards Rexburg Idaho Center Stake June 2012 Set No. 01 1300222 LDS Church - Remodel 170 W 1st S £ nbwarchitects .a. RRCHITECTUREIPLRNNIHI INTERIORS 990 John Rdams ParkWag, P.O. Boe 2212, Idaho falls, Idaho 83403-2212 Telephone: (2081 522-877VI'as:(200) 522-MMmail:nhWarch@ida.net INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Project Manual For Construction of: Remodel Rexburg 2, 5 Wards Rexburg Idaho Center Stake Church Property #507-4738 Architect Project #12022 June 2012 Architect Nielson Bodily & Associates PA 990 John Adams Parkway P.O. Box 2212 Idaho Falls, ID 83403-2212 Telephone: 208-522-8779 Fax: 208-522-8785 Mechanical Engineer Engineered Systems Associates 315 West Center Pocatello, Idaho 83204 Telephone: 208-233-0501 Fax: 208-233-0529 Electrical Engineer Payne Engineering 1823 East Center Street Pocatello, Idaho 83201 Telephone: 208-232-4439 Fax: 208-232-1435 BLANK PAGE TABLE of CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP 000000 INTRODUCTION 000101 PROTECT TITLE PAGE 000110 TABLEOFCONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP 001000 SOLICITATION 001116 INVITATIONTO Bm 002000 INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROCUREMENT 002113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 004000 PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 004113 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR FORM 004334 EQUAL PRODUCT APPROVAL REQUEST FORM 004336 BIDFORM 004500 REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS 004549 CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS REPRESENTATION CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP 007000 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 007213 GENERAL CONDITIONS: FIXED SUM (SINGLE -PRIME CONTRACT) 007301 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 011100 SUMMARYOFWORK 011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012100 ALLOWANCES Table of Contents - 1 - Document 00 0110 012200 UNIT PRICES 012300 ALTERNATES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 014301 QUALITY ASSURANCE -QUALIFICATIONS 014523 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015100 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 015200 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 015400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS 015600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 015700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS j 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016200 PRODUCTOPTIONS 01 6400 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS 016600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS i FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS 024000 DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING 024113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING 032116 EPDXY- COATED REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033923 MEMBRANE CONCRETE CURING DIVISION 04: MASONRY 040100 MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY Table of Contents - 2 - Document 00 0110 040121 UNIT MASONRY REPOINTING 04 0131 UNIT MASONRY CLEANING 040500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY 040513 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042113 BRICK VENEER MASONRY DIVISION 05: METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055215 STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAILS DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060500 COMMON WORK RESULTS OF WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060573 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061011 WOOD FASTENINGS 061100 WOOD FRAMING 061636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 062001 COMMON FINISH CARPENTRY REQUIREMENTS 062210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM 064000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064001 COMMON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK REQUIREMENTS 064005 PLASTIC LAMINATE 064114 WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064115 ROSTRUM CASEWORK 064313 WOOD STAIRS 064512 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM 066000 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 6001 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071000 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07 1900 WATER REPELLENTS 076000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076210 GALVANIZED STEEL FLASHING AND TRIM 077000 ROOF AND WALL SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 077123 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Table of Contents - 3 - Document 00 0110 079000 JOINT PROTECTION 079213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08: OPENINGS 081000 DOORS AND FRAMES 081313 HOLLOW METAL DOORS DIVISION 09: FINISHES 090100 MAINTENANCE OF FINISHES 090193 REFINISHING INTERIOR CLEAR -FINISHED HARDWOOD 090500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FINISHES 090503 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 092000 PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093000 TILING 093013 CERAMICTILING 095000 CEILINGS 095116 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 096000 FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 096816 SHEET CARPET/ URETHANE CUSHION, DIRECT GLUE 097000 WALL FINISHES 097226 SISAL WALL COVERINGS 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS 099112 EXTERIOR PAINTED FERROUS METAL 099123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER 099124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL 099125 INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD 099324 INTERIOR CLEAR-FINISHEO HARDWOOD 099413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 101000 INFORMATION SPECIALTIES 101113 FIXED CHALKBOARDS 101116 FIXED MARKERBOARDS 101495 MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE 102000 INTERIOR SPECIALTIES Table of Contents - 4 - Document 00 0110 102113 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 116000 ENTERTAINMENT EQUIPMENT 116144 PLATFORM CURTAINS DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 122000 WINDOW TREATMENTS 122200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 126000 MULTIPLE SEATING - i 126113 UPHOLSTERED AUDIENCE SEATING 126713 PEWS DIVISIONS 13 THROUGH 19: NOT USED FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 20: AND 21: NOT USED DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING 220501 Common Plumbing Requirements 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Pipes and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220910 Demolition and Repair 221000 PLUMBING PIPES AND PUMPS 221116 Domestic Water Piping 22 1313 Facility Sanitary Sewers 22 1319 Facility Sanitary Sewer specialties 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4213 Commercial Water Closets and Urinals 22 4216 Commercial Lavatories DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATING, ANDAIR-CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR. CONDITIONING 23 0501 Common HVAC Requirements 23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0800 Demolition and Repair 233000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3400 HVAC Fans 23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Table of Contents - 5 - Document 00 0110 DIVISION 24: AND 25: NOT USED DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260000 ELECTRICAL 260501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 260519 LINE -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260613 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHTSCHEDULE 262000 LOW(LINE)VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION 262726 WIRINGDEVICES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 265000 LIGHTING 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING D I V I S 10 N S 27 THROUGH 29: NOT USED SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 30 AND 31: NOT USED DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 328000 IRRIGATION 328423 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS 329000 PLANTING 329001 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS 329113 SOILPREPARATION 329119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 329223 SODDING 329300 PLANTS D I V I S 10 N S 33 THROUGH 39: NOT USED PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP D I V I S 10 N S 40 THROUGH 49: NOT USED END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 6 - Document 00 0110 PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS BLANK PAGE INVITATION TO BID 1. GENERAL CONTRACTORS INVITED TO BID THE PROJECT: To be determined 2. PROJECT: Rexburg 2,5 Wards Rexburg Idaho Center Stake Remodel 3. LOCATION: 170 West 1S1 South Rexburg, Idaho 83440 4. OWNER: Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, A Utah Corporation Sole 50 East North Temple Street Salt Lake City, Utah 84150 5. ARCHITECT: NBW Architects, P.A. 990 John Adams Parkway P.O. Box 2212 Idaho Falls, Idaho 83403 6. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: A. Products provided under Value Managed Relationships (VMRs) are specified for the following products or systems: 1. Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 2. Aluminum Windows 3. Standard Steel Doors 4. Standard Steel Frames 5. Flush Wood Doors 6. Factory -Finished Wood Doors 7. Finish Hardware 8. Wood Flooring Assemblies 9. Furnaces 10. Refrigerant Condensing Units B. Project consists of upgrades to interior finishes with some exterior upgrades as well. 7. TYPE OF BID: Bids will be on a lump -sum basis. Segregated bids will not be accepted. 8. TIME OF COMPLETION: The time limit for completion of this Work will be 90 calendar days and as noted in the Agreement. 9. BID OPENING: Sealed bids will be received at time and place to be announced. Bids will be publicly opened at time and place to be announced. 10. BIDDING DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding Documents may be examined at the following plan room locations: CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 1 of 14 1. McGraw Hill Construction 2195 West 5400 South, Suite 101 Taylorsville, UT 84129-1433 2. Associated General Contractors 980 John Adams Parkway Idaho Falls, ID 83401 3. Associated General Contractors 1649 West Shoreline Drive Boise, ID 83702 4. Associated General Contractors 1411 Falls Ave. E. Suite 821 Twin Falls, Idaho 83301 5. Builders Exchange 120 North 12th, Ste. 8 Pocatello, ID 83201 B. Bidding Documents may be obtained at the Architect's office with a refundable deposit of $50.00 per set. Deposit will be refunded if documents are returned complete and in good condition within five days of bid opening. 11. BID BOND: Bid security in the amount of 5 percent of the bid will accompany each bid in accordance with the Instruction To Bidders. 12. BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Bidding by the General Contractors will be by invitation only. 13. OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS: The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any irregularity therein. END OF DOCUMENT CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 2 of 14 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DEFINITIONS: A. The definitions set forth in Section 1 of the General Conditions are applicable to the documents included under Bidding Requirements. B. Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the documents identified as Contract Documents in the Form of Agreement, except for Modifications. The Bidding Requirements are those documents identified as such in the proposed Project Manual. C. Addenda are written or graphic documents issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. They become part of the Contract Documents as noted in the Form of Agreement upon execution of the Contract. 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS: -- - - A. By submitting a bid, the bidder represents that 1. Bidder has carefully studied and compared the Bidding Documents with each other. Bidder understands the Bidding Documents and the bid is fully in accordance with the requirements of those documents, 2. Bidder has thoroughly examined the site and any building located thereon, has become familiar with local conditions which might directly or indirectly affect the contract work, and has correlated its personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents, and 3. Bid is based on the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS: A. Copies 1. Bidding Documents may be obtained as set forth in the Invitation to Bid. 2. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be issued. 3. Bidders will use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing bids and make certain that those submitting sub -bids to them have access to all portions of the documents that pertain to the work covered by sub -bid, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01. Bidder assumes full responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of partial sets of Bidding Documents by itself or any sub -bidder. B. Interpretation or Correction Of Bidding Documents 1. Bidders will request interpretation or correction of any apparent errors, discrepancies and omissions in the Bidding Documents. 2. Corrections or changes to Bidding Documents will be made by written addenda. C. Substitutions and Equal Products 1. Generally speaking, substitutions for specified products and systems, as defined in the Uniform Commercial Code, are not acceptable. However, equal products may be approved upon compliance with Contract Document requirements. 2. The terms 'Acceptable Manufacturers', 'Approved Manufacturers ' Suppliers , Installers' and 'VMR (Value Managed Relationship) Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers' are used throughout the Project Manual to differentiate among the options available to Contractor regarding specified products, manufacturers, and suppliers. See Section 016000 for options available regarding acceptance of equal products. 3. Base bid only on materials, equipment, systems, suppliers or performance qualities specified in the Bidding Documents. 4. Architect is only authorized to consider requests for approval of equal products to replace specified products in Sections where the heading 'Acceptable Manufacturers' is used and statement, 'Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev 0 13 July 2010 Page 3 of 14 016000 or 'Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 016000,' appears. In Sections where the afore -mentioned statements do not appear and a different heading is used, Architect is authorized as Owner's representative to decline consideration of requests for approval of equal products. Approvals of equal products in such Sections must be made by Owner and will generally be for subsequent Projects. D. Addenda - Addenda will be sent to bidders and to locations where Bidding Documents are on file no later than one week prior to bid opening or by fax no later than 48 hours prior to bid opening. 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES: A. Form and Style of Bids 1. Use Owner's Bid Form. 2. Fill in all blanks on Bid Form by typewriter or by printing manually in ink. Signatures will be in longhand and executed by representative of bidder duly authorized to make contracts. 3. Bids will bear no information other than that requested on bid form. Do not delete from or add to the information requested on the bid form. B. Bid Security 1. Each bid will be accompanied by a bid bond naming Owner, as listed in the Agreement, as obligee. If Bidder refuses to enter into a Contract or fails to provide bonds and insurance required by the General Conditions, amount of bid security will be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. 2. Bid bond will be issued by a surety company meeting requirements of the General Conditions for surety companies providing bonds and will be submitted on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond or AIA authorized equivalent provided by surety company The attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety will affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 3. Owner may retain bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until a. Contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished, b. Specified time has elapsed so bids may be withdrawn, or C. All bids have been rejected. C. Submission of Bids 1. Submit bid in sealed opaque envelope containing only bid form and bid security. Envelopes will be sealed, bear bidder's name, and include the following: BID FOR Rexburg 2, 5 Wards Remodel - Rexburg Idaho Center Stake Property No. 507-4738 If bid is sent by mail, enclose sealed envelope in separate mailing envelope with notation'SEALED BID ENCLOSED' on face. 2. It is bidder's sole responsibility to see that its bid is received at specified time. Bids received after specified bid opening time will be returned to bidders unopened. 3. No oral, facsimile transmitted, telegraphic, or telephonic bids, modifications, or cancellations will be considered. D. Modification or Withdrawal of Bid 1. Bidder guarantees there will be no revisions or withdrawal of bid amount for 45 days after bid opening. 2. Prior to bid opening, bidders may withdraw bid by written request or by reclaiming bid envelope. 3. Prior to bid opening, bidder may mark and sign on the sealed envelope that bidder acknowledges any or all Addenda. CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C- 13 July 2010 Page 4 of 14 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS: A. Opening of Bids - See Invitation to Bid. B. Rejection of Bids - Owner reserves right to reject any or all bids and to waive any irregularity therein. C. Acceptance of Bid 1. No bidder will consider itself under contract after opening and reading of bids until Agreement between Owner and Contractor is fully executed. 2. Bidder's past performance, organization, subcontractor selection, equipment, and ability to perform and complete its contract in manner and within time specified, together with amount of bid, will be elements considered in award of contract. 6. POST -BID INFORMATION: A. The conditionally accepted bidder submitting a bid involving subcontractors will submit its list of proposed subcontractors in a meeting to be held immediately after bid opening. 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND: A. Bond Requirements - Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment bond will be required for this Project as specified in the General Conditions. B. Time of Delivery of Bonds - Bonds will be delivered to Owner with Agreement signed by bidder. 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR: A. Agreement form will be similar to Owner's sample Form of Agreement included in Bidding Requirements. 9. MISCELLANEOUS: A. Pre -Bid Conference 1. A pre-bid conference will be held at a time and place to be announced. B. Liquidated Damages - Conditions governing liquidated damages are specified in the General Conditions and in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Examination Schedule for Existing Building and Site 1. D. Exemption from local taxes - See Supplementary Conditions END OF DOCUMENT CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 5 of 14 BLANK PAGE INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS ASBESTOS -CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM) A. The building upon which work is being performed has been examined for asbestos - containing material. To the Owners knowledge, there is no asbestos containing materials present in the building or on the site. END OF DOCUMENT CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 6 of 14 BLANK PAGE SUBCONTRACTORS AND MAJOR MATERIALS SUPPLIERS LIST Project Name: Date: Stake: Project No: General Contractor: General Contractor is to provide the names of the following subcontractors and suppliers to the Church Project Manager immediately following the bid opening: VMR SUBCONTRACTORS Doors, Frames & Hardware Other Other SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS Grading / Site work Site Utilities Demolition Site Concrete Landscaping Masonry Framing Insulation Millwork Drywall Ceramic Tile Acoustical Tile Painting Wall Coverings CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 7 of 14 Draperies Plumbing HVAC Electrical Controls Sound / Satellite CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 8 of 14 EQUAL PRODUCT APPROVAL REQUEST FORM Project Name: TO: FROM: BID DATE: Request Number: A proposed product is not legally approved and cannot legally be included in a bid or used in the Work until it appears in an Addendum or other Contract Modification as defined in the General Conditions. See Instructions To Bidders Paragraph 3,C, General Conditions, and Section 016000. PROPOSED EQUAL PRODUCT: Specification Section: Specified Products: Proposed Product: The Undersigned certifies: 1. Proposed equal product has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified products. 2. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed equal product as for specified products. 3. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. 4. Proposed equal product will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. 5. Proposed equal product does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. ATTACHMENTS: Include the following attachments - 1. Copy of the Project Manual Section where the proposed equal product would be specified, rewritten or red -lined to include any changes necessary to correctly specify the proposed equal product. Identify completely changes necessary to the original Project Manual Section. 2. Copies of details, elevations, cross-sections, and other elements of the Project Drawings redone as necessary to show changes necessary to accommodate proposed equal product. Identify completely the changes from the original Drawings. 3. Complete product literature and technical data, installation and maintenance instructions, test results, and other information required to show complete conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. SIGNED: Company Address City, State, Zip Telephone FAX CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 9 of 14 REVIEW COMMENTS: Accepted. See Addenda Number Submission Not In Compliance With Instructions. Respond to attached comments and resubmit. Proposed Equal Product Not Acceptable. Use specified products. Not Reviewed. Submission received too late. Use specified products. ADDITIONAL COMMENTS: BY: DATE: CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 10 of 14 BID FORM FOR GENERAL CONTRACT' WORK (TI.S.) OWNER: Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole (OOwnerO) Architect: NBW Architects, P.A. BID In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: a. If this Bid is accepted, Bidder will enter into an agreement with Owner to perform and furnish the Work described in the Bidding Documents for the Bid Price and within the Time of Substantial Completion indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. b. Bidder has carefully examined Set(s) Number of the Bidding Documents consisting of the Project Manual containing the Bidding Requirements, the Conditions of the Contract, and the Specifications, entitled the Drawings entitled and including sheets numbered and addenda numbers C. Bidder has examined the site of the work, existing conditions, and all other conditions affecting the work on the above-named Project. d. Bidder has carefully correlated the information known to Bidder and information and observations obtained from visits to the site with the Bidding Documents. e. Bidder is familiar with federal, State, and local laws and regulations applicable to Project. f Bidder guarantees there will be no revisions or withdrawal of bid amount for forty-five (45) days after the bid opening. _�. Base Bid: Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportations, services, licenses, fees, permits, etc, required by said documents to complete the Work described by the Contract Documents for the lump -sum of: 3. Add Alternate No. 1, New Light Fixtures: Dollars Dollars 4. Add Alternate No. s, Remodel Toilet Rooms Etc.: Dollars square foot). 5. Unit Price per square foot of additional brick masonry re -pointing: Dollars per Square Foot square foot). 6. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion of the Work within the number of days indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 7. Enclosed is a Bid Bond for not less than five percent (5%) of the bid. RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: name Signature (print signor's name) Business Address Date City, State, and Zip Code License No. Telephone FAX CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev C 13 July 2010 Page 11 of 14 BLANK PAGE FORM O F AG REEMENT FIXED SUM PROJECTS (U.S.) NOTE: The form outlined below is intended to be representative only of the type of Agreement to be used. The actual document to be executed by the parties will be prepared by the Owner and may vary somewhat in content and form from that shown below as circumstances require Corporation of the Presiding bishop of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints a Utah corporation sole, (UOwner0) and (OContractorO) agree as follows: 1. Protect Site. Property Number: Address: Project Type: Project Name: 2. Scope of the Work. Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Documents. A. The Contract Documents consist of: 1. This Agreement; 2. The General Conditions for a Fixed Sum (U.S.), Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications (Divisions 01 through 33) contained in the Project Manual entitled dated , and prepared by (OArchitectO); 3. The Drawings prepared by Architect entitled sheet numbers ,dated 4. Addendum No. dated ;and 5. All Modifications to the Contract Documents. B. The Contract Documents are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. C. The definitions set forth in the General Conditions for A Fixed Sum (U.S.) will apply to the Contract Documents. D. The Contract Documents contain the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersede all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. E. Modifications or other amendments to the Contract Documents must be in writing and as provided in the General Conditions. 4. Time of Commencement and Substantial Completion A. Contractor will commence the Work on the date for commencement set forth in the Written Notice to proceed from Owner to Contractor. B. Contractor will achieve Substantial Completion and have the Work ready for OwnerOs inspection no later than___ ___________ ( days from the date of commencement set forth in the Written Notice to proceed from Owner to Contractor, as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Time is of the essence. 5. Contract Sum. A. Owner will pay Contractor for performance of ContraclorUs obligations under the Contract Documents the Contract Sum in the amount of Dollars ($ 1, subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. B. Owner will make payments to Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. Relationship of the Parties. Contractor is an independent contractor and is not the agent or employee of the Owner. 7. Assignment. Neither party to this Agreement will assign any right or obligation hereunder without the prior written consent of the other, which consent may be granted or withheld in such party's absolute discretion. Contractor will not assign moneys due or to become due to Contractor hereunder, nor will Contractor pledge the credit of Owner or bind Owner to any third party. 8. Notice. The parties hereby designate the following addresses and facsimile numbers to be used for sending Written Notice to the other party: To Owner: To Contractor: CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev B 19 June 2003 Page 12 of 14 10. Effective Date. The effective date of this Agreement is the date indicated by the OwnerUs signature. OWNER: CONTRACTOR: Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, a Utah corporation sole [company name] By: Designated Representative or Authorized Agent Address: Telephone No: Date: Reviewed by: - [signature] [print name] Title: Address: Telephone No: License No: Date: CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev B 19 June 2003 Page 13 of 14 CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS STATEMENT (U.S.) Project Name: Project Type: Building Address: Omicr: Corporation of the Presiding Bishop of die Church oFjesus Christ of Latter -days Saints, a Utah corporation sole Property Number: Completion Date: As CONSULTANT and principal in charge; based on my best knowledge, inronnation, inspection, and belief, I certify that on the above referenced Project, no asbestos containing building materials were specified in the construction documents or given approval in shop drawings or submittals. Date Consultant and Principal in charge Company Name As GENERAL CONTRACTOR in charge of construction; based on my best knowledge, information, inspection, and belief; I certify that on the above referenced building, no asbestos containing building materials were used in the construction. Date Name General Contractor in charge CON -FSU -0090 -US Rev B 19 June 2003 Page 14 of 14 BLANK PAGE CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS BLANK PAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS for a FIXED SUM (U.S.) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 2 OWNER SECTION 3 CONTRACTOR SECTION 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT SECTION 5 SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS SECTION 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK SECTION 8 TIME SECTION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Agreement: the document entitled "Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for a Fixed Sum (U.S.), executed by Owner and Contractor for performance of the Work. B. Architect: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. C. Chanae In The Work: a modification to the requirements of the Contract Documents or a delay in Substantial Completion resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect to Contractor or from another event or circumstance. D. Chanoe Order: a written instrument prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon the following: (1) the occurrence of a Change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum as a result of the Change in the Work; and (3) the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time as a result of the Change in the Work. E. Construction Chance Directive: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Owner which: (1) orders a Change in the Work if the terms of a Change Order cannot be agreed upon prior to performance of a Change in the Work described in Section 7.1 or after occurrence of an event or circumstance described in Section 7.2; and (2) states a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or both, resulting from the Change in the Work. F. Contract Documents: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. G. Contract Sum: the total amount set forth in the Agreement payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work. H. Contract Time: the period of time set forth in the Agreement for the Substantial Completion of the Work. I. . Contractor: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. J. DaT. calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. K. Direct Costs: actual costs for labor, materials, equipment, insurance, bonds, subcontract costs and onsite supervision relating to the Project. They do not include labor costs for project managers or other off-site administration. L. Drawings: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. CON -FSU -0022 Rev. L SECTION 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION SECTION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY SECTION 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS SECTION 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK SECTION 13 RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES SECTION 14 TERMINATION SECTION 15 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS M. Field Chance: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Contractor for a minor Change in the Work consistent with the general intent of the Contract Documents costing $1,000 or less, resulting in no time extension, and which is necessary to avoid delaying the Work. N. Modification: a written amendment to the Contract Documents in the form of a: 1. Change Order; 2. Construction Change Directive; or 3. Field Change. 0. Owner: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. P. Project: the total construction designed by Architect of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. O. Product Data: standard illustrations, schedules, perfor- mance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate details regarding materials or equipment to be used in the Work, or the manner of installation, operation, or maintenance of such materials or equipment. R. Project Manual: the document identified as such in the Agreement. S. Samples And Mock-ups, physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish stan- dards by which the Work will be judged. T. Shoo Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, sched- ules, performance charts, fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, patterns, templates, and other data which illustrate some portion of the Work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract Documents specially prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. U. Specifications: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. V. Subcontractor: any entity supplying labor, materials, equipment, construction or services for the Work under sepaiate contract with Contractor or any other Subcontractor. W. ubmi I � Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups and any other documents or items furnished by Contractor or its Subcontractors to Owner or Architect to November 16, 2005 Page i of 13 demonstrate how any portion of the Work will be accomplished or the type of materials or products that will be used in the Work. X. Substantial Completion: Completion of the Work to a point where Owner can use the Work for its intended purposes. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified as such by Architect in accordance with the Contract Documents. Y. Work: all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services required by the Contract Documents. Z. Written Notice: notice in writing given from one party to the other at the addresses or facsimile numbers listed in the Agreement, or at such other addresses or facsimile numbers as the parties will designate from time to time by Written Notice, and will be effective at the earliest of: 1. The date of personal delivery to the other party with signed acknowledgment of receipt; or 2. The date sent by facsimile transmission to the other party provided receipt of the facsimile is verified by an electronic confirmation report by the party sending the facsimile transmission and further provided that a confirmation copy is sent to the other party by courier or by registered or certified mail within twenty-four (24) hours after the time and date of the facsimile transmission; or 3. The date of receipt by the other party as stated on the return receipt if sent by registered or certified mail, or by courier. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to require Contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by any one will be as binding as if required by all. Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the requirements expressly set forth in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. B. The organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to establish the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. C. Words used in the Contract Documents that have well known technical or trade meanings are used therein in accordance with such recognized meanings. D. In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any' and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Drawings, the Project Manual, and copies thereof are the property of Owner. Contractor will not use these documents on any other project. Contractor may retain one copy of the Drawings and the Project Manual as a contract record set and will return or destroy all remaining copies following final completion of the Work. SECTION 2 - OWNER 2.1 OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE Owner will designate in writing a representative who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. A. Owner will be responsible for establishment of property lines and benchmarks for grading. B. Owner will furnish to Contractor any information or services it is required to furnish under the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. C. Owner will furnish to Contractor a reasonable number of copies of the Drawings, the Project Manual, and the Addenda. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO INSPECT THE WORK Owner and its representatives will have the right to inspect any portion of the Work wherever located at any time. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents in a timely manner, Owner may order Contractor in writing to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for that order has been eliminated. SECTION 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR A. By executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that it has visited the Project site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated its own observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor will carefully review and compare the Contract Documents and any other available information relating to the Project prior to commencing and during performance of each portion of the Work and will immediately report to Architect any errors, inconsistencies, and omissions it discovers. C. Should Contractor or any of its Subcontractors become aware of any question regarding the meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents prior to commencing that portion of the Work about which there is a question, Contractor will request an interpretation or clarification from Architect before proceeding. Contractor proceeds at its own risk if it proceeds with the Work without first making such a request and receiving an interpretation or clarification from Architect. If neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors become aware of the question until after work on the relevant portion of the Work has commenced, then the following precedence will govern for purposes of determining whether resolution of the question constitutes a Change in the Work: 1. The Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 2. The Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the General Conditions. 3. The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the Drawings and the Specifications. 4. An Addendum or a Modification take precedence over the document(s) modified by the Addendum or Modification. 5. The Specifications take precedence over the Drawings. 6. Within the Drawings, larger scale drawings take prece- dence over smaller scale drawings, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 2 of 13 D. Contractor will give Architect notice of any additional drawings, specifications, or instructions required to define the Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the Work, sufficiently in advance of the need for information so as not to delay the Work. E. It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with requirements of applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with those requirements, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing. Contractor will not proceed unless Owner and/or Architect effects Modifications to the Contract Documents required for compliance with such requirements. Contractor will be fully responsible for any work knowingly performed contrary to such requirements and will fully indemnify Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising therefrom. Contractor will take field measurements and verify field conditions and will compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to Contractor with the Contract Documents before ordering any materials or commencing construction activities. Contractor will immediately report errors, inconsistencies, and omissions that it discovers to Architect. If Contractor orders materials or commences construction activities before taking field measurements and verifying field conditions, Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for additional costs to Contractor resulting from field measurements or conditions different from those anticipated by Contractor which would have been avoided had Contractor taken field measurements and verified field conditions prior to ordering the materials or commencing construction activities. G. If site conditions indicated in the Contract Documents or other information provided by Owner or Architect to Contractor differ materially from those Contractor encounters in performance of the Work, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing of such differing site conditions. 3.2 SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work. All loss, damage, liability, or cost of correcting defective work arising from the use of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures will be borne by Contractor, notwithstanding that such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless Contractor has given timely notice to Owner and Architect in writing that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are not safe or suitable, and Owner has then instructed Contractor in writing to proceed at Owner's risk. B. Contractor will utilize its best skill, efforts, and judgment to provide efficient business administration and supervision, to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials, and to perform the Work in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of Owner. C. Contractor will be responsible for: 1. The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements as shown in the Contract Documents; 2. The location and layout of the Work as shown in the Contract Documents with respect to the position of the Work on the property and the elevation of the Work in relation to grade; and 3. Setting and maintaining construction stakes. D. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of its employees and Subcontractors as well as persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. E. Contractor will not be relieved of its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a result of any tests, inspections, or approvals by Owner, Architect or their consultants. F. Contractor will be responsible for inspection of portions of the Work already completed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent portions of the Work. 3.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor will provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. B. Contractor will at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among those performing the Work and will not permit employment of any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned to them. C. Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work connected therewith until Owner has accepted the Work in writing. Contractor will replace or repair at its own expense any materials or work damaged or stolen, regardless of whether it has received payment for such work or materials from the Owner. D. Contractor will remedy all damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. E. Contractor will be responsible for determining that all materials furnished For the Work meet all requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect may require Contractor to produce reasonable evidence that a material meets such requirements, such as certified reports of past tests by qualified testing laboratories, reports of studies by qualified experts, or other evidence which, in the opinion of Architect, would lead to a reasonable certainty that any material used, or proposed to be used, in the work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. All such data will be furnished at Contractor's expense. This provision will not require Contractor to pay for periodic testing of different batches of the same material, unless such testing is specifically required by the Contract Documents to be performed at Contractor's expense. F. Contractor will coordinate and supervise the work performed by Subcontractors so that the Work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the Work. Contractor and all Subcontractors will at all times afford each trade, any separate contractor, or Owner, reasonable opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of materials. G. Contractor warrants to Owner that the materials and equip- ment furnished for the Work will be new unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents, and that the Work will be free from defects, and will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective in the discretion of Owner. If required by Architect, Contractor will furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of the materials and equipment used in performing the Work. H. Owner may elect to purchase materials required for the Work. In that event, Contractor will comply with the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents relating to such materials. CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 3 of 13 3.4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public authorities relating to performance of the Work. 3.5 TAXES A. Contractor will pay all sales, use, consumer, payroll, workers compensation, unemployment, old age pension, surtax, and similar taxes assessed in connection with the performance of the Work. B. Owner will pay all taxes and assessments on the real property comprising the Project site. 3.6 PERMITS AND FEES A. Owner will obtain and pay for all zoning and use permits and permanent easements necessary for completion of the Work. B. Contractor will obtain and pay for the building permit, and all other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. C. Contractor will secure any certificates of inspection and of occupancy required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Contractor will deliver these certificates to Architect prior to issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion by Architect. 3.7 CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE Contractor will employ a competent representative acceptable to Owner to supervise the performance of the Work. This representative will be designated in writing by Contractor prior to commencement of work and will not be changed prior to Final Inspection of the Work without prior written consent of Owner. This representative will represent Contractor for all purposes, including communication with Owner. 3.8 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A. Contractor will prepare and submit for Owner's and Architect's information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor will prepare and maintain a Submittal schedule which is coordinated with Contractor's construction schedule and sets forth specified times for Architect to review Submittals. 3.9 DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS AT THE SITE Contractor will keep at the Project site for use by Owner, Architect, or their representatives, a record copy of the Project Manual, the Drawings, all Addenda, and all Modifications. These documents will be maintained in good order and currently marked to record changes and selections made during construction. In addition, Contractor will keep at the Project site one copy of all Submittals. 3.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not alter the requirements of the Contract Documents unless incorporated into the Contract Documents by a Modification. Documents or will make such determination, verification, check, and coordination prior to commencing the relevant portion of the Work. In reviewing Submittals Architect will be entitled to rely upon Contractor's representation that such information is correct and accurate. C. Contractor will inform Architect in writing at the time of submission of any Submittal or portion thereof which deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will provide Architect with documentation demonstrating to Architect that the Submittal is equal to or better than the specified product or work. Contractor will not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect's acceptance of a Submittal unless Contractor has informed Architect in writing of the deviation and Architect has incorporated the deviation into the Contract Documents by a Modification. D. Contractor will not perform any portions of the Work requiring Submittals until the respective Submittal has been reviewed and accepted in writing by Architect. E. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, Owner will be entitled to rely upon such certifications, and neither Owner nor Architect will be expected to make any independent examination with respect thereto. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned to Contractor without action. 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING Contractor will be responsible for any cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to complete the Work and make its parts fit together properly. 3.12 ACCESS TO WORK Contractor will permit Owner, Architect their representatives and consultants access to the Work wherever located at - any time. 3.13 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Contractor will pay all royalties and license fees required by the Work or by Contractor's chosen method of performing the Work. Contractor will defend and hold Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, license or other intellectual property rights or any loss on account thereof. 3.14 INDEMNIFICATION B. Contractor will review, approve, and submit to Architect Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. By approving Submittals, Contractor represents that it has determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that it has checked and coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 4 of 13 A. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Owners representatives, employees, agents, architects, and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, liability, demands, costs, judgments, awards, settlements, causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively "Claims" or "Claim'), including but not limited to attorney fees, consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of real or personal property, including loss of use resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity includes, without limitation, indemnification of Owner from all losses or injury to Owner's property, except to the extent that such loss or injury arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity applies, without limitation, to include Claims occurring both during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder, that party will bear the cost of such Claim to the extent it was the cause thereof. In the event that a claimant asserts a Claim for recovery against any party indemnified hereunder, the party indemnified hereunder may tender the defense of such Claim to Contractor. If Contractor rejects such tender of defense and it is later determined that the negligence of the party indemnified hereunder did not cause all of the Claim, Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for all costs and expenses incurred by that party in defending against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to indemnify any party for damages resulting from the sole negligence of that party. B. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcontractor relating to the Project. Where liens have been filed against Owners property, Contractor (and/or its bonding company which has issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens of Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its bonding company are unable to obtain a lien release, Owner in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a bond around the lien or a bond to discharge the lien, at Contractors sole expense. C. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any claim of any other contractor resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in performance of the Work by Contractor. D. The indemnification obligation herein will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 3.15 PROJECT MEETINGS Contractor will attend and participate in meetings as required by the Contract Documents. =CTION 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize itself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Although Architect is required to make periodic inspections, it is not required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections. On the basis of its observations while at the site, Architect will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Architect's failure to observe a defect or deficiency in the Work will not relieve Contractor of its duty to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments. B. Architect will review Contractor's payment requests and determine the amounts due Contractor in accordance with Section 9. C. Communications between Contractor and Owner relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Contractor with Architect's consultants relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Architect and subcontractors relating to the Work will be through Contractor. Communications between Contractor and any separate contractor will be through Architect, except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. D. Architect will have the right to condemn and require removal of the following at Contractor's expense: 1. Any portion of the Work that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Any portion of the Work damaged or rendered unsuit- able during installation or resulting from failure to exercise proper protection. E. Architect will have authority to stop the Work, with concurrence of Owner, whenever such stoppage may be necessary in its reasonable opinion to insure the proper performance of the Work. Architect will review Contractor's Submittals and will accept or take other appropriate action regarding the Submittals. Architect's review of the Submittals will be for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the Contract Documents and will not be conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substan- tiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor. Architect's review of Submittals will not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. Architect's review of Submittals will not constitute acceptance of safety precautions or construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Architect's acceptance of a specific item will not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a compo- nent. G. Architect has authority to order Construction Change Directives and Field Changes in accordance with Section 7. 4.1 ARCHITECT H. Architect will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive In the event that Owner terminates its contractual relationship and review written guarantees and related documents with Architect, Owner will appoint in writing another architect, required by the Contract and assembled by Contractor, and whose status under the Contract Documents will be that of the will review and certify or reject Contractors final payment former Architect in all respects. request. I. Architect will be the interpreter of the performance and requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect's interpretations will be in writing or in the form of drawings. CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 5 of 13 J. Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the Contract Documents. SECTION 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A. Contractor will enter into contracts with Subcontractors to perform all portions of the Work that Contractor does not customarily perform with its own employees. B. Contractor will not contract with any Subcontractor who has been rejected by Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. C. If Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor proposed by Contractor, Contractor will propose an acceptable substitute to whom Owner has no reasonable objection. D. Contractor will not make any substitution for any Subcon- tractor that has been accepted by Owner and Architect without the prior written approval of Owner and Architect. 5.2 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS A. Contractor's responsibility forthe Work includes the labor and materials of all Subcontractors, including those recommended or approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all workmanship and materials under any subcontracts. Any warranties required for such work will be obtained by Contractor in favor of Owner and delivered to Architect. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor, and under no circumstances will Owner be responsible for the non-performance or financial failure of any Subcontractor or any effects therefrom. B. Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractors promptly upon receipt of payment from Owner for that portion of the funds received which represents the Subcontractor's portion of the Work completed to Contractor's satisfaction for which Owner made payment. C. Contractor will require each Subcontractor to: 1. Be licensed by the state in which the Project is located where such licensing is required by the governing authority; 2. Be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as far as they are applicable to the Subcontractor's work; 3. Assume toward Contractor the same obligations Contractor has assumed toward Owner, including the prompt payment of its Subcontractors; 4. Submit its applications for payment to Contractor in time to permit Contractor to make timely application to Owner; 5. Execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers for payments made by Contractor; and 6. Make all claims for Changes in the Work to Contractor in the same manner as Contractor is required to make such claims to Owner. SECTION 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK OR AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. Owner reserves the right to perform work itself or to award separate contracts in connection with the Project. B. When separate contracts are awarded, "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case will mean the contractor who signs each separate contract. A. Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable opportunity to place and store their materials and equipment on site and to perform their work and will properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs where applicable. B. If any part of Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any separate contractor for proper performance or results, Contractor will inspect and promptly report to Architect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper performance and results. Failure of Contractor to so inspect and report will constitute an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor as fit and proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. C. Contractor will promptly remedy damage caused by Contractor or any Subcontractor to the completed or partially completed work of other contractors or to the property of Owner or other contractors. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEANUP If a dispute arises among Contractor and separate contrac- tors as to the responsibility under their separate contracts for maintaining the Project free from waste materials and rubbish, Owner may clean the Project, allocate the cost among those responsible as Owner and Architect determine to be just, and withhold such cost from any amounts due or to become due to Contractor. SECTION 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT TO CONTRACTOR A. If Owner or Architect gives Contractor an instruction that modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. If compliance with the instruction affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work, the Contract Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in cost subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7. 1, Paragraphs B through G. If compliance with the instruction delays Substantial Completion, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1, Paragraphs B through G and Section 7.3, Paragraph A and Contractor will be paid liquidated damages for the delay as set forth in Section 7.3, Paragraph B. B. If Contractor receives an instruction from Owner or Architect that Contractor considers to be a Change in the Work, Contractor, before complying with the instruction, will notify Architect in writing that Contractor considers such instruction to constitute a Change in the Work. If Architect agrees that compliance with the instruction will constitute a Change in the Work, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Modification in accordance with Section 7.1, Paragraphs C. and D. within ten (10) days. C. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) as a result of an instruction by Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown itemized as required by Owner. The breakdown will be in sufficient detail to allow Owner to determine any increase or decrease in Direct Costs as a result of compliance with the instruction. Any amount claimed for subcontracts will be supported by a similar price breakdown and will itemize the Subcontractor's profit and overhead charges. Profit and overhead will be subject to the following limitations: 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 6 of 13 1. The Subcontractor's profit and overhead will not exceed circumstance results from a willful or negligent act or twelve (12) percent of its Direct Costs. omission of Owner or Architect. 2. Contractors profit and overhead on work performed by its own crews will not exceed twelve (12) percent of its B. If a Change in the Work results from any event or Direct Costs, circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or 3. Contractor's profit and overhead mark up on work per- omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will give Owner formed by its Subcontractors will not exceed five (5) Written Notice of such event or circumstance within twenty - percent of the Subcontractors' charges for such work. four (24) hours after commencement of the event or 4. Amounts due Owner as a result of a credit change will be circumstance so that Owner can take such action as is the actual net savings to Contractor from the Change in necessary to mitigate the effect of the event or the Work as confirmed by Architect. On credit changes, circumstance. Contractor will not be entitled to any profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will adjustment in either the Contract Time or the Contract Sum not be credited back to Owner. If both additions and based on any damages or delays resulting from such event credits are involved in a single Change in the Work, or circumstance during a period more than twenty-four (24) overhead and profit will be figured on the basis of net hours prior to Contractor giving such Written Notice to increase, if any, related to that Change in the Work. Owner. D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the C. Contractor will submit in writing any claims for an Contract Time as a result of an instruction from Owner or adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum Architect, Contractor will include in its proposal justification to resulting from an event or circumstance within the time support Contractor's claim that compliance with the instruction limits set forth below. In the event that Contractor fails to will delay Substantial Completion. submit its claim in writing within the time limits set forth below, then Contractor agrees it will not be entitled to any E. Upon receipt of Contractor's proposal for Modification, adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum or to Architect and Owner will determine whether to proceed with any other damages from Owner due to the circumstance or the Change in the Work. If Architect and Owner determine to event and waives any claim therefor. proceed with the Change in the Work, they will issue a 1. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time due to Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field inclement weather will be made by the tenth (10th) of Change as appropriate. the month following the month in which the delay oc- curred. F. Contractor agrees that if it complies with an instruction from 2. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or Owner or Architect without first giving written notice to the Contract Sum due to any other circumstance or Architect as provided in Section 7.1., Paragraph B, and event will be submitted within seven (7) days after the receiving a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or occurrence of the circumstance or event. Field Change, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as a result of the D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the instruction and waives any claim therefor. Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a - time extension) because of an event or circumstance G. If Contractor is instructed to perform work which it claims resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission of constitutes a Change in the Work but which Owner and Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Architect do not agree constitutes a Change in the Work, Change Order containing a price breakdown as described Contractor will comply with the instruction. Contractor may in Section 7.1, Paragraph C. Any amount claimed for submit its claim for adjustment to the Contract Sum, the increased labor costs as a result of the event or Contract Time, or both as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 circumstance must be supported by a certified payroll. Any within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction, claim for rented equipment or additional material costs must Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for be supported by invoices. resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction, then Contractor will not be E. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance, Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim Contractor will include with its claim copies of daily logs, therefor. letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets, Project schedules, and other supporting information necessary to justify 7.2 CHANGE IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN EVENT OR Contractor's claim that the event or circumstance delayed CIRCUMSTANCE Substantial Completion. If Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or A. If an event or circumstance other than an instruction from circumstance caused by the wilful or negligent act or Owner or Architect affects the cost to Contractor of performing omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will be compen- the Work or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may sated for all costs related to the delay in accordance with be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Section 7.3, Paragraph B. Contract Time. If the circumstance or event affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work and is caused by a willful or F. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Contractor's claim, negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, the Contract Architect will either deny the claim or recommend approval Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or to Owner. If Owner approves the claim, the adjustment in decrease in Contractor's cost to perform the Work resulting the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum will be reflected in a from the event or circumstance, subject to the conditions set Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5 or a Construction forth in Section 7.2, Paragraphs B through F. If the event or Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. If Owner or circumstance delays Substantial Completion and is described Architect denies Contractor's claim, Contractor may submit in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, the Contract Time will be its claim as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 within thirty extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay (30) days of receipt of the denial of the claim. If Contractor subject to the conditions set forth in such section. If the fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 circumstance or event delays Substantial Completion and is within the thirty (30) day time period, then Contractor agrees caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or it is not entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time and/ Architect, then Contractor will be compensated for costs or Contract Sum or any other damages as a result of the incident to the delay in accordance with Section 7.3, event or circumstance and waives any claim therefor. Paragraph B. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment to the Contract Sum or other damages from Owner as a result 7.3 EXTENSIONS OF TIME of any event or circumstance unless the event or CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 7 of 13 A. If Substantial Completion of the Project is delayed because of any of the following causes, then the Contract Time will be extended by Change Order for a period of time equal to such delay: 1. Labor strikes or lock -outs; 2. Inclement weather; 3. Unusual delay in transportation; 4. Unforeseen governmental requests or requirements; 5. A Change in the Work resulting from an instruction by Owner or Architect to Contractor subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1.; or 6. Any other event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. B. Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4. For each day of delay in Substantial Completion described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 5 and 6, Contractor will be paid liquidated damages in the amount per day set forth in the Supplementary Conditions to compensate Contractor for all damages resulting from any delay including but not limited to damages for general conditions costs, additional job site costs, additional home office overhead costs, disruption costs, acceleration costs, increase in labor costs, increase in subcontract costs, in- crease in materials costs, and any other costs incident to the delay. Contractor will be entitled to no other compensation relating to the delay. 7.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK Every Change in the Work will be documented by a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change. If Owner, Architect and Contractor reach agreement regarding the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, resulting from a Change in the Work, then the parties will execute a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5. If Owner, Architect and Contractor cannot reach agreement regarding the adjustment in Contract Sum or the adjustment in Contract Time resulting from a Change in the Work, then Owner and Architect will issue a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. Field Changes require the agreement of Architect and Contractor only. 7.5 CHANGE ORDERS Contractor's signature upon a Change Order is Contractor's acknowledgment that it is not entitled to any additional adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or any other damages or compensation as a result of the Change in the Work other than that provided for in the Change Order, irrespective of whether a subsequent claim for additional compensation or time extensions relating to the Change in the Work is described as a change in the requirements of the Contract Documents, a delay, a disruption of the Work, an acceleration of the Work, an impact on the efficiency of performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment, or other claim and irrespective of whether the impact of the Change in the Work is considered singly or in conjunction with the impact of other Changes in the Work. 7.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Contractor will promptly comply with all Construction Change Directives. B. Pending final resolution of any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time relating to a Construction Change Directive, the amounts proposed by Owner in the Construction Change Directive may be included in Contractors payment requests once the work relating thereto is completed. C. If after the work described in the Construction Change Directive is completed, Owner, Architect, and Contractor reach agreement on adjustments in the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both, such agreement will be reflected in an appropriate Change Order. D. If the parties do not reach agreement regarding an adjust- ment to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both relating to the Construction Change Directive within thirty (30) days of the completion of the work described therein, then Contractor may submit its claim for an adjustment pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of the completion of such work. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of completion of the work described in the Construction Change Directive, then it will not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such work except as set forth in the Construction Change Directive and waives any claim therefor. 7.7 FIELD CHANGES Architect and Contractor will sign a Field Change order listing the Change In The Work and the Contract Sum including markups before Contractor proceeds with the Field Change, 7.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS Except as set forth in Section 7, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or for any damages of any kind whatsoever resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect, any event or circumstance, or any act or omission of Owner or Architect and Contractor expressly waives any and all claims therefor. SECTION 8 - TIME 8.1 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. Contractor will proceed expeditiously with adequate resources and will achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.2 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK Contractor will not commence work on the Project site until the date set forth in the Written Notice to proceed. However, Contractor may enter into subcontracts and secure material for the Project after receipt of the Agree- ment with Owner's authorized signature. Owner will issue the Written Notice to proceed within forty-five (45) days after Owner receives acceptable bonds and evidence of insuran- ce pursuant to Section i i unless Owner earlier terminates the Agreement pursuant to Section 14, 8.3 DELAY IN COMPLETION OF THE WORK A. For each day after the expiration of the Contract Time that Contractor has not achieved Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay Owner the amount set forth in the Supplementary Conditions as liquidated damages for Owner's loss of use of the Project and the added adminis- trative expense to Owner to administer the Project during the period of delay. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys' fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay. Owner may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable expenses from any money due or to become due to Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and reimbursable expenses exceeds any amounts due to Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request from Owner for payment. CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 8 of 13 B. At the time Architect certifies that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion, Architect will identify the remaining items to be completed for final completion of the Work and will establish with Contractor a reasonable time for completion of those items. Architect will set forth the items to be completed and the time established for their completion in a Certificate of Substantial Completion. For each day that Contractor exceeds the time allowed for completion of the items set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay to Owner as liquidated damages for additional administrative expenses the amount set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys' fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay in completing such items. - SECTION 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor will submit to Architect a schedule of values which allocates the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work. The schedule of values will be supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as required by Architect. This schedule, when accepted by Owner and Architect, will be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor's payment requests. 9.2 PAYMENT REQUESTS A. Not more than once a month, Contractor will submit a payment request to Architect for Work completed, materials stored on the site, and for materials stored offsite as of the date of the payment request. The amount of the payment request will be based upon the schedule of values and will be equal to the value of the Work completed: 1. Less retention amounts specified in Supplementary Conditions; 2. Less all prior amounts paid by Owner to Contractor as part of the Contract Sum; and 3. Less offsets allowed under Section 9.4. The payment request may include Changes in the Work that have been performed by Contractor and authorized by Owner and/or Architect pursuant to Section 7. If a payment request includes materials stored offsite, Contractor will include with the payment request a list of the materials, the location where they are stored and the written request of Contractor and its performance bond surety that payment be made for such materials. B. Contractor warrants and guarantees that upon the receipt of payment for materials and equipment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, title to such materials and equipment will pass to Owner free and clear of all liens, claims, security inter- ests, or encumbrances. Notwithstanding this payment and passage of title, Contractor will remain responsible for all such materials and equipment until actual delivery to the project site, incorporation into the Work, and final acceptance by Owner. Contractor further warrants that no material or equip- ment covered by a payment request is subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbran- ce thereon is retained by the seller or any other person or entity. 9.3 PAYMENT REQUEST CERTIFICATION observations at the site and the data comprising the payment request, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by Architect. However, the certification of the payment request will not constitute a representation that Architect has: 1. Conducted exhaustive or continuous on-site inspec- tions to check the quantity or quality of the Work; 2. Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; 3. Reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors or other data requested by Owner to substantiate Contractor's right to payment; or 4. Made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. C. In taking action on Contractor's payment request, Owner will be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by Contractor. 9.4 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION AND PAYMENT A. Architect may withhold certification of a payment request in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner if, in the opinion of Architect, the representations to Owner required by Section 9.3, Paragraph B cannot be accurately made. If Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.3, Paragraph A. If Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, Architect will promptly certify a payment request for the amount for which Architect is able to make such representations to Owner. Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a payment request previously certified, to such extent as may be necessary in Architect's opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: 1. Defective work not remedied; 2. Third -party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- ing probable filing of such claims; 3. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors for labor, materials, equipment, construction or services; 4. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 5. Damage to Owner or another contractor for which Contractor is responsible; 6. Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance will not be adequate to cover the cost of completing the Work and damages for the anticipated delay; or 7. Contractor's persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to A. Architect will, within seven (7) days after receipt of Contractor, subsequent to Architect's certification of any Contractor's payment request, forward to Owner the payment payment request, in order to protect Owner from loss due to request certified for such amount as Architect determines is any condition described in Section 9.4, Paragraph A, properly due. If Architect certifies less than the full amount of Subparagraphs 1 through 7. Upon satisfactory resolution of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and any such conditions, payments so withheld will be made. Owner of Architect's reasons for withholding certification of the full amount requested. B. The certification of the payment request will constitute a representation by Architect to Owner based upon Architect's CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 9 of 13 9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15) days after Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect. B. Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within fifteen (15) days after Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to Architect Owner's form entitled "Contractor's Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety' fully executed by Contractor and its surety. C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the United States mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owners discretion. D. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. E. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcontractors. F. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. 9.6 FINAL PAYMENT A. Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within thirty (30) days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1. Contractor has submitted its final payment request; 2. Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete; and 3. Architect has received conditional releases or releases or waivers of lien from all Subcontractors. B. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontrac- tor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner. SECTION 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Contractor will be responsible to Owner for initiating and supervising all safety programs in connection with the perfor- mance of the Work. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. All persons on the site; 2. The Work and materials and equipment to be incorporat- ed into the Work; and 3. Other property at the site or adjacent to it. B. Contractor will give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and other lawful requirements of public authorities bearing on the safety or protection of persons and property. C. Contractor will designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty will be the prevention of accidents. This person will be Contractors onsite representative unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner and Architect. 10.3 EMERGENCIES In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of any person or property, Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from Architect or Owner, act at its own discretion to safeguard persons or property. Contractor will immediately notify Architect of such emergency action and make a full written report to Architect within five (5) days after the event. SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Contractor will obtain the following insurance and provide evidence thereof as described below prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier: 1. Workers Compensation Insurance. 2. Employers Liability Insurance with minimum limits of the greater of $500,000 per accident1disease or as required by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 3. Commercial General Liability Insurance - ISO Form CG 00 01 (10/93) or equivalent Occurrence Policy which will provide primary coverage in the event of any Occurrence Claim, or Suit, with: a. Limits of not less than: 1) $2,000, 000 General Aggregate; 2) $2,000, 000 Products - Comp/OPS Aggre- gate: 3) $1,000, 000 Personal and Advertising Injury: 4) $1,000, 000 Each Occurrence; 5) $50,000 Fire Damage (anyone fire); and 6) $5,000 Medical Expense (any one person). b. Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent: 1) ISO Form CG 25 03 (10/93), Amendment Of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the Agreement and specifying limits as shown above. 2) ISO Form CG 20 10 (10/93), Additional In- sured -- Owners, Lessees, Or Contractors (Form B), naming Owner and Architect as additional insureds. 4. Automobile Liability Insurance, with: a. A minimum limit of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit per accident; and b. Coverage applying to "Any Auto." B. Contractor will provide evidence of such insurance to Owner as follows: CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 1. Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD 25-S (3/93) Form, or equivalent: a. Listing Owner as a Certificate Holder and Additional Insured on general liability and any excess liability policies; b. Attaching the endorsements set forth above. (Note: If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of the non -ISO forms will be attached to this certificate); c. Identifying the Project; d. Containing a cancellation clause of the certificate amended to read: "Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing insurer will mail 30 days prior written notice to the certificate holder names to the left"; e. Listing the insurance companies providing coverage (All companies listed must be rated "B+ Class VII" or better in the A.M. Best Company Key Rating Guide -Property -Casualty, current edition); and Page 10 of 13 f. Bearing the name, address and telephone number of the producer and an original signature of the authorized representative of the producer. Facsimi- le or mechanically reproduced signatures will not be accepted. C. Contractor will maintain, from commencement of the Work, Insurance coverage required in Section 11.1 as follows: 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance through expiration of warranty period specified in Section 12.2, Paragraph B. including completion of any warranty repairs; and 2. All other insurance through Final Payment. D. Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, or certificate of insurance with or without cause. E. The cost of insurance as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for payment of all deductible amounts under all insufance. F. Owner will provide builders risk insurance for the cost of the Project. The policy will be written on an all risk basis with coverage for perils of wind, flood, earthquake, and terrorism, with exclusions standard for the insurance industry. The policy will be subject to a $5,000 deductible per occurrence which will be the responsibility of Contractor and will not be a reimbursable expense. Owner will provide a copy of the terms and conditions of the builders risk policy to Contractor upon Contractor's request. Contractor will comply with terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy. The terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy shall govern coverage. In addition, when there is a loss which may be covered by the builders risk insurance policy, Contractor will comply with the following: 1. Contractor will report the loss immediately to builders risk commercial insurer by calling 1 -877 -NEW LOSS (659-5677) and shall make such further written submissions as required and otherwise comply with all requirements of the builders risk policy. 2. Contractor will report the loss immediately to the Owner. 3. Contractor will immediately notify its general liability insurance carrier of the loss. 4. Contractor will take all necessary and appropriate actions to protect the property and individuals from further loss, harm, and injury. In the event there are damages resulting from fire or water, restoration shall be performed only by a certified restoration contractor. 5. To the extent possible, Contractor will preserve and not disturb the evidence of the loss until after the builders risk commercial insurer and all interested parties and their insurance carriers have had the opportunity to view and investigate the site and loss. 6. Contractor will cooperate with Owner and the builders risk commercial insurer in the investigation, documentation, and settlement of loss claims, including without limitation promptly responding to all requests for information and documentation from the builders risk commercial insurer and/or Owner. 11.2 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. Priorto commencement of the Work orwithin ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier, Contractor will furnish to Owner a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (1000/6) of the Contract Sum as security for all obligations arising under the Contract Documents. Such bonds will: 1. Be written on Form AIA Document A312 (1987). 2. Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding valid certificates of authority under Sections 9304 to 9308, Title 31, of the United States Code as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. 3. Have a penal sum obligation not exceeding the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #670 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e. "Treasury List". 4. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of attorney stating the authority of the attorney -in -tact executing the bonds on behalf of the surety. B. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. C. The cost of the bonds as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. SECTION 12 - UNCOVERING AND COR- RECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK Contractor will notify Architect at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of performing work that would cover up work or otherwise make it difficult to perform inspections required by the Specifications or by applicable governing authorities. Should any such work be covered without proper notification having been given to Architect, Contractor will uncover that work for inspection at its own expense. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Contractor will promptly correct any portion of the Work that is rejected by Architect or which fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor will bear the cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspection costs, compensation for Architect's services, and any other expenses made necessary thereby. B. Contractor will remedy any defects due to faulty materials, equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay all costs of correcting faulty work, including additional Architect's fees, attorneys' fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses when incurred. C. Nothing in the Contract Documents will be construed to establish a period of limitation within which Owner may enforce the obligation of Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents. The one-year period specified above has no relationship to the time within which compliance with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. If Owner prefers to accept any portion of the Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring removal and correction of the nonconforming Work. In that event, the Contract Sum will be reduced by an amount agreed upon by the parties that reflects the difference in value to Owner between the Work as specified and the nonconforming Work. Such adjustment may consider increased maintenance costs, early replacement costs, increased inefficiency of use, and the like and will be effective whether or not final payment has been made. Such adjustment will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5. CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 11 of 13 B. Temporary or trial usage by Owner or Architect of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment, or other work or materials supplied under the Contract Documents prior to written acceptance by Architect, will not constitute Owner's acceptance. SECTION 13 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 13.1 SUBMITTAL OF DISPUTE In the event there is any dispute arising under this Agreement which cannot be resolved by agreement between the parties, either party may submit the dispute with all documentation upon which it relies to Director of Project Construction, Physical Facilities Department, 50 East North Temple, 11th Floor, Salt Lake City, Utah 84150, who will convene a dispute resolution conference within thirty (30) days. The dispute resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations and any settlement proposal made pursuant to the conference will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that the parties do not resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute resolution conference, either party may commence legal action to resolve the dispute. Any such action must be commenced within six (6) months from the first day of the dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission of the dispute to the Director as outlined above is a condition precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any dispute. In the event that either party commences legal action to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to the Director, the other party will be entitled to obtain an order dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such other party any costs and attorneys fees incurred by that party in obtaining the dismissal, including without limitation copy costs, and expert and consultant fees and expenses. 13.2 CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH DILIGENCE Pending final resolution of a dispute hereunder, Contractor will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement. SECTION 14 - TERMINATION 14.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly give Written Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the breach within ten (10) days of the Written Notice, Contractor may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Owner and recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum represented by the Work completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation or damages as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor's indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 14.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE Should Contraetor fail to provide Owner with the bonds and certificates of insurance required by Section 11 within the time specified therein, make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled workmen or specified materials to property prosecute the Work in accordance with Contractor's schedule, or otherwise materially breach any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default within ten (10) days, Owner may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Contractor. In such case, Owner may, in Owner's sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor and/or take posses- sion of the premises and all materials, tools, equipment, and appliances thereon, and finish the Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient. Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional administrative, architectural, consultant, and legal services (including without limitation attorneys fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses), such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such expense exceeds the unpaid balance, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor's indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 14.3 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the Contract Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its absolute discretion, terminate the Agreement at any time. In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled to recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum equal to the percentage of the Work which Architect determines has been completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation as a result of j the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Owner may, in Owner's sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other I contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation, Contractor's indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. SECTION 15 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 15.1 GOVERNING LAW The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have - substantial connections to the State of Utah. The Contract Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed, and delivered in Salt Lake City, Utah. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Utah, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in Salt Lake City, Utah and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Salt Lake City, Utah and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise. 15.2 NO WAIVER CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 12 of 13 No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect, or Contractor will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 15.3 RULE OF CONSTRUCTION Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents will be deemed to have been drafted by both Owner and Contractor and will not be construed against either Owner or Contractor because of authorship. 15.4 ENFORCEMENT In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or rescind any term of the Contract Documents, the prevailing parry will be entitled to recover its attorneys fees and costs, including without limitation all copy costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and on all appeals, from the other party. 15.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Owner and Architect have the right to have tests made when they deem it necessary. Tests conducted by Owner or Architect will be paid for by Owner. Should a test reveal a failure of the Work to meet Contract Document requirements, the cost of the test as well as subsequent tests related to the failure necessary to determine compliance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by Owner, with the cost thereof deducted from the Contract Sum by Modification. B. Tests will be made in accordance with recognized stan- dards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. Materials found defective or not in conformity with Contract Document requirements will be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of Contractor. C. Owner and Architect have the right to obtain samples of materials to be used in the Work and to test samples for determining whether they meet Contract Document require- ments. Samples required for testing will be furnished by Contractor and selected as directed by Architect. Samples may be required from the sample's source, point of manufacture, point of delivery, or point of installation at Architect's discretion. Samples not required as a Submittal in the Specifications will be paid for by Owner. Should tests reveal a failure of the Sample to meet the Contract Document requirements, Contractor will provide other Samples that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT CON -FSU -0022 -US Rev L November 16, 2005 Page 13 of 13 BLANK PAGE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FIXED SUM (U.S.) ITEM 1 - GENERAL 1. Conditions of the Contract apply to each Division of the Specifications. 2. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Divisions 02 through 33 of the Specifications. ITEM 2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGE AMOUNTS: The amount of liquidated damages to be paid to the Contractor for delays under General Conditions Section 7.3, Paragraph B is $500 per day. 2. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in Substantial Completion of the Work under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph A is $500 per j day. — 3. The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in completing work itemized on the Substantial Completion Certificate under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph B is $250 per day. ITEM 3 - PERMITS 1. Delete Section 3.6, Paragraph B and replace with the following: B. The Contractor shall purchase and pay for the General Building permit. This cost shall NOT be included in its bid. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for this amount outside of the Bid Amount. All other permits and fees are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in its Bid Amount. ITEM 4 - MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES IN GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. None ITEM 5 - RETENTION APPLIED TO CONTRACTOR PAYMENTS FOR PROJECTS IN IDAHO AND MINNESOTA: Add the following to Section 9.5 G In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also withhold and retain 5% of payments made to Contractor. END OF DOCUMENT CON-FSUU-0072-US Rev N 8 January 2010 Page 1 of 1 48444784-3588.2 BLANK PAGE SPECIFICATIONS BLANK PAGE DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 011100 SUMMARYOFWORK 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS 012000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012100 ALLOWANCES 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 01 2300 ALTERNATES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 014301 QUALITY ASSURANCE -QUALIFICATIONS 01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015100 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 015200 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 015400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS 015600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 015700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS 016400 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS 016600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION 017400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 01 0000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements Summary of Work requirements. WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Sections of Divisions 02 through 49 of Specifications. Instructions contained in Specifications are directed to Contractor. Unless specifically provided otherwise, obligations set forth in Contract Documents are obligations of Contractor. B. Contractor shall furnish total labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to perform The Work in accordance with Contract Documents. WORK BY OWNER A. Owner will furnish and install some portions of The Work with its own forces. Contractor will be provided with schedule of when these items are to be performed. 1. General: a. Complete work necessary to accommodate work to be performed by Owner before scheduled date for performance of such work. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to timely complete such work. b. Store and protect completed work provided by Owner until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Work furnished and installed by Owner include, but are not limited to, following: a. Selected Commercial Toilet Accessories. b. Carpet and Carpet Base. c. Owner will terminate building telephone cables at terminal board. d. Pews. SART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used SART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION iummary of Work - 1 - 01 1100 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Multiple Contracts. SUMMARY OF CONTRACTS A. Owner has issued or will issue separate contracts for operations scheduled to be completed between Notice to Proceed and Substantial Completion. 1. General: a. Schedule performance of work covered by such separate contracts in Contractor's Construction Schedule so as to avoid delays in Substantial Completion. Give written notice to such contractors and to Owner of any revisions to scheduled delivery and work dates at least 90 days in advance. b. Complete work necessary to accommodate items provided under such separate contracts before scheduled date for performance of such work. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to timely complete such work including, but not limited to, cost of crews during downtime or for call backs and costs to correct substrate deficiencies. c. Store and protect completed work provided under separate contracts until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Pews. See Section 12 6713. 3. Sheet Carpeting. See Section 09 6816. 4. Soap dispensers, paper towel dispensers, and toilet tissue dispensers. See Section 10 2813. 5. Testing and Inspection. See Section 01 4523 "Testing and Inspection" for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods: a. Air System Testing, Adjusting, and Balance. See Section 01 4546. b. Concrete. See Section 03 3053 and Section 03 3111. c. Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity level. See Section 09 0503, Section 09 6466, Section 09 6519, Section 09 6813, and Section 09 6816. 6. Tile Carpeting. See Section 09 6813. B. Owner has issued or will issue separate contracts for operations normally scheduled to follow Substantial Completion. 1. General: a. Give written notice to such contractors and to Owner of any revisions of scheduled date of Substantial Completion at least 90 days in advance. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to accurately report date of Substantial Completion. b. Complete work necessary to accommodate items provided under such separate contracts before Substantial Completion. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to complete such work before Substantial Completion. 2. Furnishings. Aultiple Contract Summary - 1 - 01 1200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Multiple Contract Summary - 2 - 01 1200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Work Restrictions. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During construction period, Contractor will have use of premises for construction operations. Contractor will ensure that Contractor, its employees, subcontractors, and their employees comply with following requirements: 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits shown on Drawings. Do not disturb portions of site beyond Contract limits. 2. Do not allow alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs, or persons under their influence on Project site. 3. Do not allow use of tobacco in any form on Project Site. 4. Do not allow pornographic or other indecent materials on site. 5. Do not allow work on Project site on Sundays except for emergency work. 6. Refrain from using profanity or being discourteous or uncivil to others on Project Site or while performing The Work. 7. Wear shirts with sleeves, wear shoes, and refrain from wearing immodest, offensive, or obnoxious clothing, while on Project Site. 8. Do not allow playing of obnoxious and loud music on Project Site. Dc not allow playing of any music within existing facilities. 9. Do not build fires on Project Site. 10. Do not allow weapons on Project Site, except those carried by law enforcement officers or other uniformed security personnel who have been retained by Owner or Contractor to provide security services. B. Existing Facilities: 1. Owner will not occupy existing building during construction period. C. Do not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety. Questions of structural loading as part of construction means and methods shall be addressed by a licensed structural engineer engaged by Contractor, subject to the review by Architect. 'ART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used 'ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Vork Restrictions - 1 - 01 1400 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 01 2100 ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements to prepare and process Allowances. 1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Include following Allowances in bid: 1. Division 32 9001 Common Planting Requirements. Allow $5,000.00 B. If actual purchase price differs from Allowance, change order will be issued adjusting Contract Sum by amount of difference. C. Actual purchase price is actual amount paid by Contractor, including applicable sales and use taxes, before taking into account cash discounts for prompt payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION allowances - 1 - 01 2100 offMkll4ffJF.W 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 'ART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Unit Prices. 1.2 UNIT PRICE MEASUREMENT A. Unit prices listed by Contractor on Bid Form will be used to price changes to Contract Sum. Such unit prices include all labor, material, equipment, overhead, profit, and taxes. B. Unit Price Measurement: 1. Keep daily log of each Unit Price item which includes: a. A description of Unit Price Item. b. Quantity. c. Date. d. Time of Day with place for AM and PM. e. Signature of person preparing log. 2. Submit copy of log to Architect with daily construction reports. .3 UNIT PRICE PAYMENT A. Contract Sum will be adjusted by change order to reflect variance, if any, of actual quantities from amount included in base bid for each Unit Price. DART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used SART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Init Prices - 1 - 01 2200 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 2300 ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements to prepare and process Alternates. B. With its bid, Contractor has provided prices for following alternate products, materials, equipment, systems, methods, units of work, or major elements of The Work. Any of these Alternates may, at Owner's option, be selected for The Work in place of corresponding requirements of Contract Documents 1. Alternate No. 1: Replace light fixtures throughout building as indicated. See Electrical drawings and specification sections. 2. Alternate No. 2: All work as shown on Sheets A7.1 and A7.2 including plumbing and electrical work in rest rooms, serving area, mother's room and custodial rooms. See description on Sheet TS1.0 and Sheets A7.1 and A7.2. C. Contractor acknowledges that description for each Alternate is incomplete and abbreviated, but that it implies that each Alternate will be complete for scope of work affected. D. Contractor will coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate with work of each Alternate selected by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION kiternates - 1 - 01 2300 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements to prepare and process Applications for Payments. PAYMENT REQUESTS A. Use Payment Request forms provided by Owner. B. Each Payment Request will be consistent with previous requests and payments certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. C. Request Preparation: 1. Complete every entry on Payment Request form. 2. Entries will match data on approved schedule of values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 3. Submit signed Payment Request to Architect with current Construction Schedule. D. Provide following submittals before or with submittal of Initial Payment Request: 1. List of Subcontractors. 2. Initial progress report. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Submittal Schedule. E. Provide Affidavit of Contractor and Consent of Surety with Payment Request following Substantial Completion. SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit schedule of values on Owners standard form to Architect 20 days minimum before submission of Initial Payment Request as a necessary condition before payment will be processed. Coordinate preparation of schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Payment Request form. SART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 'ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 'ayment Procedures - 1 - 01 2900 BLANK PAGE 5074738 PART 1 -GENERAL June 2012 SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Rexburg 2, 5 A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Management and Coordination on Projects. 1.2 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project designation for this Project is LDS 507-4738, Rexburg ID Center Stake. B. This Project designation will be included on documents generated for Project by Contractor and Subcontractors, or be present on a cover letter accompanying such documents. 1.3 MULTIPLE CONTRACT COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for accurately maintaining and reporting schedule of The Work from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Temporary Facilities And Controls for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. C. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Construction Waste Management And Disposal services for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. D. Contractor shall be responsible for Final Cleaning for entire Project 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Attend preconstruction conference and organizational meeting scheduled by Architect at Project site or other convenient location. 2. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including such topics as: a. Construction schedule. b. Critical Work sequencing. c. Current problems. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Distribution of Contract Documents. f. Equipment deliveries and priorities. g. General schedule of inspections by Architect and its consultants. h. General inspection of tests. i. Office, work, and storage areas. j. Preparation of record documents and O & M manuals. k. Procedures for processing interpretations and Modifications. I. Procedures for processing Payment Requests. m. Project cleanup. n. Security. o. Status of permits. p. Submittal of Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, Quality Assurance / Control submittals. Project Management and Coordination - 1 - 01 3100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 51 q. Use of the premises. r. Work restrictions. s. Working hours. 3. Architect will record minutes of meetings and distribute copies to Owner and Contractor within three (3) working days. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend progress meetings at Project site at regularly scheduled intervals determined by Architect, at least once a month. 2. Progress meetings will be open to Owner, Architect, Subcontractors, and anyone invited by Owner, Architect, and Contractor. 3. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including following: a. Progress since last meeting. b. Whether Contractor is on schedule. c. Activities required to complete Project within Contract Time. d. Labor and materials provided under separate contracts. e. Off-site fabrication problems. f. Access. g. Site use. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Project cleanup. I. Quality and Work standards. m. Status of pending modifications. n. Documentation of information for Payment Requests. o. Maintenance of Project records. 4. Architect will prepare minutes of progress meetings and distribute copies of minutes to Owner and Contractor within three (3) working days. C. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Attend pre -installation conferences specified in Contract Document. a. If possible, schedule these conferences on same day as regularly scheduled Progress Meetings. If this is not possible, coordinate scheduling with Architect. b. Request input from attendees in preparing agenda. 2. Be prepared to discuss following items: a. Requirements of Contract Documents. b. Completed work necessary for installation of items or systems. c. Conditions not in compliance with installation requirements. d. Installation and inspection schedule. e. Coordination between trades. f. Space and access limitations. g. Testing. 3. Architect will prepare meeting minutes and distribute minutes to Owner and Contractor within three (3) working days. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Project Management and Coordination - 2 - 01 3100 5074738 PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY June 2012 SECTION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Rexburg 2, 5 A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. Bar Chart Schedule: 1. Submit horizontal bar chart schedule before Preconstruction Conference. Provide separate time bar for each construction activity listed on Owner0s payment request form. Within each time bar, show estimated completion percentage. Provide continuous vertical line to identify first working day of each week. Show each activity in chronological sequence. Show graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of The Work. As The Work progresses, place contrasting mark in each bar to indicate actual completion. 2. Provide copies of schedule for Architect and Owner and post copy in field office. 3. Revise schedule monthly. Send copy of revised schedule to Owner and Architect and post copy in field office. B. Daily Construction Reports: 1. Prepare daily reports of operations at Project including at least following information: a. List of Subcontractors at site. b. Approximate count of personnel at site by trade. c. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. d. Major items of equipment on site. e. Materials, equipment, or Owner -furnished items arriving at or leaving site. I. Accidents and unusual events. g. Site or structure damage by water, frost, wind, or other causes. In. Meetings, conferences, and significant decisions. i. Visitors to the job including meeting attendees. j. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. k. Any tests made and their result if known. I. Meter readings and similar recordings. m. Emergency procedures. n. Orders and requests of governing authorities. o. Modifications received, carried out. p. Services connected, disconnected. q. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. r. Brief summary of work accomplished that day. s.' Signature of person preparing report. 2. Submit daily reports to Architect at least weekly. 3. Maintain copies of daily reports at field office. ,onstruction Progress Documentation - 1 - 01 3200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Construction Progress Documentation - 2 - 01 3200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Submittal Procedures. 1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Furnish submittal schedule within 20 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, listing items specified to be furnished for review to Architect including product data, shop drawings, samples, and Informational submittals. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Enclose the following information for each item: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of Subcontractor. e. Description of part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal. g. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Print and distribute copies to Architect and Owner and post copy in field office. When revisions are made, distribute to same parties and post in same location. C. Revise schedule monthly. Send copy of revised schedule to Owner and Architect and post copy in field office. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently before performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. a. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. b. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals required for related elements of The Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 2. Processing Time: a. Allow sufficient review time so installation will not be delayed by time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1) Allow 21 days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to allow coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will promptly advise Contractor when submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2) If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process same as initial submittal. 3) Allow 10 days for reprocessing each submittal. 4) No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to Architect in sufficient time before work is to be performed to allow processing. I ubmittal Procedures 1 01 3300 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3. Identification: a. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Include name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 1) Provide space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken. 2) Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a) Project name. b) Date. c) Name and address of Architect. d) Name and address of Contractor. e) Name and address of Subcontractor. f) Name and address of supplier. g) Name of manufacturer. h) Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 4. Transmittal: a. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using transmittal letter. On transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements, or, on form or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. b. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor or not marked with Contractor's approval will be returned without action. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit Product Data, as required by individual Sections of Specifications. 2. Mark each copy of each set of submittals to show choices and options used on Project. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required for Project, mark copies to indicate information relating to Project: 3. Certify that proposed product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. List any deviations from those requirements on form or separate sheet. 4. Submit five copies of each required submittal unless otherwise required. Architect will return three copies marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. 5. Submit electronic files PDF: Architect will return a PDF copy marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit newly prepared graphic data to accurate scale. Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by 48 inches (915 by 1 200 mm). Highlight, encircle, or otherwise show deviations from Contract Documents. Include following information as a minimum: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products and materials included. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. Standard printed information prepared without specific reference to Project is not acceptable as Shop Drawings. 3. Review and designate (stamp) approval of shop drawings. Unless otherwise specified, submit to Architect six copies of shop drawings required by Contract Documents. Shop drawings not required by Contract Documents, but requested by Contractor or supplied by Subcontractor, need not be submitted to Architect for review. C. Samples: 1. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or Submittal Procedures 2 01 3300 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. a. Mount, display, or package Samples so as to ease review of qualities specified. Prepare Samples to match samples provided by Architect, if applicable. Include following: 1) Generic description of Sample. 2) Sample source. 3) Product name or name of manufacturer. 4) Compliance with recognized standards. 5) Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variations in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in material or product represented, submit set of three samples minimum that show approximate limits of variations. b. Refer to other specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate _ workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to Contractor for incorporation into The Work. Such Samples shall be undamaged at time of use. On transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. 3. Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit full set of choices for material or product. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 4. Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit three sets. One will be returned marked with action taken. 5. Samples, as accepted and returned by Architect, will be used for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, submittal may serve as final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of construction associated with each set. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Informational submittals are design data, test reports, certificates, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other documentary data affirming quality of products and installations. Submit five copies of each required submittal unless otherwise required. Architect will return three copies marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. [or] Submit electronic files: PDF. Architect will return a PDF copy marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. 1. Certificates: Describe certificates intended to document affirmations by Contractor or others that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, but do not repeat provisions of Parts 2 or 3. 2. Delegated Design Submittals / Design Data: Describe submittals intended to demonstrate design work prepared by Contractor's licensed professionals. 3. Test And Evaluation Reports: Describe submittal of test reports or evaluation service reports intended to document required tests. 4. Manufacturer Instructions: Describe submittals intended to document manufacturer instructions. 5. Source Quality Control Submittals: Describe submittal of source quality control documentation. 6. Field Quality Control Submittals: Describe submittal of field quality control documentation. 7. Manufacturer Reports: Describe submittal of Manufacturer reports as documentation of manufacturer activities. 8. Special Procedure Submittals: Describe submittals intended to document special procedures. An example would be construction staging or phasing for remodeling an existing facility while keeping it in operation. While the Contractor would normally be responsible for managing this, submittal of his plan as documentation could be specified. submittal Procedures 3 01 3300 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 9. Qualification Statements: Describe submittals intended to document qualifications of entities employed by Contractor. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. This title groups submittals that occur during project closeout. Coordinate with section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals. 1. Maintenance Contracts: Describe submittal of the maintenance contract. 2. Operations & Maintenance Data: Describe submittal of operation and maintenance data necessary for products of the Section. 3. Bonds: Describe submittals of bonds specific to this Section. 4. Warranty Documentation: Describe submittal of final executed warranty document. 5. Record Documentation: Describe submittal of record documentation specific to this Section. 6. Sustainable (LEED) Design Closeout Documentation: Describe submittal intended to document sustainable design requirements that cannot be submitted until closing or later. 7. Software: Describe submittal of extra copy operating system and other utility software necessary to operate and maintain software during life of product. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. This title groups maintenance material submittals required by Section. 1. Spare Parts: Describe spare parts necessary for Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance. 'Parts' are generally understood to be items such as filters, motor drive belts, lamps, and other similar manufactured items that require only simple replacement. 2. Extra Stock Materials: Describe extra stock materials to be provided for Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance. Extra stock materials are generally understood to be items such as ceiling tiles, flooring, paint etc. 3. Tools and Software: a. Describe tools to be provided for Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance. Tools are generally understood to be wrenches, gauges, circuit setters, etc, required for proper operation or maintenance of a system. b. If necessary, describe submittal of an extra copy of operating system and other utility software necessary to operate and maintain the software during expected life of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Submittal Procedures 4 01 3300' 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Special Procedures. 1.2 ACCELERATION OF WORK A. Complete The Work in accordance with Construction Schedule. If Contractor falls behind schedule, take such actions as are necessary, at no additional expense to Owner, to bring progress of The Work back in accordance with schedule. B. Owner may request proposal for completion of The Work at date earlier than expiration of Contract Time. Promptly provide requested proposal showing cost of such acceleration of The Work. Consult with Owner and Architect regarding possible options to decrease cost of such acceleration. If Owner determines to order acceleration of The Work, change in Contract Sum and Contract Time resulting from acceleration will be included in a Change Order. 1.3 OWNER'S SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Personal Protection 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Positive means of fall protection, such as guardrails system, safety net system, personal fall arrest system, etc, is provided to employees whenever exposed to a fall six feet or more above a lower level. b. Personnel working on Project shall wear hard hats and safety glasses as required by regulation and hazard. c. Personnel working on Project shall wear long or short sleeve shirts, long pants, and hard - toed boots or other sturdy shoes appropriate to type and phase of work being performed. B. Contractor Tools And Equipment: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Tools and equipment are in good working condition, well maintained, and have necessary guards in place. b. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) is utilized on power cords and tools. c. Scaffolding and man lifts are in good working condition, erected and maintained as required by governmental regulations. d. Ladders are in good condition, well maintained, used as specified by Manufacturer, and secured as required. C. Miscellaneous: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Protection is provided on protruding rebar and other similar objects. b. General Contractor Superintendent has completed the OSHA 10 -hour construction outreach training course or equivalent. c. Implementation and administration of safety program on Project. d. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are provided for substances or materials for which an MSDS is required by governmental regulations before bringing on site. e. Consistent safety training is provided to employees on Project. Special Procedures - 1 - 01 3500 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 2. Report accidents involving injury to employees on Project that require off-site medical treatment to Owner's designated representative. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Special Procedures - 2 - 01 3500 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are used to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality assurance and quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in Sections that specify those activities and Section 01 4523. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Requirements 1. Section 01 3100: 'Project Management and Coordination' for Pre -Installation Conferences for testing and inspection. 2. Section 01 3200: 'Construction Progress Documentation' for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Section 01 3300: 'Submittal Procedures'. 4. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: 'Testing and Inspecting Services' for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7300: 'Executions' for cutting and patching for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 7. Divisions 01 thru 49 establish responsibility for providing specific testing and inspections. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15�h St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, 'Structural Tests and Special Inspections'. 3. The American Institute of Architects. AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Washington, DC. 2007. 4. The Construction Specifications Institute. Project Resource Manual/CSI Manual of Practice, 5'h Edition. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2005. B. Definitions: )uality Requirements - 1 - 01 4000 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Contract Documents: Engineering and Architectural Drawings and Specifications issued for construction, plus clarification drawings, addenda, approved change orders and contractor designed elements. 4. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. 6. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards: a. Inspection: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Inspection: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. c. Inspection -Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. d. Inspection -Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 7. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. a. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of corresponding generic name. 8. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will bejudged. 9. Observation: Visual observation of building /site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 10. Owner's Representative: Owner's Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. 11. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 12. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 13. Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 14. Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 15. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 16. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 17. Special Inspection: See Inspection. 18. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. 19. Special Test: See Test. Quality Requirements - 2 - 01 4000 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 20. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. a. Test: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Test: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 21. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 22. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. 23. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for decision before proceeding. SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Testing Agency to demonstrate their capabilities and experience per Article 1.7 "Quality Assurance". B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. C. Certified written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service will include, but not be limited: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of Testing Agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. )uality Requirements - 3 - 01 4000 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to verify compliance and guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Activities performed by Owner's Quality Assurance Testing Agency include, but are not limited to following: 1. Preconstruction: a. Review inspection requirements. b. Review inspection frequency. c. Review concrete mix design submittals. d. Review other material submittals. e. Review contractor's welding certificates. f. Prepare non-compliance log to track non-compliant testing or inspections. g. Review Quality Assurance personnel qualifications. 2. Weekly Activities: a. Summarize and track any non-compliance issues. b. Provide summary report of previous week's performed Work. c. Visit contractors periodically to find out if they have any concerns with Quality Assurance inspectors and check on any schedule changes. d. Visit Owner's representatives periodically to find out if they have any concerns with how project is progressing. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements performed by Contractor. They do not include inspections, tests or related actions performed by Architect, Owner, governing authorities or independent agencies hired by Owner or Architect. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified Testing Agency to perform these quality control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same testing entity engaged by Owner, without Owner's written approval. B. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed j Work. a. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 3300: "Submittal Procedures." D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality control services with minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. Quality Requirements - 4 - 01 4000' 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist Testing Agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require quality control by Testing Agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Weekly Activities: a. Ensure that non-compliance log is current. b. Provide summary reports of performed Work. SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified Testing Agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Requirements of Section 01 4523: "Testing and Inspecting Services" apply. SART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used SART 3 - EXECUTION REPAIR AND PROTECTION General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as passible. 2. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Section 01 7300 "Execution" for Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for Quality Assurance and Quality Control activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for Quality Assurance and Quality Control Services. END OF SECTION )uality Requirements - 5 - 01 4000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS DART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Regulatory Requirements. 1.2 ASBESTOS A. Contract Documents for this Project have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted professional architectural and engineering practices. Accordingly, no asbestos or products containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this Project. Notify Architect immediately for instructions if f materials containing asbestos are brought to site for inclusion in the Work. j B. At Architect's direction and with Owner's approval, a certified asbestos inspector will collect samples and an independent testing laboratory will perform testing procedures on suspect materials. C. Certify that based upon best knowledge, information, inspection, and belief no building materials containing asbestos were used in construction of Project. Submit certification on form provided by Owner. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used )ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ?egulatory Requirements - 1 - 01 4100 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 4200 REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Reference standards, definitions, specification format, and industry standards. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Approved: The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Directed: The term "directed" is a command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 3. Experienced: The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum often previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authority having jurisdiction. 4. Furnish: The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. 5. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 6. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to requirements expressed by graphic representations, or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. 7. Install: The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 8. Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 9. Project Site: The term "Project site" means the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and mayor may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. 10. Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 11. Regulations: The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. 12. Submitted: The terms "submitted," "reported," "satisfactory" and similar words and phrases means submitted to Architect, reported to Architect and similar phrases. 13. Testing Agencies: A "testing agency" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, or to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 14. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements. specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. B. References Standards: references -1 - 01 4200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 Specification Format: Specifications will follow MasterFormatTm 2004 for organizing numbers and; titles. (The Construction Specifications Institute, Project Resource Manual/CSI Manual of Practice, 5'h Edition. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2005). a. Specification Identifications: 1) The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross referencing in the Contract Documents. 2) Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is q q incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. b. Specification Language: 1) Specifications should be prepared, with concern and respect for their legal status. Specifications should be Clear, Concise, Correct and Complete. 2) Streamlining: Streamlining is used to list products, materials, reference standards, and other itemized specifications. This technique places the subject first and provides keywords for quick reference c. Sentence Structure: 1) Specifications to be written in the "Imperative Mood". I a) The verb that clearly defines the action becomes the first word in the sentence. b) The imperative sentence is concise and readily understandable. 2) Streamlining is used to list products, materials, reference standards, and other itemized specifications. This technique places the subject first and provides keywords for quick reference. d. Abbreviated Language: 1) Abbreviations should be used only on drawings and schedules where space is limited. 2) Abbreviations with multiple meanings should be avoided, unless used in different disciplines where their meaning is clear from the context in which they are used. 3) Abbreviations should be limited to five or fewer letters a) The verb that clearly defines the action becomes the first word in the sentence. e. Symbols: 1) Caution should apply to symbols substituted for words or terms. f. Numbers: 1) The use of Arabic numerals rather that words for numbers is recommended. C. Industry Standards: 1. Except where Contract Documents specify otherwise, construction industry standards will apply and are made a part of Contract Documents by reference. 2. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards apparently establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer to Architect for decision before proceeding. Quantity or quality level shown or specified will be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for decision before proceeding. 3. Each entity engaged in construction on Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, Contractor will obtain copies directly from publication source. 4. Trade Association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to mean association names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. AABC Associated Air Balance Council Washington DC (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Man- Schaumburg IL (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org ufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of Washington DC (202) 624-5800 www.aashto.org State Highway & Transporta- tion Officials References - 2 - 01 4200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 AAMA American Architectural Man- Schamumburg IL (847) 303-5774 www.aamanet.org ufacturers Association AASHTO American association of Washington DC www.transportation.org State Highways and Trans- www.aashto.org ortation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute Farmington MI (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org International Hills AGA American Gas Association Washington DC 202 824-7000 www.aga.org AHRI Air Conditioning Heating & Arlington VA (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org Refrigeration Institute AIA American Institution of Archi- Washington DC (202) 626-7300 www.aia.org tects AISC American Institute of Steel Chicago IL (312) 670-2400 www.aisc.org Construction AISI American Iron & Steel Insti- Washington DC (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org tute AITC American Institution of Tim- Englewood CO (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ber Construction AMCA Air Movement & Control As- Arlington IL (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org sociation International Heights ANSI American National Stan- New York NY (212) 642-4900 www.ansi.org dards Institute APA APA -Engineered Wood As- Tacoma WA (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org sociation API American Petroleum Institute Washington DC 202 682-8000 www.api.org AQMD South Coast Air Quality Diamond Bar CA (909) 396-2000 www.agmd.gov Management District ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Atlanta GA (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org Refrigerating, & Air - Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Me- New York NY (800) 843-2763 www.asme.org chanical Engineers Interna- tional ASTM ASTM International West Consho- PA (610) 832-9500 www.astm.org hocken AWI Architectural Woodwork In- Potomac Falls VA (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org stitute AWPA American Wood Protection Birmingham AL (205) 733-4077 www.awpa.com Association AWS American Welding Society Miami FL 800 443-9353 www.aws.or AWWA American Water Works As- Denver CO (303) 794-7711 www.awwa.org soc BHMA Builders Hardware Manufac- New York NY (212) 297-2122 www.buil6ershard aare.com turers Association BIA Brick Industry Association Reston VA 703 620-0010 www.bia.or CFI International Certified Floor- Kansas City MO (816) 231-4646 www.cfi-installers.org covering Installers, Inc. CRI Carpet & Rug Institution Dalton GA 706 278-3176 www.carpet-ru(,I.com CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Schaumburg IL (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org Institute CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Chattanooga TN 423 892-0137 www.cispi.org DHI Door & Hardware Institute Chantilly VA 703 222-2010 www.dhi.orcl DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Birmingham AL (205) 402-8700 www.dipra.org Association. EIMA EIFS Industry Members As- Morrow GA (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com sociation FM FM Global Johnston RI 401 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council Bonn, Ger- +49 0 228 367 www.fsc.or leferences - 3 - 01 4200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 References - 4 - 01 4200' many 660 GA Gypsum Association Hyattsville MD 301 277-8686 www.gypsum.org GS Green Seal Washington DC 202 872-6400 www.greenseal.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Ve- Reston VA (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org neer Association ICC International Code Council Washington DC 888 422-7233 www.iccsafe.or ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service Whittier CA 562 699-0543 www.ice-es.or ICBO International Conference of (See ]CC) Building Officials ISO International Organization Geneva, Swit- www.iso.org for Standardization zerland ISSA International Slurry Surfac- Annapolis MD (410) 267-0023 www.ilu—rry.org ing Association KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufac- Reston VA (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org tures Association LPI Licjhtninci Protection Institute Maryville MO 800 488-6864 www.lightning.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufactur- Deerfield IL (888) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org ers' Association MSS Manufacturer's Standardiza- Vienna VA (703) 281-6613 www.mss-hq.com tion Society of The Valve and Fittings Industr NAAMM National Association of Ar- Glen Ellyn IL (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org chitectural Metal Manufac- turers NEC National Electric Code from NFPA . NEMA National Electrical Manufac- Rosslyn VA (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org turer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection As- Quincy MA (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org sociation NFRC National Fenestration Rating Greenbelt MD (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org Council NSF NSF International Ann Arbor MI 734 769-8010 www.nsf.or PCA Portland Cement Associa- Skokie IL (847) 966-6200 www.cement.org tion PCI Precast/ Prestressed Can- Chicago IL (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org crete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute Norcross GA 770 676-9366 www. orcelainenamel.co RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Ins- LaGrange GA (706) 882-3833 www.rfci.com titute SCTE Society of Cable Telecom- Exton PA (800) 542-5040 www.scte.org munications Engineers SDI Steel Deck Institute Fox River IL (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org Grave SDI Steel Door Institute Westlake OH 440 899-0010 www.steeldoor.or SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Chicago IL (312) 644-6610 www.arcat.com Manufacturer's Association Sill Steel Joist Institute Myrtle Beach SC 843 293-1995 www.steeljoist.or SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Condition- Chantilly VA (703) 803-2980 www.smacna.org ing Contractors National As- sociation SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Pensacola FL (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org j Bureau SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturer's Glen Ellyn IL (630) 942-6592 www.ssma.com Association TCNA Tile Council of North Amer- Anderson SC (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com ica TPI Truss Plate Institute Alexandria VA 703 683-1010 www.t inst.or TPI TurfgrassProducers Interna- East Dundee IL 847 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org References - 4 - 01 4200' i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 D. Federal Government Agencies: 1. Names and titles of federal government standard or specification producing agencies are often abbreviated. Following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in Contract Documents represent names of standard or specification producing agencies of federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. :S tional (formally American Washington DC (202) 512-0000 www.doc.gov Sod Producers Association UL Underwriters Laboratories Camas WA 877 854-3577 www.ul.com WDMA Window and Door Manufac- Chicago IL (312) 321-6802 www.nwwda.org :CC turer's Association Washington DC (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov WWPA Western Wood Products Portland OR (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org S Association Washington DC (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov D. Federal Government Agencies: 1. Names and titles of federal government standard or specification producing agencies are often abbreviated. Following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in Contract Documents represent names of standard or specification producing agencies of federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. :S Commercial Standard (U S Washington DC (202) 512-0000 www.doc.gov Department of Commerce :PA Environmental Protection Washington DC (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov Agency :CC Federal Communications Washington DC (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov Commission S Federal Specifications Unit Washington DC (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from GSA 4IL Military Standardization Philadelphia PA (215) 697-2179 www.dod.gov Documents (U S Department of Defense LIST National Institute of Stan- Gaithersburg MD (301) 975-4500 www.ts.nist.gov dards and Technology, technology Administration (US Department of Com- merce )SHA Occupational Safety & Washington DC 202) 219-8148 www.osha.gov Health Administration (U S Department of Labor 'S Product Standard of NBS (U Washington DC (202) 512-1800 www.doc.gov S Department of Commerce E. Governing Regulations / Authorities: 1. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the Work. 2. Obtain copies of regulations required to be retained at Project Site, available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need for such reference. ,ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION eferences - 5 - 01 4200 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 4301 QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALIFICATIONS SART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4523: 'Testing and Inspecting Services' for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. 3. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 4. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E329-1 I a, 'Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.' QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualifications: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements: 1. Fabricator / Supplier / Installer Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. a. VMR (Value Managed Relationship): 1) Where heading 'VMR (Value Managed Relationship) / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers' is used to identify list of specified suppliers or installers, Owner has established relationships that extend beyond requirements of this Project. 2) No other Suppliers/ Installers will be acceptable. 3) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified suppliers / installers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 4) Following areas of the Work have restrictions on sub -bids by Contractor: a) Pews, Section 12 6713: VMR, no other Manufacturer / Installers accepted. b) Sheet Carpeting, Section 09 6816: VMR, no other Manufacturer / Installers accepted. )uality Assurance - Qualifications - 1 - 01 4301 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' c) Tile Carpeting, Section 09 6813: VMR, no other Manufacturer / Installers accepted. b. Approved: 1) Where heading 'Approved Suppliers/ Distributors/ Installers /Applicators /Fabricators' is used to identify list of specified suppliers / distributors / installers / applicators / fabricators, use only listed suppliers / installers / fabricators. 2) No substitutions will be allowed. 3) Following areas of the Work have restrictions on sub -bids by which may be accepted by Contractor: a) Ceramic Tiling, Section 09 3013: No other Suppliers accepted. b) Electric And Electronic Control System for HVAC, Section 23 0933, No other Distributors accepted. c) Rough Carpentry, Sections 06 1100, 06 1636, 06 1712, 06 1733, and 06 1800: Alternate Supplier approved by Architect before bidding. d) Sound, Division 27: Installers approved by Architect before bidding. c. Acceptable Suppliers / Installers: 1) Where heading 'Acceptable Suppliers/Installers/Fabricators' is used, qualifications as specified in Quality Assurance in Part 1 of individual sections will be used to determine requirements of those that will be acceptable to be used on Project. Lists for acceptable installers can include additional installers that may be approved before bidding or by addendum. a) Underground Sprinklers, Section 32 8423: Acceptable Landscape Installers approved by Landscape Architect before bidding. Equal Landscape Installers to be approved by Architect before bidding. 2) Following areas of the Work have restrictions on sub -bids by Contractor: a) Baptismal Font Railing, Section 11 9119, Acceptable Installers are listed for each state. Equal Installers to be approved by Architect before installation. 2. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: a. Authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 3. Installer Qualifications: a. Firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 4. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 5. Manufacturer's Field Services Qualifications: a. Experienced authorized representative of manufacturer to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. 6. Professional Engineer Qualifications: a. Professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 7. Specialists: a. Certain sections of Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. b. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for activities indicated. c. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. 8. Testing Agency Qualifications: a. Independent Testing Agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1) Testing Laboratory: Quality Assurance - Qualifications - 2 - 01 4301 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a) AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) Accreditation Program. b) Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL). c) Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL): Nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. d) National Voluntary Laboratory (NVLAP): Testing Agency accredited according to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Technology Administration, U. S. Department of Commerce Accreditation Program. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 'ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Wality Assurance - Qualifications - 3 - 01 4301 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 4523 TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES 3ART1-GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes testing, inspections, special testing, special inspections, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods as specified hereafter for the Work. B. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality control procedures to fully comply with Contract Document requirements in all regards. C. Costs: Costs of initial services for testing and inspection personnel will be paid by Owner unless otherwise noted. 1. If initial tests indicate non-compliance with contract document requirements, any subsequent testing will be performed by same personnel and paid for by Contractor. D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. 3. Division 01 through Division 50 establish responsibility for providing specific testing and inspections and Field Tests and Inspections. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15th St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, 'Structural Tests and Special Inspections'. B. Definitions: 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Contract Documents: Engineering and Architectural Drawings and Specifications issued for construction, plus clarification drawings, addenda, approved change orders and contractor designed elements. 4. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. testing and Inspection Services 1 01 4523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 6. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards: a. Inspection: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Inspection: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. c. Inspection -Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. d. Inspection -Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 7. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. a. Using term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of corresponding generic name, such as Il "carpenter." b. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of i corresponding generic name. 1 8. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verifyi selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation. They are not samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will be judged. 9. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 10. Owner's Representative: Owner's Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. 11. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 12. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 13. Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 14. Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 15. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 16. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 17. Special Inspection: See Inspection. 18. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. 19. Special Test: See Test. 20. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. a. Test: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Test: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 21. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 22. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. 23. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: Testing and Inspection Services 2 01 4523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. ASTM C1021-08, 'Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants'. b. ASTM C1077-11 b, 'Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation'. c. ASTM C1093-11, 'Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry. d. ASTM D3666 -09a, 'Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials'. e. ASTM D3740-11, 'Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction'. f. ASTM E329-1 1b: 'Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing'. g. ASTM E543-09, 'Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing'. h. ASTM E1212-09, 'Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies'. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. General: Additional submittal requirements are specified in Individual Sections in Division 01 through Division 50. 2. Certificates: a. Testing Agency will submit certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service. 3. Tests and Evaluation Reports: a. Testing Agency or Agencies will prepare logs, test reports, and certificates applicable to specific tests and inspections and deliver copies (or electronic record) distributed as follows: 1) 1 copy to Owner's Representative. 2) 1 copy to Architect. 3) 1 copy to Consulting Engineers (Engineer of Record). 4) 1 copy to General Contractor. 5) 1 copy to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (if required). b. Other tests, certificates, and similar documents will be obtained by Contractor and delivered to Owner's Representative and Architect in such time as not to delay progress of the Work or final payment therefore. 4. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Testing Agency will submit following prior to commencing the Work: 1) Qualifications of Testing Agency management and personnel designated to project. 2) Testing Agency 'Written Practice for Quality Assurance'. 3) Qualification records for Inspector and non-destructive testing technicians designated for project. 4) Testing Agency non-destructive testing procedures, equipment calibration records, and personnel training records. 5) Testing Agency Quality Control Plan for monitoring and control of testing operations. 6) Welding Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). 7) Bolting Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). 8) Shear Connector Stud Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). 9) Seismic Connections Inspection Procedures (Structural Steel testing). QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Owner or Owner's designated representative(s) will perform quality assurance. Owner's quality assurance procedures may include observations, inspections, testing, verification, monitoring and any other procedures deemed necessary by Owner to verify compliance with Contract Documents. B. Owner will employ independent Testing Agencies to perform certain specified testing, as Owner deems necessary. Owner's employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve .esting and Inspection Services 3 01 4523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5` Contractor of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Certification: Product producers and associations, which have instituted approved systems of quality control and which have been approved by document approval agencies, are not required to have further testing. Concrete mixing plants, plants producing fabricated concrete and wood or plywood products certified by agency, lumber, plywood grade marked by approved associates, and materials ori equipment bearing underwriters' laboratory labels require no further testing and inspection. D. Written Practice for Quality Assurance: Testing Agency will maintain written practice for selection and administration of inspection personnel, describing training, experience, and examination requirements for qualification and certification of inspection personnel. Written practice will describe testing agency procedures for determining acceptability of structure in accordance with applicable codes, standards, and specifications. Written practice will describe Testing Agency inspection procedures, including general inspection, material controls, visual welding inspection, and bolting inspection. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control will be sole responsibility of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for testing, coordination, start-up, operational checkout, and commissioning of all items of the Work included in Project. All costs for these services will be included in Contractor's cost of the Work. B. Contractor will assign one employee to be responsible for Quality Control. This individual may have other responsibilities and may be Contractor's Project superintendent or Contractor's Project Manager. C. Notify results of all Testing and Inspection performed by Contractor's independent Testing Agencies to Architect and Owner's Representative within twenty four (24) hours of test or inspection having been performed. 1. Testing and Inspection Reports will be distributed as follows: a. 1 copy to Owner's Representative. b. 1 copy to Architect. c. 1 copy to Consulting Engineer(s) (Engineer of Record). d. 1 copy to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (if required). 1.7 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS - GENERAL A. Testing specifically identified to be conducted by Owner, will be performed by an independent entity and will be arranged and paid for by Owner. B. Individual Sections in Division 01 through Division 50 indicate if Owner will provide testing and inspection of the Work of that Section. C. Owner may engage additional consultants for testing, air balancing, commissioning, or other special services. Activities of any such Owner consultants are in addition to Contractor testing of materials or systems necessary to prove that performance is in compliance with Contract requirements. Contractor must cooperate with persons and firms engaged in these activities. D. Tests include but not limited to those described in detail in 'Field Quality Control' in Part 3 of Individual Sections in Divisions 01 through Division 50. E. Taking Specimens: 1. Except as may be specifically otherwise approved by Architect, only testing laboratory shall secure, handle, transport, or store any samples and specimens for testing. F. Scheduling Testing Agency: 1. Contractor will coordinate the Work and facilitate timeliness of such testing and inspecting services so as not to delay the Work. Testing and Inspection Services 4 01 4523 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 2. Contractor will notify Testing Agency and Architect to schedule tests and / or inspections. a. Architect will notify Owner's Representative before each test and / or inspection. G. For 'building -wide' and/or life safety systems, such as emergency lighting, emergency power uninterruptible power supply systems, fire alarm, fire sprinkler systems, smoke evacuation systems, toxic gas monitoring, capturer exhaust systems, etc. formal start-up inspection will be completed prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection for any area of Project: 1. Manufacturer's representatives and installing contractor will demonstrate both operation and compliance to Owner's agents and consultants. If coordinated and scheduled appropriately by Contractor, these equipment and/or systems inspections may also serve to provide required Owner training, if approved in advance by Owner. 2. Contractor responsible for requesting that Architect arrange for inspection of materials, equipment, and work prior to assembly or enclosure that would make materials, equipment, or work inaccessible for inspection and at other times as may be required. ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILTY A. Architect Duties: 1. Notify Owner's Representative before each test and/or inspection. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. Owner's employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Tests and inspections that are not explicitly assigned to Owner are responsibility of Contractor. C. Cooperate with Testing Agency(s) performing required inspections, tests, and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify Testing Agency before operations to allow assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: 1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor, equipment, and facilities deemed necessary by Testing Agency to facilitate inspections and tests at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or helping Testing Agency in taking samples. 3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. 4. Providing Testing Agency with preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by Testing Agency. D. Contractor will integrate Owner's independent Testing Agency services within Baseline Project Schedule and with other Project activities. E. For any requested inspection, Contractor will complete prior inspections to ensure that items are ready for inspection. F. All Work is subject to testing and inspection and verification of correct operation prior to 100% payment to Contractor of line item(s) pertaining to that aspect of the Work. G. For Mechanical Equipment, inspection and documented approval of individual equipment and/or system(s) must be accomplished prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection for any area affected by said equipment and/or system. 1. Contractor will perform thorough checkout of operations with manufacturer's representatives prior to requesting formal inspection by Owner. Contractor must notify Owner's Representative, in advance, as to when manufacturer's representative is scheduled to arrive at Site. H. Comply: esting and Inspection Services 5 01 4523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,'. 1. Upon completion of Testing Agency's inspection, testing, sample -taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. 2. Comply with Contract Documents in making such repairs. Data: Furnish records, drawings, certificates, and similar data as may be required by testing and inspection personnel to assure compliance with Contract Documents. Defective Work (Non -Conforming Work): Non -conforming Work as covered in General Conditions applies, but is not limited to following requirements: 1. Where results of inspections, tests, or similar services show that the Work does not comply with Contract Document requirements, correct deficiencies in the Work promptly to avoid Work delays.! 2. Where testing personnel take cores or cut-outs to verify compliance, repair prior to acceptance. I 3. Contractor responsible for any and all costs incurred resulting from inspection that was scheduled: prematurely or retesting due to failed tests. i 4. Remove and replace any Work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to Owner. j 5. Should test return unacceptable results, Contractor will bear all costs of retesting and re- i inspection as well as cost of all material consumed by testing, and replacement of unsatisfactory material and/or workmanship. K. Protection: 1. Protect construction exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities, and' protect repaired construction. L. Scheduling: Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. 1. Schedule testing and inspections in advance so as not to delay the Work and to eliminate any need to uncover Work for testing or inspection. 2. Notify Testing Agency and Architect as noted in Sections in Division 01 through Division 50 prior to any time required for such services. 3. Incorporate adequate time for performance of all inspections and correction of noted deficiencies. 4. Schedule sequence of activities to accommodate required services with minimum of delay. 5. Schedule sequence of activities to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspections. M. Test and Inspection Log: 1. Provide system of tracking all field reports, describing items noted, and resolution of each item. Prepare record of tests and inspections. Include following: a. Date test or inspection was conducted. b. Description of the Work tested or inspected. c. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. d. Identification of Testing Agency or inspector conducting test or inspection. 2. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 1.10 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Testing Agency, including independent testing laboratories, will be licensed and authorized to operate in jurisdiction in which Project is located. 1. Approved Testing Agency Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 apply. B. Testing and Inspection Services: 1. Testing Agency will not release, revoke, alter, or increase Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 2. Testing Agency will not give direction or instruction to Contractor. 3. Testing Agency will have full authority to see that the Work is performed in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and directions of Owner's Representative and/or Architect. Testing and Inspection Services 6 01 4523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 4. Testing Agency will not provide additional testing and inspection services beyond scope of Work without prior approval of Owner's Representative and / or Architect. C. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Independent Testing Agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual specification Sections will cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties and will provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 2. Testing Agency will test or obtain certificates of tests of materials and methods of construction, as described herein or elsewhere in technical specification. 3. Testing Agency will provide management, personnel, equipment, and services necessary to perform testing functions as outlined in this section. 4. Testing Agency must have experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated by ASTM standards and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 5. Testing Agency will comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM D3666, ASTM D3740, and other relevant ASTM standards. 6. Testing Agency must calibrate all testing equipment at reasonable intervals (minimum yearly) with accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 7. Welding Procedure Review: Testing Agency will provide review and approval or rejection of all welding procedures to be used and will verify compliance with all reference standard requirements. D. Testing and Inspection Reports: 1. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected the Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 2. Laboratory Reports: Testing Agency will furnish reports of materials and construction as required, including: a. Description of method of test. b. Identification of sample and portion of the Work tested. 1) Description of location in the Work of sample. 2) Time and date when sample was obtained. 3) Weather and climatic conditions at time when sample was obtained. c. Evaluation of results of tests including recommendations for action. 3. Inspection Reports: Testing Agency will furnish 'Inspection at Site' reports for each site visit documenting activities, observations, and inspections. Include notation of weather and climatic conditions, time and date conditions and status of the Work, actions taken, and recommendations or evaluation of the Work. 4. Reporting Testing and Inspection (Conforming Work): a. Submit testing and inspection reports as required within twenty four (24) hours of test or inspection having been performed. 5. Reporting Testing and Inspection Defective Work (Non -Conforming Work): a. Testing Agency, upon determination of irregularities, deficiencies observed or test failure(s) observed in the Work during performance of its services of test or inspection having been performed, will: 1) Verbally notify results to Architect, Contractor, and Owner's Representative within one hour of test or inspection having been performed (if Defective Work (Non -Conforming Work) is incorporated into project). 2) Submit written inspection report and test results as required within twenty four (24) hours of test or inspection having been performed. 6. Final Report: a. Submit final report of tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which identify unresolved deficiencies. esting and Inspection Services 7 01 4523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests And Inspections: 1. Field Tests and Inspections requirements are described in 'Field Quality Control' in Division 01 through Division 50 Sections. END OF SECTION Testing and Inspection Services 8 01 4523, 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 5100 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Temporary Utilities. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Where necessary, engage appropriate local utility companies to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of service, provide remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company's recommendations. 1. Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 3. Arrange with utility company and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 4. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility availability, provide trucked -in services. 5. Obtain construction easements necessary to bring temporary and/or permanent utilities to site. 6. Use qualified personnel for installation and maintenance of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with the Work of Owner or other Contractors on Project Site. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 7. Pay cost and use charges for temporary facilities and utilities. B. Prepare schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At earliest feasible time and when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. C. Keep temporary utilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or allow them to interfere with progress of The Work. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on Project site. D. Limit availability of temporary utilities to essential and intended uses to reduce waste and abuse. E. Maintain utilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. F. Remove each temporary utility and control when need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of permanent utility, or by Substantial Completion. Complete permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary utility. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that make up temporary utilities are property of Contractor. 2. By Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent utilities used during construction period, including but not limited to: .emporary Utilities - 1 - 01 5100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subjected to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by substantial hours of use. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER A. Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. 1.4 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against predictable and controllable fire losses. At a minimum, provide and maintain in working order two Standard UL Labeled ABC all-purpose 10 Ib fire extinguishers. Do not incorporate these extinguishers into final Project. 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 1.5 HEATING, COOLING, AND VENTILATING: A. Install and operate temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating units including fuel, temporary piping, fittings, wiring, and connections necessary to provide environmental conditions specified for various portions of the Work. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient conditions required and reduce consumption of energy. B. Repair damage to building and contents caused by cold, heat, dampness, and/or heating, cooling, and ventilating equipment. Select equipment that will not have harmful effect on completed installations or on elements being installed. C. Maintain safe conditions for use of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating systems including, but not limited to, following requirements: 1. Operate equipment according to equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide fresh air ventilation required by equipment manufacturer. 3. Keep temperature of fuel containers stabilized. 4. Secure fuel containers from overturning. 5. Operate equipment away from combustible materials. D. Permanent mechanical system may be operated subject to the following conditions: 1. Do not operate system when work causing air -borne dust is occurring or when dust caused by such work is present without installation of temporary filtering system approved by Architect. 2. Operate system at no cost to Owner, including cost of fuel. 3. Assume all responsibility and risk for operation of system. 4. Return permanent mechanical equipment to 'like -new' condition for Substantial Completion Inspection. 1.6 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Install and operate temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. Temporary Utilities - 2 - 01 5100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1.7 TEMPORARY TELEPHONES A. Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout construction period. B. Contractor will pay for Local calls. Party making call will pay for long-distance and toll calls. C. At each telephone, post list of important telephone numbers. 1.8 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Temporary Utilities - 3 - 01 5100 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 5200 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Construction Facilities. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary facility. B. Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or allow them to interfere with progress of The Work. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on Project site. C. Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. D. Remove each temporary facility when need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of permanent facility, or by Substantial Completion. Complete permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that make up temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. By Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. FIELD OFFICES A. Provide and maintain insulated, weather tight temporary office of sufficient size to accommodate Contractor's personnel at Project site and for use by Owner, Architect and Subcontractors. 1. Keep office clean and orderly. 2. Heat and cool office as needed. 3. Furnish office with locking door, light(s), table(s), bench(es), rack(s) for drawings, telephone, and FAX machine. 4. Make office available for progress meetings. 5. Provide an operable fire extinguisher in facility. 6. Provide hardhats for Owner's Representatives for site visits. B. If Owner agrees to permit removal of temporary office before Substantial Completion, Contractor may use a room as an office after temporary office is removed. Equip room as specified above and restore to 'like -new' condition before Substantial Completion. SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide temporary sanitary toilet. Service and maintain temporary toilet in a clean, sanitary condition. ,onstruction Facilities 1 - 01 5200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Construction Facilities - 2 - 01 5200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 5400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Construction Aids. 1.2 SCAFFOLDING, PLATFORMS, STAIRS, ETC A. Furnish and maintain equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, and elevators as required for proper execution of The Work. B. Apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet requirements of applicable laws and safety regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION I onstruction Aids 1 - 01 5400 BLANK PAGE 1074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 5600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES )ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Temporary Barriers and Enclosures. GENERAL A. Protection Of Existing Improvements: Protect streets, private roads, and sidewalks, including overhead protection where required. Repair damage to existing improvements caused by construction activities. B. Protection Of Adjacent Property: Provide necessary protection for adjacent property and lateral support thereof. TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. Comply with standards and code requirements in erecting barricades, warning signs, and lights. B. Take necessary precautions to protect persons, including members of the public, from injury or harm. TEMPORARY SECURITY BARRIERS A. Install temporary enclosures of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and other violations of security. B. Secure materials and equipment stored on site. C. Secure building at the end of each work day. Maintain exterior building security until Substantial Completion. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Protection: 1. Before commencing site work, build and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation as shown on the drawings. 2. Individual trees will have protective fencing built beyond drip line. 3. Build protective fencing around groups of trees and other vegetation as indicated on Drawings. 4. Keep areas within protective fencing undisturbed and do not use for any purpose. B. Maintenance 1. Maintain existing tree, shrubs, and vegetation as indicated in Contract Documents: a. Remove and replace vegetation that dies or is damaged beyond repair due to construction activities. b. Damage to any tree, shrub, or vegetation that has been indicated to remain and be protected, will have a cost associated with it. This includes branches, trunk and root systems: 'emporary Barriers and Enclosures - 1 - 01 5600 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Trees: $1,000.00. 2) Shrubs: $ 100.00. 3) Vegetation: $ 50.00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Temporary Barriers and Enclosures - 2 - 01 5600 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 5700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Temporary Controls. TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and reduce possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result: 1. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. 2. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near site. B. Provide protection against weather (rain, winds, storms, frost, or heat) to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. C. Protect excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water: 1. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with requirements of applicable local regulations. Where feasible, use permanent facilities. 2. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. D. Comply with governing ordinances relating to weed control and removal. )ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used )ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION .emporary Controls - 1 - 01 5700 BLANK PAGE 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Common Product Requirements. GENERAL A. Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, new and unused at time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect. B. Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on building exterior. 1. Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Provide permanent nameplates on items of service -connected or power -operated equipment. Locate on easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Nameplate will contain following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. C. Where specifications describe a product or assembly by specifying exact characteristics required, with or without use of brand or trade name, provide product or assembly that provides specified characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. D. Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by manufacturer for application described. General overall performance of product is implied where product is specified for specific application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by manufacturer's certification of performance. E. Where specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select product that complies with standards, codes or regulations specified. F. Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily. Where no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily nor complies with other specified requirements, refer to Architect. G. Where specified product requirements include phrase ' ... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ... 'or similar phrase, select product and manufacturer that comply with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture from product line selected. :ommon Product Requirements 1 - 01 6100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' H. Remove and replace products and materials not specified in Contract Documents but installed in the Work with specified products and materials at no additional cost to Owner and for no increase in Contract time. a. a PDF copy marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. i PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Common Product Requirements - 2 - 01 6100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Product Options. 1.2 GENERAL A. Product Selection: 1. When option of selecting between two or more products is given, product selected will be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Non -conforming work as covered in Article 12.3 of General Conditions applies, but is not limited, to use of non-specified products or manufacturers. C. Product selection is governed by Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include: 1. Substitutions And Equal Products: a. Generally speaking, substitutions for specified products and systems, as defined in the Uniform Commercial Code, are not acceptable. However, equal products may be approved upon compliance with Contract Document requirements. b. Approved Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers: 1) Category One: a) Owner has established 'Value Managed Relationships' that extend beyond requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 2) Category Two: a) Owner has established National Contracts that contain provisions extending beyond requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 3) Category Three: a) Specified products are provided to Church Projects under a National Account Program. Use these products to preserve advantages that accrue to Owner from those programs. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. 4) Category Four: a) Provide only specified products available from manufacturers listed. No substitutions, private -labeled, or equal products, or mixing of manufacturers' products is allowed on this Project. b) In Sections where lists recapitulating Manufacturers previously mentioned in Section are included under heading 'Manufacturers' or'Approved Manufacturers', this is intended as a convenience to Contractor as a listing of contact information only. It is not intended that all manufacturers in list may provide products where specific products and manufacturers are listed elsewhere in Section. Product Options - 1 - 01 6200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' c. Acceptable Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers: 1) Type One: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products / manufacturers has been obtained from Architect by Addendum. 2) Type Two: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products and manufacturers has been obtained from Architect in writing before installing or applying unlisted or private -labeled products. 3) Use'Equal Product Approval Request Form' to request approval of equal products, manufacturers, or suppliers before bidding or before installation, as noted in individual Sections. d. Quality / Performance Standard Products / Manufacturers: 1) Class One: Use specified product/ manufacturer or equal product from specified manufacturers only. 2) Class Two: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from any manufacturer. 3) Products / manufacturers used shall conform to Contract Document requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Product Options - 2 - 01 6200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 6400 OWNER - FURNISHED PRODUCTS 3ART1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Owner -Furnished Products. Install items furnished by Owner or receive and store in safe condition items purchased directly by Owner according to requirements of Contract Documents: 1. Display Cases. See Section 10 1200. 2. Fixed Chalkboards. See Section 10 1113. 3. Fixed Markerboards. See Section 10 1116. 4. Fixed Tackboards. See Section 10 1123. 5. Interior Signage. See Section 10 1495. 6. Rostrum casework. See Section 06 4115. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Review 'Contractor Notification Report' listing Owner -furnished products to be delivered for Project: a. Review delivery dates and vendor lead times for each item and coordinate with construction schedule. Immediately report recommended changes to Owner's Purchasing Coordinator listed in 'Contractor Notification Report.' Contact vendors directly if changes to delivery dates become necessary during construction. b. Report problems in coordinating delivery dates with construction schedule to Architect and Owner's Purchasing Coordinator. 2. Receive and unload Owner -furnished materials and products. a. Provide labor and equipment necessary to receive, unload, and store materials and products. b. Verify that number of packages received matches number listed on bill of lading. c. Check for external damage. d. Note discrepancies between pieces received and pieces listed on bill of lading as well as instances of visible damage on bill of lading before signing. Include Project Name and Project Number on bill of lading e. Store and protect deliveries. Report deliveries made outside of delivery schedule to Owner's Purchasing Coordinator. 3. Within twenty four (24) hours of delivery: a. Open and inspect each piece of freight delivered. Note concealed damage not observed at time of delivery. b. Compare 'Contractor Notification Report' with packing slips. Note discrepancies in number, size, color, model numbers, etc. c. Deliver bills of lading on which loss or damage is recorded, or copy, to Owner's Purchasing Coordinator together with report of concealed damage and discrepancies. d. Notify Owner's Purchasing Coordinator immediately of damage and discrepancies. 4. As directed by Owner, either repair or replace shortages and damaged items not recorded and reported as specified above at no additional cost to Owner. Nner-Furnished Products - 1 - 01 6400 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Owner -Furnished Products - 2 - 01 640( 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 6600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling Requirements. 1.2 GENERAL A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1.3 DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule delivery to reduce long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. B. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. C. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. D. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Store products at site in manner that will simplify inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. B. Store heavy materials away from Project structure so supporting construction will not be endangered. C. Store products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 'ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION elivery, Storage, and Handling Requirements - 1 - 01 6600 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 7300 EXECUTION DART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for governing Execution of the Work. COMMON INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations to extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. Notify Architect of conflicts between Manufacturer0s installation instructions and Contract Document requirements. B. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure work true to line and level. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located, and aligned with other Work. Allow for expansion and building movement. C. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to Architect for final decision. D. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure best possible results. Isolate each part of completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. E. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to reduce necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. F. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not shown, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry or local codes for that application. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to Architect for final decision. ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used ART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION tecution - 1 - 01 7300 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 7400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Cleaning and Waste Management as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Coordination of responsibilities for waste management. 2. Section 01 6400: Waste removal of Owner furnished products. 3. In addition to standards described in this section, comply with all requirements for cleaning -up as described in various other Sections of these Specifications. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Asphalt Pavement, Brick, and Concrete (ABC) Rubble: Rubble that contains only weathered (cured) asphalt pavement, clay bricks and attached mortar normally used in construction, or concrete that may contain rebar. The rubble shall not be mixed with, or contaminated by, another waster or debris. 2. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. 3. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. 4. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 6. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. 7. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. ART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used ART 3 - EXECUTION PROGRESS CLEANING A. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. B. Keep premises broom clean during progress of the Work. C. Keep site and adjoining streets reasonably clean. If necessary, sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to suppress dust. D. During handling and installation, protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from soiling, damage, or deterioration until Substantial Completion. eaning and Waste Management 1 - 01 7400 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 E. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure ability to operate without damaging effects. i F. Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period. G. Before and during application of painting materials, clear area where such work is in progress of debris, rubbish, and building materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors and vacuum as required and take all possible steps to keep area dust free. H. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to avoid damage and deterioration. {� 6 I. Place extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become Owner's property as directed by Owner or Architect. J. Construction Waste Management And Disposal: 1. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, Subcontractors, and contractors under separate contract with Owner and dispose of legally. Remove unsuitable or damaged materials and debris from building and from property. a. Provide adequate waste receptacles and dispose of materials when full. b. Properly store volatile waste and remove daily. c. Do not deposit waste into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. 2. Do not burn waste materials or build fires on site. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately before Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean building and area where The Work was performed. Remove all rubbish from under and about building, landscaped areas and parking lot and leave building and Project Site ready for occupancy by Owner. B. Comply with individual manufacturer's cleaning instructions. C. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program, including but not limited to: 1. Interior Cleaning: a. Clean inside glazing, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, fingerprints and dirt. c. Clean and polish woodwork and finish hardware. d. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. e. Clean plumbing fixtures and tile work. Remove spots, soil or paint. f. Clean surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and i other substances. Clean light fixtures and lamps. g. Clean other fixtures and equipment and remove stains, paint, dirt, and dust. h. Remove temporary floor protection and clean floors. 2. Exterior Cleaning: a. Clean outside glazing, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, and dirt from exterior surfaces. c. Clean and polish finish hardware. d. Remove temporary protection systems. e. Clean dirt, mud, and other foreign material from paving, sidewalks, and gutters. f. Clean drop inlets, through -curb drains, and other drainage structures. g. Remove trash, debris, and foreign material from landscaped areas. Cleaning and Waste Management - 2 - 01 740( 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 END OF SECTION leaning and Waste Management - 3 - 01 7400 BLANK PAGE i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Closeout Procedures. GENERAL A. Schedule closeout procedures in the four weeks before expiration of Contract Time. Weeks will be marked by three Architect's weekly visits before Final Closeout Review, Final Closeout Review, and expiration of Contract Time. B. Date of Substantial Completion shall fall within week between Architect's final weekly visit and Final Closeout Review. Date of Substantial Completion shall not occur until Construction Schedule shows completion of construction work, unless agreed to by Architect and included on Certificate of Substantial Completion. PRELIMINARY CLOSEOUT REVIEWS A. Confirm with Architect when Substantial Completion of The Work will be achieved. 1. Final three Architect's weekly visits will serve as Preliminary Closeout Reviews to determine if Final Closeout Review will occur as scheduled and that Substantial Completion of the Work will be achieved by that date. 2. By final weekly Architect visit, notify Owner and Architect of date when Substantial Completion of The Work will be achieved. B. Arrange with Architect date for Final Closeout Review to confirm Substantial Completion. CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Before Final Closeout Review: 1. Deliver Closeout Submittals to Architect. 2. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items as required by the Contract Documents. 3. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner's maintenance personnel as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements. FINAL CLOSEOUT REVIEW A. Participate in Final Closeout Review. B. When Owner and Architect have confirmed that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of The Work, Owner, Architect, and Contractor will execute Certificate of Substantial Completion that contains: 1. Date of Substantial Completion. 2. Punch List of Work not yet accepted. oseout Procedures 1 - 01 7700 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5! 3. Amount to be withheld for completion of Punch List work. 4. Time period for completion of Punch List work. 5. Amount of liquidated damages set forth in Supplementary Conditions to be assessed if Contractor, fails to complete Punch List work within time set forth in Certificate. C. Final Acceptance Conference: 1. Notify Architect in writing when work on Punch List has been completed. 2. Arrange with Architect date and time for Final Acceptance Conference. 3. When Owner and Architect have confirmed that Contractor has completed Punch List work, Architect will issue letter to Owner authorizing final payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Closeout Procedures - 2 - 01 7700 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But is Not Limited To: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Closeout Submittals. 1.2 GENERAL A. Workmanship bonds, final certifications, equipment check-out sheets, and similar documents. B. Releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of The Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. C. Project photographs, damage or settlement survey, and similar record information required by Contract Documents. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operations And Maintenance Manuals that include: 1. Copy of Soils Report. 2. Copy of complete Project Manual including Addenda, Modifications as defined in General Conditions, and other interpretations issued during construction. a. Mark these documents to show variations in actual Work performed in comparison with text of specifications and Modifications. Show substitutions, selection of options, and similar information, particularly on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. b. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 3. Operations and maintenance submittals required by Contract Documents. 4. Certifications required by Contract Documents. 5. Copies of warranties required by Contract Documents. 6. Testing and Inspection Reports required by Contract Documents. WARRANTIES A. When written guarantees beyond one year after substantial completion are required by Contract Documents, secure such guarantees and warranties properly addressed and signed in favor of Owner. Include these documents in Operations & Maintenance Manuals specified above. B. Delivery of guarantees and warranties will not relieve Contractor from obligations assumed under other provisions of Contract Documents. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect from deterioration and loss in secure, fire -resistive location. Provide access to record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. loseout Submittals 1 - 01 7800 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 B. Maintain clean, undamaged set of Drawings. Mark set to show actual installation where installation varies from the Work as originally shown. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to Owner, but was not shown on Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 1.6 SPARE PARTS A. Provide items that are indicated in individual Sections. 1.7 EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS A. Provide items that are indicated in individual Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Closeout Submittals .2- 01 78001, DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS 024000 DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING 024113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS -able of Contents - 1 - 020000 my"AMMIXeM 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Demolish and remove portions of existing site facilities as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used SART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Notify corporations, companies, individuals, and local authorities owning conduits running to property 1. Protect and maintain conduits, drains, sewers, pipes, and wires that are to remain on the property. PERFORMANCE A. Execute work in orderly and careful manner, with due consideration for neighbors and the public. B. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. Coordinate with Owner for equipment and materials to be removed by Owner. C. Concrete: 1. Saw cut joints between material to be removed and material to remain to full depth. 2. Hand -excavate trench 12 inches (300 mm) wide and 16 inches (400 mm) deep along concrete or paving to be removed. Cut roots encountered with saw, axe, or pruner. Dc not cut roots with excavating equipment. Remove roots under concrete and paving to be replaced down to 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade. CLEANING A. Keep streets and roads reasonably clean, and sweep daily. B. Sprinkle demolition rubbish and debris as necessary to lay dust. C. Promptly remove demolition materials, rubbish, and debris from property. END OF SECTION 'elective Site Demolition - 1 - Section 02 4113 BLANK PAGE DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING 032116 EPDXY-COATED REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033923 MEMBRANE CONCRETE CURING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 030000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 03 2116 EPDXY-COATED REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install epoxy coated reinforcement steel bars as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 0000: 'General Requirements': a. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. b. Section 013100: 'Project Management and Coordination' for pre -installation conference. c. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. d. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. e. Section 01 4523: 'Testing and Inspecting Services' for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. f. Section 01 7800: 'Closeout Submittals'. 2. Section 03 0353: 'Miscellaneous Cast -In -Place Concrete'. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15" St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, 'Structural Tests and Special Inspections'. B. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. 3. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards: a. Inspection: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Inspection: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. c. Inspection -Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. d. Inspection -Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 4. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. poxy-Coated Reinforcement Steel Bars - 1 - 032116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 5. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 6. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 7. Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 8. Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 9. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 10. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 11. Special Inspection: See Inspection. 12. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. 13. Special Test: See Test. 14. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. a. Test: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Test: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 15. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 16. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. 17. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements. C. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 117-10: 'Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary'. b. ACI 117M-10: 'Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary (Metric)'. c. ACI 318-11, 'Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.' 2. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for reinforcement bars testing): a. ASTM A615/A615M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.' b. ASTM A706/A706M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.' c. ASTM A775/A775M-07b, 'Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars.' 3. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Testing Agencies): a. ASTM E329 -11b: 'Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing.' b. ASTM E543-09, 'Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing.' c. ASTM E1212-09, 'Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies.' 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. 'Manual of Standard Practice' (28th Edition 2009 or latest edition available). 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 03 3111. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, and Section 03 3111, review following: a. Installation scheduling and reinforcing placement. b. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review frequency of testing and inspections. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement Steel Bars - 2 - 03 21161 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 B. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect as directed in Section 03 3053 and Section 03 3111. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Reinforcing placement drawings. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Mill certificates certifying mill tests for reinforcing in accordance with ASTM A775. 1) Mill test is to be approved before fabrication begins. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: t a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Inspection Reports of reinforcement bars. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Comply with provisions of following codes and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: a. ACI 318, 'Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary'. b. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)'Manual of Standard Practice'. B. Qualifications: 1. Throughout progress of the work of this section, provide at least one (1) person who shall be thoroughly familiar with Construction Documents and other applicable specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in necessary skills, and who shall be present at site and shall direct all work performed under this Section: a. In actual installation of the work of this Section, use adequate numbers of skilled workmen to ensure installation in strict accordance with approved design. b. In acceptance or rejection of work performed under this Section, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on part of workmen. C. Testing and Inspection: 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for inspection of reinforcement bars: a. See Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary'. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver bars separated by size and tagged with manufacturer's heat or test identification number. 2. Reinforcement steel bars shall be free of abrasions or other penetrations of epoxy -coating at time of delivery and placing. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Properly protect rebar on site after delivery. :poxy-Coated Reinforcement Steel Bars - 3 - 032116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Epoxy Coated Reinforcement Steel Bars: 1. Bars shall have grade identification marks and conform to ASTM A615/A615M with coating conforming to ASTM A775/A775M and comply with requirements of ACI 318.21.2.5. a. Bar supports shall be completely coated with epoxy or vinyl, compatible with both concrete and epoxy coating on bars. Coating shall be at least 1/8 inch thick at tips. b. Tie wire shall be nylon coated. 2. Actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi and Ratio of actual ultimate stress (at breaking point) to actual tensile yield stress shall not be less than 1.25. a. Grade 60 minimum, except dowels that are to be field bent, Grade 40 minimum. 3. Bars shall be deformed type. 4. Bars shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other bond -reducing coatings. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcement bars according to the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 'Manual of Standard Practice' and details on Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 2. Blowtorch shall not be used to facilitate field cutting or bending or any other reinforcing work. 3. Reinforcement shall not be bent after partially embedded in hardened concrete. B. Placing Reinforcement: 1. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 'Manual of Standard Practice' recommended practice for 'Placing Reinforcing Bars' for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports. and as herein specified. 2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations: a. Locate and support reinforcing by chairs, runners, bolsters, bar supports, spacers, or hangers, as required as recommended by'ACI Detailing Manual, latest edition, except slab on grade work. b. Support bars in slabs on grade and footings with specified bar supports around perimeter and at 4-1/2 feet (1 350 mm) on center each way maximum to maintain specified concrete cover. c. Install bar supports at bar intersections. 3. Bend bars cold. 4. Dowel vertical reinforcement for formed concrete columns or walls out of footing or structure below with rebar of same size and spacing required above. 5. Securely anchor and tie reinforcement bars and dowels before placing concrete. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. C. Splices: 1. Non -Concrete Structural System: Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement Steel Bars - 4 - 032116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 a. Avoid splices of reinforcement bars at points of maximum stress. Lap bars 60 bar diameters minimum unless dimensioned otherwise on Drawings. Run reinforcement bars continuous through cold joints. 2. Concrete Structural System: a. In beams, slabs, and walls, avoid splices of reinforcement bars at points of maximum stress. b. Lap bars as follows: 1) Compression Splices: 45 bar diameters minimum. 2) Tension Splices: In accordance with ACI Class B requirements. 3) No splice shall be less than 18 inches (450 min). 4) For epoxy coated rebar, increase lap -splice lengths by 1.5 times those listed above. c. In columns, splices in vertical bars are permitted only at floor levels or points of lateral support and shall consist of 45 bar diameter laps. d. Run reinforcement bars continuous through cold joints. D. Tolerances: 1. Provide following minimum concrete cover for reinforcement as per ACI 318. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations: a. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 1) Exterior Slabs on Grade (where shown): 2 inches (50 mm). 2) Sections other than Slabs: 3 inches (75 mm). b. Concrete Exposed to Earth or Weather: 1) No. 6 and Larger Bars: 2 inches (50 mm). 2) No. 5 and Smaller Bars, W31 and D31 Wire: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). END OF SECTION :poxy-Coated Reinforcement Steel Bars - 5 - 032116 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 03 3053 MISCELLANEOUS EXTERIOR CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Compact sub -base for miscellaneous cast -in-place concrete as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install miscellaneous cast -in-place concrete and equipment pads as described in Contract Documents. 3. Furnish and install sealants and curing compounds as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 0000: 'General Requirements': a. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. b. Section 01 3100: 'Project Management and Coordination' for pre -installation conference. c. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. d. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. e. Section 01 4523: 'Testing and Inspecting Services' for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. I. Section 01 7800: 'Closeout Submittals'. 2. Section 03 3923: Membrane concrete curing application. A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 224R-01, 'Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures' (Reapproved 2008). b. ACI 224.1 R-07, 'Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures' (March 1, 2007). c. ACI 224.2R-92: 'Cracking of Concrete Members in Direct Tension' (Reapproved 2004). d. ACI 224.313-95, 'Joints in Concrete Construction' (Reapproved 2008). e. ACI 302.1 R-04: 'Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction' (March 23, 2004). f. ACI 305R-10, 'Guide to Hot Weather Concreting'. g. ACI 306R-10, 'Guide to Cold Weather Concreting'. 2. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15t' St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 3. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, 'Structural Tests and Special Inspections'. B. Definitions: 1. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. C. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 117-10: 'Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary'. b. ACI 117M-10: 'Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary (Metric)'. liscellaneous Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete - 1 - 033053 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 c. ACI 301-10, 'Specification for Structural Concrete'. d. ACI 305.1-06, 'Specification for Hot Weather Concreting'. e. ACI 306.1-90(R2002), 'Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting'. f. ACI 318-11, 'Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary'. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1751-04(2008), 'Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non -extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)% b. ASTM E329-1 ib:'Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing'. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 03 3111: a. Schedule concrete site element pre -installation conference after installation of sleeves, placing of aggregate base, and installation of forms, but before placing of concrete. b. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 03 3111, review following: 1) Review installation scheduling, coordination, and placement of concrete. 2) Review approved mix design and use of admixtures. 3) Review 'Verification Of Conditions' requirements. 4) Review placement, finishing, and curing of concrete including cold and hot weather requirements. 5) Review smooth rubbed concrete finish procedures and requirements (applied immediately after removing concrete formwork while concrete is "green"). 6) Review joint layout plan for control and expansion joints for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. 7) Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. c. Review frequency of testing and inspections. 2. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501. a. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, and 31 0501, review following: j 1) Review proposed miscellaneous exterior concrete schedule. B. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty four (24) hours minimum before placing concrete for exterior site work concrete (sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc.), footings, foundation walls, and building slabs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Joint layout plan for control and expansion joints for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters for written approval before starting work on this Section. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of concrete for exterior site work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for concrete for exterior site work: Miscellaneous Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete - 2 - 0330531 5074738 June 2012 a. See Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary'. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Cold Weather Limitations: a. Follow requirements of ACI 306 for cold weather concreting. 2. Hot Weather Limitations: a. Follow requirements of ACI 305 for hot weather concreting. DART 2 -PRODUCTS Rexburg 2, 5 SYSTEM t E A. Materials: j 1. Concrete: a. Meet requirements specified in Section 03 3111 for exterior concrete. ACCESSORIES A. Formwork: 1. Meet requirements specified in Section 03 1113. B. Expansion Joint Material: 1. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. 2. Manufactured commercial fiber type: a. Meet requirements of ASTM D1751. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Conflex by Knight-Celotex, Northfield, IL www.aknightcompany.com. 2) Sealtight by W R Meadows Inc, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 3. Recycled Vinyl: a. Light gray color. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Proflex by Oscoda Plastics Inc, Oscoda, MI www.oscodaplastics.com. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. C. Finishing Material: 1. Finishing Material available in multiple concrete shades to closely match concrete surface. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Mixture of 1 part cement (using same cement as used in concrete foundations), 1 part sand with 95% passing #50 sieve. b. RapidSet WunderFixx by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corporation, Cypress, CA www.rapidset.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Concrete Forms: 4iscellaneous Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete - 3 - 033053 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Verify dimensions and spot elevations for locations of forms for concrete footings, stem walls, building slabs, curbs, gutters, walkways, and drainage systems are correct before concrete is placed. 1) Notify Architect of incorrect dimensions or spot elevations in writing. 2) Do not place concrete until corrections are made and verified. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Sub -Base: a. Compact sub -base as specified in Section 31 2213. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Form vertical surfaces full depth. Do not allow concrete to flow out from under forms in any degree into landscaped areas. i B. Sidewalks, And Landings: 1. Slope with cross slope of 1/8 to 1/4 inch per ft (3 to 6 mm per 300 mm) (one to two percent) in direction of intended drainage. 2. Slope away from building 1/8 to 1/4 inch per ft (3 to 6 mm per 300 mm) (one to two percent) minimum. 3. Do not dust with cement. C. Mow Strips and Aprons: 1. Aggregate base not necessary under mow strips and aprons. 2. Form and cast mow strips in place. 3. Set top of mow strip above finish grade as follows: a. Sodded Areas: 2 inches (50 mm) below. b. Seeded Areas: One inch (25 mm) below. c. Ground Cover Areas: 2 inches (50 mm) below. d. Trees and Shrub Areas (not individual trees): 4 inches (100 mm) below. 4. Compact topsoil underneath mow strips and aprons to density of undisturbed earth. D. Joints: 1. Expansion Joints: a. Install so top of expansion joint material is 1/4 inch (6 mm) below finished surface of concrete. b. No expansion joint required between curbs and sidewalks parallel to curb. c. Provide expansion joints at ends of exterior site concrete elements that are perpendicular to and terminate at curbs, building foundations or other concrete elements (i.e. sidewalks, mow strips, aprons). d. Provide expansion joints between sidewalks that are parallel, and adjacent, to the storage building or main building. e. Provide expansion joints around perimeter of concrete slab on grade at mechanical enclosure, around perimeter of slab on grade at dumpster enclosure and at top and bottom of exterior stairs. f. Spacing On Center g. Seal expansion joints as specified in Section 07 9213 for following areas: 1) Between entryway slabs and building foundations. 2) Between sidewalks and building foundations. h. Expansion joints are not required to be sealed for following areas: Miscellaneous Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete - 4 - 033053 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Within aprons and where apron abuts building foundation and sidewalks. 2) Within mow strips and where mow strip abuts building foundation and sidewalks. 3) Within sidewalks. 2. Scored Control Joints: a. Depth of control joints shall be approximately one quarter of concrete slab thickness, but not less than one inch (25 mm). b. Control joints may be sawcut in concrete paving but are to be hand tooled in sidewalks, curbs and gutters, mow strips, and aprons. c. Spacing On Center (+/-): Sidewalks 4 feet to 6 feet 12 meters to 18 meters Curbs and Gutters 10 feet 1 3.0 meters Mow Strips 3 feet to 5 feet 1 0.90 meters to 1.50 meters E. Finish: 1. Flatwork: a. Sidewalks, Mow Strips, And Miscellaneous: 1) After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: a) Provide fine hair finish where grades are less than 6 percent 1-1/4 inch (32 mm). b) Provide rough hair finish where grades exceed 6 percent 1-1/4 inch (32 mm). c) Broom finish, by drawing broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide fine line texture acceptable to Architect. At curb and gutter, apply broom finish longitudinal to curb and gutter flowline. d) On inclined slab surfaces, provide coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. At curb and gutter, apply broom finish longintudinal to curb and gutter flowline. e) Do not remove forms for twenty four (24) hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point -up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. f) Round edges exposed to public view to 1/2 inch (13 mm) radius, including edges formed by expansion joints. g) Remove edger marks. 2. Vertical Surfaces (Exposed To View Vertical Surfaces): a. General: 1) Finishing Material to fill and smooth interior and exterior concrete surface defects such as spalls, gouges, cracks, dents, chips, bug holes, stone pockets, honeycombs, voids and other defective areas. b. Surface preparation: 1) Formwork shall be stripped from concrete while concrete is still "green". 2) Concrete surface to be finished immediately after formwork has been removed. a) Immediately after removing forms, remove joints, marks, bellies, projections, loose materials and other irregularities, and cut back metal ties from surfaces to be exposed. b) Repair defective areas and voids or stone pockets with Finishing Material and smooth to even surface matching surrounding undamaged area. 3) Smooth Rubbed Finish. a) Thoroughly wet with water, apply Finishing Material in thin layer, rub in circular motion to smooth uniform finish. b) Entire surface shall be protected from rapid drying for not less than three (3) days. c) Surfaces shall be cleaned of drip marks and discolorations. d) Concrete surface shall be left with clean, neat, uniform finish, free from form markings and shall be uniform in color and texture. 4) Chamfer lines shall be finished. Aiscellaneous Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete - 5 - 033053 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5'i 3.4 APPLICATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Membrane Curing Compound: a. Apply product specified in Section 03 3923 to sidewalks, landings, and pads. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Concrete: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for Miscellaneous Exterior Concrete. See Section 03 3111 for Testing and Inspection requirements. B. Non -Conforming Work: Non -conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: -- 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no C additional cost to the Owner. 3.6 PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect concrete that has not received its initial set from precipitation to avoid excess water in mix and unsatisfactory surface finish. END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete - 6 - 033053 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 03 3923 MEMBRANE CONCRETE CURING DART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of membrane concrete curing as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 03 3111: Normal weight structural concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C309-11,'Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's product data. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Printed installation instructions. 'ART 2 -PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Exterior: 1. Low VOC (less than 350 grams per liter), water -borne, membrane forming curing compound meeting requirements of ASTM C309, Type 2. 2. Horizontal Miscellaneous Cast -In -Place Concrete: a. Class Two Quality Standard. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Classes. 1) Vocomp 20 Cure and Seal by W. R. Meadows. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Protection of In -Place Conditions: 1. Protect surfaces that will be receiving products or systems incompatible with curing compounds. 2. Where such surfaces do receive curing compound, remove to extent required by installer of products and systems to be subsequently installed and at no additional cost to Owner. 4embrane Concrete Curing - 1 - 033923 5074738 June 2012 END OF SECTION Rexburg 2, 5 Membrane Concrete Curing - 2 - 033923 DIVISION 04: MASONRY 040100 MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY 040121 UNIT MASONRY REPOINTING 040131 UNIT MASONRY CLEANING 040500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MASONRY 040513 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042113 BRICK VENEER MASONRY END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 040000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 04 0121 UNIT MASONRY REPOINTING PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Remove existing mortar to specified depth, clean joints, and tuck -point as described in Contract Documents. 2. Remove, clean, and reinstall existing masonry units as described in Contract Documents. 3. Remove existing masonry units and replace with new masonry units as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 0513: Cement and Lime Masonry Mortaring. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C150 / C150M-09, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' b. ASTM C207-06, 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.' PART 2 -PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Hydrated Lime: Meet requirements of ASTM C207, Type S. 2. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M-09, Type Il, White (non -staining). 3. Aggregate: a. Match existing as much as possible. b. Generally, sand with rounded edges is preferred. 4. Color: a. Match existing mortar color unless otherwise agreed to. b. This will generally require fresh mortar to be slightly darker than existing to compensate for natural bleaching with age. 5. Water: Clean, drinkable. B. Mixes: 1. Pointing mortar shall be softer or no harder than existing mortar. Unless agreed to otherwise, mix may be one part lime and 2 parts sand. Portland cement may be added up to 20 percent of total lime and sand. Use no admixtures. 2. Mix dry ingredients, then add about half water and mix for five minutes. Add additional water slowly until proper consistency is reached. Use mortar within 30 minutes. Do not re -temper. Jnit Masonry Repointing - 1 - 040121 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate work of this Section with general masonry cleaning so all, except final pointing, is completed before general masonry cleaning, if any. B. Remove mortar from joint 2-112 times deeper than joint width or one inch, whichever is greater, with hammer and cold chisel or other suitable hand tools. Do not use power tools unless it can be demonstrated to Architect's satisfaction that masonry surfaces will not be damaged. C. Remove masonry from designated areas, if any, and clean mortar from salvageable removed units and from surrounding units in wall. Re-lay masonry units in wall leaving raked joint to approximate depth of existing joints prepared for repointing. Mortar for re-laying shall be as specified in Section 04 0513. D. Clean joints with combination of water flushing and brushing with bristle brush. E. Work fresh mortar from 'hawk' to joint with jointing tool. First fill recessed areas, which are deeper than standard chiseled depth, and then proceed to fill raked joint using several layers of mortar and working tool in one direction only. Each layer of mortar shall be thumbprint hard before succeeding layer is applied. Where corners of face brick have eroded, it may be necessary to recess mortar to some degree in order to maintain consistent visual width of joints. F. Perform final tooling when mortar is thumbprint hard. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean face of masonry one to two hours after mortar has set. 1. Use plain stiff bristle brush. 2. If mortar has become too hard, use brush and plain water and wooden paddle or, if necessary, a chisel. 3. If harsher cleaning methods are required, allow mortar to cure 30 days before commencing. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Repointing - 2 - 040121 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 04 0131 UNIT MASONRY CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Clean exterior masonry surfaces as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Cutting, altering, and replacing damaged masonry. 2. Sections under 09 9000 heading: Paints And Coatings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Adhere to applicable City, State, and Federal EPA laws and requirements. 2. Require applicators to observe applicable Federal and State Agency, industry, and Manufacturer recommended safety regulations and precautions. Applicators shall wear safety goggles, rubber gloves, and plastic or rubber rain suits so as to avoid splash to skin or eyes. B. Qualifications: 1. Installers: a. Applicators performing work of this section shall have five years minimum experience using specified restorative cleaning techniques. C. Field Samples: 1. Fundamental consideration for selection of appropriate cleaning procedures shall be that materials and techniques adopted do minimal or no damage to masonry substrates while achieving desired degree of cleaning. 2. Architect will approve location of test areas. 3. Clean test areas with recommended specified cleaning material for inspection and approval of Architect. 4. Conduct tests on each building exposure in unobtrusive locations on representative staining conditions. 5. Tests shall employ cleansing operation and include evaluation of all surfaces to be cleaned. 6. Test samples of adjacent non -masonry materials for possible reaction with cleaning materials. 7. Test procedures shall include evaluation of materials and techniques proposed for protection of surrounding and adjacent non -masonry surfaces from cleaning solutions and rinse waters. 8. Representative of Cleaning Materials Manufacturer shall be present during preparation and application of cleaning materials for all test areas. 9. Do not begin full scale cleaning operations until Architect has approved cleaning results in test areas and application procedures. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Purchase and store on site in factory sealed containers sufficient cleaning materials to complete Project. 2. Containers shall be available for inspection. Unit Masonry Cleaning - 1 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Conduct cleaning operations at time of year when treated masonry surfaces will have adequate time to thoroughly dry without fear of freezing. Do not perform masonry cleaning at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C), or when local Weather Service reports indicate temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C) during ensuing 24 hours are imminent, unless heated rinse water will be used and if approved in writing by Architect. 2. Do not perform masonry cleaning during winds sufficiently strong to spread sprayed compound to adjacent unprotected surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. b. Sure Klean Products by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. B. Description: 1. This specification describes cleaning systems designed to effectively clean and restore exterior masonry surfaces. 2. Selection of specific cleaners to be used shall be dependent on type of substrate, its condition, and results of tests conducted at job site as specified below. 3. Sandblasting and use of non-proprietary acids, alkalis, powdered or liquid, is not permitted. 4. Application shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and as approved in writing by Owner. C. Materials 1. Paint Stripper I: a. Primarily for removal of graffiti, paint spills or drips, spray paints, inks and crayons. May be used for heavy-duty coatings, epoxies, urethanes, floor enamels and other chemically resistant coatings. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper. 2) Diedrich 505 Special Coatings Stripper. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Paint Stripper II: a. Formulated specifically for removal of certain types of latex and lacquer paints. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean 940 Paint Stripper. 2) Diedrich 505, 505X. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 3. Paint Stripper III: a. For removing multiple layers of paint coatings and graffiti from exterior masonry surfaces. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Heavy Duty Paint Stripper. 2) Diedrich 606 Paint Remover. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 4. Asphalt And Tar Remover: a. For removal of asphalt / tar roofing spills, grease, hydraulic oil, motor oil, and other similar stains from masonry surfaces. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Asphalt And Tar Remover. 2) Diedrich 920 Asphalt And Tar Remover. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Unit Masonry Cleaning - 2 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 5. Prewash l: a. Formulated for use with Restoration Cleaner I, Limestone Afterwash, and Restorer I. b. Acts as 'carbon solubilizer' and assists in removing heavy carbon encrustations from brick, terra cotta, sandstone, limestone, and most other masonry. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean 766 Prewash. 2) Diedrich 808 Limestone Prewash. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 6. Prewash II: a. For use on difficult to clean masonry where restoration cleaner alone does not do an adequate job of cleaning masonry surface. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean 792 Masonry Prewash. 2) Diedrich 707X, 808X. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 7. Restoration Cleaner I: a. For removing atmospheric staining with heavy deposits of carbon and dirt, paint oxidation, embedded clay and mud stains, rust, smoke, and algae. b. Effective on brick, granite, sandstone, unpolished marble, and most other types of masonry surfaces. Do not use on limestone surfaces. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner. 2) Diedrich 101G Restoration Cleaner. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 8. Restoration Cleaner II: a. For removing atmospheric staining from heavy deposits of carbon and dirt, paint oxidations, embedded clay and mud stains, rust, smoke, and algae. b. Effective on brick, granite, sandstone, unpolished marble, and most other types of masonry surfaces. Do not use on limestone surfaces. c. Provides triple strength cleaning action and is designed for cleaning extremely dirty and heavily carboned masonry surfaces typically found in large cities or high pollution areas. d. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Heavy Duty Restoration Cleaner. 2) Diedrich 101 Masonry Restorer. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 9. Restorer: a. For removing atmospheric and organic stains from high calcium based natural limestone, precast limestone, concrete, exposed aggregate, and similar masonry surfaces. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Limestone Restorer. 2) 202 New Masonry Detergent. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 10. Limestone Prewash And Limestone Afterwash: a. For removing heavy carbon, dirt, and other atmospheric stains from porous limestone surfaces. b. Most appropriate for cleaning extremely old limestone surfaces and limestone structures in high pollution areas. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Limestone Prewash and Sure Klean Limestone Afterwash. 2) Diedrich 707X Limestone Cleaner Pre -Rinse and 707N Limestone Neutralizer After - Rinse. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 11. Strippable Masking: a. For protecting glass, non -porous metal, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effect of acidic cleaning materials. It is a liquid, film forming, strippable masking material. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Strippable Masking. 2) Diedrich Acid Guard. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 12. Interior Stone Cleaner: Jnit Masonry Cleaning - 3 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. For removing smoke, soot, and other related surface stains from interior marble, limestone, granite, natural stones, slates, etc. b. Most appropriate for cleaning occupied stone buildings where strong corrosive cleaners and large amounts of water cannot be used. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Interior Stone Cleaner. 2) Diedrich 707 Interior Stone Cleaner. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 13. Marble Cleaner: a. For removing surface dirt, carbon build-up and other atmospheric stains from marble, polished stone, and other glazed masonry. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Clean Liquid Marble Cleaner. 2) Diedrich 910 PM Polished Interior Marble Cleaner. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 14. Poultice: a. For removing deep-set oil, dirt, and other related stains from polished marble and stone. b. For interior application. c. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Marble Poultice. 2) Diedrich General Purpose Poultice. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 15. Aluminum Cleaner: a. For removing aluminum oxidation, atmospheric dirt, carbon, and other related surface stains from architectural aluminum. b. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) Sure Klean Aluminum Cleaner. 2) Diedrich 970 Aluminum Cleaner. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection Of In -Place Conditions: 1. Provide covered access to building for public, employees, and service vehicles at all times. 2. Protect, or avoid contact with, auto and pedestrian traffic. 3. Protect aluminum, wood, and painted surfaces from exposure to cleaning solution. Also protect plants and shrubbery. 4. Protect surrounding landscape and lawn areas from contact with cleaning solutions. a. Landscape and lawn areas may be best protected by keeping them as wet as possible through use of lawn soaker hoses which provide a slow but steady mist of water to areas adjacent to masonry being cleaned. b. Root systems of adjacent trees and shrubs exposed to cleaning rinse waters can be protected with use of neutralizing trenches. 5. Protect non -masonry surfaces that are not to be replaced from contact with cleaning solution. a. Protect wooden and painted surfaces with sheets of polyethylene or other proven protective materials, firmly fixed and sealed to surface. b. Keep non -masonry surfaces, which are not protected, running -wet with clean water throughout cleaning process of adjacent masonries. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Complete paint stripping and cleaning procedures before installation of new window glazing and paint finishes. Failure to do so will make it necessary to protect such finishes from contact with cleaning and paint stripping agents. 2. Test surfaces not to be cleaned for possible detrimental effects of cleaning solutions and protect as determined necessary by test results. Unit Masonry Cleaning - 4 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3. Temporarily calk or otherwise protect open joints to prevent intrusion of washing waters into wall structure or building interior. APPLICATION A. General: 1. Any dilution of cleaning materials will be with clean water in accordance with instructions on Manufacturer's printed container label. 2. Surface Treatment: a. Thoroughly pre -wet surfaces, which are to be treated with water soluble materials, with clean water before application of cleaning materials. Do not pre -wet surfaces to be cleaned with materials containing solvents, such as Paint Strippers I, ll, and III, and Asphalt And Tar Remover. b. Purpose of pre -wetting is to limit activity of cleaning solution to masonry surface and prevent cleaning solutions from being too readily absorbed by dry masonries. Failure to adequately pre -wet may result in streaking and other residual staining of treated masonries. 3. Pressure Application: a. Use high pressure rinsing equipment for pre -wetting and rinsing procedures described below. Pressures of 400 to 800 psi (2.76 to 5.52 MPa) and a flow rate of 4 to 6 gallons (18 to 27 liters) per minute have proved most effective. b. Use low-pressure spray application for cleaning materials. High pressure application may drive cleaning compounds deep into masonry surface making it impossible to rinse treated f surfaces free of cleaning residues. ff c. If spray application of cleaning solution is desired, apply cleaning agents with 50 psi (0.35 i MPa) maximum spray equipment. d. Equipment that can apply hot water shall be controllable so water temperatures do not exceed 160 deg F (71 deg C). 4. In areas of high public traffic, perform cleaning operations at night. 5. Rinse chemicals after appropriate dwell time using garden hose just before rinsing with high- pressure equipment. 6. Avoid cleaning at times of extreme or excessive winds. 7. When cleaning from scaffolding in traffic areas, drape scaffolding with plastic or burlap to reduce spray drift. 8. When working in an area of public foot traffic, build shed over sidewalk to protect pedestrian traffic. B. Paint Stripper I: 1. Remove as much paint / stain matter as is practical with hand scrappers. 2. Using a natural fibered cleaning brush, roller or large paint brush, apply a heavy, thick coating of paint stripper to painted / stained areas. 3. Allow paint stripper to remain until paint / stain 'lifts' or shows signs of dissolving. Do not allow stripper to dry on surface. 4. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water using pressure washing equipment to remove paint stripper and dissolved paint/stain material. C. Paint Stripper III: 1. Using synthetic fibered brush, roller, or appropriate spray equipment, apply a heavy, thick coating of paint stripper to painted surfaces. On surfaces that have multiple coats of paint, sufficient material should be applied to produce a 1/8 inch (3 mm) buildup of stripper on surface. 2. Allow paint stripper to remain on surface for 4 to 24 hours until paint is obviously dissolved. On surfaces that have received 15 to 20 coats of paint, second application of paint stripper directly over first application, before rinsing, will frequently improve efficiency of stripping operation. 3. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water using pressure washing equipment to remove all paint stripper and solubilized paint material. 4. Reapply as required to removal all traces of paint coatings. 5. When all paint has been removed, use a restoration cleaner to remove all traces of stripper and to clean exposed masonry. D. Asphalt And Tar Remover: nit Masonry Cleaning - 5 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Using densely packed masonry washing brush or low-pressure spray, apply Asphalt And Tar Remover liberally to dry masonry surface. When using spray application beware of drift and employ solvent resistant spraying devices. 2. Allow cleaning solution to stay on wall for several minutes. 3. Reapply cleaning solution to stained areas with vigorous scrubbing manner with a stiff fibered masonry washing brush. 4. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing full city water pressure or pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds and staining matter. 5. Allow masonry surfaces to thoroughly dry before determining cleaning results. 6. Reapply as necessary. E. Prewash: 1. Apply heavy coating of Prewash to masonry surface using synthetic fiber brush or roller. 2. Allow material to remain on surface until carbon stains are dissolved. Do not allow prewash to dry on surface. 3. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water, employing pressure equipment removing all cleaning compound, dirt, etc. 4. Apply a Restoration Cleaner to area treated using a natural fiber masonry washing brush or low pressure spray. 5. Allow solution to dwell on surface three to five minutes depending on drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. 6. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, stains, etc. F. Restoration Cleaner l: 1. Apply cleaning solution liberally to masonry surface using low-pressure spray or densely packed, soft fibered masonry washing brush. 2. Allow cleaning solution to remain on wall for 3 to 5 minutes depending upon drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. 3. Reapply cleaning solution in a scrubbing manner. 4. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, etc. 5. Reapply as necessary. G. Restoration Cleaner II: 1. Apply cleaning solution liberally to masonry surface using low-pressure spray or densely packed, soft fibered masonry washing brush. 2. Allow cleaning solution to remain on wall for three to five minutes depending upon drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. 3. Reapply cleaning solution in a scrubbing manner. 4. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, etc. 5. Reapply as necessary. H. Restorer: 1. Apply cleaning solution liberally to masonry surface using low-pressure spray or densely packed, soft fibered masonry washing brush. 2. Allow cleaning solution to remain on wall for three to five minutes depending upon drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. 3. Reapply cleaning solution in a scrubbing manner. 4. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, etc. 5. Reapply as necessary. I. Limestone Prewash / Afterwash: 1. Apply heavy coating of Limestone Prewash to masonry surface using synthetic fiber brush or roller. 2. Allow material to remain on surface until carbon stains are dissolved. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. Unit Masonry Cleaning - 6 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compound, dirt, etc. 4. Immediately apply solution of Afterwash as specified below. 5. Apply prepared solution (diluted two parts water to one part concentrated cleaner) to area treated using natural fiber masonry washing brush or low pressure spray. 6. Allow solution to dwell on surface 3 to 5 minutes depending on drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. 7. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, stain, etc. Strippable Masking: 1. Test surfaces to be coated to verify ease of removal before general application. Surfaces should be clean and free of contaminants. 2. Using brush or roller: a. Apply masking material so as to provide a build-up of 2.0 dry mils of coating. 3. Allow masking to dry before exposing coating to cleaning application. 4. Remove within 15 days (exterior) to 60 days (interior) by pulling corner of coating free of surface and continue to pull coating from surface. K. Marble Cleaner: 1. Apply concentrated cleaner to masonry surface using soft bristle nylon brush. 2. Allow cleaner to remain on surface for 5 to 15 minutes and brush to remove all stains. Do not allow cleaner to dry. 3. Rinse with clean water using pressure washer, garden hose, or brush and sponges, as condition will allow. Thoroughly rinse surface. Change rinse water frequently. L. Poultice: 1. Mixing Procedures: a. Pour 100 pounds (45 kg) of poultice into wheelbarrow or other suitable mixing container. b. While mixing, slowly add enough water to bring mix to dry paste. c. Add one to two pints, depending on desired mix consistency, of poultice. d. While mixing, slowly add additional water until poultice mix is at desired troweling consistency. e. Mixing proportions of poultice additive should be from one to two pints (0.6 to 1.2 liters) of additive to 100 pounds (45 kg) of poultice. Precise amount of poultice additive used will depend on desired plasticity of mixture. 2. Application: a. Apply 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick coating of prepared poultice mix to surface using plasterer's trowel or airless spray equipment. b. Press light polyethylene film over poulticed area. Tape or otherwise seal off edges of poly film. c. Allow film covered poultice to remain on surface for 12 to 24 hours. d. Remove protective film. Scrape off poultice. Wash surface thoroughly with fresh water, using sponge or cloth. e. Repeat poultice procedures where necessary. f. Polish clean surface with soft dry cloth. Use quality marble polish if desired. M. Aluminum Cleaner: 1. Pre -wet surface to be cleaned. 2. Apply cleaning solution liberally to aluminum surface to be cleaned. 3. Allow to remain on surface for approximately three minutes, then apply second coat in scrubbing manner. 4. Immediately rinse with fresh water. Do not clean hot surfaces or surfaces exposed to direct sunlight. Init Masonry Cleaning - 7 - 040131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of masking materials following completion of cleaning operation. Leave windows and non -masonry areas clean. B. Sweep or flush residue washed from building surface away from surrounding sidewalk and service areas nightly. Premises shall be clean and neat at all times. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Cleaning - 8 - 0401311 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 04 0513 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of masonry mortar used on Project. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 0000: 'General Requirements': a. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. b. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. 2. Sections Under 04 2000 Heading: Furnish and install mortar. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Mortar: Plastic mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregate and water. See ASTM C270. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C144-11, 'Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.' b. ASTM C150/C150M-11,'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' c. ASTM C207-06(2011), 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. d. ASTM C270-10, 'Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry'. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. If pre -mixed wet mortar or pre -blended dry mortar mix are to be used, provide certification from Manufacturer or Supplier verifying that mixes meet specification requirements. b. If site mixed / blended mortar is to be used, provide written description of proposed method of measuring and mixing of materials. ART 2 -PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Performance: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: a. Type N: 750 psi (5.17 MPa). B. Materials: 1. Portland Cement: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C150, Type II Low Alkali unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. 2. Hydrated Lime: ement And Lime Masonry Mortaring 1 - 040513 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' a. Meet requirements of ASTM C207, Type S. Aggregate: a. Standard Mortar: 1) Natural or manufactured sand meeting requirements of ASTM C144 and following a) Fineness modulus: 1.6 to 2.5 percent b) Water demand, ratio by weight: 0.65 percent maximum c) Grading: Sieve Sieve Percent Passing Natural Sand Manufactured Sand No. 4 4.750 mm 100 100 No. 8 2 360 mm 95 to 100 95 to 100 No. 16 1.191 mm 70 to 100 70 to 100 No. 30 0.594 mm 40 to 75 40 to 75 No. 50 0.297 mm 10 to 35 20 to 40 No. 100 0.150 mm 2 to 15 10 to 25 No. 200 0.075 mm none 0 to 10 4. Water: a. Clean and free of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. 5. Admixtures: a. Use no admixtures, except for color pigments specified below, without Architect's written permission. Use of any admixture to meet cold weather requirements and admixtures that increase air entrainment are expressly forbidden under all circumstances. C. Mixes: 1. General: a. Heat water and sand to 140 deg F (60 deg C) maximum if temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Unit Masonry Mortar: Type'N' a. Parts by Volume: Portland Cement 1 Hydrated Lime 1 Damp Loose Sand: 2-1/4 minimum to three maximum, times sum of volumes of cement and lime used. Maintain sand piles in damp, loose condition. b. Parts by Weight: Portland Cement 94 lbs 43 kg Hydrated Lime 40 lbs 18 kg Dry Sand 360 lbs min. to 480 lbs max. 163 kq min. to 218 ka max. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring - 2 - 0405131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 04 2113 BRICK VENEER MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install masonry units as veneer on framing as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 2. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' for minimum qualification levels required. 3. Section 01 7800: 'Closeout Submittals'. 4. Sections Under 04 0000 Heading: Masonry: a. Pre -installation conference held jointly with other masonry related sections. 5. Section 04 0513: Quality of mortar. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. The Brick Industry Association Technical Notes on Brick Construction, 'Specifications for and Classification of Brick', October 2007 www.gobrick.com. B. Definitions: 1. Brick Classifications: a. Grade, class, type, application and use: 1) Criteria for these classifications may include exposure or use conditions; appearance items; physical properties needed for performance; tolerances on dimensions and distortion; chippage; and void area. 2) Brick qualify for particular classification based on their properties after manufacturing. While most brick can be manufactured to attain all attributes desired, certain attributes may be dictated by production method, durability classification or appearance classification designated by user: a) For example, molded brick cannot be made to meet classification for tightest dimensional tolerances since production method uses a higher percentage of water that may result in greater shrinkage. b) Brick manufactured by extrusion process can be made to meet classification for light or loose dimensional tolerances. b. Brick Color: 1) There are no color -related tolerances in ASTM standards for brick. Standards are dictated by sample panel, mockups, or project specification. c. Brick Grade: Designation for durability and exposure: 1) Brick is subjected to environmental and service conditions that vary. Brick is specified for its specific durability based on severity of weather and exposure and physical properties. Following are brick grades classifications based on the Weathering Index: a) SW: Severe weathering. b) MW: Moderate weathering. c) NW: Negligible or no weathering. 2) Grade SW is stronger and more durable, and require less maintenance. Grade MW is less durable. Grade NW is least durable and should only be used for interior work. d. Brick Type: 3rick Veneer Masonry - 1 - 042113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Limits include tolerances on dimensions, distortion, out -or -square and chippage. Appearance classification is established on size and precision attained in manufacturing. Following are brick types: a) Type FBX: Brick for general use in masonry where higher degree of precision and lower permissible variation in size than permitted for Type FBS is required: (1) Type FBX maintains strict requirements on absorption, waste, chipping, cracks, dimensions and distortion (warpage). Type FBX allows very narrow color range, minimal size variations, and uniform in appearance). b) Type FBS: Brick for general use in masonry: (1) Type FBS offer wider range of color and size variations, but lack of production controls results in many odd color lots. c) Type FBA: Brick for general use in masonry selected to produce characteristic architectural effects resulting from non-uniformity in size and texture of individual units: (1) Type FBA is used for aesthetic qualities. FBA have no limits for size and calor+ variations. 2. Cold Weather, as referred to in this Section, is four (4) hours with ambient temperature below 40 deg F (4 deg C) in twenty four (24) hour period. 3. Efflorescence: Deposit or encrustation of soluble salts, generally white and most commonly consisting of calcium sulfate that may form on surface of stone, brick, concrete, or mortar when moisture moves through and evaporates on masonry. Often caused by free alkalis leached from mortar, grout, adjacent concrete, or in clays. Test for efflorescence is described in ASTM C67 and CAN/CSA A82. 4. Facing Brick: Intended for use in both structural and nonstructural masonry, including veneer, where appearance is a requirement. 5. Hot Weather, as referred to in this Section, is ambient air temperature above 100 deg F (38 deg C) or ambient air temperature above 90 deg F (32 deg C) with wind velocity 8 mph (13 kph) or greater. 6. Mortar: Plastic mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregate and water (See ASTM C270 or ASTM C476). 7. Running Bond: Same as common bond, with continuous horizontal joints, but vertical joints are offset or in line. Bricks of each course are offset from the previous instead of being right on top of each other. If running bond is being used with modular brick, end of brick will be at mid -point of brick on course below. Running bond only requires minimal cutting at each end and will easily follow a gentle curve. Running bond method most used. 8. Solid Brick: Solid masonry unit of clay or shale, usually formed into rectangular prism while plastic and burned or fired in a kiln. Solid brick can have core holes whose area is no more than twenty five 25 percent of total bed surface of brick. 9. Veneer: Single wythe of masonry for facing purposes, not structurally bonded. 10. Warpage: Distortion of surfaces or edges of an individual brick from a plane surface or from straight line. 11. Weep Hole: Opening placed in mortar joints of facing material at level of flashing, to permit escape of moisture. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C62-10, 'Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). b. ASTM C67-11, 'Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile'. c. ASTM C216-11, 'Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Made from Clay or Shale)'. d. ASTM C270-12, 'Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry'. e. ASTM C476-10, 'Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry'. f. ASTM C652-11, 'Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made Frorr Clay or Shale)'. g. ASTM C1232 -10c, 'Standard Terminology of Masonry'. 2. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) - The Masonry Society (TMS) / American Concrete Institute (ACI) /American Society of Civil Engineers (SEI/ASCE): Brick Veneer Masonry - 2 - 0421131 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. TMS 402-11/ACI 530-11/ASCE 5-11, 'Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Commentary'. b. TMS 602-11/ACI 530.1-11/ASCE 6-11, 'Specification for Masonry Structures and Commentary'. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference held jointly with other Division 04 'Masonry' specifications in this Project that require pre -installation conferences: 2. Schedule pre -installation conference during construction of mockup panel. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review storage and handling requirements. b. Review cold and hot weather procedure requirements. c. Review protection requirements. d. Review masonry cleaning requirements. e. Review clean up requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. One (1) full size brick minimum, one (1) sample of each special shape, and physical samples which demonstrate full range of color and texture. b. Type of veneer tie used. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Color and type selection. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Minimum of five (5) years experience on successfully completed projects of similar nature. DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such manner as to avoid soiling, damaging, or chipping. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Masonry units: a. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage, dirt, or disfigurement. b. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 2. Cementitious material: a. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in dry location. b. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 3. Aggregates: rick Veneer Masonry - 3 - 042113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 4. Masonry accessories: a. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. b. Protect from damage until installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Face Brick: Meet requirements of ASTM C216. 1) Grade SW. 2) Type: FBX. 3) Efflorescence: a) Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C67 and is rated 'Not Effloresced'. 4) Initial rate of absorption: Less than 30 sq. in (30 g) per minute when tested per ASTM C67. 5) Size (actual dimensions): Match existing. 6) Brick shall be free of defects, deficiencies, and surface treatments, including coatings that would interfere with proper setting of brick or significantly impair strength or performance of Work. 7) Face or faces that will be exposed in place shall be free of chips that exceed limits set in ASTM C216 of five (5) percent for FBX. Aggregate length of chips shall not exceed ten (10) percent. 8) Other than chips, face or faces shall be free of cracks or other imperfections detracting from appearance of designated sample when viewed from distance of 15 feet (4.6 meters) away. Number of brick in delivery that are broken or otherwise fail to meet requirements for chippage and tolerances shall not exceed five (5) percent. B. Materials: 1. Mortar: Type 'N' as specified in Section 04 0513. 2. Brick: a. Brick shall be true to size and shape. No warped brick permitted. Brick for Project shall be fired in same run. b. Match existing in size, color, and texture. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Compounds: 1. Use type of compound recommended by Brick Manufacturer based on minerals present in masonry units. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 202 or 202V by Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. b. Surekleen No. 600 or Vana-Trol by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Brick Veneer Masonry - 4 - 042113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and verify substrate is suitable for installation of masonry. 2. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not install masonry over unsuitable conditions. 3. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: a. Do not lay masonry in Cold Weather unless authorized by Architect. b. Comply with cold -weather requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. c. Heat mixing water and sand as required during Cold Weather to produce mortar temperatures at application of between 70 and 120 deg F (21 and 49 deg C). d. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum when ambient temperature is below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C). e. Provide windbreaks during construction if ambient temperature is 35 deg F (2 deg C) or below and wind velocities exceed 15 mph (24 kph). f. If ambient temperature is 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C) or below, provide enclosure for masonry under construction with heat sources and maintain temperature in enclosure at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum. Maintain temperature around masonry at 40 deg F (4 deg C) minimum for first 48 hrs after construction. g. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Keep materials free of ice and snow. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. h. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven (7) days after completing cleaning. 2. Hot Weather Requirements: a. Comply with hot -weather requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. b. In Hot Weather, cool mixing water as necessary to maintain mortar and grout temperatures below 90 deg F (32 deg C). c. In Hot Weather, prevent rapid drying of walls by using fog spray or by covering wall with plastic or wet canvas or burlap. 3. Repair brick units and repoint mortar joints only when air temperature is beween 40 deg F (4 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) and is predicted to remain so for at least seven (7) days after completion of the Work unless otherwise indicated. B. Interface With Other Work: 1. Make cuts proper size to accommodate work of other trades. Cut openings for electrical devices using cover plates no larger than can be covered by standard size plate. 2. Replace unit masonry in which larger than necessary openings are cut. Do not patch openings with mortar or other material. C. Tolerances: 1. Masonry shall be laid true to vertical and horizontal planes within 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 meters), non -cumulative. Recess masonry where indicated. 2. Maintain 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) mortar joints throughout. D. Masonry Veneer Ties: 1. Free of material that may destroy bond. 2. Install as detailed by screwing through sheathing into framing. Begin approximately 8 inches (200 mm) from base of masonry and with maximum spacing of 16 inches (400 mm) vertically and 3rick Veneer Masonry - 5 - 042113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 at each vertical stud horizontally. Install final row of ties within 8 inches (200 mm) of top course of brick. E. Laying: 1. Layout: a. Running bond except where noted otherwise. Select brick so there is uniform distribution of hues. b. Use solid brick where brick coursing would otherwise show cores. 2. Joints: a. Do not tool until mortar has taken initial set. b. Tool concave. When tooling joints, squeeze mortar back into joint. c. Point holes in joints. Fill and tool properly. 3. Use mortar within two (2) hours of initial mixing. Discard mortar that has begun to set. 4. Wet each brick to saturation. Lay brick when surface is dry. Brick absorption when laid should not exceed 0.025 oz/sq inch (457 g(sq mm) maximum. 5. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. Shove brick into place in full mortar bed, do not lay. 6. Completely fill horizontal and vertical joints. Do not furrow bed joints. 7. Strike back -side joints on brick flush. Do not allow mortar build-up in cavity between masonry veneer and stud wall sheathing. 8. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Use toothing only with Architect's approval. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace defective material at Architect's direction and at no additional cost to Owner. 3.4 CLEANING A. After mortar has hardened, wet masonry and clean with specified cleaning compound. Use stiff fibered brush for application. Rinse masonry surfaces with water immediately after cleaning. Leave masonry clean, free of mortar daubs, and with tight mortar joints. B. Wash adjacent non -masonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloth. C. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove mortar and debris. Where necessary, pressure wash pavement surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains. D. Waste Management: 1. Clean up masonry debris and remove from site. 3.5 PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect masonry with cover during rainy weather. B. Stain prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining face of masonry to be left exposed. Immediately remove mortar and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with pointed and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. Brick Veneer Masonry - 6 - 042113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 END OF SECTION 3rick Veneer Masonry - 7 - 042113 BLANK PAGE DIVISION 05: METALS )55000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055215 STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAILS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS able of Contents - 1 - 050000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 05 5215 STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAILS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.2 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install stainless steel pipe handrails as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchoring sleeves in concrete. A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C1107/C1107M-08, 'Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink).' SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including floor plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other elements of The Work. DART 2 -PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Materials: 1. Handrails And Railings: a. 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) outside diameter non-magnetic satin finish 18 gauge type 304 stainless tubing. b. Sizes and configurations as indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Pipe Sleeves: 2 inch (50 mm) diameter by 6 to 9 inch (150 to 225 mm) long non-magnetic stainless steel. 3. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, And Anchors: a. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing systems to concrete work. B. Fabrication: 1. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. 2. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Grind smooth welded joints and buff welds to same appearance as remainder of railing. 4. Form curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. 5. Welded Connections: stainless Steel Handrails - 1 - 055215 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Fabricate railing system and handrail connections by welding. b. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with following: 1) Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop of metals. 2) At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around. 3) At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent surfaces. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Rail Setting Grout: 1. Commercial nonshrink grout conforming to requirements of ASTM C1107, Type B or Type C. 2. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Normal Construction Grout A by Bonsai American, Charlotte, NC www.bonsal.com. b. Advantage 1107 Grout by Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals, Kansas City, KS www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. c. NS Grout by Euclid Chemical Co, Cleveland, OH www.euclidchemical.com d. 5 Star Special Grout 110 by Five Star Products Inc, Fairfield, CT www.fivestarproducts.com. e. Duragrout by L&M Construction Chemicals Inc, Omaha, NE www.Imcc.com. f. Sonneborn / BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN www.chemrex.com. g. Tamms Grout 621 by TAMMS Industries, Mentor, OH www.tamms.com. h. U S Spec MP Grout by U S Mix Products Co, Denver, CO www.usspec.com. i. CG -86 Grout by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. j. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Touch up field welds to match finished material. END OF SECTION Stainless Steel Handrails - 2 - 055215 DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060500 COMMON WORK RESULTS OF WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060573 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061011 WOODFASTENINGS 061100 WOOD FRAMING 06 1636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING )62000 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2001 COMMON FINISH CARPENTRY REQUIREMENTS 062210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM )64000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064001 COMMON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK REQUIREMENTS 064005 PLASTIC LAMINATE 064114 WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064115 ROSTRUM CASEWORK 064313 WOOD STAIRS 064512 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM )66000 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 066001 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC FABRICATIONS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 'able of Contents - 1 - 060000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY June 2012 SECTION 06 0573 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of wood preservative treatment where specified. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: a. Characteristics of wood to be pressure -treated. b. Furnishing and installing of pressure -treated wood. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC 2303.1.8.17, 'Preservative -treated Wood'. Rexburg 2, 5 B. Definitions: 1. Preservative -Treated Wood: Wood that is exposed to high levels of moisture or heat is susceptible to decay by fungus and other organisms, and to insect attack. The damage caused by decay or insects can jeopardize the performance of the wood members so as to reduce the performance below that required by the code. IBC Section 2304.11 identifies the locations where the use of preservative -treated wood is required. It is important to note that preservative treatment requires a pressure -treatment process. Painting, coating or other surface treatment does not produce preservative -treated wood that will perform as required. The treatment process uses pressure to achieve the depth of penetration of preservative into the wood which is needed to verify that the wood will be resistant to decay and insects over time. Surface treatments may be washed away by rain or ground water, or may chip or peel. The American Wood Preservers Association is the consensus standard writing organization for treated wood. 2. Treated Wood: Treated wood is manufactured to reduce the ability of the wood to propagate flame or to resist damage caused by fungus or insects. Several American Wood Preserver Association (A WP A) standards are prescribed in IBC Section 2303.1.8. These include water borne as well as several oil borne standards for treatment testing and quality control of various wood and wood -based products. The American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) also accredits third party inspection agencies, in a manner similar to their grading rules certification, for the quality control of preservative treated wood products. Facsimiles of accredited agencies' quality marks for treatment are available from ALSC. C. Reference Standards: 1. American Wood -Preserver's Association: a. AWPA C11-96, 'All Timber Products, Pressure Treatment.' b. AWPA C2-96, 'Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties, Pressure Treatment.' c. AWPA C31-xx, 'Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously Protected from Liquid Water.' d. AWPA C33-xx,'Standard for Preservative Treatment of Structural Composite Lumber by Pressure Processes.' e. AWPA P5-xx.'Waterborne Preservatives.' 'reservative Wood Treatment - 1 - 060573 t 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificate: Certificate of pressure treatment showing compliance with specification requirements and including information required under IBC Section 2303.1.8.1. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection Inc, Smyrna, GA www.wolmanizedwood.com. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Thomson, GA www.frtw.com. c. Osmose Inc, Griffin, GA www.osmose.com. d. U S Borax Inc, Valencia, CA www.borax.com/wood. e. VIANCE, Charlotte, NC www.treatedwood.com. f. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. B. Performance: 1. Framing lumber grade and species shall be as specified in Section 06 1100 for particular use. 2. Interior Wood In Contact With Concrete or Masonry: a. Preservatives: 1) Disodium octoborate tetrahydrate (DOT / SBX) meeting requirements of AWPA C31 and with retention of 0.25 lbs per cu ft (4 kg per cu meter). 2) Zinc borate meeting requirements of AWPA C33 and with retention of 0.17 lbs per cu ft (2.7 kg per cu meter). b. Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPA C31 or C33 and dry after treatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Preservative Wood Treatment - 2 - 06 0573 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 061011 WOOD FASTENINGS PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of wood fastening methods and materials used for Rough Carpentry unless specified otherwise. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 1511: Quality of Anchors and Inserts. 2. Section 05 0523: Quality of bolts used for Rough Carpentry. 3. Furnishing and installing of other fasteners are specified in individual Sections where installed. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards; 1. APA -The Engineered Wood Association: a. APA AFG-01: Adhesives for Field -Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing (September 1974). 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A153/A153M-09, 'Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware'. b. ASTM D3498-03(2011), 'Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field -Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems'. c. ASTM F1667-11 a, 'Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples'. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature on framing anchors and powder actuated fasteners. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Submit diameter and lengths of fasteners proposed for use on Project. If length or diameter of proposed fasteners differ from specified fasteners, also include technical and engineering data for proposed fasteners including, but not limited to: 1) Adjusted fastener spacing where using proposed fasteners and, 2) Adjusted number of fasteners necessary to provide connection capacity equivalent to specified fasteners. b. Submit on powder -actuated fasteners other than those specified in Contract Documents showing design criteria equivalents at each application. c. Show type, quantity, and installation location of framing anchors. Where necessary, reference Drawing details, etc, for installation locations. 'ART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: 1. Nail Terminology: Vood Fastenings - 1 - 061011 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. When following nail terms are used in relation to this Project, following lengths and diameters will be understood. Refer to nails of other dimensions by actual length and diameter, not by one of listed terms: Nail Term Length DiameterR76.2mm Diameter 8d Box 2-1/2 inches 0.113 inch 2.827 mm 8d Common 2-1/2 inches 0.131 inch 3.389 mm 10d Box 3 inches 0.128 inch 3.251 mm 10d Common 3 inches 0.148 inch 3.759 mm 16d Box 3-1/2 inches 0.135 inch 3.411 mm 16d Sinker 3-1/4inches 0.148 inch 3.759 mm 16d Common 1 3-1/2 inches 1 0.162 inch 88.9 mm 1 4.115 mm B. Materials: 1. Fasteners: a. General: 1) Fasteners for preservative treated and fire -retardant -treated wood shall be of hot dipped; zinc -coated galvanized steel, stainless steel, silicon bronzed, or copper. Coating weights for zinc -coated fasteners shall be in accordance with ASTM At 53/A153M. b. Nails: 1) Meet requirements of ASTM F1667. 2) Unless noted otherwise, nails listed on Drawings or in Specifications shall be common nail diameter, except 16d nails, which shall be box diameter. c. Wood Screws: 1) SDS Screws: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of categories. (1) SDS Screws by Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com. 2) All Other: Standard type and make for job requirements. d. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: i 1) Type One Quality Standard: Hilti X -DNI 62P8. 2) Manufacturers: a) Hilti, Tulsa, OK www.us.hilti.com. b) Redhead Division of ITW, Wood Dale, IL www.itw-redhead.com and Markham, ON www.itwconstruction.ca. c) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2. Adhesives: a. Construction Mastics: 1) Meet requirements of 'APA -The Engineered Wood Association' Specification AFG-01 or, ASTM D3498. 2) Use phenol -resorcinol type for use on pressure treated wood products. 3. Framing Anchors: a. Framing anchors and associated fasteners in contact with preservative hot dipped zinc - coated galvanized steel or stainless steel. Do not use stainless steel items with galvanized items. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) KC Metals Inc, San Jose, CA www.kcmetals.com. 2) Simpson Strong Tie Co, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com. 3) United Steel Products Co Inc (USP), Montgomery, MN www.uspconnectors.com. 4) Equals as approved by Architect through shop drawing submittal before installation. See Section 01 6200. Wood Fastenings - 2 - 061011 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION ERECTION A. Secure one Manufacturer approved fastener in each hole of framing anchor that bears on framing member unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. B. Provide washers with bolt heads and with nuts bearing on wood. END OF SECTION Vood Fastenings - 3 - 061011 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 061100 WOOD FRAMING DART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood framing and blocking as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Roof related blocking, wood nailers, and curbs. 2. Wood panel product sheathing. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 1223: Furnishing of miscellaneous structural steel. 2. Section 06 0573: Quality of Preservative Wood Treatment. 3. Section 06 1636: Furnishing of wood panel product sheathing. a. Pre -installation conference held jointly with Section 06 1100. 4. Section 06 4313: Wood stair treads and risers. 5. Sections in Division 07: Roofing membranes for related blocking, wood nailers, and curbs. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Technology Administration, U. S. Department of Commerce: a. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 20-05, 'American Softwood Lumber Standard.' ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference held jointly with Section 06 1636. a. Schedule pre -installation conference immediately before beginning framing work. b. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1) Equipment and gypsum board blocking in wood framed walls. 2) Nails and nailing requirements. 3) Connections. 2. Participate in pre -installation conference held jointly with Section 08 4113. a. Schedule pre -installation conference for one (1) week before scheduled installation of storefront system. b. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: 1) Rough opening requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Technical and engineering data on nails to be set by nailing guns for Architect's approval of types proposed to be used as equivalents to specified hand set nails and adjusted number and spacing of pneumatically -driven nails to provide equivalent connection capacity. Nood Framing - 1 - 061100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at job site. 2. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store lumber and plywood on level racks and keep free of ground to avoid warping. 2. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Dimension Lumber: 1. Meet requirements of PS 20 and National Grading Rules for softwood dimension lumber. 2. Bear grade stamp of WWPA, SPIB, or other association recognized by American Lumber Standards Committee identifying species of lumber by grade mark or by Certificate of Inspection. 3. Lumber 2 inches (50 mm) or less in nominal thickness shall not exceed 19 percent in moisture content at time of fabrication and installation and be stamped 'S -DRY', 'K -D', or'MC15.' 4. Lumber shall be S4S. 5. Preservative Treated Plates / Sills: a. 2x4 (38 mm by 64 mm): Standard and better Douglas Fir, Southern Pine, or Hem Fir, or StrandGuard by iLevel by Weyerhaeuser Boise, ID www.ilevel.com. (LSL 1.3 E) b. 2x6 (38 mm by 140 mm) And Wider: No. 2 or or MSR 1650f - 1.5e Douglas Fir, Southern Pine, Hem Fir, or StrandGuard by iLevel by Weyerhaeuser, Boise, ID www.ilevel.com. (LSL 1.3 E). B. See drawings for additional requirements. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Blocking: 1. Sound lumber without splits, warps, wane, loose knots, or knots larger than 1/2 inch (13 mm). B. Furring Strips: 1. Utility or better. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Use preservative treated wood for wood members in contact with concrete or masonry, including wall, sill, and ledger plates, door and window subframes and bucks, etc. B. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with other Sections for location of blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. Do not allow installation of gypsum board until required blocking is in place. 2. Where manufactured items are to be installed in framing, provide rough openings of dimensions within tolerances required by manufacturers of such items. Confirm dimensions where not shown on Drawings. C. Tolerances: Wood Framing - 2 - 061100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 Walls: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 feet (6 meters), non -cumulative in length of wall. b. 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 meters) with 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum in height of wall. c. Distances between parallel walls shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum along length and height of wall. D. Floors: 1. Place with crown side up. 2. Provide accurately fitted header and trimmer joists of same size as regular joists around floor openings, unless detailed otherwise, and support by steel joist hangers. 3. Double joists under partitions that parallel run of joists. E. Walls: 1. Openings: Single, bearing stud supporting header and one adjacent (king) stud continuous between top and bottom plates, unless shown otherwise. 2. Corners And Partition Intersections: Triple studs. 3. Top Plates In Bearing Partitions: Doubled or tripled and lapped. Stagger joints at least 48 inches (1 200 mm). 4. Firestops: a. Horizontal or vertical concealed spaces in walls, light coves, soffits, drop ceilings, and other features over 10 feet (3 000 mm) in length or height, and at stairs, ceiling levels, floor levels, and other junctures of horizontal to vertical concealed spaces. b. Within concealed spaces of exterior wall finishes and exterior architectural elements, such as trims, cornices or projections, at maximum intervals of 20 feet (6 000 mm), length or height. 5. Sill Plates: a. Shear Walls And Bearing Walls: 1) Provide specified anchor 12 inches (300 mm) maximum and 4 inches (100 mm) minimum from each end of each plate. 2) Shear Walls: Fasten with anchor bolts embedded in concrete or with screw anchors. 3) Bearing Walls: Fasten with anchor bolts embedded in concrete, or with screw anchors or expansion bolts in drilled holes. b. Non -Structural Walls: Fasten with powder actuated fasteners. c. In addition to requirements of paragraphs 'a' and'b' above, set sill plates of interior walls measuring less than 36 inches (900 mm) in length in solid bed of specified construction adhesive, except where sill sealer is used. d. Install specified seal sealer under sill plates of exterior walls of main building and of acoustically insulated interior walls. 6. Nailing: a. Stud to plate: 2 by 4 inch nominal 38 by 89 mm End nail, two 16d OR toe nail four 8d 2 by 6 inch nominal 38 bv 140 mm End nail, three 16d OR toe nail, four 8d 2 by 8 inch nominal 38 bv 184 mm End nail, four 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 2 by 10 inch nominal 38 by 235 mm End nail, five 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 1-3/4 by 5-1/2 inch LVL 44 by 140 mm LVL End nail, three 16d OR toe nail, four 8d 1-3/4 by 7-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 184 mm LVL End nail, four 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 1-3/4 by 9-1/4 inch LVL 44 by 235 mm LVL End nail, five 16d OR toe nail, six 8d 1-3/4 by 11-1/4 inch LVL 1 44 by 286 mm LVL End nail, six 16d OR toe nail eight 8d b. Top plates: Spiked together, 16d, 16 inches (400 mm) on center. c. Top plates: Laps, lap members 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum and nail with 16d nails 4 inches (100 mm) on center d. Top plates: Intersections, three 16d. e. Backing And Blocking: Three 8d, each end. f. Corner studs and angles: 16d, 16 inches (400 mm) on center. F. Accessory/ Equipment Mounting And Gypsum Board Back Blocking (nailers): 1. Furnish and install blocking in wood framing required for hardware, specialties, equipment, accessories, and mechanical and electrical items, etc. Nood Framing - 3 - 061100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 END OF SECTION Wood Framing - 4 - 061100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 061636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood panel product sheathing required for walls and floors as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 0000: 'General Requirements': a. Section 01 3100: 'Project Management and Coordination' for pre -installation conference. b. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. c. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. d. Section 01 6200: Administrative and procedural requirements for product options. 2. Section 06 1100: 'Wood Framing': a. Pre -installation conference held jointly with Section 06 1636. A. Association Publications: 1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15'h St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 2. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, 'Structural Tests and Special Inspections'. B. Definitions: 1. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. 2. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards: a. Inspection: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Inspection: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. c. Inspection -Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. d. Inspection -Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 3. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 4. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 5. Owner's Representative: Owner's Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. Jood Panel Product Sheathing - 1 - 061636 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 6. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 7. Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 8. Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 9. Special Inspection: See Inspection. 10. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 11. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements. C. Reference Standards: 1. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Technology Administration, U. S. Department of Commerce: a. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 1-07. 'Structural Plywood.' b. Voluntary Product Standard DOC PS 2-04, 'Performance Standard for Wood -based Structural -Use Panels.' 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 06 1100. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 06 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required. 2. Protect sheathing and keep under cover in transit and at job site. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store sheathing on level racks and keep free of ground. 2. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS 1100, review following: A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Meet requirements of PS 1, PS 2, PRP -108 (APA), or PRP -133 (TECO). Except where plywood is specifically indicated on Drawings, oriented strand board (OSB) is acceptable. B. Materials: 1. Sheathing: a. Sheathing shall bear grade stamp from American Plywood Association (APA) or equal grading organization. b. Sheathing shall not exceed 18 percent moisture content when fabricated or more than 19 percent when installed in Project. c. Sheathing 23/32 inch (18.3 mm) thick and thicker used for single -layer subflooring shall be tongue and groove. d. Sheathing used for same purpose shall be of same thickness. In all cases, thickness specified is minimum required regardless of span rating. e. Minimum span ratings for given thicknesses shall be as follows: Wood Panel Product Sheathing - 2 - 061636 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 Thickness San Rating 3/8 inch 9.5 mm 24/0 7/16 inch nominal 11 mm nominal 24/16 15/32 inch actual 11.9 mm actual 32/16 1/2 inch nominal 12.5 mm nominal 32/16 19/32 inch actual 15.1 mm actual 40/20 5/8 inch nominal 15.9 mm nominal 40/20 23!32 inch actual 18.3 mm actual 48/24 3/4 inch nominal 19 mm nominal 48/24 A. Nails: 1. As indicated on Drawings. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Top of nail heads shall be flush with sheathing surface. 2. Use of edge clips to provide spacing between sheathing panels is acceptable. B. Floor Sheathing: 1. Floor Sheathing: 1 Layer Subflooring. a. Apply bead of glue to structural supports. Lay face grain / strength axis across supports and with panel continuous over two supports minimum. b. Allow expansion gap of at least 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) at walls. c. Tongue and Groove. d. Nail Spacing. 1) As indicated on Drawings. e. Thickness: 1) As indicated on Drawings. f. Do not install any piece of bottom layer floor sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm). 2. Subflooring: 2 Layers Subflooring. a. Bottom layer: 1) Glue subflooring layers together along lines of structural supports. 2) Leave 1/32 inch (1 mm) gap at side and end joints. 3) Nail as per floor sheathing nailing requirements. 4) Thickness: a) 19/32 inch actual (15 mm) minimum thickness, except where specifically noted otherwise. 5) Do not install any piece of single layer floor sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm). b. Top layer: 1) Stagger joints of second layer subflooring so they do not line up with joints of first layer subflooring, but do align with intermediate structural member (for example, align with field nailing of bottom subflooring layer). 2) Glue subflooring layers together along lines of structural supports. 3) Leave 1/32 inch (1 mm) gap at side and end joints. 4) Nail at 6 inch (150 mm) centers on ends and 12 inch (300 mm) centers on intermediate structural members. 5) Thickness: a) 19/32 inch actual (15 mm) minimum thickness, except where specifically noted otherwise. 'ood Panel Product Sheathing - 3 - 061636 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5',' 6) Do not install any piece of single layer floor sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 24 inches (600 mm). END OF SECTION Wood Panel Product Sheathing - 4 - 06 1636 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 2001 COMMON FINISH CARPENTRY REQUIREMENTS )ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants required for items installed under this Section, as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install following items as described in Contract Documents: B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Architectural Woodwork. 2. Casings, stops, handrails, and jambs. 3. Chair Rails. 4. Hardwood Trim for wall covering. 5. Miscellaneous Wood Trim. 6. Plastic Laminate Countertops. 7. Rostrum Casework. 8. Selected Building Specialties. 9. Selected Equipment. 10. Window Stools. 11. Wood Trim at Ceiling Crowns. 12. Woad -Veneer -Faced Architectural Cabinets. 13. Miscellaneous as specified elsewhere. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Furring and blocking. 2. Section 06 2210: Miscellaneous Wood Trim. 3. Section 06 2221: Speaker Enclosures. 4. Sections under 06 4000 heading: Furnishing of Architectural Woodwork. a. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. b. Section 06 4001: Quality of wood materials to be used in Finish Carpentry. c. Section 06 4005: Plastic laminate countertops. d. Section 06 4114: Wood -Veneer -Faced Architectural Cabinets. e. Section 06 4115: Rostrum Casework. I. Section 06 4313: Wood Stairs. g. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork. 5. Section 06 6001: Quality of Window Stools. 6. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants, submittal and installation requirements. 7. Sections under 09 9000 heading: Back priming of work to be installed against concrete or masonry or subjected to moisture, and finishing of finish carpentry and architectural woodwork. 8. Sections in Division 10: Furnishing of Specialties. 9. Sections in Division 11: Furnishing of Equipment. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada: a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009.' B. Definitions: 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: ommon Finish Carpentry Requirements 1 - 062001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Economy Grade: The lowest acceptable grade in both material and workmanship requirements, and is for work where price outweighs quality considerations. b. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project's quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. c. Premium Grade: The highest Grade available in both material and workmanship where the highest level of quality, materials, workmanship, and installation is required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Glue: Waterproof and of best quality. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify walls, ceilings, floors, and openings are plumb, straight, in-line, and square before installing) Architectural Woodwork. 2. Report conditions that are not in compliance to Architect before starting installation. V 3.2 PREPARATION f A. Surface Preparation: 1. Install Architectural Woodwork after wall and ceiling painting is completed in areas where Architectural Woodwork is to be installed. B. Items Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: Install in accordance with requirements specified in Section furnishing item. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. AWS Custom Grade is minimum acceptable standard, except where explicitly specified otherwise, for installation of architectural woodwork. B. General Architectural Woodwork Installation: 1. Fabricate work in accordance with measurements taken on Project site. 2. Scribe, miter, and join accurately and neatly to conform to details. 3. Exposed surfaces shall be machine sanded, ready for finishing. 4. Allow for free movement of panels. 5. Countersink nails. Countersink screws and plug those exposed to view. C. Items Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: Install in accordance with requirements specified in Section furnishing item. 1. Window Stool: a. Install window stool to structure with silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 9213 "Elastomeric Joint Sealant". END OF SECTION Common Finish Carpentry Requirements 2 - 0620011 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 2210 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood trim not specified elsewhere as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. 2. Section 06 2001: Common Finish Carpentry Requirements. 3. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 4. Section 06 4512: Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim. 5. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood'. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. B. Definitions: 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project's quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. 2. Plain -Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the board's face. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish. Aiscellaneous Wood Trim - 1 - 062210 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5'4 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. B. Meet requirements of Section 06 4001: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Design Criteria: 1) Match materials specified in Section 06 4512. 2) Match finish specified in Section 06 4512 and match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. 2. Opaque Finished Hardwood: Hardwood allowed by AWS Custom Grade. 3. Opaque Finished Softwood: Solid stock Pine, C or better, S4S. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Wood Trim - 2 - 062210 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 4001 COMMON ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK REQUIREMENTS )ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General standards for materials and fabrication of Architectural Woodwork and for hardware associated with Architectural Woodwork. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Furring and blocking. 2. Section 06 2001: Installation. 3. Section 06 2210: 'Miscellaneous Wood Trim'. 4. Section 06 4005: 'Plastic Laminate'. 5. Section 06 4114: 'Wood -Veneer -Faced Architectural Cabinets'. 6. Section 06 4115: 'Rostrum Casework'. 7. Section 06 4512: 'Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim'. 8. Section 06 6001: 'Miscellaneous Plastic Fabrications'. 9. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood' for filling of nail holes and finishing A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. B. Definitions 1. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project's quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature for specialty items and hardware not manufactured by Architectural Woodwork fabricator. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Statement. See Section 01 4301 for fabricator qualifications: a. Fabricator: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: 1. Fabricator: a. Fabricator Firm specializing in performing work of this section. ommon Architectural Woodwork Requirements - 1 - 064001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Firm experience in supplying products indicated for this Project. 2) Firm with sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3) Firm will comply with specifications and Contract Documents for this Project. 4) Minimum five (5) years experience in Woodwork installations. 5) Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects similar in size, scope, and installation procedures required for this project before bidding. b. Upon request by Architect or Owner, submit documentation. 1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Assemble architectural woodwork at Architectural Woodwork Fabricator's plant and deliver ready for erection insofar as possible. 2. Protect architectural woodwork from moisture and damage while in transit to job site. 3. Report damaged materials received. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Unload and store in place where it will be protected from moisture and damage and convenient to use. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATORS A. Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 4301: 1. Meet Quality Assurance Fabricator Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. 2.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. AWS Custom Grade is minimum acceptable standard, except where explicitly specified otherwise, for materials, construction, and installation of architectural woodwork. B. Materials: 1. Lumber: a. Grade: 1) No defects in boards smaller than 600 sq in (3 871 sq cm). 2) One defect per additional 150 sq inches (968 sq cm) in larger boards. 3) Select pieces for uniformity of grain and color on exposed faces and edges. 4) No mineral grains accepted. b. Allowable Defects: 1) Tight knots not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in diameter. No loose knots permitted. 2) Patches (dutchmen) not apparent after finishing when viewed beyond 18 inches (450 mm). 3) Checks or splits not exceeding 1/32 inch by 3 inches (1 mm by 75 mm) and not visible after finishing when viewed beyond 18 inches (450 mm). 4) Stains, pitch pockets, streaks, worm holes, and other defects not mentioned are not permitted. 5) Normal grain variations, such as cats eye, bird's eye, burl, curl, and cross grain are not considered defects. c. Use maximum lengths possible, but not required to exceed 10 feet (3 meters) without joints. No joints shall occur closer than 72 inches (1 800 mm) in straight runs exceeding 18 feet (3 600 mm). Runs between 18 feet (3 600 mm) and 10 feet (3 meters) may have no more than Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements - 2 - 064001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 one joint. No joints shall occur within 72 inches (1 800 mm) of outside corners nor within 18 inches (450 mm) of inside corners. d. Moisture content shall be 6 percent maximum at fabrication. No opening of joints due to shrinkage is acceptable. C. Fabrication: 1. Follow Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) for fabrication of Architectural Woodwork. 2. Tolerances: a. No planer marks (KCPI) allowed. Sand wood members and surfaces with 100 grit or finer. b. Maximum Gap: None allowed. c. Flushness Variation: 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) maximum. d. Sanding Cross Scratches: 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. e. Plug screw holes. Screw locations not to be visible beyond 18 inches (450 mm). 3. Fabricate work in accordance with measurements taken on job site. 4. 'Ease' sharp corners and edges of exposed members to promote finishing and protect users from slivers. Radius of 'easing' shall be uniform throughout Project and between 1/32 and 1/1 6th of an inch. 5. Fabricate so veneer grain is vertical. 6. Joints: a. Use lumber pieces with similar grain pattern when joining end to end. b. Compatibility of grain and color from lumber to panel products is required. 7. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. Leave operating hardware operating smoothly and quietly. 8. Remove or repair damaged surface of or defects in exposed finished surfaces of architectural woodwork to match adjacent similar undamaged surface. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION ommon Architectural Woodwork Requirements - 3 - 064001 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 4005 PLASTIC LAMINATE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY i I A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Wall -hung counters. 2. Countertops for custom casework. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: a. Installation of wall -hung counters. b. Installation of countertops for custom casework. 2. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), list Edition, 2009. 1) Section 11: Countertops. B. Definitions: 1. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. 2. Flame Spread Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 or CAN/ULC-S102.2-10. 3. Smoke -Developed Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 or CAN/ULC-S102.2-10. 4. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade. a. Premium Grade: Highest Grade available in both material and workmanship where highest level of quality, materials, workmanship, and installation is required. 5. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): Laminated thermosetting decorative sheets intended for decorative purposes. Sheets consist essentially of layers of fibrous sheet material, such as paper, impregnated with thermosetting condensation resin and consolidation under heat and pressure. Top layers have decorative color or printed design. Exposed surface has attractive exposed surface that is durable and resistant to damage from abrasion and mild alkalies, acids, and solvents, meeting requirements of National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD -3. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E84-1 1, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.' b. ASTM E162-1 la, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source'. 2. Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association: a. ASTM/KCMA A161.1-2000 (R2005), 'Performance And Construction Standards For Kitchen And Vanity Cabinets'. b. ANSI/KCMA At 61.2-1998, 'Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops.' 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association /American National Standards Institute: 'lastic Laminate - 1 - 064005 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' a. ANSI/NEMA LD -3-2005, 'High Pressure Decorative Laminates.' 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: a. UL 723: 'Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Tenth Edition September 10 2008.' (Revision: September 13, 2010).' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Calor selections. b. Manufacturer's technical data sheet. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Provide Manufacturer's certification of compliance to ANSI/NEMA LD 3. 2. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Test reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties for Quality Assurance if requested by Owner or Architect. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature for plastic laminate. b) Color selections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide plastic laminate with surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products by qualified testing agency. a. Surface -Burning Characteristics: 1) Plastic Laminate shall have Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 Type 1. a) Class A (Flame spread index 0-25; Smoke -developed index 0-450). b) Flash point: None. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fabricators: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. B. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Formica, Cincinnati, OH www.formica.com or Formica Canada Inc, St Jean sur Richelieu, PQ (450) 347-7541, all matte finish. b. Nevamar, Odenton, MD www.nevamar.com. c. Pionite Decorative Surfaces, Auburn, ME www.pionite.com. d. WilsonArt, Temple, TX www.wilsonart.com or WilsonArt International Inc, Mississuaga, ON (905) 565-1255. e. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. Plastic Laminate - 2 - 0640051 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 C. Plastic Laminates: 1. Quality: a. Countertops: 1) Post -formed front edge and backsplash, except where detailed otherwise, with plastic laminate meeting requirements of ANSI/NEMA LD 3: PF 42. a) Vertical Applications: GP 28. b) Horizontal (other than countertops): GP 38. 2) No raised lip on front edge. b. Balancing Material: BK 20. c. AWS Quality Grade: Premium. 2. Assemblies: a. Countertops shall meet requirements of KCMA At 61.1 and At 61.2. b. Adhesives for other than post -formed types shall be spray grade, high heat resistant, neoprene contact adhesive. 3. Category Four Acceptable Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: a. WilsonArt: 4170-60. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Mastic Laminate - 3 - 064005 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 4114 WOOD -VENEER -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS DART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Custom casework. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. 2. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 3. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 4. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood'. 5. Sections Under 22 4200 Heading: Plumbing Fixtures. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1 st Edition, 2009. B. Definitions: 1. Adhesive, Type I (fully waterproof): Forms a bond that will retain practically all of its strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying; bond shall be of such quality that specimens will withstand shear and the two-cycle boil test specified in ANSI/HPVA HP (latest edition). 2. Adhesive, Type II (water-resistant): Forms a bond that will retain practically all of its strength when occasionally subjected to a thorough wetting and drying; bond shall be of such quality that specimens will withstand the three -cycle cold soak test specified in ANSI/HPVA HP (latest edition). 3. Book -Match: Matching between adjacent veneer leaves on one panel face. Every other piece of veneer is turned over so that the adjacent leaves are "opened" as two pages in a book. The fibers of the wood, slanting in opposite directions in the adjacent leaves, create a characteristic light and dark effect when the surface is seen from an angle. 4. Concealed Surfaces: Top and bottom edges of wood unless the top edge is visible from above. 5. Core: The material (typically, veneer, lumber, particleboard, medium -density fiberboard, or a combination of these) on which an exposed surface material (typically, veneer or HPDL) is applied. 6. Core, Solid: The innermost layer or section in flush door construction. Typical constructions are as follows: a. Fiberboard Core: Manufactured from wood reduced to fine fibers mixed with binders and formed by the use of heat and pressure into panels. b. Particleboard - A solid core of wood or other lignocellulose particles bonded together with a suitable binder, cured under heat, and pressed into a rigid panel in a flat -platen press. 7. Edge Banding: Method of concealing plies or inner cores of plywood or particleboard when edges are exposed. 8. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces normally visible after installation. 9. Face: The better side of any panel in which the outer plies are of different veneer grades; also either side of a panel in which there is no difference in veneer grade of the outer plies. 10. Face Veneer: The outermost exposed wood veneer surface of a veneered wood door, panel, or other component exposed to view when the project is completed. Vood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork - 1 - 064114 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 11 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project's quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. Plain -Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the board's face. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat -cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a "flitch." Running Match: Each panel face is assembled from as many veneer leaves as necessary. Any portion left over from one panel may be used to start the next. Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces that are only visible under closer examination. Veneer: A thin sheet or layer of wood, usually rotary cut, sliced or sawn from a log or flitch. Thickness may vary from 1/100 inch (0.3 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). C. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association: a. ANSI / HPVA HP -1-2004 01 -Jan-2004 'American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets for hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Confirm compliance with Contract Document requirements as to configuration and dimensions of custom casework. b. Include plan and elevation views, materials used, standing and running trim profiles, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessories, and hardware. 3. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample(s) of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish. 2. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Copy of AWS manual with shop drawing submission. Wood -Veneer -Faced Architectural Woodwork - 2 - 064114 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SART 2 - PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. 2. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Accuride, Santa Fe Springs, CA www.accuride.com. b. CompX National, Mauldin, SC www.nclnet.com. c. Glynn Johnson, Chicago, IL www.glynn-johnson.com. d. Grass America Inc, Kernerville, NC www.grassusa.com. e. Hager Companies, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com or Hager Hinge (Canada) Ltd, Kitchener, ON (519) 893-7580. f. Ives, Indianapolis, IN www.iveshardware.com. g. Julius Blum Inc, Stanley, NC www.blum.com. h. Knape & Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI www.knapeandvogt.com or Knape & Vogt Canada, Mississaugua, ON (905) 676-8972. i. Mckinney, Scranton, PA www.mckinneyhinge.com or Markham, ON (905) 940-2040. j. Olympus Lock Co, Seattle, WA www.olympus-lock.com. k. Salice America Inc, Charlotte, NC www.saliceamerica.com. I. Stanley, New Britain, CT www.stanleyhardware.com. m. Techna-Base Inc, Pleasant Grove, UT (801) 361-2289 or dlundahl@earthlink.net. n. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA www.trimcobbw.com. Materials: 1. Wood Materials: a. Exposed: Plain sawn Red Oak. b. Semi -exposed And Concealed: Species as acceptable for AWS custom grade. 2. Panel Product: a. Cores: 1) Cabinet Doors: Medium density fiberboard (MDF) with minimum density of 48 lbs per cu ft (769 kg per cu meter). 2) All Other: Industrial grade particle board with minimum density of 45 lbs per cu ft (721 kg per cu meter). b. Facings: 1) Hardwood veneer facings shall be plain sliced Red Oak AWS Grade A, or equal by HPVA, NWWDA, or APA. 2) All other facings shall be Melamine or Kortron. c. Edgings: 1) Cabinet Doors And Drawer Fronts Higher Than 8 Inches (200 mm): a) 3/4 inch by 1/8 to 1/4 inch (19 mm by 3 to 6 mm) edge -band of wood species matching hardwood face veneer. 2) Shelves And Exposed Panel Product Edges. Do not use in CES Module cabinetry: a) Hot -glued, 2 mm thick minimum, PVC edge -banding. Wood -grain, except color matching Melamine or Kortron surface at shelf edges. 3) Semi -Exposed Panel Product Edges: a) Hot -glued, 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) thick minimum, wood grained PVC edge -banding. d. Glues (adhesives) used in manufacture and fabrication of panel products shall be Type I or if. e. Moisture content shall be same as specified for lumber. 3. Casework Doors: a. Face Veneer: 1) Plain sliced Red Oak meeting requirements of AWS Grade A, 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick minimum immediately before finishing. 2) Face veneers shall be running book matched. b. Doors under 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) thick: Panel Product. 1) Rails: a) 1-1/8 inches (28.5 mm). b) Mill option material. Nood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork - 3 - 064114 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' 4. Cabinet And Drawer Hardware: a. Cabinet And Drawer Pulls: 1) US26D steel -plated, brass / bronze core bow handles, 4 inches (100 mm) long minimum. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) 4484 by Stanley. b) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. b. Cabinet And Drawer Locks: 1) Pin tumbler type suitable for location. Key individually by cabinet grouping shown on signage schedule. Stamp keys with Room number and cabinet designation as shown on signage schedule. 2) Key cabinets and drawers within an Office alike. 3) Crosskey knife drawer in Serving Area so all other cabinet and drawer keys will open drawer. 4) Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a) SC Advantage Series Door Lock by CompX National Lock. b) 100DR Series Door Lock by Olympus Lock Inc. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. c. Cabinet Adjustable Shelf Supports: 1) Either of following systems are acceptable, at Fabricator's option: a) 32mm System: Casework Fabricator's standard. b) Traditional System: (1) Class Two Quality Standards: 255 and 256 by Knape & Vogt. d. Cabinet Inactive Leaf Catches: 1) Class Two Quality Standards: a) Full -Height Doors: Two Surface Bolts No 043 - 2 inch (50 mm) by Ives. b) All Other Doors: Elbow Catch No 2 by Ives. e. Drawer Guides: 1) Pencil Drawers: a) Steel ball bearings, 45 Ib (20 kg) load rating. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Series 2006 by Accuride. (2) Series KV8200 by Knape & Vogt. 2) Standard Drawers: a) Full extension, steel ball bearings, 100 Ib (45 kg) load rating. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Series 3832 by Accuride. (2) Series KV8400 by Knape & Vogt. 3) Lateral Files / Kitchen Drawers: a) Files/Drawers 30 inches (762 mm) wide and under: (1) Full extension, steel ball bearings, 150 Ib (68 kg) load rating: (2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: i (a) Series 4034 by Accuride. (b) Series KV8505 by Knape & Vogt. b) Files/Drawers over 30 inches (762 mm) wide: (1) Heavy -Duty, full extension, steel ball bearings, 200 lbs (90 kg) load rating: (2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (a) Series 3640 by Accuride. (b) Series KV8800 by Knape & Vogt. C. Fabrication: 1. Cabinet Body: a. Use AWS Flush Overlay construction on cabinet bodies. b. If used, install Rail System adjustable shelf supports recessed. 2. Drawers: a. Fabricate with separate, screw -attached drawer front. Wood -Veneer -Faced Architectural Woodwork - 4 - 064114 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Joints shall be dowel and pressure -glued, or lock shoulder, glued, and pin nailed. c. Set bottoms into sides, backs, and subfront with 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep groove with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum standing shoulder. d. Every drawer shall have specified drawer guides and pull installed. Install drawer guides with 'Euroscrews', and pulls with through -bolts passing through both front and sub -front. 3. Cabinet Doors: a. Full height, panel product cabinet doors may be fabricated in two pieces and joined on back with metal backplate. Backplate shall match interior door surface color. b. Hinges: Install hinges using plastic insertion dowels for hinges and'Euroscrews' for baseplates. c. Every cabinet door shall have specified pull installed. 4. Cabinet Component Thickness And Material: a. Use hardwood veneer facing on panel product, except on following surfaces, where Kortron or Melamine shall be used. 1) Cabinet interiors, not including cabinet doors, and shelving faces behind cabinet doors in all rooms. 2) Cabinet interiors and shelving faces exposed to view in Material Center, Sacrament Preparation Room, Serving Area, and Storage Rooms. 3) Cabinet exteriors permanently concealed. 4) Drawer sides, backs, bottoms, and subfronts. ! b. Ends, Divisions, Bottoms, Tops: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick panel product. c. Rails: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick panel product. d. Shelves: 1) Panel product. 2) Thickness: a) 30 Inch (750 mm) Span And Less: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. b) Spans Over 30 Inches (750 mm) To 42 Inches (1 050 mm): One inch (25 mm) thick. c) Spans Over 42 inches (1 050 mm): One inch (25 mm) thick and provide Hafele or equal center supports. e. Backs: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick panel product. f. Doors: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick panel product. g. Drawer Sides, Backs, And Subfronts: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick minimum panel product. h. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick panel product. i. Separate Drawer Front: 1) 8 Inches (200 mm) High And Less: 314 inch (19 mm) thick solid hardwood 2) More Than 8 Inches (200 mm) High: 3/4 inch (19 mm) panel product j. Hardboard Dividers: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick panel product k. Hardboard Shelves: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick hardboard, smooth both sides 5. Install plastic grommets in cable access holes in countertops. Finishes: 1. Factory Finishing: a. Applied before leaving factory. b. Performance / Design Criteria: 1) Factory -finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. c. Match existing Project Color Scheme: 1) Control Sample provided by Owner: a) Control Sample will be existing wood item from Project. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324. Vood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Woodwork - 5 - 064114 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, E PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Wood -Veneer -Faced Architectural Woodwork - 6 - 064114 5074738 PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY June 2012 SECTION 06 4115 ROSTRUM CASEWORK A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Rostrum casework as described in Contract Documents consisting of the following: a. Chapel pulpit with adjustable lift mechanism. b. Rostrum rail. c. Sacrament table. d. Control pedestal. e. Wood handrails and handrail brackets. Rexburg 2, 5 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Rostrum casework. This Specification establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 2001: Installation of Rostrum casework. 3. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 4. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 5. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood'. A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. B. Definitions: 1. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. 2. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade: a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project's quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. 3. Plain -Sawn: A hardwood figure developed by sawing a log lengthwise at a tangent to the annual growth rings. It appears as U-shaped or straight markings in the board's face. 4. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat -cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a "flitch." C. Reference Standards: 1. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): a. IEC 60529 (ed. 2.1 b:2001), 'Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code). 2. International Organization for Standards (ISO): a. ISO 3746:2010, 'Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure - Survey method using an enveloping measurement surface over a reflecting plane'. iostrum Casework - 1 - 064115 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completion of rostrum casework. 3. Coordinate completions of electrical and audio video wiring with rostrum casework. B. Sequencing: 1. Install rostrum casework after following as been completed: a. Carpet. b. Adjacent millwork. c. Adjacent walls and ceilings are finished. C. Scheduling: 1. Notify Rostrum Casework Fabricator after field dimensions of Rostrum are recorded. a. Submit field dimensions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample from project for finish. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Field dimensions: 1) General Contractor Responsibility: a) Provide field dimensions of Rostrum area to Rostrum Casework Fabricator. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Assemble Rostrum Casework at Architectural Woodwork Fabricator's plant and deliver ready for erection insofar as possible. 2. Protect Rostrum Casework from moisture and damage while in transit to job site. 3. Report damaged materials received. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Unload and store in secure place where it will be protected from moisture and damage and convenient to use. Rostrum Casework - 2 - 064115 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Rostrum Casework Fabricator's written guarantee that system shall be free from defects and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of substantial completion of building. 2. Adjustable Lift Mechanism: a. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. )ART 2 - PRODUCTS OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Fabricator. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements. 1. Granite Mill & Fixture Co., Salt Lake City, UT www.granitemill.com. a. Contact Information: Chris Sandberg (801) 467-3222 csandberg@granitemill.com. MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: 1. Rostrum casework consists of Chapel pulpit with adjustable mechanism, rostrum rail, sacrament table, control pedestal, wood handrails, and wood handrail and brackets. B. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. AWS Custom Grade is minimum acceptable standard for materials, construction, and installation of architectural woodwork. 2. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish. Furnish factory -finish matching Owner selected sample for Rostrum Casework: a. Design Criteria: 1) Factory -finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. b. Match existing Project C 1) Control Sample provided by Owner: a) Control Sample will be existing wood item from Project. C. Materials: 1. Rostrum Casework as described in Contract Documents. a. Solid Wood: Plain sawn Red Oak. b. Paneling: Panel Product with plain sliced Red Oak veneer. 2. Wood handrails and brackets. D. Fabrication: 1. Following Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) for fabrication of Rostrum casework. ACCESSORIES A. Adjustable Pulpit Mechanism: 1. Description: a. Lift Mechanism for raising and lowering pulpit / podium lecterns including but not limited to following components: 1) Column assembly. 2) Control box. 3) Control cable. 4) Control relay assembly. 5) Lift Actuator. 6) Safety switch assembly. iostrum Casework - 3 - 064115 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 7) Surge protector. 2. Design Criteria: a. General: 1) Identification; a) Each unit shall have tag permanently attached giving Model Number and Manufacturer's name, phone number, and address. 2) Service Life: a) Estimated service life of Lift Mechanism shall be 1 million cycles plus/minus 10 percent. 3) Sound: a) Lift mechanism must operate at not more than 48db(A) measured per ISO 3746. b. Dimension Requirements: 1) Provide Lift Mechanism within lectern neck and engage not more than 18 inches (450 mm) and not less than less than 17 inches (430 mm). a) Provide Lift Mechanism to fit within lectern neck 8-3/4 to 9 inch (222 to 230 mm) square by 18 inch (450 mm). c. Column Assembly: _ 1) General: r a) Construct Lift Mechanism with inner and outer column. b) Inner column must be fixed to base plate of Lift Mechanism. E c) Connect outer column to inner column with system of roller bearings to provide vertical motion but limit lateral motion. 2) Material: a) Construct inner and outer column dimensionally stable material for presence of variable humidity levels (typically aluminum). b) Protect inner and outer column from oxidation with an electrolytic coating such as powder coat paint or anodize. d. Control Box: j 1) General: a) Electrical components of unit shall be UUULC, CSA, and/or TUV listed or recognized where such listing or recognition is available. b) Actuator and power supply must meet requirements of IEC 60529 for IP51 protection. c) Cut-off mechanism must automatically reset after operation. 2) Power Supply: a) Power supply for operating motor of actuator must be separate from actuator and Lift Mechanism. b) Power supply mains cable must be available with molded plug end for interface with standard outlets without use of adapters. c) Power supply must meet worldwide voltage and frequency requirements. e. Control Cable: 1) Separate interconnection cables used to connect screw actuator, control switch and power to power supply unit. 2) Interconnection cables must be uniquely sized, keyed, and pinned so that incorrect connection to power supply unit cannot be completed. 3) Locking mechanism must be supplied to prevent interconnection cables from being removed from the power supply without disabling lock mechanism. f. Lifting Actuator: 1) Provide movable outer column with screw type actuator. a) Outer column must not be physically connected to screw type actuator. 2) Screw Type Actuator: a) Provide sealed and lubricated for life of actuator. b) Provide end of stroke limit switches contained with actuator. c) Provide brake mechanism to prevent screw from back driving under load. d) Actuator must extend and/or retract at minimum speed of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) per second. g. Safety Switch Assembly: 1) Provide adjustable cut-off mechanism to limit weight that Lift Mechanism can carry during extension: Rostrum Casework - 4 - 064115 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a) Lift Mechanism to carry total weight of 55 Ib (24.9 kg) to 65 Ib (29.5 kg) including weight of pulpit lectern and neck assembly. 2) Provide adjustable cut-off mechanism to limit force that may be transmitted to an obstruction object during retraction: a) Force should not exceed 3 lbs (1.36 kg) when measured between top of pulpit cabinet and front left corner of lectern. 3. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. Manufacturer Contact List: 1) Mark Eaton LLC, American Fork, UT www.markeatonlic.com. a) Contact Information: Mark Eaton (801) 756-5639. b. Approved Product: 1) Model LDS2005A by Mark Eaton. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Rostrum Casework - 5 - 064115 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 4313 WOOD STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Stair treads and risers to: a. Rostrum. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 5214: Custom metal handrails. 2. Section 06 1100: Stair stringers. 3. Section 06 1636: Wood Panel Product Sheathing. 4. Section 06 2001: Installation. 5. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 6. Section 06 4115: Wood handrails at Rostrum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Materials: 1. Treads: a. 5/4 inch (32 mm) clear Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, or 1-1/8 inch (28 mm) thick high density particle board preformed stair tread. b. Treads to have 1/2 inch (13 mm) radius at top outside edge. 2. Risers: 4/4 inch (25 mm) clear Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, or 3/4 inch (19 mm) plywood meeting requirements specified in Section 06 1636. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Wood Stairs - 1 - 064313 BLANK PAGE 5074738 PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY June 2012 SECTION 06 4512 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WOOD TRIM A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Chair rails. 2. Hardwood base. Hardwood base 3. Hardwood handrail at Rostrum Riser and/or Rostrum Ramp. 4. Hardwood trim for wall covering. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Installation. 2. Section 06 2210: Remaining Wood Trim. 3. Section 06 4001: Approved Fabricators. 4. Section 06 4001: Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements. 5. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood' 1.2 REFERENCES A. Association Publications Rexburg 2, 5 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1 st Edition, 2009. B. Definitions: 1. Flitch: A hewn or sawn log made ready for veneer production or the actual veneer slices of one half log, kept in order, and used for the production of fine plywood panels. 2. Grade: Unless otherwise noted, this term means Grade rules for Economy, Custom, and/or Premium Grade. a. Custom Grade: Typically specified for and adequately covers most high-quality architectural woodwork, providing a well-defined degree of control over a project's quality of materials, workmanship, or installation. 3. Plain Slicing: Most commonly used for hardwood plywood. The log is cut in half, and one half is placed onto a carriage and moved up and down past a fixed knife to produce the veneers. Veneer is sliced parallel to the pith of the log and approximately tangent to the growth rings to achieve flat -cut veneer. Each piece is generally placed in a stack and kept in order. One half log, sliced this way, is called a "flitch." 4. Running Trim: Generally combined in the term "standing and running trim" and refers to random, longer length trims delivered to the jobsite (e.g., baseboard, chair rail, crown molding). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Shop Drawings: a. Include materials used, standing and running trim profiles, joint details, and hardware. 2. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim - 1 - 064512 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample for finish. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Approved Fabricators. See Section 06 4001 for Approved Fabricators. B. Performance / Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of Section 06 4001 'Common Architectural Woodwork Requirements'. 1. Glue: Waterproof and of best quality. 2. Factory -finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. C. Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim: 1. Interior Hardwood For Transparent Finish: a. Design Criteria: 1) Solid wood shall be plain sawn Red Oak. 2) Paneling shall be panel product with plain sliced Red Oak veneer. 3) Finish to match Owner selected sample as specified in Section 09 9324. b. Match existing Project C 1) Control Sample provided by Owner: a) Control Sample will be existing wood item from Project. 2. Interior Wood For Opaque, Painted Finish: a. Applies to ceiling trim only. b. Solid wood shall be any species allowed by AWS Custom grade. D. Shelves: 1. Conform to applicable requirements of Sections 06 4001 and 06 4114. 2. Use 3/4 inch (19 mm) Kortron or Melamine faced Panel Product with 2 mm thick PVC 3062 banding with eased edges. Apply banding on exposed edges with one inch (25 mm) return onto unexposed edges. Edge banding color to match Panel Product. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim 2 - 064512 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 06 6001 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But not Installed Under This Section: 1. Furnish window stools as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2001: Common Finish Carpentry Requirements and installation of Window Stools. 1.2 REFERENCES I A. Definitions: 1. Solid Surface: Solid surface materials are manufactured from polymeric materials. Granules may also be added to enhance the color effects. Solid surface materials are non -porous and homogeneous, with the same composition throughout the thickness of the solid surface material. They are capable of being repaired, renewed to the original finish and fabricated into continuous surfaces with inconspicuous seams. B. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute/International Cast Polymer Alliance: a. ANSI/ICPA SS -1-2001, 'Performance Standard for Solid Surface Materials.' SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature. b. Color selections. 3ART2-PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Acrylic Solid Surface: a. Meet requirements of ANSIPCPS SS -1. b. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Corian by DuPont Co, Wilmington, DE. Contact Ted A. Williams at (612) 819-8751 FAX (763) 495-5394 or Theodore.A.Williams@usa.dupont.com. 2) LG Hi -Macs Solid Surfacing by LG Solid Source LLC, Peoria, AZ www.lgcreate.com. 3) Staron Solid Surfacing by Cheil Industries / Samsung Chemical USA, La Mirada, CA www.staron.com. 4) 'Gibralter Solid Surface' by Wilsonart International Inc, Temple, TX www.wilsonart.com. B. Materials: 1. Acrylic Solid Surface Window Stools: a. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick 100 percent acrylic polymer. Aiscellaneous Plastic Fabrications - 1 - 066001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Approved Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard solid (white or off- white only) colors. 1) Glacier White by Cori an. 2) Bisque by Corian. 3) Cameo White by Corian. 4) Vanilla by Corian. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Plastic Fabrications - 2 - 06 6001 DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 71000 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 071900 WATER REPELLENTS 76000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076210 GALVANIZED STEEL FLASHING AND TRIM 77000 ROOF AND WALL SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 077123 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 79000 JOINT PROTECTION 079213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS able of Contents - 1 - 070000 BLANK PAGE 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 071900 WATER REPELLENTS 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and apply water repellent system to exposed exterior brick masonry as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Sections under 04 0000 and 04 2000 headings: Cleaning of masonry. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: Schedule pre -installation conference for same time as application of test application. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data including data substantiating that specified materials are recommended by Manufacturer for applications shown. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: Printed application instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Comply with applicable VOC standards and other local requirements. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Installer shall be acceptable to Manufacturer as applicator of its product. C. Preconstruction Testing: 1. Test substrate for moisture content. Do not apply if moisture contents of wall not within limits acceptable to Manufacturer. 2. Apply 10 foot (3 meter) square test application for review of substrate preparation procedures and application methods. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Temperatures at time of application: a. Silane: Between 40 and 75 deg F (4 and 24 deg C). b. Siloxane: Between 40 and 100 deg F (4 and 38 deg C). 2. No precipitation shall have occurred within 24 hours of application or be expected for 48 hours minimum after completion of application. Vater Repellents - 1 - 071900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Type One Acceptable Products 1. Siloxane: a. Prime A Pell 200 by Chemprobe, Div Tnemec, North Kansas City, MO www.tnemec.com. b. Weather Worker WB (J -26 -WB) by Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals, Kansas City, KS www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. c. Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane WB Concentrate by ProSoCo, Lawrence, KS www.prosoco.com. d. Rainstopper 600 by TexCote - Textured Coatings of America, Panama City, FL www.texcote.com. 2. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not apply water repellent until after installation of sealants in areas to receive water repellants and adjoining areas. B. Clean substrate of substances that will interfere with penetration and adhesion of water repellent. C. Protect adjoining work from spillage or blow -over as recommended by Manufacturer. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply two heavy saturation spray coats beginning at bottom of walls and following Manufacturer's written application instructions. 3.3 CLEANING A. Immediately clean adjoining surfaces of spillage and overspray as recommended by Manufacturer. END OF SECTION Water Repellents - 2 - 071900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 076210 GALVANIZED STEEL FLASHING AND TRIM DART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install miscellaneous flashing, counterflashing, and hold-down clips as described in Contract Documents and not specified to be of other material. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Gravel stops, copings, scuppers, and miscellaneous sheet metal specialties not specified to be of other materials. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section under 07 5000 heading: Installation of gravel stops, copings, scuppers, and miscellaneous roofing related flashing. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM A653/A653M-11, 'Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process'. b. ASTM A792/A792M-10, 'Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 %, Aluminum -Zinc Alloy - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process'. 2. Federal Specifications: a. TT -S -00230C(2) Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component, (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers Of Metal: a. CMG — Coated Metals Group, Denver, CO www.cmgmetals.com. b. Drexel Metals, LLC, Ivyland, PA www.drexmet.com. c. Englert Inc, Perth Amboy, NJ www,englertinc.com. d. Fabral, Lancaster, PA www.fabral.com. e. Firestone Metal Producdts, Anoka, MN www.unaclad.com. f. MBCI, Houston, TX www.mbci.com. g. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp, Sellersburg, IN www.mtlsales.com. h. Petersen Aluminum Corp, Elk Grove, IL www,pac-clad.com. i. Ryerson, Chicago, IL www.ryerson.com. j. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. B. Materials: 1. Sheet Metal: a. Galvanized iron or steel meeting requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, G 90 or Galvalume steel meeting requirements of ASTM A792/A792M AZ50, 50 ksi. 1) 22 ga (0.792 mm) for hold-down clips. ialvanized Steel Flashing And Trim - 1 - 076210 5074738 June 2012 2) 24 ga (0.635 mm) for all other. Rexburg 2, 5 C. Fabrication: 1. Form accurately to details. 2. Profiles, bends, and intersections shall be even and true to line. 3. Fold exposed edges 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) to provide stiffness. D. Finish: 1. Metal exposed to view shall have face coating of polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVFZ) Resin -base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) containing 70 percent minimum PVFZ in resin portion of formula. Thermo -cured two coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. Reverse side coating shall be thermo-cured system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants: Rubber base type conforming to Fed Spec TT -S -00230C. B. Fasteners: 1. Of strength and type consistent with function. 2. Nails: Hot -dipped galvanized. 3. Screws, Bolts, And Accessory Fasteners: Galvanized or other acceptable corrosion resistant treatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install with small, watertight seams. B. Slope to provide positive drainage. C. Provide sufficient hold down clips to insure true alignment and security against wind. D. Provide 4 inch (100 mm) minimum overlap. E. Allow sufficient tolerance for expansion and contraction. F. Insulate work to prevent electrolytic action. 3.2 CLEANING A. Leave metals clean and free of defects, stains, and damaged finish. END OF SECTION Galvanized Steel Flashing And Trim - 2 - 07 621 d 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 07 7123 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS DART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install gutters and downspouts as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants for joints. REFERENCES A. Reference Standard: 1. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc: a. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 6th edition 2003. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Show gutter cross-section, mounting method, gauge of metal, expansion joint design and locations, and downspout locations minimum. )ART 2 -PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers of Metal: a. CMG — Coated Metals Group, Denver, CO www.cmgmetals.com. b. Englert Inc, Perth Amboy, NJ www.englertinc.com. c. Fabral, Jackson, GA www.fabral.com. d. Firestone Metal Products, Anoka, MN www.unaclad.com. e. MBCI, Houston, TX www.mbel.com. f. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp, Sellersburg, IN www.mtlsales.com. g. Petersen Aluminum Corp, Elk Grove, IL www.pac-clad.com. h. Reynolds Metals Company, Richmond, VA www.rmc.com. L Ryerson, Chicago, IL www.ryerson.com. j. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2. Downspout Adapter: a. Piedmont Pipe, Debris Trap Model 35 -26 -DT www.piedmontpipe.com. B. Materials 1. Steel: a. Downspouts: Rectangular, 24 ga (0.0276 inches - 0.7010 mm) galvanized steel including necessary elbows. b. Gutters: 24 ga (0.0276 inches - 0.7010 mm) galvanized steel. c. Brackets: 22 ga (0.0336 inches - 0.8534 mm) galvanized steel or 26 ga (0.0217 inches - 0.478 mm) double -hemmed minimum. tanufactured Gutters And Downspouts - 1 - 077123 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 C. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Manual recommendations, where applicable. 2. Cross-sectional configuration of gutter shall be as indicated on the drawingsl. 3. Form accurately to details. 4. Profiles, bends, and intersections shall be even and true to line. D. Finishes: 1. Metal exposed to view shall have face coating of polyvinyledene Fluoride (PVFZ) Resin -base finish (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000) containing seventy (70) percent minimum PVFZ in resin portion of formula. a. Thermo -cured two (2) coat system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer and top coat factory applied over properly pre-treated metal. b. Reverse side coating shall be thermo-cured system consisting of corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer applied over properly pre-treated metal. 2. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection Of In -Place Conditions: 1. Before starting work, verify governing dimensions at building. Inspect for conditions that would prevent installation of specified system. Do not install over improper conditions. 2. Insulate work from fascia as necessary to prevent electrolytic action. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Allow no more than 40 feet (12 meters) between downspouts. Lap joints in downspouts 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum in direction of water flow. B. Furnish and install outlet tubes and gutter ends where required. Furnish and install expansion joints in runs exceeding 50 feet (15 meters) and in runs that are restrained at both ends. Lap other joints in gutter one inch (25 mm) minimum, apply sealant in lap, and stainless steel rivet one inch (25 mm) on center maximum. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. At completion of this work, block downspouts and flood gutters. 2. Notify Architect two (2) working days before testing. 3. Repair leaks and adjust for proper drainage. 3.4 CLEANING A. Leave metals clean and free of defects, stains, and damaged finish. END OF SECTION Manufactured Gutters And Downspouts - 2 - 0771231 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants not specified to be furnished and installed under other Sections. 2. Quality of sealants to be used on Project not specified elsewhere, including submittal, material, and installation requirements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Furnishing and installing of sealants is specified in Sections specifying work to receive new sealants. C. Products Furnished But not Installed Under This Section: 1. Interior Ceramic Tile Joint Sealants: D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 3013: 'Ceramic Tiling'. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 'Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants'. 2. ASM International: a. 'Adhesives and Sealants', Volume 3, ASM International Handbook Committee, (May 1999). b. Committee C24 on Building Seals and Sealants for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant specifying and application. c. Committee E6 on Building Performance for various Specifications, Guides, Test Methods, and Practices related to sealant use with air barriers, vapor retarders, and exterior enclosure systems and materials. 3. The Adhesive and Sealing Council, Inc. (ASC) / Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (SWR Institute): a. 'Sealants: The Professional's Guide'. b. 'Joint Sealants, Whole Building Design Guide'. B. Definitions: 1. Adhere: To cause two surfaces to be held together by adhesion. 2. Adhesive: An adhesive, as defined by The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), is 'a substance capable of holding materials together by surface attachment'. 3. Caulk: Caulks have variety of definitions but are generally recognized as materials used in applications where only minor elastomeric properties are needed. 4. Elastomer: Rubbery material which returns to approximately its original dimensions in short time after relatively large amount of deformation. 5. Flow: Movement of adhesive during bonding process before adhesive is set. 6. Joint: Location at which two substrates are held together with layer of adhesive. 7. Primer: Coating applied to surface, prior to application of an adhesive, to improve performance of the bond. 8. Sealant. Sealants are generally used in applications where elastic properties are needed while adhesives are generally used in applications where bonding strength and rigidity are needed. With technology advancements both sealants and adhesives can be used interchangeably depending on applications performance requirements. lastomeric Joint Sealants - 1 - 079213 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,E 9. Sealant Types and Classifications: a. ASTM Specifications: 1) Type: a) Type S: Single -component sealant. b) Type M: Multi-component sealant. 2) Grade: a) Grade P: Pourable or self -leveling sealant used for horizontal traffic joints. b) Grade NS: Non -sag or gunnable sealant used for vertical and non -traffic joints. 3) Classes: Represent movement capability in percent of joint width. a) Class 100/50: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic movement shall withstand of at least 100 percent increase and decrease of at leas 50 percent of joint width as measured at time of application. I b) Class 50: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 50 percent of joint width as measured at time of application. p c) Class 25: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion or cohesion under cyclic i movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 25 percent of joint width as measured at time of application. i d) Class 12: Sealant that, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement shall withstand increase and decrease of at least 12 percent of joint width as measured at time of application. 4) Use: a) T (Traffic): Sealant designed for use in joints in pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas such as walkways, plazas, decks and parking garages. b) NT (Non -Traffic): Sealant designed for use in joints in non -traffic areas. c) I (Immersion): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested by immersion (Immersion rated sealant applications require primer). d) M (Mortar): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on mortar specimens. e) G (Glass): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on glass specimens. f) A (Aluminum): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on aluminum specimens. g) O (Other): Sealant that meets bond requirements when tested on substrates other than standard substrates, being glass, aluminum, mortar. b. Federal Specifications: 1) Type: a) Type I: Self -leveling, pour grade. (1) Compound which has sufficient flow to give smooth level surface when applied in horizontal joint at 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). b) Type II: Nan -sag, gun grade (1) Compound which permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging (slumping) at temperatures 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and 122 deg. F (50 deg. Q. c) Type NS: Non -sag, gun grade. (1) Non -sag shall be a compound which permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging (slumping) at temperatures between -20 deg F and 122 deg. F (- 29 and 50 deg. C). 2) Class: a) Class A: Compounds resistant to 50 percent total joint movement (includes Type I and Type 11). (1) Capable of resisting compression -extension cycling of plus and minus 25 percent of nominal half inch width. b) Class B: Compounds resistant to 25 percent total joint movement (includes Type I and Type 11). (1) Capable of resisting compression -extension cycling of plus and minusl2 1/2 percent of nominal half inch width. 10. Shelf Life: Period of time, usually beginning with date of manufacture, during which stored adhesive will remain effective or useful. Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 2 - 079213 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 11. Silicone: Any member of family of polymeric products whose molecular backbone is made up of alternating silicon and oxygen atoms and which has pendant hydrocarbon groups attached to silicon atoms. Used primarily as a sealant. Offers excellent resistance to water and large variations in temperature (minus 100 deg F to + 600 deg F) (minus 73.3 deg C to + 316 deg C). 12. Stability: Ability of material to remain unchanged. 13. Storage Life: Period of time during which packaged adhesive can be stored under specified temperature conditions and remain suitable for use. 14. Substrate: Material upon surface of which an adhesive -containing substance is spread for any purpose, such as bonding or coating. 15. Surface Preparation: Physical and /or chemical preparation of substrate to render it suitable for adhesive joining. Same as substrate preparation or pre -bond preparation. 16. Toxicity: Material shall have no adverse effect on health of personnel when used for its intended purpose. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C639-01(2011), 'Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of Elastomeric Sealants'. b. ASTM C661-06(201 1), 'Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer'. c. ASTM C679 -03(2009)e1, 'Standard Test Method for Tack -Free Time of Elastomeric Sealants'. d. ASTM C719-93(2010), 'Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle)'. e. ASTM C794-10, 'Standard Test Method for Adhesion -in -Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants'. I. ASTM C920-11, 'Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants'. g. ASTM C1135-00(2011), 'Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Structural Sealants'. h. ASTM C1184-05, 'Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants'. i. ASTM C1193-09, 'Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants'. j. ASTM C1248-08, 'Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants'. k. ASTM C1330-02(2007), 'Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants'. I. ASTM C1481-11 'Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants with Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems (EIFS)'. m. ASTM D412-06ae2, 'Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension'. n. ASTM D2202-00(2010), 'Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants'. o. ASTM D2240-05(2010), 'Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness'. 2. Federal Specifications: a. Federal Specification TT -S -001543A (CON-NBS), 'Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Calking, Sealing & Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)' (9 Jun 1971). b. TT -S -00230C (CON-NBS), 'Sealing compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Calking, Sealing, And Glazing In Buildings And Other Structures.' (2 Feb 1970). 3. Government Services Administration (GSA), Commercial Item Descriptions (CID): a. GSA CID A -A -272A, 'Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)'. b. GSA CID A -A-1556, 'Sealing Compound Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)'. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling: 1. Schedule work so waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes are installed after sealants, unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. 2. Ensure sealants are cured before covering with other materials. :lastomeric Joint Sealants - 3 - 079213 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, F 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. b. Manufacturer's literature for each Product. c. Schedule showing joints requiring sealants. Show also backing and primer to be used. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1) Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2) Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture. 2. Manufacturers' Instructions: a. Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each Product. b. Manufacturer's installation for completing sealant intersections when different materials are joined. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. 2. Applicator Qualifications: a. Company specializing in performing work of this section. b. Provide if requested, reference of projects with minimum three (3) years documented experience, minimum three (3) successfully completed projects of similar scope and complexity, and approved by manufacturer. c. Designate one (1) individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation. B. Preconstruction Testing: 1. Pre -construction testing is not required when sealant manufacturer can furnish data acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for materials matching those of the Work. C. Mockups: 1. Provide mockups including sealant and joint accessories to illustrate installation quality and color if requested by Architect or Project Manager. a. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use. 2. Inspect for damage or deteriorated materials. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Handle, store, and apply materials in compliance with applicable regulations and material safety data sheets (MSDS). 2. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage. 3. Store in a cool dry location, but never under 40 deg F (4 deg C) or subjected to sustained temperatures exceeding 90 deg F (32 deg C) or as per Manufacturer's written recommendations. 4. Do use sealants that have exceeded shelf life of product. Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 4 - 079213 D74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 .7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not install sealant during inclement weather or when such conditions are expected. Allow wet surfaces to dry. 2. Follow Manufacturer's temperature recommendations for installing sealants. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Signed warranties against adhesive and cohesive failure of sealant and against infiltration of water and air through sealed joint for period of three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. a. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials. b. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. ART 2 -PRODUCTS SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Dow Corning Corp., Midland, MI www.dowcorning.com. b. Franklin International, Inc. Columbus, OH www.titebond.com. c. GE Sealants & Adhesives (see Momentive Performance Materials Inc.). d. Laticrete International Inc., Bethany, CT www.laticrete.com. e. Momentive Performance Materials Inc. (formally GE Sealants & Adhesives), Huntersville, NC www.siliconeforbuilding.com. I. Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com. g. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com or Sika Canada Inc, Pointe Claire, QC www.sika.ca. h. Tremco, Beachwood, OH www.tremcosealants.com or Tremco Ltd, Toronto, ON (800) 363- 3213. B. Materials: 1. Design Criteria: a. Compliance: Meet or exceed requirements of these standards: 1) ASTM C920: Elastomeric joint sealant performance standard. 2) ASTM C639 or ASTM D2202: Flow (sag or slump). 3) ASTM C661 or ASTM D2240: Durometer hardness (shore A). 4) ASTM C679 or ASTM C794: Tack free time. 5) ASTM C719: Joint movement capability. 6) ASTM C1135 or ASTM D412: Tensile adhesion strength. 7) ASTM C1184: Structural silicone sealants. 8) ASTM C1248: Staining. 9) Federal Specification TT -S-001 543A. 10) Federal Specification TT -S -00230C. 11) GSA CID A -A -272A. 12) GSA CID A -A-1556. b. Comply with Manufacturer's ambient condition requirements. c. Sealants must meet Manufacturer's shelf -life requirements. d. Sealants must adhere to and be compatible with specified substrates. e. Sealants shall be stable when exposed to UV, joint movements, and particular environment prevailing at project location. I. Primers (Concrete, stone, masonry, and other nonporous surfaces typically do not require a primer. Aluminum and other nonporous surfaces except glass require use of a primer. astomeric Joint Sealants - 5 - 079213 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,t Installer Option to use Adhesion Test to determine if primer is required or use primer called out in related sections): 1) Adhesion Test: a) Apply silicone sealant to small area and perform adhesion test to determine if primer is required to achieve adequate adhesion. If necessary, apply primer at rate and in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. See 'Field Quality Control' in Part 3 of this specification for Adhesive Test. 2) If Primer required, shall not stain and shall be compatible with substrates. i 3) Allow primer to dry before applying sealant. 2. Sealants At Exterior Concrete: a. Expansion Joints: 1) Design Criteria: a) Meet following standards for Sealant: (1) ASTM C920: Type S Grade NS, Class 50 Use A, G, M, O. I 2) Weathersealing required at expansion for following areas: a) Between entryway slabs and building foundations. b) Between sidewalks and building foundations. 3) Weathersealing NOT required at expansion joints for following areas: a) Within aprons and where apron abuts building foundation and sidewalks. b) Within mow strips and where mow strip abuts building foundation and sidewalks. c) Within sidewalks. 4) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Dow Corning: (1) Primer: 1200 Prime Coat. (2) Sealant: 790 Silicone Building Sealant. b) GE Sealants & Adhesives: (1) Primer: SS4044 Primer. (2) Sealant: Silpruf SCS 2000 Silicone Sealant. 3. General Interior Sealants: a. General: 1) Inside jambs and heads of exterior door frames. 2) Both sides of interior door frames. 3) Inside perimeters of windows. 4) Miscellaneous gaps between substrates. b. Design Criteria: 1) Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, NT, and Class 25 test requirements. 2) 100 percent silicone sealant. c. Nan-Paintable Sealant (Installer Option A): 1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Dow Corning: Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant. b) Laticrete: Latasil Silicone Sealant. c) Sherwin Williams: White Lightning Silicone Ultra Low Odor Window and Door Sealant. d) Tremco: Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant. e) Franklin International: Titebond 2601 (White) 2611 (Clear) 100% Silicone Sealant. d. Paintable Sealant (Installer Option B): 1) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) GE Sealants & Adhesives: GE Silicone II Paintable Silicone. 4. Sealants For Interior Joints: a. General: 1) Countertops and backsplash to wall. 2) Sinks and lavatories to countertops. 3) Joints between plumbing fixtures and other substrates b. Interior Ceramic Tile Joints are furnished in Section 07 9213 and installed in Section 09 301; 'Ceramic Tiling' including the following: 1) Ceramic tile inside corners. 2) Ceramic tile and paver tile joints. c. Description: 1) One -part acetoxy cure silicone sealant with fungicides to resist mold and mildew. d. Design Criteria: Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 6 - 07 921 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 1) Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, NT, and Class 25 test requirements. 2) 100 percent silicone sealant. e. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. I. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Dow Corning: Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant. 2) Laticrete: Latasil Tile and Stone Silicone Sealant. 3) Momentive: Sanitary SCS1700 Silicone Sealant. 4) Tremco: Tremsil 200 Silicone Sealant. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Bond Breaker Tape: 1. Pressure sensitive tape as by Sealant Manufacturer to suit application. 2. Provide tape to prevent adhesion to joint fillers or joint surfaces at back of joint and allow sealant movement. B. Joint Backing: 1. Comply with ASTM C1330. 2. Flexible closed cell, non -gassing polyurethane or polyolefin rod or bond breaker tape as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for joints being sealed. 3. Oversized 25 to 50 percent larger than joint width. C. Joint Cleaner: 1. Non -corrosive and non -staining type as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. D. Masking Tape: 1. Non -staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and adjacent joint surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive Work. a. Verify each sealant is compatible for use with joint substrates. b. Verify joint surfaces are clean and dry. c. Ensure concrete surfaces are fully cured. 2. Sealants provided shall meet Manufacturer's shelf -life requirements. 3. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate. PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove existing joint sealant materials where specified. a. Clean joint surfaces of residual sealant and other contaminates capable of affecting sealant bond to joint surface using manufacturer's recommended joint preparation methods. b. Repair deteriorated or damaged substrates as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer to provide suitable substrate. Allow patching materials to cure. 2. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, free of dust, oil, grease, dew, or frost. Prepare substrates in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions: a. Porous surfaces: Abrasive -clean followed by blasting with oil -free compressed air. lastomeric Joint Sealants - 7 - 079213 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Nonporous surfaces: Use two -cloth solvent wipe in accordance with ASTM C1193. c. High-pressure water cleaning: Exercise care that water does not enter through failed joints. 3. Field test joints in inconspicuous location. a. Verify joint preparation and primer required to obtain optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrate. b. When test indicates sealant adhesion failure, modify joint preparation primer, or both and retest until joint passes sealant adhesion test. 4. Masking: Apply masking tape as required to protect adjacent surfaces and to ensure straight bead line and facilitate cleaning. B. Joints: 1. Prepare joints in accordance with ASTM C1193. a. Clean joint surfaces of contaminates capable of affecting sealant bond to joint surface using Manufacturer's recommended instructions for joint preparation methods. b. Remove dirt, dust, oils, wax, paints, and contamination capable of affecting primer and sealant bond. c. Clean concrete joint surfaces to remove curing agents and form release agents. C. Protection: 1. Protect elements surrounding the Work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply silicone sealant in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials. 3. Install primer and sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and Manufacturer's instructions. 4. Apply primer where required for sealant adhesion. 5. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation. 6. Do not use silicone sealant as per the following: a. Apply caulking/sealant at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). b. Below -grade applications. c. Brass and copper surfaces. d. Materials bleeding oils, plasticizers, and solvents. e. Structural glazing and adhesive. f. Surfaces to be immersed in water for prolonged time. B. Joint Backing: 1. Install joint backing to maintain sealant joint ratios recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Install without gaps, twisting, stretching, or puncturing backing material. Use gage to ensure uniform depth to achieve correct profile, coverage, and performance. 3. Rod for open joints shall be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid backing. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of sealant bite is no more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) deep. C. Bond Breaker: 1. Install bond breaker. where joint backing is not used or where backing is not feasible. a. Apply bond -breaker tape in shallow joints as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer. D. Sealant: 1. Apply sealant with hand -caulking gun with nozzle of proper size to fit joints. Use sufficient pressure to insure full contact to both sides of joint to full depth of joint. Apply sealants in vertical joints from bottom to top. 2. Fill joint opening to full and proper configuration. 3. Apply in continuous operation. 4. Tool joints immediately after application of sealant if required to achieve full bedding to substrate or to achieve smooth sealant surface. Tool joints in opposite direction from application direction, i.e., in vertical joints, from the top down. Do not 'wet tool' sealants. Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 8 - 079213 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 5. Depth of sealant bite shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) maximum, but never more than one half or less than one fourth joint width. E. Caulk gaps between painted or coated substrates and unfinished or pre -finished substrates. Caulk gaps larger than 3/16 inch (5 mm) between painted or coated substrates. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Provide joint tolerances in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adhesion Test (Installer Option to use adhesion test to determine if primer is required). 1. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193, Method A, Field -Applied Sealant joint Hand -Pull Tab: a. Perform five (5) tests for first 1,000 linear feet (300 meters) of applied silicone sealant and one (1) test for each 1,000 linear feet (300 meters) seal thereafter or perform one (1) test per floor per building elevation minimum. b. For sealants applied between dissimilar materials, test both sides of joints. 2. Sealants failing adhesion test shall be removed, substrates cleaned, sealants re -installed, and re- testing performed. 3. Maintain test log and submit report to Architect indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and remedial actions. CLEANING A. Remove masking tape and excess sealant. B. Clean adjacent materials, which have been soiled, immediately (before setting) as recommended by Manufacturer. C. Waste Management: Dispose of products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. END OF SECTION lastomeric Joint Sealants - 9 - 079213 BLANK PAGE DIVISION 08: OPENINGS 081000 DOORS AND FRAMES 081313 HOLLOW METAL DOORS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ) 3 C44,ti k1!:<: l IAC f c 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 081313 HOLLOW METAL DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hollow metal doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2024: Door installation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Steel Door Institute: a. ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 (R2008), 'Standard Steel Doors and Frames.' 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A568 / A 568M -07a, 'Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled, General Requirements for. b. ASTM A653 / A653M-08, 'Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process.' c. ASTM C1036-06, 'Standard Specification for Flat Glass.' d. ASTM C1048-04, 'Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass—Kind HIS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.' 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. HMMA 810-09, 'Hollow Metal Manual'. b. HMMA 860-09, 'Hollow Metal Door and Frames'. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Suppliers: 1. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories and Section 01 4301 for Qualification Requirements: a. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley Phone (800) 574-4369 FAX 801-484-6817 e-mail russf@absdoors.com. b. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Alan John Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-485- 7647, e-mail alan@beacon-metals.com. B. Manufacturers: 1. Category One Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Any current member of Steel Door Institute. C. Doors: 1. Meet one of following requirements: a. Meet requirements of Steel Door Institute ANSI / SDI A250.8. b. Commercial grade steel meeting requirements of ASTM A568, Class 1. 1) Grade I for interior doors, Grade II for exterior doors. 2) Model 1 Full Flush or Model 2 Seamless designs at Manufacturer's option. 3) Type F, G, or L as required. dollow Metal Doors - 1 - 081313 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' 4) Finish: a) Interior doors primed or galvanized as per ASTM A653. b) Exterior doors galvanized and primed as per ASTM A653. 2. Insulation: Insulate doors at exterior of main building sufficient to provide Ll -value of 0.10 maximum. D. Fabrication: 1. General: a. Mortise and reinforce doors for hinges and locks. b. Reinforce doors for closers and other surface applied hardware. c. Drill and tap on job. d. Seams along vertical edges of door need not be filled. e. Do not extend hinge cut out full width of door unless fill strip is inserted, weld filled, and ground smooth so no seam appears on back face plate. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Verification of Performance: a. Label each door as conforming to above required standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Hollow Metal Doors - 2 - 081313 DIVISION 09: FINISHES 190100 MAINTENANCE OF FINISHES 090193 REFINISHING INTERIOR CLEAR -FINISHED HARDWOOD 190500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FINISHES 090503 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 192000 PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 193000 TILING 093013 CERAMIC TILING 195000 CEILINGS 095116 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 196000 FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 096816 SHEET CARPET/ URETHANE CUSHION, DIRECT GLUE 197000 WALL FINISHES 097226 SISAL WALL COVERINGS 199000 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS 099112 EXTERIOR PAINTED FERROUS METAL 099123 INTERIOR PAINTED GVPSUM BOARD, PLASTER 099124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL 099125 INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD 099324 INTERIOR CLEAR -FINISHED HARDWOOD 099413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS able of Contents - 1 - Document 09 0000 BLANK PAGE i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 0193 REFINISHING INTERIOR CLEAR FINISHED HARDWOOD 3ART1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and refinishing existing interior clear finished hardwood as described in Contract Documents including but not limited to: a. Pews. b. Casework. c. Standing and Running Trim. d. Doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements. )ART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEMS A. Description: 1. Use MPI(r) RIN 6.3E Polyurethane Varnish Finish system. Substitution of lacquer for specified products and systems is not allowed under any circumstances. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 6 or 7. C. Materials: 1. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. 2. Stain: MPI Product 90. 3. Finish Coats: MPI Product 56. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION APPLICATORS A. Acceptable Applicators 1. Brandon's Majestic Interiors, Heber City, UT. a. Contact information: Brandon, (801) 404-1825, e-mail brandon@majesticinteriors.net. 2. Church Interiors Inc., Charlotte, NC www.churchinteriors.com. a. Contact information:. phone (800) 289-7397. 3. Church Specialties Inc., Pleasant Grove, UT: a. Contact information: Nathan Bishop, phone (801) 830-0376, fax (866) 430-0650, e-mail nate@churchspecinc.com. 4. Commercial Furnishings, LLC, Orem, UT www.commercialfurnishingsllc.com. a. Contact information: Aaron, (801) 319-5814, email aaron@commercialfurnishingsllc.com. 5. Harris Restoration & Upholstery Inc, Orem UT www.harrisuphoistery.com. a. Contact Information: email harris.restoration@gmail.com. 'lefinishing Interior Hardwood - 1 - 090193 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5' 6. Mobile Restoration Services, Pleasant Grove, UT www.users.gwest.neU-snj3. 7. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 4300. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Using existing wood element that is not to be re -used, apply finish as specified for existing work. a. Notify Architect immediately with preliminary results of testing. b. Within four calendar days of test, meet with Architect and finish applicator to evaluate test results and performance of specified finish system. If specified system is not satisfactory, revised finish system will be determined and specified. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. Touch-up And Recoat: 1. Sand with fine sandpaper to remove gloss, scratches, and blemishes. 2. Clean surfaces with mild soap and water. Etch with tri -sodium phosphate (TSP). 3. Patch scratches and gouges and stain as necessary to match adjacent wood. 4. Apply two coats of Urethane using professional spray equipment. END OF SECTION Refinishing Interior Hardwood - 2 - 090193 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 0503 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION �ART1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Coordination and scheduling of Owner Furnished Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture Testing of concrete slab as described in Contract Documents. 2. Preparing floor substrate to receive flooring as described in Contract Documents. 3. Remove existing carpet and prepare floor as described in Contract Documents. 4. Remove pews and rostrum seating and return to Owner. 5. Perform building modifications and repairs to accommodate carpet and carpet base as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Pre -Installation conferences held jointly with Section 09 0503 as described in Administrative Requirements on Part 1 of this specification section. 2. Section 01 0000: 'General Requirements': a. Section 01 1200: Multiple contracts. b. Section 01 3100: 'Project Management and Coordination' for pre -installation conference. c. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. d. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. e. Section 01 4523: 'Testing and Inspecting Services' for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. I. Section 01 7800: 'Closeout Submittals'. 3. Section 03 3111: Installation tolerances for concrete slabs. 4. Section 09 6813: Tile Carpeting. 5. Section 09 6816: Sheet Carpeting. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 302.2R-06, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture -Sensitive Flooring Materials (August 15, 2006). 2. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections. Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15`h St., NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org). 3. International Code Council (IBC): a. IBC Chapter 17, 'Structural Tests and Special Inspections'. B. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented. Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration parameters according to their scopes of accreditation. 2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to. 3. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. =looring Substrate Preparation - 1 - 090503 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 4. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards: a. Inspection: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Inspection: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. c. Inspection -Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed. d. Inspection -Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed and at completion of the Work. 5. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 6. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 7. Owner's Representative: Owner's Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. 8. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. 9. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 10. Relative Humidity (RH) Testing: Testing of concrete slabs is defined as ratio of actual amount of water vapor present in volume of air at given temperature to maximum amount that air could hold at that temperature, expressed as percentage. a. Relative Humidity test method covers quantitative determination of percent relative humidity in concrete slabs for field or laboratory tests. b. Moisture test results indicate moisture condition of slab only at time of test. 11. Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Owner. 12. Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 13. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 14. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 15. Special Inspection: See Inspection. 16. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for project. 17. Special Test: See Test. 18. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. a. Test: Not required by code provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. b. Special Test: Required by code provisions and by Contract Documents. 19. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 20. Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship. 21. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E329-11 a: 'Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing'. b. ASTM E543-09, 'Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing'. c. ASTM E1212-09, 'Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive Testing Agencies'. Flooring Substrate Preparation - 2 - 090503 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 d. ASTM F710-11, 'Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring'. e. ASTM F2170-11, 'Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes'. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference held jointly for all related Division 09 6000 'Flooring' used in Project. 2. Schedule conference after substrate preparation and ONE (1) week minimum before installation of flooring system. (If more than one flooring system is included on project, hold conference at same time if schedule permits). 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review condition of floor with regard to compliance with concrete installation tolerances and other work necessary to prepare floors for installation of flooring. b. Review Testing Agency testing report of Concrete Moisture of concrete slab (Flooring Installer's option if concrete moisture tests of concrete slab exceeds Ambient Conditions requirements for flooring. Owner's Representative must approve any additional costs): 1) NOTE: If (RH) exceeds 90% as per ASTM F2170 and alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9, contact Church Headquarters at carpet@ldschurch.org. Provide project information including test results and contact information. 2) Apply Manufacturer's approved "Concrete Sealer" to concrete surface: a) Retest for concrete moisture. b) Apply flooring only after acceptable test results are obtained. c. Review Testing Agency testing report of Alkalinity of concrete slab (Flooring Installer's option if alkalinity tests of concrete slab exceeds Ambient Conditions requirements for flooring. Owner's Representative must approve any additional costs): 1) Apply Manufacturer's approved solution to concrete surface. a) Retest for alkalinity. b) Apply flooring only after acceptable test results are obtained. 4. Review condition of floor with regard to compliance with concrete installation tolerances and other work necessary to prepare floors for installation of flooring. 5. Review additional agenda items all related flooring sections. B. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect ONE (1) week minimum before pre -installation conference to allow testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab for each flooring system.. SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing Reports of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture testing. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before installation of flooring: a. See Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary'. -looring Substrate Preparation - 3 - 090503 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, E 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Provide storage space and protection for flooring and installation accessories if materials are delivered before start of flooring installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Coordinate with each flooring system specification section for ambient conditions required for each floor system. B. Existing Conditions: 1. If asbestos containing materials are suspected or discovered upon removing carpet, stop work and report to Architect before proceeding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Furniture: a. Examine pews, rostrum seating, and pianos to identify condition and anchorage system of each. Make written record of existing mars and damage to each piece to be removed and stored. If required by Architect, take photographs of each piece. b. Note positions of anchors to insure replacement of seating in original positions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furniture Removal: 1. Remove existing pews, rostrum seating, and pianos and store in location as directed by Owner. 2. Protect stored furniture items from dust, dirt, and damage related to other installation activities. B. Flooring Preparation: 1. Prepare floor substrate in accordance with Carpet And Rug Institute (CRI) best practices to receive carpet installation and to provide installation that meets Carpet Manufacturer's warranty requirements: a. Concrete floor slab patching: 1) Cracks, chips and joints must be properly patched or repaired. b. Concrete surface cured, clean, dry, and free of foreign substances that will compromise carpet and/or other flooring installations. 1) Removal of curing compounds. 2) Remove paint, sealer, grease, oil, silicone sealants, and other materials incompatible with flooring adhesives. 3) Removal of overspray from painted walls (essential so glue will stick). 2. Moisture vapor emission tests and alkalinity test of concrete slab has been preformed. 3. Vacuum and damp mop floor areas to receive flooring before flooring installation. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Flooring Substrate Preparation - 4 - 090503 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 Concrete Moisture and Alkalinity: a. Testing Agency will test interior concrete slabs before installation of floor coverings as directed by Architect and will include following: 1) Interior concrete slab areas to be tested: a) Section 09 6813 'Tile Carpeting'. b) Section 09 6816'Sheet Carpeting'. 2) Ambient Conditions: Testing conditions inside building shall be brought to same ambient temperature and relative humidity levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 3) Tests required of interior concrete slabs on grade: a) Existing Construction: (1) Testing for concrete moisture should be evaluated from project to project if testing will be required, number of tests, size of project, and where floor coverings will be installed. (2) Carpet areas replacement only. Testing recommended because of problems with new low VOC adhesives. Individual Sections in Division 09 indicate if Owner will provide testing and inspection of the Work of that Section or Flooring Installer. (3) Athletic wood flooring replacement only. Three (3) tests minimum in wood athletic flooring area. Individual Sections in Division 09 indicate if Owner will provide testing and inspection of the Work of that Section or Flooring Installer. b. Approved concrete moisture test. See Section 01 6200: 1) Relative Humidity (RH): In -Situ Testing of Concrete Relative Humidity: a) Design Criteria: (1) Verify relative humidity measuring instrument conforms to section 6 of ASTM F2170 (NIST -traceable calibration certificate is on file). (2) Check calibration of measuring instrument per section 8 of ASTM F2170. (3) Building ambient conditions are met before testing. (4) Drill and prepare test holes per section 10.3 of ASTM F2170. (Drill holes equal to 40% of slab's thickness for slabs on grade and 20% of slab's thickness for suspended slabs). (5) Verify seventy two (72) hour moisture equilibrium period for each test hole per section 10.3.4 of ASTM F2170. (6) Perform relative humidity measurements per section 10.5 of ASTM F2170. Verify meter reading does not drift more than 1 % relative humidity over a five (5) minute period. Re -usable probes should equilibrate at least one (1) hour in each test hole. b) Approved concrete moisture testing meter. See Section 01 6200: (1) Wag neer Rapid RH 4.0 Easy Reader with Touch -n -Sense Technology with Smart Sensors. c. Alkalinity Testing (pH): 1) Test with pH meter or pH paper. 2) Testing shall be taken at every location and at each time concrete moisture test is performed as per ASTM F710. 3) Clean floor to remove all oil, dirt, dust and any floor coating or sealer. If surface has primer, sealer or old adhesive that might affect test procedure, it must be removed by lightly grinding, sanding or bead blasting. Do not remove more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) of concrete. Removal of more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) may give high pH reading. Failure to remove laitance will produce low, inaccurate pH reading. 4) Testing to be performed concurrently with concrete moisture testing. d. Tests and Inspection Reports as covered in 'Testing Agency Services and Responsibilities' applies, but is not limited to following : 1) Record and report results per section 11 of ASTM F2170. 2) Test Report will include following: a) Identify Building slab location of each test. b) Including type of flooring system to be installed at each test location. c) Test results of each test given. 3) Test Report shall be given to Architect, Contractor, Owner's Representative and Flooring Installer(s) before Pre -Installation Conference as described in Administration Requirements of each floor system Section and included in closing submittals. Flooring Substrate Preparation - 5 - 090503 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,B END OF SECTION Flooring Substrate Preparation - 6 - 090503 1074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install gypsum board as described in Contract Documents, except behind ceramic tile. 2. Furnish and install acoustical sealants as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9219: Quality of acoustical sealants. 2. Section 09 3013: Installation of backerboard joint reinforcing. 3. Section 09 9413: Textured finishing. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Accessories: Metal or plastic beads, trim, or moulding used to protect or conceal corners, edges, or abutments of the gypsum board construction. 2. Drywall Primer: Paint material specifically formulated to fill the pores and equalize the suction difference between gypsum board surface paper and the compound used on finished joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories and over skim coatings. 3. Skim Coat: Either a thin coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, over the entire surface. 4. Texturing: Regular or irregular patterns typically produced by applying a mixture of joint compound and water, or proprietary texture materials including latex base texture paint, to a gypsum board surface previously coated with drywall primer. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM C1 1-10a, 'Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems'. b. ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007), 'Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board'. c. ASTM C840-11, 'Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board'. d. ASTM C1002-07, 'Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs'. e. ASTM C1047 -10a, 'Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base'. I. ASTM C1178/C1178M-11, 'Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel'. g. ASTM C1396/C1396M-11, 'Standard Specification for Gypsum Board'. h. ASTM E84-12, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials'. i. ASTM E119-12, 'Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials'. 2. Gypsum Association: a. GA-214-10,'Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish'. b. GA-216-10:'Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products'. I ypsum Board 1 - 092900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, c. GA-600-09,'Fire Reference Design Manual'. d. GA -801-07, 'Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products: A Guide for Distributors, Retailers, and Contractors'. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a. UL 263: 'Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials' (2011). b. UL 723: 'Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; (2010). 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre -installation conference immediately before installation of gypsum wallboard. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Finish requirements necessary for installation of finish materials over gypsum wallboard, location and installation of ceramic tile backerboard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Fire test results or assembly diagrams and numbers confirming products used will provide required fire ratings with installation configurations used. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: 1. Following recommendations of GA -801 Guide for Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products unless local, state or federal laws or agency rules differing from the recommendations shall take precedence. B. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name, applicable standard designation, and Manufacturer's name. C. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store material under roof and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum board flat to j prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Comply with ASTM C840 or GA -216 requirements, whichever are more stringent: a. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 1) Temperature shall be 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C) maximum day and night during entire joint operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2) Provide ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. 3) Avoid hot air drafts that will cause too rapid drying. b. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. Gypsum Board - 2 - 092900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 2 -PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Gypsum, Dallas, TX www.americangypsum.com. b. CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc; Tampa, FL www.certainteed.com. c. Georgia Pacific, Atlanta, GA www.gp.com. d. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. e. Pabco Gypsum, Newark, CA www.pabcogypsum.com. f. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. B. Materials: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: a. General: 1) Size: a) Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2) Class Two Quality Standard: a) Core: Fire-resistant rated gypsum core. b) Complies with Type X requirements of ASTM C1396/C1396M (Section 5). c) Surface paper: Face paper suitable for painting. d) Long edges: Tapered edge. e) Overall thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer: a. Product meeting requirements of ASTM C1178/C1178M. b. Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). c. Square edges. d. Category Four Approved Manufacturer. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) DensShield Fireguard Type X by Georgia Pacific. 2) GlasRoc Tilebacker Type X by CertainTeed. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, OH www.kineticsnolse.com. b. Magnum Products, Lenaxa, KS www.levelcoat.com. c. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. d. Soundproofing Co, San Marcos, CA www.soundproofing.org. e. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. I. Westpac Materials Inc, Orange, CA www.westpacmaterials.com. g. Wm. Zinsser & Co, Somerset, NJ www.zinsser.com. 2. Gypsum Board Mounting Accessories: a. Class Two Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200 for definitions: 1) Furring Channels: a) Walls: Galvanized DWFC-25. b) Ceilings: Galvanized DWFC-20. 2) Accessories as required by Manufacturer's fire tests to provide necessary fire ratings. 3. Corner And Edge Trim: a. Metal, paper -faced metal, paper -faced plastic, or solid vinyl meeting requirements of ASTM C1047. Surfaces to receive bedding cement treated for maximum bonding. 4. Joint Compound: a. Best grade or type recommended by Board Manufacturer and meeting requirements of ASTM C475/C475M. Gypsum Board - 3 - 092900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Use Taping Compound for first coat to embed tape and accessories. 2) Use Taping Compound or All -Purpose Compound for subsequent coats except final coat. 3) Use Finishing Compound for final coat and for skim coat. 5. Joint Reinforcing: a. Paper reinforcing tape acceptable to Gypsum Board Manufacturer. 6. Fasteners: a. Bugle head screws meeting requirements of ASTM C1002: 1) Gypsum Board: a) Type W: For fastening gypsum board to wood members, of length to penetrate wood framing 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) minimum. 2) Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer: a) Wood Framing: 11 ga (0.1233 in) (3.1318 mm), galvanized with 7/16 inch (11 n head, hot dipped. Screws: Type W or Type S Hi -Lo, bugle head, rust resistant. B. Primer / Surfacer On Surfaces To Receive Texturing: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Sheetrock First Coat by USG. b. Prep Coat by Westpac Materials. c. Level Coat by Magnum Products. d. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. C. Primer On Surfaces To Receive Wallcovering: 1. White, self -sizing, water based, all purpose wallcovering primer. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Shieldz Universal Pre-Wallcovering Primer by Wm. Zinsser and Company. b. Equal as approved by Architect before application. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and verify framing is suitable for installation of gypsum board. 2. Examine gypsum board before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 3. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not install board over unsuitable conditions. 4. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Division 06 for location of backblocking for edges and ends of gypsum board and for blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. 2. Do not install gypsum board until required blocking is in place. B. General: Install and finish as recommended in ASTM C840 or GA -216 unless specified otherwise in this Section. C. Mounting Accessories: 1. Furring Channels: Apply with screws through flanges into each framing member. D. Interior Gypsum Board: 1. General: Gypsum Board - 4 - 092900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Install so trim and reinforcing tape are fully backed by gypsum board. No hollow spaces between pieces of gypsum board over 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide before taping are acceptable. b. Rout out backside of gypsum board to accommodate items that extend beyond face of framing, but do not penetrate face of gypsum board, such as metal door frame mounting brackets, etc. 2. Single Layer Application: a. Apply ceilings first using minimum of two men. b. Use board of length to give minimum number of joints. c. On walls over 108 inches (2 700 mm) high and on ceilings, apply board perpendicular to support. d. Stagger end joints. End and edge joints of board applied on ceilings shall occur over framing members or be back blacked with 2x4 (38 mm by 89 mm) blocking. End joints of board horizontally applied on walls shall occur over framing members. Edge joints of board vertically applied on walls shall occur over framing members. e. Butt edges in moderate contact. Do not force in place. Shim to level. f. Leave facings true with joint, finishing flush. Vertical work shall be plumb and ceiling surfaces level. g. Scribe work closely. Keep joints as far from openings as possible. If joints occur near an opening, apply board so vertical joints are centered over openings. No vertical joints shall occur within 8 inches (200 mm) of external corners or openings. h. Install board tight against support with joints even and true. Tighten loose screws. i. Caulk perimeter joints in sound insulated rooms with specified acoustical sealant. 3. Double Layer Application: a. Apply base layer as specified for single layer application, except edge joints need not occur over framing members or be back blocked. b. Apply face layer with joints staggered in relationship to base and occurring over supports. Use combination of adhesive and screws if required to meet Manufacturer's specifications for fire -rated assembly. Apply screws attaching face layer through base layer into support for specified penetration. 4. Fastening: a. Apply from center of board towards ends and edges. b. Apply screws 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum from ends and edges, one inch (25 mm) maximum from edges, and 1/2 inch (13 mm) maximum from ends. c. Spacing: 1) Ends: Screws not over 7 inches (175 mm) on center at edges where blocking or framing occurs. 2) Wood Framed Walls And Ceilings: Screws 7 inches (175 mm) on center in panel field. 3) Metal Framed Walls: Screws 12 inches (300 mm) on center in panel field. d. Set screw heads 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) below plane of board, but do not break face paper. If face is accidentally broken, apply additional screw 2 inches (50 mm) away. e. Screws on adjacent ends or edges shall be opposite each other. f. Drive screws with shank perpendicular to face of board. 5. Trim: a. Corner Beads: 1) Attach corner beads to outside corners. a) Attach metal corner bead with staples spaced 4 inches (100 mm) on center maximum and flat taped over edges of corner bead. Also, apply screw through edge of corner bead where wood trim will overlay corner bead. b) Set paper -faced trim in solid bed of taping compound. b. Edge Trim: Apply where gypsum board abuts dissimilar material. Hold channel and'L'trim back from exterior window and door frames 1/8 inch (3 mm) to allow for caulking. 6. Finishing: a. General: 1) Tape and finish joints and corners throughout building as specified below to correspond with final finish material to be applied to gypsum board. When sanding, do not raise nap of gypsum board face paper or paper -faced trim. 2) First Coat: Gypsum Board - 5 - 092900 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a) Apply tape over center of joint in complete, uniform bed of specified taping compound and wipe with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound. If metal corner bead is used, apply reinforcing tape over flange of metal corner bead and trim so half of tape width is on flange and half is on gypsum board. b) Completely fill gouges, dents, and fastener dimples. j c) Allow to dry and sand lightly if necessary to eliminate high spots or excessive compound. 3) Second Coat: a)Apply coat of specified joint compound over embedded tape extending 3-112 inches (88 mm) on both sides of joint center. Use finishing compound only if applied coat is intended as final coat. b) Re -coat gouges, dents, and fastener dimples. c) Allow to dry and sand lightly to eliminate high spots or excessive compound. 4) Third Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 6 inches (150 mm) on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with damp sponge. 5) Fourth Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 9 inches (425 mm) on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with damp sponge. a. Finishing Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840, GA - 214 and GA -216: 1) Gypsum Board Surfaces Under Acoustical Tile: a) GA -214 Level 2: 'All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level. 2) Gypsum Board Surfaces to Receive Sisal Wall Covering: a) GA -214 Level 3: 'All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with specified wallcovering primer'. 3) Gypsum Board Surfaces to Receive Vinyl Wall Covering, Acoustic Wall Carpeting, Multi -Color Coating System, and Painted Texturing, and Smooth Gypsum Board Surfaces: a) GA -214 Level 4: 'All and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with specified primer'. E. Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer: 1. Apply glass mat gypsum tile backer to framing. Attach using specified fasteners spaced 6 inches (150 mm) on center on edges and into all framing members. Drive screws flush with surface of board. 2. Shim board to be plumb and flat or level and flat, depending on location. 3. Apply reinforcing only at joints where abutting different materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Gypsum Board - 6 - 092900 1074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. b. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. CLEANING A. Remove from site debris resulting from work of this Section including taping compound spills. END OF SECTION 3ypsum Board - 7 - 092900 BLANK PAGE 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILING 4RT1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install ceramic tile and tile setting materials and accessories as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Installation of backerboard behind ceramic tile, except for joint reinforcing. C. Products Installed But not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Interior Ceramic Tile Joint Sealants: Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: 'Elastomeric Joint Sealants'. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American National Standard Specification (ANSI) for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. 2. International Standards Organization (ISO) 13007, 'Classification for Adhesives and Grout'. 3. Tile Council of North America: a. TCNA Handbook, 'Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2011'. B. Definitions: 1. Crack Isolation: Prevention of transfer of cracks from substrate through tile or stone when substrate is subjected to horizontal movement of cracks. 2. Dry -Set Mortar: Water -retentive hydraulic cement mortar usable with or without sand. When this mortar is used, neither tile nor walls have to be soaked during installation. 3. Epoxy Grout: Mortar system employing epoxy resin and epoxy hardener portions. 4. Grout: Rich or strong cementitious or chemically setting mix used for filling tile joints. 5. ISO 13007 Standards Product Classifications: a. Adhesives: Types Classes Special Characteristics C = Cementitious 1 = Normal F = Fast -Setting (Thin -Set Mortars) 2 = Improved T = Slip -Resistant E = Extended Open Time S1 = Deformable S2 = Highly Deformable P1 = Plywood Adhesion P2 = Improved Plywood Adhesion D = Dispersion 1 = Normal F = Fast -Setting (Mastics) 2 = Improved T = Slip -Resistant E = Extended Open Time R = Reaction Resin 1 = Normal T = Slip -Resistant (Epoxies) 2 = Improved eramic Tiling - 1 - 093013 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1) Cementitious Adhesive (C): Mixture of hydraulic binding agents (e.g. portland cement) aggregates, and organic additives (e.g. latex polymers, moisture retention additive, etc...) to be mixed with water or latex admix before mixing. 2) Dispersion Adhesive (D): Ready -to -use mixture of organic binding agents in the form c an aqueous polymer dispersion, organic additives and mineral fillers - mastic type products. i 3) Reaction Resin Adhesive (R): Single or multi-component mixture of synthetic resin, mineral fillers and organic additives in which curing occurs by chemical reaction — epoxy or urethane based products. 4) Class 1 (1): Adhesive has passed minimum pass level tests that are mandatory for tha adhesive type. 5) Class 2 (2): Adhesive has passed same tests as Class 1 and/or other applicable tests, but at higher pass levels. 6) Fast -Setting (F): Adhesive with accelerated cure time that must achieve minimum strength requirements of fast setting adhesive. This designation does not apply to reaction resin adhesives (R). 7) Slip -Resistance (T): Downward movement of a tile applied to combed adhesive layer on vertical surface must be 5 0.5mm for a C or D adhesive, ands 5mm for a type R adhesive. 8) Extended Open Time (E): Maximum time interval after application at which tiles can bei embedded in applied adhesive and meet tensile adhesion strength requirement must b z 30 minutes. This designation does not apply to reaction resin adhesives (R). 9) Deformability (S): Capacity of hardened adhesive to be deformed by stresses between tile and substrate without damage to installed surface — to pass S1 requirements an adhesive must be able to deform z 2.5mm but < 5mm; to pass S2 requirements an adhesive must be able to deform z 5mm. This designation does not apply to reaction resin adhesives (R). 10) Exterior Glue Plywood (P): Adhesive with ability to bond tile or stone to exterior glue plywood substrates (interior only). This designation does not apply to reaction resin adhesives (R) or dispersion adhesives (D). b. Grouts: Types Classes Special Characteristics CG = Cementitious Grout 1 = Normal F = Fast -Setting 2 = Improved A = High Abrasion Resistance W = Reduced Water Absorption RG = Reaction Resin Grouts 1 = Normal Higher performance characteris- tics than improved Cementitious 2 = Improved routs 1) Cementitious Grout (CG): Mixture of hydraulic binding agents (e.g. portland cement), aggregates, inorganic and organic additives (e.g. latex polymers, moisture retention additive, etc...). 2) Reaction Resin Grout (RG): Single or multi-component mixture of synthetic resin, mineral fillers and organic additives in which curing occurs by chemical reaction — epoxy or urethane based products. 3) Class 1 (1): Grout has passed minimum pass level tests that are mandatory for cementitious grouts. 4) Class 2 (2): Cementitious grout has passed same tests as Class 1 and/or other applicable tests, but at higher pass levels. 5) Fast -Setting (F): Grout with accelerated cure time that must achieve minimum compressive strength requirements under normal conditions within twenty four (24) hours. This designation applies only to cementitious grouts (CG). 6) High Abrasion Resistance (A): Capability of grout to resist wear. This designation applies only to cementitious grouts (CG). 7) Reduced Water Absorption (W): Grout has lower water absorption rate than standard cementitious grout. This designation applies only to cementitious grouts (CG). Ceramic Tiling - 2 - 093013 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 6. Latex/Polymer Modified Portland Cement Mortar: Latex/Polymer modified portland cement mortar is a mixture of portland cement, sand, and special latex/polymer additive that is used as a bond coat for setting tile. 7. Mastic: Tile adhesive. 8. Mortar Bed: Layer of mortar on which tile is set. Final coat of mortar on wall, floor or ceiling is called a mortar bed. 9. Movement Joints: a. Construction Joint: Surface where two successive placements of concrete meet, across which it may be desirable to achieve bond, and through which reinforcement may be continuous. b. Contraction Joint: Formed, sawed or tooled groove in concrete structure to create C weakened plane and regulate location of cracking resulting from dimensional change of different parts of structure. See also Isolation Joint. c. Control joint: See contraction joint. f d. Expansion Joint: (1) Separation provided between adjoining parts of structure to allow movement where expansion is likely to exceed contraction; (2) Isolation joint intended to allow independent movement between adjoining parts e. Isolation Joint: Separation between adjoining parts of concrete structure, usually vertical plane, at designated location such as to interfere least with performance of structure, yet such as to allow relative movement in three directions and avoid formation of cracks elsewhere in concrete and through which all or part of bonded reinforcement is interrupted. 10. Mud: Slang term for mortar. E 11. Non -vitreous tile: Tile with water absorption of more than 7.0 percent. 12. Pavers: Unglazed porcelain or natural clay tile formed by dust -pressed method and similar to j ceramic mosaics in composition and physical properties but relatively thicker with 6 in.- or more of facial area. (ASTM C 242). 13. Sanded Cement Grout: Factory prepared mixture of cement, graded sand, and other ingredients to produce water-resistant, dense, uniformly colored material. Used for joints of 1/8 inch (3 mm) width or greater. 14. Setting Bed: See Mortar Bed. 15. Tile: ! a. Ceramic Tile: Ceramic surfacing unit, usually relatively thin in relation to facial area, made from clay or mixture of clay; and other ceramic material, called body of the tile, having either I 'glazed' or 'unglazed'face, and fired above red heat to temperature sufficiently high to produce specific physical properties and characteristics. b. Paver Tile: Unglazed porcelain or natural clay tile formed by dust -pressed method and similar to ceramic mosaics in composition and physical properties but relatively thicker j (usually 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick) with 6 inch (150 mm) or more of facial area. (ASTM C242). c. Porcelain Tile: Ceramic mosaic tile or paver that is generally made by dust -pressed method, of composition resulting in tile that is dense, fine-grained, and smooth with sharply formed face, usually impervious. (ASTM C242). d. Wall Tile: Glazed tile with body that is suitable for interior use and which is usually nonvitreous and is not required nor expected to withstand excessive impact. 16. Thin -set: Term used to describe bonding of tile with suitable materials applied approximately 1/8 inch thick. 17. Urethane: Elastomeric polymer with excellent chemical and water resistance. 18. Unsanded Cement Grout: Factory prepared mixture of cement and additives that provide water retentivity. Used for joints of 1/8 inch (3 mm) or less. 19. Vapor Retarder: Waterproof membrane placed under concrete floor slabs that are placed on grade. 20. Vitreous Tile: Ceramic tile with low porosity, used indoors or outdoors, in wet or dry locations. 21. Waterproof Membrane: Membrane to provide positive waterproof floor over substrate, which is to receive tile installation using a wire reinforced mortar bed. C. Reference Standard: 1. American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1, 'American National Standards Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile', Version 2011.1 (compilation of standards): 1) Installation Standards: eramic Tiling - 3 - 093013 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, $ a) A108.01-2010, 'General Requirements: Subsurfaces and Preparation by Other Trades'. b) A108.02-2010, 'General Requirements: Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship'. c) A108.05-2010, 'Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar of Latex -Portland Cement Mortar'. d) A108.6-2005/2010, 'Installation of Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy'. e) A108.10-2010, 'Installation of Grout in Tilework'. f) At 08.17-2010, 'Installation of Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone'. 2) Material Specifications: a) At 18.1-2010, 'Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar'. b) A118.3-2009. 'Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive'. c) A118.4-2010, 'Latex Portland Cement Mortar'. d) A118.6-2010, 'Cement Grouts for Tile Installation'. e) At 18.7-2010, 'High -Performance Polymer Modified Latex/Portland Cement Grout: for Tile Installation'. f) At 18.10-2008, 'Load Bearing, Banded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installations'. g) At 18.12-2008, 'Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin -set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installations'. b. ANSI At 37.1-2008, 'Ceramic Tile'. 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM A185/A185M-07, 'Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain. for Concrete'. b. ASTM C144-11, 'Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar'. c. ASTM C150/C150M-11,'Standard Specification for Portland Cement'. d. ASTM C206-03(2009), 'Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime'. e. ASTM C207-06(201 1), 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes'. f. ASTM C242-01(2007), 'Standard Terminology of Ceramic Whitewares and Related Products'. g. ASTM C373-88(2006), 'Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products'. h. ASTM C482-02(2009), 'Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement Paste'. i. ASTM C501-84(2009), 'Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser'. j. ASTM C648-04(2009), 'Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile'. k. ASTM C847 -10a, 'Standard Specification for Metal Lath'. I. ASTM C1028 -07e1, 'Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull -Meter Method'. 3. International Organization for Standardization: a. ISO 13007-1:2010, ' Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 1: Terms, definitions and specifications for adhesives'. b. ISO 13007-2:2010,' Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 2: Test methods for adhesives'. c. ISO 13007-3:2010, 'Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 3: Terms, definitions and specifications for grouts'. d. ISO 13007-4:2010, 'Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives - Part 4: Test methods for grouts'. 4. Tile Council of North America: a. TCNA F111-11, 'On -Ground or Above -Ground Concrete, Unbonded Mortar Bed, Ceramic Tile'. b. TCNA F113-11, 'On -Ground or Above Ground Concrete, Ceramic Tile (Direct Bond w/Optional Membrane)'. c. TCNA F115-11, 'On -Ground Concrete, Ceramic Tile, Epoxy or Furan Grout'. d. TCNA F125a-11 'On Ground or Above Ground Concrete'- Crack Isolation Membrane - Ceramic Tile'. Ceramic Tiling - 4 - 09 3013, D74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 e. TCNA F141-1 1, 'Joists 16 inch o.c./Plywood Subfloor, Unbonded Mortar Bed, Ceramic Tile'. I. TCNA F144-1 1, 'Joists 16 inch o.c./Plywood, Subfloor, Cement or Giber -Cement, Backer Board, Ceramic Tile'. g. TCNA W244c-11, 'Wood or Metal Studs , Cement Backer Board, Ceramic Tile'. h. TCNA W245-1 1, 'Wood or Metal Studs, Coated Glass Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backer Board, Ceramic Tile'. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review installation scheduling, coordination with related work, and placement of tile. b. Review Manufacturer's installation requirements, submittals, and Installers requirements to assure issuance of Manufacturer's system warranty. c. Review surface preparation. d. Review water -proofing and crack isolation membrane requirements. e. Review tile base installation requirements. f. Review floor tile grout thickness requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. 24 inch (600 mm) square sample on specified tile backer showing all types of tile, grout, and colors specified in this Section. 1/2 of sample board shall show floor tile and 1/2 shall show wall tile. b. One sample of each type of base tile and trim piece to be used on Project. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Master grade certificate. 1) Conform to ANSI At 37.1. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Provide instructions for installation of tile -setting materials. 3. Qualification Statement. See Section 01 4301 for qualifications: a. Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Cleaning and maintenance instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's cut sheets of materials used in installed system. b) Tile color and pattern selections. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Of Materials: 1. Provide materials obtained from one (1) source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials for Manufacture's system warranty. B. Qualifications: eramic Tiling - 5 - 093013 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,1 Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Minimum three (3) years experience installing specified tile installations. b. Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations of comparable quality, scope, similar size, and complexity in past two (2) years before bidding. c. Upon request, submit documentation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Deliver and store packaged materials in their original unopened containers with labels intact until time of use. 2. Store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage or contamination by water, freezing, or foreign matter. 3. Keep grade seals intact and cartons dry until tile are used. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not apply tile setting materials to surfaces that contain frost. 2. Keep ambient temperatures of area to receive tile work and surface temperatures of substrates al 50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum during preparation of mortar bed, laying of tile, and for seventy two (72) hours after completion of tile work. Use electric heat to prevent discoloration of grout. 3. Temperature of substrate shall be 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) and rising for application of epoxy and furan unless otherwise specifically authorized by Manufacturer. 4. Maintain epoxy at stable temperature between 60 deg F (15.6 deg C)and 90 deg F (32 deg C) during curing period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's twenty five (25) year minimum system warranty on tile -setting materials and grout includes replacement of defective materials and replacement of tile, including labor and materials at original cost at time of installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer's Contact List: a. Custom Building Products, Seal Beach, CA www.custombuildingproducts.com. 1) Contact Information: John Gallup (206) 718.6024 johng@cbpmail.net. b. Dal -Tile Corp., Div. of Mohawk Industries, Dallas, TX www.daltile.com. c. Interceramic Distributed by American Marazzi Tile, Inc., Sunnyvale, TX www.marazzitile.com. d. Laticrete International Inc., Bethany, CT www.laticrete.com. e. Mapei Americas Headquarters, Deerfield Beach, FL www.mapei.com. 1) Contact Information: Bart A. Wilde (801) 467-2060 www.bwilde@mapei.com. f. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc., Anaheim, CA www.merkrete.com. 1) Contact Information: Andy Townes (505) 873-1181 andy.townes@parexusa.com. g. Schulter Systems L.P., Plattsburgh, NY www.schluter.com. B. Category Two National Contract Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Contact following suppliers to procure components of tile assembly: Ceramic Tiling - 6 - 093013 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Daltile And Stone, Salt Lake City, UT: 1) LDS Project Coordinators: a) Russ Green and Larry McCleary, (801) 487-9901, Cell (801) 301 1461, FAX (801) 487-0345 larry.mccleary@daltile.com - www.daltileproducts.com or www.daltilegreenworks.com. b. Marazzi Tile and Stone, Salt Lake City, UT www.saltlakecity@marazzitile.com or www.marazziusa.com: 1) LDS Project Coordinators: a) Mike Kelsch, (801) 467-8453, FAX (801) 467-8469, MKelsch@marazzitile.com. b) Joseph Bennett, (801) 755-4716, FAX (801) 467-8469, JBennett@marazzitile.com. C. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Paver Tile: Standard grade porcelain tile, solid color throughout, graded in accordance with ANSI A137.1. b. Ceramic Tile: 1) Tile shall be standard quality, white or off-white body, square or cushion edge, graded in accordance with ANSI A137.1. 2) Square edge, white body, lug type wall tile. Field wall tile shall have two lugs on each edge to assure uniform joint, approximately 0.040 inch (one mm). 3) External and internal corner pieces shall be standard grade. 2. Capabilities: a. Paver Tile: 1) Water Absorption when tested in accordance with ASTM C373: 0.1 to 0.5 percent. 2) Abrasive Wear Resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM C501: 275 minimum. 3) Breaking Strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C648: 300 lbs minimum. 4) Bond Strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C482: 200 psi minimum. 5) Coefficient of Friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028: 0.6 COF minimum. Description: 1. Paver Tile: a. Tile Sizes: 1) Finished floor with no slope shown on Contract Documents: 12 inches (300 mm) square minimum. 2) Finished floor with slope shown on Contract Documents: 8 inches (200 mm) square. 3) Cove Base: 6 inches by 8 inches (150 mm by 200 mm) with bull -nosed top. b. Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) CD05 Bianco Alpi by Daltile. 2) Dotti Ivory by Interceramic. 2. Ceramic Tile: a. Wall: 1) Walls: 6 inch by 6 inch (150 mm by 150 mm). 2) Ceramic Tile Base: a) 6 inch (150 mm) high, A3601 cove base. b) When base only is installed at painted walls, use one course of cove base and one course of bull -nose wall tile. 3) Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Room Walls: (1) 0135 Almond by Daltile. (2) Canvas 112 by Interceramic. b) Accent Color: (1) 0100 White by Daltile. (2) Bone 110 by Interceramic. E. Materials: 1. Paver Tile: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: 1) Porcealto Graniti by Daltile. ;eramic Tiling - 7 - 093013 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, .i 2) Intertech by Interceramic. 2. Wall Tile: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: 1) Semi -Gloss or Matte by Dal -Tile. 2) IC Brites or Mattes or Bold Tones Series by Interceramic. 3. Mortar Bed: a. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M, Type 1, designation shall appear on bag. b. Hydrated Lime: 1) Meet Requirements of one of following: a) ASTM C206. b) ASTM C207, Type S (designation shall appear on bag). c. Sand: Clean, washed, well -graded, meeting requirements of ASTM C144 with gradation of 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve with not over five (5) percent passing No. 100 sieve. d. Latex Additive; in lieu of all water: 1) Meet warranty requirements. 2) Meet requirements of ANSI At 18.4. 3) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) CUSTOM: Thin -Set Mortar Admix. b) LATICRETE: Latex Additive. c) MAPEI: Planicrete AC. d) MERKRETE: 150 Latex Admixture. 4. Metal Trim: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: j 1) Tile / Carpet Junction: Schluter-RENO-AETK. 5. Joint Sealants: a. Interior Ceramic Tile Joints are furnished in Section 07 9213 and installed in Section 09 301 a 'Ceramic Tiling' including the following: 1) Ceramic tile inside corners. 2) Ceramic tile and paver tile joints. 6. Backer Board Joint Reinforcing: 2 inch (50 mm) wide glass fiber mesh tape. 7. Tile Setting Products: a. Use only products of same Manufacturer to validate warranty, unless otherwise acceptable to Ceramic Tile Supplier. b. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar For Floors: 1) Design Criteria: a) Meet Requirements of ANSI At 18.4 or ANSI At 18.6 and ISO 13007 C2ES1 P2 for' manufactured mortar. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 62 00 for definitions of Categories: a) CUSTOM: Megalite Thinset or FlexBond Fortified Thin -Set Mortar. b) LATICRETE: 254 Platinum Thinset. c) MAPEI: Ultraflex 3. d) MERKRETE: 735 Premium Flex. c. Latex/Polymer Modified Portland Cement Mortar For Walls: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI A118.4 or ANSI At 18.6 and ISO 13007; C2ES1 P2 for manufactured mortar. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) CUSTOM: Megalite Thin -Set Mortar or FlexBond Fortified Thin -Set Mortar. b) LATICRETE: 254 Platinum Thinset. c) MAPEI: Ultraflex 3. d) MERKRETE: 735 Premium Flex. d. Floor Grout (Epoxy): 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI At 18.3 or ANSI At 18.6 and ISO 13007 RG. 2) Color: a) CUSTOM: No. 145 Light Smoke. b) LATICRETE: No. 24 Natural Grey. c) MAPEI: No. 11 Sahara Beige. d) MERKRETE: Pro Epoxy D-153 Buckskin. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) CUSTOM: CEG -Lite 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout. Ceramic Tiling - 8 - 093013 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b) LATICRETE: SpectraLOCK PRO. c) MAPEI: Kerapoxy. d) MERKRETE: Pro Epoxy. e. Wall Grout (Modified Polymer): 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI At 18.6 or ANSI Al 18.6 and ISO 13007. 2) Color: a) CUSTOM: No. 381 Bright White. b) LATICRETE: No. 44 Bright White. c) MAPEI: No. 00 White. d) MERKRETE: D-11 Snow White. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) CUSTOM: PolyBlend Non -Sanded Grout or Prism SureColor Grout. b) LATICRETE: 1600 Series Unsanded Dry Set Wall Grout with 1776 Grout Admix Plus additive. c) MAPEI: Keracolor-U Unsanded Polymer -Modified Grout. d) MERKRETE: Non -Sanded ColorGrout, latex modified. f. Waterproofing Membrane: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI Al 18.10. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions for Categories: a) Troweled applied, cement based: (1) CUSTOM: FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane. (2) LATICRETE: Hydro Ban. (3) MAPEI, Mapelastic 315. (4) MERKRETE: Hydro -Guard SP -1. b) Liquid applied, latex based: (1) CUSTOM: RedGard Waterproofing or Crack Prevention Membrane or FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane. (2) LATICRETE: Hydro Ban. (3) MAPEI: Mapelastic AquaDefense. (4) MERKRETE: Hydro -Guard SP -1. g. Crack Isolation Membrane: 1) Meet Requirements of ANSI Al 18.12. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions for Categories: a) Flexible, thin, load-bearing, fabric -reinforced: (1) CUSTOM: Crack Buster Pro Crack Prevention Mat Underlayment, with Peel & Stick Primer. (2) LATICRETE: Blue 92 Anti -Fracture Membrane. (3) MAPEI, Mapeguard SM, and Primer SM. (4) MERKRETE: Hydro -Guard SP -1. b) Liquid applied, latex based: (1) CUSTOM: RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane or FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane. (2) LATICRETE: Hydro Ban. (3) MAPEI, Mapelastic AquaDefense. (4) MERKRETE: Fracture Guard 5000. h. Stone Thresholds: 1) Texture and color variation shall be within limits established by Architect's approved sample. 2) Free of defects that would materially impair strength, durability, and appearance. 3) Finish: 80 grit exterior hone. 4) White marble, one (1) piece, 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick by 2 1/2 inches (64 mm) by door opening width. Cross-section to meet handicap accessibility requirements. F. Mixes: 1. Mortar Beds: Portland Cement Dry Sand Damp Sand Hydrated Lime* Floor Mix One Part 5 Parts 4 Part 1/10 Part Wall Mix One Part 5-1/2 to 7 Parts 1/2 Part Font One Part ** 4 Part ;eramic Tiling - 9 - 093013 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,'''; PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers: 1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates where tile will be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions effecting performance of installed tile. 2. Verify tile substrate is well cured, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films, and curing compounds. 3. Notify Architect in writing if surfaces are not acceptable to install tile: a. Do not lay tile over unsuitable surface. b. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces and approval of existing conditions. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove existing tile and setting bed to concrete substrate. 2. Repair and clean substrate in accordance with installation standards and manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, door frames, electrical, mechanical, and other work in or behind tile shall be installed before tile work is started. B. Special Techniques: 1. Install in accordance with following latest TCNA installation methods: a. Flush Concrete Slabs with crack isolation membrane: TCNA F115. b. Mortar Bed on Concrete Slab: TCNA F111 with reinforcing. c. Framed Floors: TCNA F141 or F144 at installer's option. d. Framed Walls: TCNA W245 with waterproof membrane. e. Tile Cove Base: TCNA Flush style. C. Tolerances: 1. Plane of Vertical Surfaces: a. 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.450 meters) from required plane shall be plumb and true with square corners. 2. Variation In Slab Grade: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) in any 10 feet (3.050 m) of floor slab and distance between high point and low point of slab of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). b. Slab Testing Procedure: 1) Place ends of straightedge on 3/8 inch (10 mm) high shims. Ceramic Tiling -10- 09 3013 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 2) Floor is satisfactory if 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter steel rod rolled under straightedge will not touch anywhere along 10 foot (3.050 m) length and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter steel rod will not fit under straightedge anywhere along 10 foot (3.050 m) length. D. General: 1. Install tile in pattern indicated: a. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. b. Adjust to minimize tile cutting and to avoid tile less than half size. c. Center and balance areas of tile if possible. 2. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruption: 3. Maintain heights of tilework in full courses to nearest obtainable dimension where heights are given in feet and inches (meters and millimeters) and are not required to fill vertical spaces exactly. 4. Install cut tile with cuts on outer edges of field: a. Provide straight cuts that align with adjacent materials. b. When possible, smooth cut edges of tile or use appropriate cutter or wet saw to produce smooth cuts. c. Do not install tile with jagged or flaked edges. 5. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment: a. Fit tile closely where edges are to be covered by trim, escutcheons, or similar devices. 6. Provide straight tile joints of uniform width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size: a. Make joints smooth and even, without voids, cracks, or excess mortar or grout. 7. Use a beating block and hammer or rubber mallet so faces and edges of individual tiles are flush and level with faces and edges of adjacent tiles, and to reduce lippage. 8. Accessories in tilework shall be evenly spaced, properly centered with tile joints, and level, plumb, and true to correct projection. 9. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. E. Application On Framed Floors: 1. On Cement Board Sheathing: a. Install cement board in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. b. Attach board through subfloor into framing with screws spaced 8 inches (200 mm) on center. Pre -drill holes in cement board for screws if required by Cement Board Manufacturer. c. Provide bedding coat, tape and fill joints as required by Cement Board Manufacturer. F. Application On Concrete Floor: 1. On Mortar Bed: a. Apply mortar bed to depth equal to depression in slab minus 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). b. Properly cure before installing tile. 2. Clean substrate surface thoroughly. a. Dampen if very dry, but do not saturate. 3. Install tile with 100 percent contact with mortar bed. a. Obtaining 100 percent contact may require troweling mortar layer on back of each tile before placing on mortar bed. 4. Install base by flush method (square or thin -lip method is not acceptable): a. Allow for expansion joint directly above any expansion or control joints in slab. 5. Insert temporary filler in expansion joints. G. Application On Walls a. 2. On Glass Mat Gypsum Tile Backer Over Framing: a. Embed fiberglass reinforcing tape at joints with mortar used to adhere tile. 3. Dampen dry backings as determined by environmental conditions and Manufacturer's recommendations to achieve cure. 4. Allow for sealant joints full height at room corners in wall tile. Insert temporary filler in expansion joints. 5. Install wall tile directly atop bull -nosed paver tile base. :eramic Tiling - 11 - 093013 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 H. Application Of Mortar: 1. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered within ten (10) to fifteen (15) minutes: a. If 'skinning' occurs, remove mortar and spread fresh material. b. Spread mortar with notches running in one (1) direction, perpendicular to pressing, pushing and pulling of tile during placement. 2. Install tile before mortar has started initial cure: a. For thin set mortar application, use notch trowel that will achieve the recommended coverage of mortar after tiles have been installed. 3. Place tile in fresh mortar, press, push and pull tile slightly to achieve as near 100 percent coverage and contact of tile with setting material and substrate as possible: a. Average contact area shall be not less than eighty (80) percent except on exterior or shower installations where contact area shall be ninety five (95) percent when not less than three (3) tiles or tile assemblies are removed for inspection. The eighty (80) percent or ninety five (95) percent coverage shall be sufficiently distributed to give full support of the tile. b. Support corners and edges with mortar leaving no hollow corners or edges. 4. Install so there is 1/8 inch (3 mm) of mortar between tile and substrate after proper bedding: a. Periodically remove sheets or individual tiles to assure proper bond coverage consistent with industry specifications. b. If coverage is found to be insufficient, use a larger size notch trowel. Application Of Grout: 1. Firmly set tile before applying grout: a. This requires forty eight (48) hours minimum. 2. Before grouting: a. Remove all paper and glue from face of mounted tile. b. Remove spacers or ropes before applying grouting: 3. Mixing Grout: a. Use clean buckets and mixing tools: 1) Use sufficient pressure and flow grout in progressively to avoid air pockets and voids. b. Machine mixing of grout is preferred to assure uniform blend. To prevent trapping air bubbles into prepared grout, use slow speed mixer. c. Slake for fifteen (15) minutes. d. Water or latex additives used for mixing with dry grout shall be measured accurately. 4. Before grouting entire area, do a test area to assure there will be no permanent staining or discoloration of tile and to verify that excess grout can be easily removed from tile surface: a. If necessary, pre -coat exposed surfaces of tile with a grout release recommended by Grout Manufacturer to facilitate removal of excess grout. 5. Installing Grout: a. Use caution, when grouting glazed ceramic tiles to prevent scratching or damaging surface of tile. b. Dampen dry joints prior to grouting with sand-portland cement grout, standard sanded cement grout, standard unsanded cement grout, polymer modified sanded tile grout, and polymer modified unsanded tile grout. Do not leave puddles of water in joints before grouting. c. Keep an adequate joint depth open for grouting. Force maximum amount of grout into joints. d. Apply grout to produce full, smooth grout joints of uniform width, and free of voids and gaps 1) Fill joints of cushion edge tile to depth of cushion. 2) Fill joints of square edge tile flush with surface. 3) Fill joint between wall tile and bull -nosed paver tile base with floor grout. e. Install floor tile with grout thickness of 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) maximum. f. Remove excess grout from surface of tile before it loses its plasticity or begins to set. g. Finished grout shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without voids, pin holes, or low spots. J. Curing: 1. Keep installation at 65 to 85 deg F (18 to 30 deg C) during first eight (8) hours of cure. Shade area completely from sun during this period. K. Application of Joint Sealants: 1. Apply joint sealants after grout has cured: a. This requires forty eight (48) hours minimum. Ceramic Tiling - 12 - 093013 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 2. Before applying sealant: a. Remove spacers or ropes before applying joint sealants. b. Apply backer rod and joint sealants at expansion joints. 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Correct any work found cracked, chipped, broken, unbounded and otherwise defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. CLEANING If one has been used, remove grout release and clean tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue and foreign matter: 1. If a grout haze or residue remains, use a suitable grout haze remover or cleaner. 2. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. PROTECTION A. Close to traffic areas where tile is being set and other tile work being done: 1. Keep closed until tile is firmly set. 2. Before, during, and after grouting, keep area clean, dry, and free from foreign materials and airflow that will interfere with setting and curing of grout. B. Newly tiled floors shall not be walked on nor worked on without using kneeling boards or equivalent protection of tiled surface. C. After cleaning, provide protective covering and maintain conditions protecting tile work from damage and deterioration: 1. Where tiled surfaces will be subject to equipment or wheel traffic or heavy construction traffic, cover protective covering with 114 inch (6 mm) hardboard, plywood, or similar material. END OF SECTION ;eramic Tiling -13- 09 3013 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 5116 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install acoustical tile on backerboard as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2226: 'Metal Suspension System: Gypsum Board'. 2. Section 09 2900: 'Gypsum Board'. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. The Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA), 405 Illinois Avenue, 2B, St Charles IL. www.cisca.org. a. 'Ceiling Systems Handbook': Recommendations for direct hung acoustical tile installation. b. 'Production Guide': Practical reference for ceiling systems and estimating costs. B. Definitions: 1. Acoustical Tile: Prefinished material with various surface finishes installed in concealed suspension system or adhered to ceiling surface to provide improved sound absorption qualities. 2. Acoustical Cement/Adhesive: Special type of adhesive or mastic used to stick up or adhere 12 inch x 12 inch (305 mm x 305 mm) acoustical tile to concrete or gypsum board. 3. Absorption: Materials that have capacity to absorb sound. Absorption is the opposite of reflection. 4. Bevel Edge: Acoustical tile is considered bevel edge when face of tile camfered at approximately 45 degree for 1/8 inch (3 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) around the perimeter of tile. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Rates ceiling's efficiency as barrier to airborne sound transmission between adjacent closed offices. Shown as minimum value, previously expressed as CSTC (Ceiling Sound Transmission Class). Single -figure rating derived from normalized ceiling attenuation values in accordance with classification ASTM E413, except that resultant rating shall be designated ceiling attenuation class. (Defined in ASTM E1414.) Acoustical unit with high CAC may have low NRC. 6. Center Line: Line indicating midpoint of surface in either direction. Used as guide in starting ceiling. 7. Class A: Fire classification for product with flame spread rating of no more than 25 and smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 8. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. 9. Flame Spread Index: Comparative measure, expressed as a dimensionless number, derived from visual measurements of the spread of flame versus time for a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 10. Interior Finish: Interior finish includes interior wall and ceiling finish and interior floor finish. 11. Leveling Spline 3 inch (76 mm) fiber strip inserted into kerf at intersection of four (4) adhesively applied acoustical tiles. 12. Kerf: Slit cut into midpoint of edge of tiles. 13. Light Reflectance (LR): Percentage of light a surface reflected by ceiling surface expressed in decimal form. 14. Mineral Base: Ceilings composed principally of mineral materials such as fibers manufactured from rock or slab, with or without binders. 15. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Average sound absorption coefficient measured at four frequencies: 250, 500, 1,000 and 2,000 Hertz expressed to the nearest integral multiple of 0.05. 4coustical Tile Ceilings - 1 - 095116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 Rates ability of ceiling or wall panel or other construction to absorb sound. NRC is fraction of sound energy, averaged over all angles of direction and from low to high sound frequencies that is absorbed and not reflected. 16. Smoke -Developed Index: Comparative measure, expressed as a dimensionless number, derived from visual measurements of smoke obscuration versus time for a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 17. Sound Absorption: Property possessed by materials and objects, including air, of converting sound energy into heat energy. Sound wave reflected by surface always loses part of its energy. Fraction of energy that is not reflected is called sound absorption coefficient of reflecting surface. For instance, if material reflects 80 percent of sound energy, then sound absorption coefficient would be 20 percent (0.20). 18. Surface Burning Characteristic: Rating of interior and surface finish material providing indexes for flame spread and smoke developed, based on testing conducted according to ASTM Standard E84 or UL 723. 19. Textured Pattern: Granular or raised (fine, coarse, or a blend), felted or matted surface as an integral part of the basic product or superimposed on the product surface. 20. Tile: Acoustical ceiling board, usually 12 inch x 12 inch (305 mm x 305 mm), which is stapled, cemented, or suspended by concealed grid system. Edges are often kerfed and cut back. C. Reference Standards: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (AASHRA): a. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010, 'Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality'. 2. ASTM International; a. ASTM E84-11, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.' b. ASTM E795-05, 'Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.' c. ASTM E1264 -08e1, 'Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.' d. ASTM E1414/E1414-1 1, 'Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.' e. ASTM E1477 - 98a(2008), 'Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating -Sphere Reflectometers'. 3. International Building Code (IBC) (2009 Edition): a. Chapter 8, 'Interior Finishes': 1) Section 803, 'Wall And Ceiling Finishes': a) 803.1.1, 'Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Materials'. b) 803.1.2, 'Room Corner Test for Interior Wall or Ceiling Finish Materials'. 4. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 101: 'Life Safety Code'. b. NFPA 265: 'Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls', 2007 Edition.' 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: a. UL 723, 'Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Tenth Edition September 10 2008.' (Revision: September 13, 2010). 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 09 2900 to review finish requirements for gypsum wallboard ceilings. 2. Schedule acoustical tile ceiling pre -installation conference after installation of gypsum wallboard but before beginning installation of tile. 3. In addition to items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Verify that tile comes from same dye lot and has same dye lot code. b. Review requirements of acceptable and non acceptable tile. Acoustical Tile Ceilings - 2 - 095116 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. One sample of each variant of specified tile series. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. If requested by Owner, provide copies of Quality Assurance requirements for 'Class A' flame spread rating and 'Room -Corner Test.' 2. Manufacturer Installations: a. Published installation recommendations. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature on tile and adhesive. b) Color and pattern selection. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Provide Owner with six (6) cartons of each type of tile with same dye lot code. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical ceiling tile applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Surface -Burning Characteristics: 1) Ceiling tile shall have Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723 Type 1. a) Class A (Flame spread index 0-25; Smoke -developed index 0-450). b) Flash point: None. 2. Passage of 'Room -Corner Test' as recognized by AHJ, is required for system. Adhesive cited in test literature is required for installation of ceiling tile on Project. a. Room Corner Tests: 1) ASTM E84, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.' 2) IBC 803.2.1, 'Room Corner Test for Interior Wall or Ceiling Finish Materials'. 3) NFPA 265:'Room Corner Test for Interior Wall or Ceiling Finish Materials'. 4) UL 723, 'Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.' DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials where protected from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and damage. 2. Store acoustic tile in cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight and weather, and at temperatures between 32 deg F (0 deg C) and 86 deg F (30 deg C). acoustical Tile Ceilings - 3 - 095116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 3. Store adhesive on site at installation temperature, between 65 and 90 deg F (18 and 32 deg C), for one week before installation. 4. Handle acoustical ceiling tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damage. Use no soiled, scratched, or broken material in the Work. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Building shall be enclosed, mechanical system operating with proper filters in place, and temperature and humidity conditions stabilized within limits under which Project will operate before, during, and after installation until Substantial Completion. 2. Temperature at time of setting tile shall be 50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum and 100 deg F (38 deg C) maximum. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Manufacturer's ten (10) year limited system warranty for the following: a. Manufacturer's warranty to be free from defects in materials and factory workmanship. b. Manufacturer's warranty against sagging and warping. c. Manufacturer's warranty against mold/mildew, and bacterial growth. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armstrong World Industries, Strategic Accounts, Lancaster, PA www.cellings.com. 1) For pricing and ordering of tile, contact Sherry Brunt, Phyllis Miller, or Beth Rinehart at (800) 442-4212, FAX 800-233-5598, or bpo_strategic—accounts@armstrong.com. 2) For Strategic Account information, contact Randy Lay at (303) 775-1409 ralay@armstrong.com. b. Franklin International, Inc., Columbus, OH www.titebond.com. c. TACC International Corp, Rockland, MA www.itwtacc.com. B. Materials: 1. Description: a. Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick minimum by 12 inches (300 mm) square. b. Color: White. c. Grid Face: Tile glue -up. d. Surface Finish: Factory -applied. e. Wet -formed high density mineral fiber. 2. Design Criteria: a. Meet requirements of ASTM E1264, Type III (mineral base with painted finish), Form 2 (water felted), Pattern CE (perforated, small holes — lightly textured), Fire Class A. b. Acoustics: 1) Noise Reduction Coefficient (Rating expressed according to ASTM E1284 requirements: a) NRC rating: 60 minimum. 2) CAC rating: 35 minimum. c. Anti Mold / Mildew: 1) Resistance against growth of mold/mildew. d. Durable: 1) Impact -resistant. Acoustical Tile Ceilings - 4 - 095116 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 2) Scratch -resistant. e. Edge Profile: Beveled K4C4. f. Finish: 1) Abuse-resistant/durable, factory applied vinyl latex paint. g. Fire Performance: 1) Panels meet ASTM E84 or UL 723 Type 1 surface burning characteristics. h. High Recycled Content (HRC): Classified as containing greater than 50 percent total recycled content. L Light Reflectance (LR): 0.86 Average (Range of 0.84 to 0.88). j. Sag Resistance: 1) Resistance to sagging in high humidity conditions up to, but not including, standing water and outdoor applications. k. Texture: Embossed texture with fine fissuring and small perforations with natural variation in texture and color appearance between tile. I. VOC Emissions: 1) Low formaldehyde: Contributing less than 13.5 ppb in typical conditions per ASHRAE Standard 62, 'Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality'. 3. Acoustic Tile: a. Category Three National Account Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) DuraTile Item No. MN80375 by Armstrong. C. Accessories: 1. Adhesive: a. Non -staining type suitable for work. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) ATA5495 Acoustical Tile Adhesive by TACC International Corp. 2) Titebond No. 2704 Solvent Free Acoustical Ceiling Tile Adhesive by Franklin International. 3) Highest quality of adhesive from manufacturer recommended by Tile Manufacturer as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 2. Edge Molding: a. Steel'U' molding with baked enamel finish. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) 7843 Series by Armstrong. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. SART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspect for defects in backing and support that are not acceptable. a. Examine areas around HVAC diffusers and light fixtures for tile installation problems. b. Examine ceiling for levelness. CISCA 'Code of Practice'requires ceiling to be free of irregularities and be level to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 12 foot (305 mm). c. Examine substrate for any problems that will compromise adhesion of ceiling tile. 2. Notify Architect in writing of unacceptable conditions. 3. Do not apply ceiling tile until defects in backing and support are corrected. PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Follow Manufacturer recommendations for surface preparation: a. Substrate must be clean, free of grease and dirt, sound, smooth, even and level before applying tile to surface. Acoustical Tile Ceilings - 5 - 095116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,S 1) Do not install new ceiling tile over old glue globs or bad substrate with any surface finisl that is incompatible with tile adhesive. b. Painted Surfaces: Avoid applying tile to newly painted ceiling. c. Materials shall be dry and clean at time of application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations: a. Do not install tile when room temperature exceeds or below recommended ambient conditions. b. Tile is directional tile and must be installed in same direction of pattern running parallel to ! long dimension of each room. c. Remove loose dust from back of tile and ceiling where adhesive is to be applied. d. Prime 3 inch (75 mm) minimum circle near each corner by buttering very thin coat of adhesive. e. Apply daub of adhesive to each corner. Daubs will be of sufficient size to forma circle 2-1/2 to 3 inches (63 to 75 mm) in diameter and 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) thick when tile is pressed firmly in place. Do not apply daubs so far in advance of installation that adhesive skins over. f f. Install splines in kerfs at corners. g. Do not bend tile during installation. 2. Tile Layout: a. Lay out tile symmetrically about center lines of room. b. Lay out so tiles at room perimeters are at least 1/2 full tile size. c. Leave tile in true plane with straight, even joints. d. Tile joints shall be straight and in alignment, and exposed surface flush and level. e. Furnish and install specified molding wherever tile has exposed edges or abuts walls, columns, and other vertical surfaces, except at curves of 3 inch (75 mm) radius or smaller. f. Cut around penetrations that are not to receive moldings cleanly with sharp knife and at a slight angle away from cutout. 3. Ceiling mounted items: a. Locate light fixtures, speakers, and mechanical diffusers and grilles symmetrically in room and centered on tile centers or tile joints insofar as possible, unless shown otherwise. b. Keep method of locating ceiling mounted items as consistent as possible throughout building. c. Ceiling mounted item location method within each room shall always be consistent. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Acoustical Tile. The following have been identified by the Manufacturer as tile defects, should not be installed, and will be replaced at no charge to Owner. Manufacturer will replace any material that does not meet product specifications. Installer to call 1 (800) 442-4212 immediately to report any tile discrepancies: a. Obvious Tile Defects: 1) Gross surface defects or damage. 2) Gross damage to edges and corners. 3) Bevels without paint. b. Size Measurement: 1) Tiles measure 12 inches (305 mm), plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), measured across center of two (2) parallel sides. c. Squareness Measurement: 1) Measure two (2) diagonals of an individual ceiling tile. 2) Diagonal measurements needs to be within 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of each other. No more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) difference. d. Warp: Acoustical Tile Ceilings - 6 - 095116 D74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Tiles specification is plus or minus 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) as measured in the center of tile. 2. Installer: a. Substrate preparation and installation of ceiling tile not following CISCA Code of Practice will be unacceptable and considered defective and subject to replacement at no cost to Owner. .5 ADJUSTING A. 'Touch-up' minor abraded surfaces. .6 CLEANING A. Remove from site debris connected with work of this Section. END OF SECTION kcoustical Tile Ceilings - 7 - 095116 BLANK PAGE 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling for installation of Owner -Furnished carpet tiles and carpet base used in entry vestibules using walk -off carpet tile as described in contract documents and including following: a. Schedule Testing Agency testing of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before pre -installation conference held jointly with Section 09 6816 pre -installation conference. b. Maintain Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Carpet Tiles. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install carpet tiles and carpet base. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 3100: 'Project Management and Coordination' for pre -installation conference. 3. Section 01 4000: 'Quality Requirements' for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications' establishes minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: 'Testing and Inspecting Services' for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: 'Closeout Submittals'. 7. Section 09 0503: a. Floor substrate preparation. b. Field Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. c. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 6000 heading 'Flooring. 8. Section 09 6816: a. Installation of Carpet Tile and Carpet Base: b. Cleaning and Disposal requirements. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.conerete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 302.2R-06, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture -Sensitive Flooring Materials (August 15, 2006). 2. NSF International (NSF) / American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. NSF International, Ann Arbor, MI www.nst.org 1) (NSF) / ANSI 140-2009, 'Sustainable Assessment for Carpet'. 3. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI), Dalton, GA www.carpet-rug.org. Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet: a. CRI Carpet Installation Standard — 2011 (First Edition). b. CRI Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): 1) CRI Green Label Plus Certification. c. CRI Texture Appearance Retention Rating (TARR): 'ile Carpeting - 1 - 096813 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1) Retention Rating Scales. B. Definitions: 1. Adhesive: Substance that dries to film capable of holding materials together by surface attachment. 2. Antimicrobial: Chemical treatment added to carpet or reduce growth of common bacteria, fungi, yeast, mold and mildew. 3. Appearance Retention: Ability of a fabric to retain its original aesthetics, color, and construction integrity. 4. Backing: Materials comprising back of carpet as opposed to carpet pile or face. a. Tufted carpets: (1) Primary backing, woven or nonwoven fabric in which pile yarn is inserter by tufting needles. (2) Secondary backing, Fabric laminated to back of carpet to reinforce and increase dimensional stability. b. Woven carpets: Backings are 'construction yarns' comprising chain warp, stuffer warp, and shot or fill, which are interwoven with face yarn during carpet fabric formation. 5. Backing Fabric: Fabric into which pile yarn is inserted, or reinforcing layer that is adhered to reverse side of fabric. 6. Bonding Agent (Backcoating): Application of latex or adhesive to back of carpet to anchor tufts usually followed immediately by addition of secondary backing material such as nonwoven polypropylene or poly -urethane attached cushion. 7. Carpet: Heavy fabric used to cover floor and made from variety of fibers. 8. Change In Surface Appearance: Cumulative change in surface appearance between unexposed and exposed specimens due to crushing, loss of tuft definition, and matting. 9. Colorfastness: Ability of fiber or carpet to retain color when exposed to (1) ultraviolet light, (2) crocking (wet or dry) and (3) atmospheric conditions. 10. Commercial Match: Matching of colors with acceptable tolerance, or with color variation that is barely detectable to naked eye. 11. Crockfastness: Resistance of transfer of colorant from surface of colored yarn or fabric to another surface, or to an adjacent area of same fabric, principally by rubbing. 12. Crushing: Collapsing of pile yarns, resulting in carpet matting and loss of resilience due to traffic. 13. Delamination: Form of deterioration of tufted carpet in which primary back and face yarns separate from secondary back. 14. Density: Amount of pile yarn per area of carpet or closeness of tufts. Higher density carpet improves resistance to crushing and matting. 15. Dimensional Stability: Ability of carpet to retain its size and shape once installed. 16. Face Weight: Total weight of face (above backing) yarns in carpet. 17. Fiber: Fundamental unit of carpet made from nylon, polyester, cotton, acrylics, wool, and recycled material. 18. Flammability: Procedures that have been developed for assessing flame resistance of carpets. 19. Fuzzing: Fluffy particles appear on carpet surfaces caused by fibers that loosen because of weak twist or snags. 20. Lightfastness: Degree of resistance of dyed textile materials to color destroying influence of sunlight. 21. Loss of Tuft Definition: Bursting, opening, and untwisting of pile yarn and/or decrimping of fibers in surface pile of pile yarn floor covering. 22. Matting: Loss of pile definition of a textile floor covering due to entanglement and compression of pile fibers. 23. Modification Ratio: Ratio between circumference of inner core of multi lobal fiber's cross section, and circumference of circle drawn around outer edges of fibers cross sections' outer lobes or tips. 24. Pile: Visible surface of carpet, consisting of yarn tufts in loop and/or cut configuration. Sometimes called face or nap. 25. Resilience: Ability of carpet to spring back to its original texture and thickness after being walked on or compressed weight of furniture. 26. Soil Resistance: Ability of carpet fiber to resist dry soil and maintain its original appearance after intermittent or restorative cleanings. 27. Sailing: Occurs when dirt particles build up in carpet fibers. 28. Stain Resistance: Ability of carpet fiber to resist absorption of stain and maintain its original appearance. 29. Texture: Visual and tactile surface characteristics of carpet pile, including such aesthetic and structural elements. Tile Carpeting - 2 - 096813 YLIVAN? June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 30. Texture Appearance Retention Rating (TARR): Model specification process that classifies areas of intended use and minimum carpeting texture appearance retention ratings for particular areas of use. Moderate, heavy, severe, or special end-use classification is established for each application based on level of expected foot traffic in specific areas. 31. Tile: Carpet module usually 18 inch x 18 inch or 24 inch x 24 inch (450 mm x 450 mm or 600 mm x 600 mm) in size. Extremely dense construction with heavy reinforced backing. 32. Tuft: Cluster of yarns drawn through fabric and projecting from surface in form of cut yarns or loops. 33. Tuft Bind: Force (usually measured in pounds) required to pull tuft from carpet backing. 34. Tufted Carpet: Carpet produced by tufting machine instead of loam. 35. Twist: Winding of yarn around itself. More twist improves carpet performance (especially in cut pile). 36. Woven Carpet: Carpet produced on a loom. 37. Woven: Interlacing strands of fiber into yarn forms woven carpet. 38. Yarn: Fibers that are twisted together to form a continuous strand. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM F2170-11, 'Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.' ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate completion of flooring installation with other trades. B. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 0503 and held jointly with Section 09 6816 pre -installation conference. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 0503, review following: a. Schedule conference after substrate preparation and ONE (1) week minimum before installation of flooring system. b. Review Testing Agency testing report of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 1) See Section 09 0503 for Options if concrete moisture tests of concrete slab exceeds Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture requirements for flooring. 2) NOTE: If (RH) exceeds 90 percent as per ASTM F2170 and alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9, contact Church Headquarters at carpet@ldschurch.org or call (801) 240-6466. Provide project information including test results and contact information. c. Review Owner's Representative schedule for furnishing and installation carpet. d. Review Flooring Manufacturer's installation conditions verification procedure and requirements. e. Review Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. f. Review cleaning and disposal requirements. g. Review protection requirements of carpet after installation of carpeting. C. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect ONE (1) week minimum pre -installation conference to allow testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 2. Notify Owner's Representative to coordinate installation of carpet. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. ile Carpeting - 3 - 096813 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. b) Color and style selection. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing Reports of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture testing. C. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Leave carpet tiles equivalent to 15 percent of number installed as attic stock. b. Tie securely and wrap in protective cover. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. All products provided will meet requirements of all federal, state, and local codes having jurisdiction. 2. Label meeting Federal Labeling Requirements, as stated in Textile Products Identification Act under Federal Trade Commission, shall be attached to certification samples and products delivered. B. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before installation of flooring: a. See Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary'. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials and accessories necessary for completion of carpet installation to site before beginning installation of carpet. 2. Do not deliver materials before date scheduled for installation. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store carpet and related materials in a climate -controlled, dry space. 2. Protect carpet from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Building Conditions: a. Conditions inside building shall be brought to levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 1) Carpet installation is not to begin until HVAC system is operational and following conditions are maintained for at least forty eight (48) hours before, during and seventy two (72) hours after completion: a) Carpet is to be installed when indoor temperature is between 652 - 95Q F (18® - 351 C) with maximum relative humidity of 65%. b) Substrate surface temperature should not be less than 65° F (18° C) at time of installation. c) Do not allow temperature of indoor carpeted areas to fall below 50° F (10° C), regardless of age of installation. Tile Carpeting - 4 - 09 6813 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 2) Maintain fresh air ventilation after installation for seventy two (72) hours minimum or until lingering odors are gone. 2. Alkalinity: a. Do not install carpet tiles if alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9. Corrective procedures are required. 3. Concrete Moisture (either test method acceptable) a. Testing conditions inside building shall be brought to same ambient temperature and relative humidity levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. b. Do not install carpet tiles if moisture vapor emission rate (MVER) concrete slab relative humidity (RH) exceeds 75% as per ASTM F2170. Corrective procedures are required. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Carpet Manufacturer's standard Warranty. B. Special Warranty: 1. Provide Carpet Manufacturer's fifteen (15) year Special Warranty on carpet system. a. Warranty to including specific workmanship warranties for appearance retention, delamination, edge raveling, fuzzing, pilling, and other textural changes which can be controlled through proper manufacturing (no fraying, zippering, delamination, edge raveling, fuzzing, pilling in carpet is acceptable for any reason). b. Warranty shall cover defects in installation workmanship and installation materials. c. Warranty terms will include inspection of defective area within fifteen (15) days of receipt of written notice from Owner and completion of corrective work within forty five (45) days, unless other arrangements are made in writing with Owner on case-by-case basis. d. If carpet defect or installation defect continues to appear after two separate notices for correction from Owner, carpet where defects have occurred shall be replaced. ART 2 -PRODUCTS OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Lees Commercial Carpets, Greensboro, NC (800) 523-5647 or (336) 379-2000 www.leescarpets.com. 2. Mannington Commercial Carpets, Calhoun, GA (800) 241-2262 or (706) 629-7301. www.mannington.com. B. Materials: 1. Carpet Tiles (walk -off) Vestibules only: a. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) StepUp Modular DD762 by Lees Commercial Carpets. a) Color: 508 Mineral. 2) LDS Entry Guard by Mannington Commercial. a) Color: Black. b. Size: 18 inch or 24 inch (457 mm or 609 mm) square, at Manufacturer's option. 2. Carpet Base (entry vestibules using walk -off carpet tile): a. 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) wide base without cushion backing. Top edge of base serged with 1- 1/4 inch (32 mm) polyester binding fabric. Roll edges of binding fabric under and sew along top edge of carpet cove base. b. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Manufacturer: Bigelow Commercial. a) Style Name: Spectrum V 30. b) Color: 7234 Ebony Domino. ile Carpeting - 5 - 096813 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,4 c) Provided by: (1) Lees Commercial Carpets. (2) Mannington Commercial Carpets. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Tile Carpeting - 6 - 096813 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 6816 SHEET CARPETING: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes But Is Not Limited To: 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling for installation of Owner -Furnished carpet, carpet base, carpet accessories, leveling compounds, resilient base (if included), and accessories if included in Project as described in Contract Documents and including following: a. Schedule Testing Agency testing of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before Pre -Installation Conference held in conjunction with Section 09 6813. b. Schedule Pre -Installation Conference held in conjunction with Section 09 6813. c. Maintain Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. d. Protection of carpet after installation of carpeting as required. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Carpet Tile. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install carpet and carpet base. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 3100: "Project Management and Control". 3. Section 01 4000: "Quality Requirements" for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. 4. Section 01 4301: "Quality Assurance — Qualifications" for minimum qualification levels required. 5. Section 01 4523: "Testing and Inspecting Services" for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 6. Section 01 7800: Closeout submittal. 7. Section 09 0503: a. Field Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. b. Floor substrate preparation. c. Removal of furniture including pews and rostrum seating. d. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 6000 heading 'Flooring. 8. Section 09 6813: a. Tile carpeting and carpet base used in entry vestibules using walk -off carpet tile. b. Pre -installation conference held jointly with Section 09 6813. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 302.213-06, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture -Sensitive Flooring Materials (August 15, 2006). 2. NSF International (NSF) / American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. NSF International, Ann Arbor, MI www.nsf.org 1) (NSF) / ANSI 140-2009, 'Sustainable Assessment for Carpet'. 3. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI), Dalton, GA www.carpet-rug.org. Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet: a. CRI Carpet Installation Standard — 2011 (First Edition). b. CRI Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 1 - 096816 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,1 1) CRI Green Label Plus Certification. c. CRI Texture Appearance Retention Rating (TARR): 1) Retention Rating Scales. B. Definitions: 1. Adhesive: Substance that dries to film capable of holding materials together by surface attachment. 2. Antimicrobial: Chemical treatment added to carpet or reduce growth of common bacteria, fungi, yeast, mold and mildew. 3. Appearance Retention: Ability of a fabric to retain its original aesthetics, color, and construction integrity. 4. Backing: Materials comprising back of carpet as opposed to carpet pile or face. a. Tufted carpets: (1) Primary backing, woven or nonwoven fabric in which pile yarn is insertec by tufting needles. (2) Secondary backing, Fabric laminated to back of carpet to reinforce and increase dimensional stability. b. Woven carpets: Backings are 'construction yarns' comprising chain warp, stuffer warp, and shot or fill, which are interwoven with face yarn during carpet fabric formation. 5. Backing Fabric: Fabric into which pile yarn is inserted, or reinforcing layer that is adhered to reverse side of fabric. 6. Bonding Agent (Backcoating): Application of latex or adhesive to back of carpet to anchor tufts usually followed immediately by addition of secondary backing material such as nonwoven polypropylene or poly -urethane attached cushion. 7. Carpet: Heavy fabric used to cover floor and made from variety of fibers. 8. Change In Surface Appearance: Cumulative change in surface appearance between unexposed and exposed specimens due to crushing, loss of tuft definition, and matting. 9. Colorfastness: Ability of fiber or carpet to retain color when exposed to (1) ultraviolet light, (2) crocking (wet or dry) and (3) atmospheric conditions. 10. Commercial Match: Matching of colors with acceptable tolerance, or with color variation that is barely detectable to naked eye. 11. Crockfastness: Resistance of transfer of colorant from surface of colored yarn or fabric to another surface, or to an adjacent area of same fabric, principally by rubbing. 12. Crushing: Collapsing of pile yarns, resulting in carpet matting and loss of resilience due to traffic. 13. Delamination: Form of deterioration of tufted carpet in which primary back and face yarns separate from secondary back. 14. Density: Amount of pile yarn per area of carpet or closeness of tufts. Higher density carpet improves resistance to crushing and matting. 15. Dimensional Stability: Ability of carpet to retain its size and shape once installed. 16. Face Weight: Total weight of face (above backing) yarns in carpet. 17. Fiber: Fundamental unit of carpet made from nylon, polyester, cotton, acrylics, wool, and recycled material. 18. Flammability: Procedures that have been developed for assessing flame resistance of carpets. 19. Fuzzing: Fluffy particles appear on carpet surfaces caused by fibers that loosen because of weak'; twist or snags. 20. Lightfastness: Degree of resistance of dyed textile materials to color destroying influence of sunlight. 21. Loss of Tuft Definition: Bursting, opening, and untwisting of pile yarn and/or decrimping of fibers in surface pile of pile yarn floor covering. 22. Matting: Loss of pile definition of a textile floor covering due to entanglement and compression of pile fibers. 23. Modification Ratio: Ratio between circumference of inner core of multi lobal fiber's cross section, and circumference of circle drawn around outer edges of fibers cross sections' outer lobes or tips. 24. Pile: Visible surface of carpet, consisting of yarn tufts in loop and/or cut configuration. Sometimes called face or nap. 25. Resilience: Ability of carpet to spring back to its original texture and thickness after being walked on or compressed weight of furniture. 26. Soil Resistance: Ability of carpet fiber to resist dry soil and maintain its original appearance after intermittent or restorative cleanings. 27. Soiling: Occurs when dirt particles build up in carpet fibers. 28. Stain Resistance: Ability of carpet fiber to resist absorption of stain and maintain its original appearance. Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 2 - 096816 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 29. Texture: Visual and tactile surface characteristics of carpet pile, including such aesthetic and structural elements. 30. Texture Appearance Retention Rating (TARR): Model specification process that classifies areas of intended use and minimum carpeting texture appearance retention ratings for particular areas of use. Moderate, heavy, severe, or special end-use classification is established for each application based on level of expected foot traffic in specific areas. 31. Tile: Carpet module usually 18 inch x 18 inch or 24 inch x 24 inch (450 mm x 450 mm or 600 mm x 600 mm) in size. Extremely dense construction with heavy reinforced backing. 32. Tuft: Cluster of yarns drawn through fabric and projecting from surface in form of cut yarns or loops. 33. Tuft Bind: Force (usually measured in pounds) required to pull tuft from carpet backing. 34. Tufted Carpet: Carpet produced by tufting machine instead of loam. 35. Twist: Winding of yarn around itself. More twist improves carpet performance (especially in cut pile). 36. Woven Carpet: Carpet produced on a loom. 37. Woven: Interlacing strands of fiber into yarn forms woven carpet. 38. Woven: Carpet produced on a loom through weaving process by which lengthwise (warp) yarns and widthwise (weft or filling) yarns are interlaced to form fabric. 39. Yarn: Fibers that are twisted together to form a continuous strand. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM F2170-11,'Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes'. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate completion of carpet installation with other trades. B. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 0503 and held jointly with Section 09 6813 pre -installation conference. 2. In addition to agenda items specified Section 01 3100 and Section 09 0503, review following: a. Schedule conference after substrate preparation and ONE (1) week before installation of flooring system. b. Review Testing Agency testing report of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 1) See Section 09 0503 for Options if concrete moisture tests of concrete slab exceeds Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture requirements for flooring. 2) Note: If (RH) exceeds 90% as per ASTM F2170 and alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9, contact Church Headquarters at carpet@ldschurch.org. Provide project information including test results and contact information. c. Review Owner's Representative schedule for furnishing and installation carpet. d. Review Flooring Manufacturer's installation conditions verification procedure and requirements. e. Review Building Ambient Conditions including normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning for acceptability for beginning floor preparation and carpet installation. f. Review cleaning and disposal requirements. g. Review protection requirements of carpet after installation of carpeting. C. Scheduling: 1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect ONE (1) week minimum pre -installation conference to allow testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. 2. Notify Owner's Representative to coordinate installation of carpet. heet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 3 - 096816 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature. b) Color and style selection. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing Reports of Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture testing. B. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Leave excess pieces of carpet, 6 feet square (1 800 sq mm) or larger and 25 lineal feet (7.620 m) minimum of carpet cove base. b. Roll up and tie securely. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. All products provided will meet requirements of all federal, state, and local codes having jurisdiction. 2. Label meeting Federal Labeling Requirements, as stated in Textile Products Identification Act under Federal Trade Commission, shall be attached to certification samples and products delivered. B. Qualifications: Section 01 4301 applies, but is not limited to following: 1. Carpet Installer Qualifications: a. Certified CFI Master or Contract II grade installer or FCIB certified. b. Not less than five (5) years of experience in installation of commercial carpet tile of type, quantity and installation methods similar to work of this section. c. Qualified and approved by Carpet Manufacturer. 2. Carpet Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Not less than five (5) years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. C. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab before installation of flooring: a. See Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary'. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: 1. Comply with instructions and recommendations of Manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. B. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials and accessories necessary for completion of carpet installation to site before beginning installation of carpet. 2. Do not deliver materials before date scheduled for installation. 3. Transport carpet in manner that prevents damage and distortion. Bending or folding individual carpet rolls or cuts from rolls is not recommended. When bending or folding is unavoidable for delivery purposes, carpet is required to be unrolled and allowed to lie flat immediately upon arrival at installation site. Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 4 - 0968161 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 C. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store carpet and related materials in a climate -controlled, dry space. 2. Protect carpet from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants and store on a flat surface. 3. Stacking heavy objects on top of carpet rolls or stacking more than three rolls is prohibited. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Building Conditions: a. Conditions inside building shall be brought to levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 1) Carpet installation is not to begin until HVAC system is operational and following conditions are maintained for at least forty eight (48) hours before, during and seventy two (72) hours after completion: a) Carpet is to be installed when indoor temperature is between 654 - 954 F (184 - 354 C) with maximum relative humidity of 65%. b) Substrate surface temperature should not be less than 654 F (184 C) at time of installation. c) Do not allow temperature of indoor carpeted areas to fall below 504 F (104 C), regardless of age of installation. 2) Maintain fresh air ventilation after installation for seventy two (72) hours minimum or until lingering odors are gone. 2. Concrete Slab: a. General: 1) Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have Alkalinity range and Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission Rate (MVER) recommended by carpet Manufacturer. 2) Final determination as to whether or not a concrete slab is dry enough for flooring installation should be based on evaluating both Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission Rate (MVER) testing. b. Alkalinity: 1) Do not install sheet carpeting if alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9. Corrective procedures are required. c. Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission Rate (MVER): 1) Testing conditions inside building shall be brought to same ambient temperature and relative humidity levels to be normal at occupancy of building. Conditions include normal levels of humidity, lighting, heating, and air conditioning. 2) Do not install sheet carpeting if moisture vapor emission rate (MVER) of concrete slab relative humidity (RH) exceeds 75% as per ASTM F2170. Corrective procedures are required. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide Carpet Manufacturer's standard Warranty. B. Special Warranty: 1. Provide Carpet Manufacturer's fifteen (15) year Special Warranty on carpet system. a. Warranty to including specific workmanship warranties for appearance retention, delamination, edge raveling, fuzzing, pilling, and other textural changes which can be controlled through proper manufacturing (no fraying, zippering, delamination, edge raveling, fuzzing, pilling in carpet is acceptable for any reason). b. Warranty shall cover defects in installation workmanship and installation materials. c. Warranty terms will include inspection of defective area within fifteen (15) days of receipt of written notice from Owner and completion of corrective work within forty five (45) days, unless other arrangements are made in writing with Owner on case-by-case basis. sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 5 - 096816 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, I d. If carpet defect or installation defect continues to appear after two separate notices for correction from Owner, carpet where defects have occurred shall be replaced. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category One VMR Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Materials supplied for carpet installation shall be complete package from specified Carpet Manufacturer. a. Lees, Division of Mohawk Carpets, Glasgow, VA: Help Line (800) 523-5555 or (801) 397- 5626. b. Mannington Commercial Carpets, Calhoun, GA: Help Line Voice Mail (800) 241-2262, ext 8045, (888) 487-3600, or (801) 487-3600. B. Materials: 1. Carpet: a. Category Four Approved Manufacturer and Color / Patterns. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Lees Nauvoo: 405 Bountiful by Lees, Division of Mohawk Carpets. 2. Carpet Base: a. 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) wide base made of same carpet from Manufacturer as used in each room, but without cushion backing. Top edge of base serged with 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) polyester binding fabric to coordinate with Owner's color scheme. Roll edges of binding fabric under and sew along top edge of carpet cove base. 3. Carpet Accessories: Snap -in vinyl reducer strips and vinyl track. 4. Floor Leveling Compound, Floor Patching Compound, And Latex Underlayment: As recommended and approved by Carpet Manufacturer: a. Floor Stoning: 1) Provide at transition from wood underlayment to concrete slab floor substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and moisture content is within acceptable levels before beginning installation as specified in Section 09 0503, 'Floor Substrate Preparation'. If test results exceed limitations, do not proceed with installation, until problem has been corrected. a. Notify Owner's Representative in writing if floor surface is not acceptable to install carpet. 1) Note: If (RH) exceeds 90% as per ASTM F2170 and alkalinity of concrete surface exceeds pH level 9, contact Church Headquarters at carpet@ldschurch.org. Provide project information including test results and contact information. 2) Do not lay carpeting over unsuitable surface. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of floor and approval of existing conditions. B. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Variation In Grade: a. Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) in any 10 foot (3 meter) of floor slab and distance between high point and low point of slab of 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Testing Procedure: a. Place ends of straightedge on 3/8 inch (10 mm) high shims. b. Floor is satisfactory if 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter steel rod rolled under straightedge will not touch anywhere along 10 foot (3 meter) length and 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter steel rod will not fit under straightedge anywhere along 10 foot (3 meter) length. Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 6 - 096816 D74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3. Notify Owner's Representative in writing if floor surface is not acceptable to install carpet. a. Do not lay carpet over unsuitable surface. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of floor and approval of existing conditions. PREPARATION A. Flooring Preparation: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Supplier's Responsibility: a. Prepare floor substrate in accordance with 'CRI Carpet Installation Standard' best practices to receive carpet installation and to provide installation that meets warranty requirements. b. Verify concrete surface cured, clean, dry, and free of foreign substances that will compromise carpet and/or installation. 2. Concrete floor slab patching: a. Cracks, chips and joints must be properly patched or repaired. 3. Concrete surface cured, clean, dry, and free of foreign substances that will compromise carpet and/or other flooring installations. a. Removal of curing compounds. b. Remove paint, sealer, grease, oil, silicone sealants, and other materials incompatible with flooring adhesives. c. Removal of overspray from painted walls (essential so glue will stick). 4. Moisture vapor emission tests and alkalinity test of concrete slab has been preformed. 5. Vacuum and damp mop floor areas to receive flooring before flooring installation. B. Relaxing / Conditioning Carpet: 1. Highly recommended that carpet be unrolled and allowed to relax in installation area for time period that conforms to requirements of manufacturer of product being installed. 2. Protect carpet adequately from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants. 3. Sundry items, such as adhesives, should also be conditioned. C. Carpet Accessories: 1. Owner -Furnished Product's Responsibility: a. Sundry items, such as adhesives, shall be conditioned to building ambient conditions before use. INSTALLATION A. Carpet: 1. General: a. Install carpet and carpet base in accordance with 'CRI Carpet Installation Standard' and Manufacturer's written instructions supplied with product. b. Adhesion of carpet cushion (or secondary backing) to floor substrate and adhesion of carpet primary and secondary backings shall be continuous on floor surface so there are no bubble, ridges, or any separation of carpet from backings or backing from floor substrate caused by failure of carpet, backings or cushion, and adhesives as a system. c. Install carpet under edge of metal thresholds where possible. Use specified carpet accessories at exposed edges. d. Generally, install carpet on Rostrum first, Chapel second, Overflow third, and then remainder of building. 2. Seaming Requirements: a. No seam separation in carpet and no more observable seams from any standing position than that which is unavoidable using best seaming materials and practices available at time of installation. b. Lay rooms parallel to respective Corridors. Seam to permit best use of available carpet. c. Quarter turning allowed only at cross -Corridors longer than 24 feet (7.315 m). d. Use single or double seams at doorways (single seams preferred). Run nap of pieced carpet in same direction. e. Lay carpet lengthwise on Rostrum, parallel to Rostrum seating. iheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 7 - 096816 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, f. Lay carpet in Foyer parallel to Chapel. g. Carpet over Stairs must be laid in Manufactured roll sequence to coordinate with surrounding carpet on floors. Double fill and end seams should be avoided whenever possible. h. Seal seams in accordance with Carpet Manufacturer's instructions and according to CRI Carpet Installation Standard (2009) as applicable. Seam carpet base only at inside corners E B. Carpet Base: 1. Precut base so seams occur only at inside corners. 2. Scribe base to floor. 3. Spread adhesive over back side of base up to bottom of serging on edge or apply three 3/16 inch' (4.76 mm).minimum diameter beads of adhesive placed one inch apart on back of base with top bead placed 2 inch (50 mm) down from serged edge of base and spread adhesive over back surface of base up to bottom edge of serging. a. Bird's mouth finish should only be required when door frame is flush with wall. b. If bird's mouth is required, terminate at door frames or vertical trim with 45 degree angle, bird mouth cut so serged edge turns down to contact frame or trim. 4. Do not allow adhesive beyond edge of base. Remove excess adhesive. 5. Do not use staples, nails, screws or other mechanical fasteners. 6. Set carpet base on brick walls at height either above or below horizontal mortar joint line. C. Floor Stoning: a. Apply as recommended to transition from wood floor to concrete slab substrates. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. See Section 09 0503 'Flooring Substrate Preparation' for Field Testing for Alkalinity and Concrete Moisture of concrete slab. B. Field Inspections: 1. Unacceptable carpet after installation shall include but not be limited to: a. Delaminating carpet from backings. b. Fiber loss less than specified. c. Edge raveling. i d. Fuzzing of carpet fibers. e. Pilling of carpet fibers. f. Appearance retention less than control samples attached to Agreement. g. Dye bleeding. h. Zippering fibers in carpet. I. Color streaking. j. Irregular tufts of fiber. 2. Unacceptable workmanship shall include but not be limited to: a. Improper floor preparation before installation. b. Failure of adhesive to completely adhere carpet to floor resulting in bubbles, ridges, or ripples where carpet has separated from floor. c. Seams that do not comply with specified requirements. 1) Raveled or untrimmed seams. 2) Seams not sealed, level, straight, or even. 3) Open seams. 4) Seams visibly open when viewed by Project Manager from standing position. d. Failure to properly install carpet next to walls and door frames to eliminate gaps or puckering of carpet. e. Use of unspecified carpet. f. Carpet base ends not finished to terminate at door frames or vertical trim shall have 45 degree angle 'birdsmouth'finish. g. Adhesive exposed on carpet, on carpet base, beyond edges of carpet base, and on other surfaces of building. h. Carpet base that is not scribed to fit against floor with no gaps. Sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 8 - 096816 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 i. Carpet base attached by means other than acceptable carpet base adhesive. C. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Unacceptable Carpeting: a. Unacceptable carpeting will be rejected and shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner. Owner's Representative will determine reasonable location of acceptable transition points for removal of unacceptable carpet. Minimum replacement size shall be: 1) Between nearest existing seams. 2) Between natural transition points or 12 feet (3.6 meters) of running length. CLEANING A. General: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Supplier's Responsibility: a. Remove any soiling and/or staining from carpet. b. Remove excessive adhesive with manufacturer recommended adhesive removers. B. Damage to building: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Supplier's Responsibility: a. Carpet Installer responsible for cleaning and repair of all damaged surfaces to their original condition from carpet installation. C. Waste Management: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Provide Dumpster as specified in Section 01 7400. 2. Owner -Furnished Product Supplier's Responsibility: a. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times. b. Disposal of rubbish, wrapping paper, scraps, and trimmings. PROTECTION A. Protection of Carpeting: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. No traffic of any kind on newly installed carpet for minimum of twenty four (24) hours after installation is completed. b. No wheeled traffic of any kind placement of furniture or equipment on carpet for minimum of forty eight (48) hours after completion of carpet installation. c. Protect carpet adequately from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants after carpet installation. d. Protect carpet from abuse, vandalism, or damage occurring after installation is complete. END OF SECTION sheet Carpeting: Urethane Cushion, Direct Glue - 9 - 096816 BLANK PAGE g4738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 7226 SISAL WALL COVERING ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnishing and installing wall covering'Type A' as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 4512: Wood trim for sisal wall covering. 2. Section 09 2900: Priming of gypsum board. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Flame Spread: The propagation of flame over a surface. 2. Flame Spread Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 3. Smoke -Developed Index: The numerical value assigned to a material tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E84-12, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials'. 2. International Building Code (IBC) (2009 Edition): a. Chapter 8, 'Interior Finishes': 1) Section 803, 'Wall And Ceiling Finishes': a) 803.1.1, 'Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Materials'. b) 803.3.1, 'Room Corner Test for Textile Wall Coverings and Expanded Vinyl Wall Coverings'. 3. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 101:'Life Safety Code' (2012 Edition). b. NFPA 265:'Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls', (2011 Edition). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: a. UL 723: 'Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials'; (2010 -Tenth Edition). SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b. Maintenance instructions. c. Color and pattern selection. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Copies of Quality Assurance requirements for'Class A' flame spread rating and'Room- Corner Test'. 2. Qualification Statement: iisal Wall Covering 1 - 097226 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,i a. Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Cleaning and maintenance instructions. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers Documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets. b) Color and pattern selections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. f a. Surface -Burning Characteristics: 1) Wall covering shall have Class A flame spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 or, UL 723 Type 1. a) Class A (Flame spread index 0-25; Smoke -developed index 0-450). b) Flash point: None. 2. Passage of 'Room -Corner Test' as recognized by AHJ, is required for system. Adhesive cited in test literature is required for installation of wall covering on Project. a. Room Corner Tests: 1) ASTM E84, 'Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials'. 2) IBC 803.3.1, 'Room Corner Test for Textile Wall Coverings and Expanded Vinyl Wall Coverings'. 3) NFPA 265, 'Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls'. 4) UL 723, 'Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials'. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Minimum three (3) years experience in wall covering installations. b. Minimum five (5) years satisfactorily completed projects of comparable quality, similar size, and complexity in past three (3) years before bidding. c. Agree to view DVD titled 'No -Flame Sisal Wall Covering Recommended Installation Procedures' provided by Owner. This may be waived by Owner, if Installer has viewed DVD before or can document at least two (2) satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size using sisal wall coverings in past three (3) years before bidding. d. Upon request, submit documentation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver materials in sealed containers with Manufacturer's labels intact. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials in protected area at temperatures below 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above 50 deg F (10 deg C). Keep from freezing. 2. Keep container tightly closed in a well ventilated area, and store upright when not in use. 3. Shelf life: One (1) year minimum - Unopened containers. Sisal Wall Covering - 2 - 097226 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Apply when the temperature is between 50 deg F (10 deg C) minimum and 100 deg F (38 deg C) maximum and relative humidity is less than seventy five (75) percent. 2. Provide good ventilation. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide five (5) year warranty against manufacturing defects. )ART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Design Materials Inc, Kansas City, KS www.dmikc.com. 2. Fibreworks, Louisville, KY www.fibreworks.com. DESCRIPTION A. Colors: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Fibreworks: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Design Materials: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. MATERIALS A. Sisal Wall Covering: 1. 100 percent fire -treated sisal yarn. 2. 1/4 inch (6 mm) pile height, 48 oz/sq yd (1 627 grams/sq meter) minimum. Sisal to be installed full height on walls shall be furnished in 9 or 13 foot (2.75 or 3.96 meters) wide goods. 3. Reversible weave type, without backing. ACCESSORIES A. Wall Covering Adhesive: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. 257 Sisal Adhesive by Fibreworks. b. Sisal Adhesive No. 1-422 by Design Materials. B. Seam Cement: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 4015 Glue -Down Carpet Seam Adhesive by Roberts Consolidated Industries, Div QEP, Henderson, NV www.robertsconsolidated.com. b. Equal as recommended by Wall Covering Manufacturer with approval of Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Sisal Wall Covering - 3 - 097226 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,� PART 3 - EXECUTION f 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers: 1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine substrate and verify that it is suitable for installation of sisal wall covering. 2. Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing. a. Do not install over unsuitable conditions. 3. Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of substrate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply wall covering in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, available on DVD from Owner through Architect. See Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. B. Using specified adhesive, glue continuously to surface to be covered with wall covering. Apply adhesive in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Run 'ribs' in weaving horizontally (panel style) when installing wall covering full height. If sisal instal only as wainscoting, 'ribs' may be installed vertically. Install wall covering so it extends to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of floor slab. END OF SECTION Sisal Wall Covering - 4 - 097226 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for field -applied painting and coating. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: Quality of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. a. Pre -Installation conferences held jointly with Section 09 9001. 3. Divisions 22 and 23: Painting of plumbing and HVAC identification, refrigerant line insulation, and duct interiors. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Damage Caused By Others: Damage caused by individuals other than those under direct control of Painting Applicator (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92). 2. Gloss Levels: a. Specified paint gloss level shall be defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following terms and values, unless specified otherwise for a specific paint system. Gloss Level '1' Traditional matte finish - flat 0 to 5 units at 60 degrees to 10 units maxi - mum at 85 degrees. Gloss Level '2' High side sheen flat - 'velvet-like' finish 10 units maximum at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. Gloss Level'3' Traditional 'eggshell -like finish 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. Gloss Level'4' 'Satin -like' finish 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and 35 units minimum at 85 degrees. Gloss Level's' Traditional semi -gloss 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. Gloss Level'6' Traditional gloss 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. Gloss Level "7' High gloss More than 85 units at 60 degrees. 3. Properly Painted Surface: a. Surface that is uniform in appearance, color, and sheen and free of foreign material, lumps, skins, runs, sags, holidays, misses, strike -through, and insufficient coverage. Surface free of drips, spatters, spills, and overspray caused by Paint Applicator. Compliance will be determined when viewed without magnification at a distance of 5 feet (1.50 m) minimum under normal lighting conditions and from normal viewing position (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92). 4. Latent Damage: Damage or conditions beyond control of Painting Applicator caused by conditions not apparent at time of initial painting or coating work. B. Reference Standards: 1. The latest edition of the following reference standard shall govern all painting work: a. MPI(a), 'Architectural Painting Specification Manual' by Master Painters Institute (MPI), as issued by local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction. ;ommon Painting And Coating Requirements - 1 - 099001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, b. MPI(r), 'Maintenance Repainting Manual' by Master Painters Institute (MPI), as issued by local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Schedule painting pre -installation conference after delivery of paint or coatings and before or at same time as application of field samples. a. Coordinate pre -installation conferences of all related painting and coating Sections under Of 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. b. Schedule conference before preparation of control samples as specified in Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. c. Conference to be held at same time as Section 09 2900 to review gypsum board finish preparation. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review Quality Assurance for Approval requirements. b. Review Quality Assurance Field Sample requirements. c. Review Submittal requirements for compliance for MPI Approved Products. d. Review Design Criteria requirements. e. Review Cleaning requirements. f. Review painting schedule. g. Review safety issues. 3. Review additional agenda items from Sections under 09 9000 heading'Paints and Coatings'. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Include following information for each painting product, arranged in same order as in Project Manual. 1) Manufacturer's cut sheet for each product indicating ingredients and percentages by weight and by volume, environmental restrictions for application, and film thicknesses and spread rates. 2) Provide one (1) copy of 'MPI Approved Products List' showing compliance for each MPI product specified. a) MPI Information is available from MPI Approved Products List using the following link: http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi/approved/index.shtmi. 3) Confirmation of colors selected and that each area to be painted or coated has color selected for it. 2. Samples: Provide two 4 inch by 6 inch (100 mm by 150 mm) minimum draw -down cards for each paint or coating color selected for this Project. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturer's substrate preparation instructions and application instruction for each painting system used on Project. 2. Qualification Statement: a. Applicator: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturer's documentation: a) Manufacturer's cut sheet for each component of each system. b) Schedule showing rooms and surfaces where each system was used. Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 2 - 099001 174738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 D. Maintenance Materials Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Provide painting materials in Manufacturer's original containers and with original labels in each color used. Label each can with color name, mixture instructions, date, and anticipated shelf life. b. Provide one (1) quart of each finish coat and one (1) pint of each primer and of each undercoat in each color used. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approval: 1. Conform to work place safety regulations and requirements of those authorities having jurisdiction for storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related hazardous materials. 2. Paint and painting materials shall be free of lead and mercury, and have VOC levels acceptable to local jurisdiction. 3. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: a. Products: Comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in 'MPI Approved Products List'. b. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in 'MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual' for products and coatings indicated. B. Qualifications: 1. Applicator: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Minimum five (5) years experience in painting installations. b. Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed projects of comparable quality, similar size, and complexity in past three (3) years before bidding. c. Maintain qualified crew of painters throughout duration of the Work. d. Upon request, submit documentation. C. Field Samples: 1. Before application of any paint system, meet on Project site with Architect, Owner's representative, and Manufacturer's representative. Architect may select one (1) surface for application of each paint system specified. This process will include establishing acceptable substrate conditions required for Project before application of paints and coatings. 2. Apply paint systems to surfaces indicated by Architect following procedures outlined in Contract Documents and Product Data submission specified above. 3. After approval of samples, proceed with application of paint system throughout Project. Approved samples will serve as standard of acceptability. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver specified products in sealed, original containers with Manufacturer's original labels intact on each container. 2. Deliver amount of materials necessary to meet Project requirements in single shipment. 3. Notify Architect two working days before delivery of coatings. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store materials in single place. 2. Keep storage area clean and rectify any damage to area at completion of work of this Section. 3. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F (13 deg C) minimum. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Perform painting operations at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by Manufacturer for each operation and for each product for both interior and exterior work. ommon Painting And Coating Requirements - 3 - 099001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 2. Apply painting systems at lighting level of 540 Lux (50 foot candles) minimum on surfaces to be painted. a. Inspection of painting work shall take place under same lighting conditions as application. b. If painting and coating work is applied under temporary lighting, deficiencies discovered upon installation of permanent lighting will be considered latent damage as defined in MPI Manual, PDCA P1-92. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. b. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of 'Architectural Painting Specification Manual' by Master Painters Institute (MPI). c. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under Approved Product List section of MPI Painting Manual. d. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in coating system. e. Color Levels: 1) Color Level II: a) Number and placement of interior and exterior paint colors and gloss levels shall be as defined by Color Level II from MPI Manual, PDCA P3-93 as modified in following paragraph. b) No more than one paint color or gloss level will be selected for same substrate within designated interior rooms or exterior areas. B. Materials: 1. Materials used for any painting system shall be from single manufacturer unless approved otherwise in writing by painting system manufacturers and by Architect. Include manufacturer approvals in Product Data submittal. 2. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other painting materials shall be pure, be compatible with other coating materials, bear identifying labels on containers, and be of highest quality of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI manuals. Tinting color shall be best grade of type recommended by Manufacturer of paint or stain used on Project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATORS A. Approved Applicators: 1. Meet Quality Assurance Applicator Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Directing applicator to begin painting and coating work will indicate that substrates to receive painting and coating materials have been previously inspected as part of work of other Sections and are complete and ready for application of painting and coating systems as specified in those Sections. B. Pre -Installation Testing: Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 4 - 099001 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Before beginning work of this Section, examine, and test surfaces to be painted or coated for adhesion of painting and coating systems. 2. Report in writing to Architect of conditions that will adversely affect adhesion of painting and coating work. 3. Do not apply painting and coating systems until party responsible for adverse condition has corrected adverse condition. C. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Report defects in substrates that become apparent after application of primer or first finish coat to Architect in writing and do not proceed with further work on defective substrate until such defects are corrected by party responsible for defect. PREPARATION A. Protection Of In -Place Conditions: 1. Protect other finish work and adjacent materials during painting. Do not splatter, drip, or paint surfaces not intended to be painted. These items will not be spelled out in detail but pay special attention to the following: a. Do not paint finish copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or monel metal except as explicitly specified. b. Keep cones of ceiling speakers completely free of paint. In all cases where painting of metal speaker grilles is required, paint without grilles mounted to speakers and without grilles on ceiling. c. On existing work where ceiling is to be painted, speakers and grilles are already installed, and ceiling color is not being changed, mask off metal grilles installed on ceiling speakers. It ceiling color is being changed, remove metal grilles and paint, and mask off ceiling speakers. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements and requirements of Manufacturer for each painting system specified, unless instructed differently in Contract Documents. Bring conflicts to attention of Architect in writing. 2. Fill minor holes and cracks in wood surfaces to receive paint or stain. 3. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of loose dirt. Clean and dust surfaces before painting or finishing. 4. Do no exterior painting while surface is damp, unless recommended by Manufacturer, nor during rainy or frosty weather. Interior surfaces shall be dry before painting. Moisture content of materials to be painted shall be within tolerances acceptable to Paint Manufacturer. 5. Sand woodwork smooth in direction of grain leaving no sanding marks. Clean surfaces before proceeding with stain or first coat application. APPLICATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with other trades for materials and systems that require painting before installation. 2. Schedule painting and coating work to begin when work upon which painting and coating work is dependent has been completed. Schedule installation of pre -finished and non -painted items, which are to be installed on painted surfaces, after application of final finishes. B. Paint or finish complete all surfaces to be painted or coated as described in Contract Documents, including but not limited to following items. 1. Finish casework and wood trims that are specified to be installed under Section 06 2001 and that are not called out to be factory -or shop -finished. Back prime wood elements to be installed against concrete or masonry or that may be subjected to moisture. 2. Paint mechanical, electrical, and audio/visual items that require field painting as indicated in Contract Documents. These include but are not limited to: a. Electrical panel and disconnect enclosures. Dommon Painting And Coating Requirements - 5 - 099001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, I 3. Metal reveals at ceiling access doors. 4. Paint inside of chases in occupied spaces flat black for 18 inches (450 mm) or beyond sightline, whichever is greater. C. Apply sealant in gaps 3/16 inch (5 mm) and smaller between two substrates that are both to be painted or coated. Sealants in other gaps furnished and installed under Section 07 9213. D. On wood to receive a transparent finish, putty nail holes in wood after application of stain using nature colored type to match wood stain color. Bring putty flush with adjoining surfaces. E. In multiple coat paint work, tint each succeeding coat with slightly lighter color, but approximating shade of final coat, so it is possible to check application of specified number of coats. Tint final coat t( required color. F. Spread materials smoothly and evenly. Apply coats to not less than wet and dry film thicknesses and at spreading rates for specified products as recommended by Manufacturer. G. Touch up suction spots after application of first finish coat. H. Paint shall be thoroughly dry and surfaces clean before applying succeeding coats. I. Use fine sandpaper between coats as necessary to produce even, smooth surfaces. J. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean, sharp, and without overlapping. K. Finished work shall be a'Properly Painted Surface' as defined in this Section. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Correct deficiencies in workmanship as required to leave surfaces in conformance with 'Properly Painted Surface,' as defined in this Section. 2. Correction of'Latent Damage' and 'Damage Caused By Others,' as defined in this Section, is not included in work of this Section. 3.6 CLEANING A. General: 1. As work proceeds and upon completion of work of any painting Section, remove paint spots from floors, walls, glass, or other surfaces and leave work clean, orderly, and in acceptable condition. B. Waste Management: 1. Remove rags and waste used in painting operations from building each night. Take every precaution to avoid danger of fire. 2. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, caulking, empty paint cans, cleaning rags, etc.) shall be disposed of subject to regulations of applicable authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Remove debris caused by work of paint Sections from premises and properly dispose. 4. Retain cleaning water and filter out and properly dispose of sediments. END OF SECTION Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 6 - 099001 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 ATTACHMENTS ART 4 - PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE A. Colors: 1. Interior: a. Class One Color Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200. 1) Interior Gypsum Board, Plaster: Whisper White by Pittsburg Paints. 2) Interior Metal: Whisper White by Pittsburg Paints. b. Interior Clear Finished Wood: Match other interior clear finished wood building elements. See Section 09 9324. ;ommon Painting And Coating Requirements - 7 - 099001 BLANK PAGE 7473£3 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9112 EXTERIOR PAINTED FERROUS METAL kRT1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting exterior ungalvanized iron and steel surfaces as described in Contract Documents. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001. 4RT 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. B. Description: 1. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) REX 5.1 K Waterborne Light Industrial Coating. C. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Systems specified are in addition to prime coats provided under other Sections of Project Manual. b. Finish Requirements: Use MPI Premium Grade finish requirements for work of this Section c. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. D. Materials: 1. All paints and coatings. a. Primer Coat: MPI Product 107, b. Finish Coats: MPI Product 163, (MPI Gloss Level 5). ART 3 - EXECUTION APPLICATION 'Primer, Rust -Inhibitive, Water Based'. 'Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi -Gloss A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. New Surfaces: Clean metal to be painted of rust, mill scale, grease, oil, and welding spatters, burrs, flux, slag, and fume. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying primer coat. xterior Painted Ferrous Metal 1 - 099112 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, C. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated and chalked existing paint and rust down to sound substrate by scraping o power tools. 2. Clean existing sound painted surfaces as well as scraped and sanded existing painted surfaces as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying primer coat. 3. Spot prime bare metal surfaces followed by a prime coat over entire surface to be painted. 4. Lightly sand entire surface. 5. Clean surface as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. 6. Apply specified finish coats. END OF SECTION Exterior Painted Ferrous Metal - 2 - 099112 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing, priming, and finish painting interior gypsum board and plaster surfaces as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: 'Gypsum Board': a. Priming new interior gypsum board surfaces to receive sheet wall covering system or texturing. b. Pre -installation conference. 2. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements': a. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. 3. Section 09 9413: Textured finishes. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 2900. a. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 2900, review following: 1) Review finish level requirements of gypsum wallboard as specified in Section 09 2900. 2. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers and Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. B. Description: 1. Rest Rooms And Custodial Rooms: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.2F Waterborne Epoxy Finish system. b. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 9.2E Waterborne Epoxy Finish system. 2. All Other: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.213 Latex Finish system. b. Previously Finished Work: Use MPI(r) RIN 9.26 Latex Finish system. C. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster - 1 - 099123 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2i, c. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade requirements. d. Gloss/ Sheen Required: 1) Rest Rooms, Font Room, And Custodial Rooms: Gloss Level 6. 2) Chapel Ceiling: Gloss Level 1 or 2. 3) Remaining Painted Surfaces: Gloss Level 5. D. Materials: 1. Primers: a. MPI Product 50, 'Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior'. 2. Finish Coats: a. Rest Rooms, Font Room, And Custodial Rooms: 1) Buildings with only Gypsum Board surfaces in rooms: a) MPI Product 115, 'Epoxy -Modified Latex, Interior, Gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6)'. 2) Buildings with CMU and Gypsum Board surfaces in same rooms: a) MPI Product 77, 'Epoxy, Gloss'. b. Chapel Ceiling: 1) MPI Product 53, 'Latex, Interior, Flat (MPI Gloss Level 1)'. c. Remaining Painted Surfaces: 1) MPI Product 141, 'Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi -Gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)'. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. Interface With Other Work: Properly clean and paint light cove interiors before installation of light fixtures. C. New Surfaces: 1. Primer: Apply primer to be covered with other paint coats with roller only, or with spray gun and back -rolled. D. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping or sanding. Feather i edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. 2. Clean surface with mild soap and water, or with tri -sodium phosphate (TSP). Wash surfaces that! have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent recommended by Paint' Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces. 3. Spackle and tape cracks. Sand to smooth finish and spot prime. 4. Sand or chemically etch existing painted surface as required to prepare surface to accept new paint. 5. Re -clean surface. 6. Apply primer coat. 7. Apply finish coats. END OF SECTION Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster 2 - 099123 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting interior metal surfaces as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 5871: 'Metal Brackets'. 2. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements': a. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001. B. Sequencing: 1. Paint brackets furnished under Section 05 5871 before installation of bracket. SART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. B. Description 1. Ferrous Metal: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.1 B Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. b. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 5.1 B Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. 2. Galvanized Metal: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.3J Latex Finish system b. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 5.3AH Latex Finish system. 3. Aluminum: a. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.4E Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. b. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) REX 5.4E Light Industrial Finish system. C. Performance: 1. Design Requirements: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. c. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade finish requirements. d. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. D. Materials: nterior Painted Metal - 1 - 099124 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,1 1. Primers: a. Ferrous Metal: MPI Product 107, 'Primer, Rust -Inhibitive, Water Based'. b. Galvanized Metal: MPI Product 134: 'Primer, Galvanized, Water Based'. c. Aluminum: MPI Product 95:'Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum'. 2. Finish Coats: MPI Product 153: 'Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi -Gloss (MP� Gloss Level 5)'. I PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: 1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. 2. Systems specified are in addition to prime coats furnished under other Sections. i B. New Surfaces: Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust canno( be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer coat. i C. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping and sanding. Feather i edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. Spot prime bare metal surfaces immediately. 2. Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer coat. 3. Clean existing sound painted surfaces as well as scraped and sanded existing painted surfaces as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. 4. Apply prime coat over entire surface to be painted. 5. Lightly sand entire surface. 6. Clean surface as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. 7. Apply finish coats. END OF SECTION Interior Painted Metal - 2 - 099124 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9125 INTERIOR PAINTED WOOD 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting woodwork as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements': a. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Products and Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. B. Description: 1. Systems: a. All Other: 1) New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 6.3T or U Latex Finish system. 2) Previously Finished Surfaces: MPI(r) Rin 6.3U Latex Finish system. C. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. b. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. c. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade finish requirements. d. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. D. Materials: 1. Woodwork: a. Primer Coat: MPI Product 39, ' Sealer, Alkyd, Interior'. b. Finish Coats: MPI Product 153 (MPI Gloss Level 5)'. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood' or MPI Product 45, 'Primer 'Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi -Gloss nterior Painted Wood - 1 - 099125 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, I PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. Interface With Other Work: 1. Properly clean and paint light cove interiors before installation of light fixtures. 2. Where back -priming is required, apply one (1) coat of primer. C. New Surfaces: 1. Spot prime nail holes, cracks, and blemishes before and after puttying. 2. Apply stain blocker or other product recommended by Paint Manufacturer to knots before applying primer coat. D. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping and sanding. Feather edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. Spot prime bare wood areas on woodwork. 2. Wash surfaces that have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent recommended by Paint Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces. 3. Apply finish coats. END OF SECTION Interior Painted Wood - 2 - 0991251 174738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9324 INTERIOR CLEAR -FINISHED HARDWOOD ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and finishing of interior clear finished hardwood as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 2210: 'Miscellaneous Wood Trim'. 2. Section 06 4114: 'Wood -Veneer -Faced Architectural Cabinets'. 3. Section 06 4115: 'Rostrum Casework'. 4. Section 06 4512: 'Architectural Woodwork Wood Trim'. 5. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements': a. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. 6. Section 09 0193: Refinishing existing interior clear finished hardwood. 7. Section 12 6113: 'Upholstered Audience Seating'. 8. Section 12 6713: 'Pews'. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. B. Reference Standards: 1. Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association / American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI/KCMA At 61.1-2000 (R2005) 23 -Jan -2001 'Recommended Performance and Construction Standards for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets.' ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 9001, review following: a. Review control sample. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Requirements for samples are specified in Related Requirement Sections listed above. b. Design Criteria: 1) Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Before beginning finish work, submit Finish Manufacturer's literature or certification that finish material meets requirements of ANSI / KCMA At 61.1. iterior Clear -Finished Hardwood - 1 - 099324 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Stain: MPI 90,'Stain, Semi -Transparent, for Interior Wood'. 2. Clear Finish Coats: a. Field Finished: I 1) Chemcraft International Inc: a) First, Second, And Third Coats: 20 Sheen Opticlear Pre -Catalyzed Lacquer. 2) ICI Dulux /Trinity: a) First Coat: ICE Vinyl Sanding Sealer. b) Second And Third Coats: ICI Pre -Catalyzed Lacquer. 3) Lilly / Valspar: a) First, Second, And Third Coats: 20 Sheen Pre -Catalyzed Lacquer 587E208. 4) Sherwin-Williams: a) First Coat: T67F3 Vinyl Sealer. b) Second And Third Coats: T77F38 Sherwood Pre -Catalyzed Lacquer DRE. b. Mill Finished: Architectural Woodwork finished in a mill may use one (1) coat of Vinyl Sealer and two (2) coats of Conversion Varnish or three (3) coats of Conversion Varnish from one (1) of the approved Finish Manufacturers, as recommended by Finish Manufacturer. c. Products meeting testing requirements for finishes of ANSI / KCMA At 61.1 may be used upon approval of submission by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 3. Color: a. Design Criteria: 1) Finish to match Owner selected sample. b. Approved Finish: j 1) Performance standard: Owner provided sample of existing wood item from existing i project to be used as Control Sample. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: 1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. 2. Sand entire exposed surface of item to be finished lightly with 120 to 150 non-stearated sandpaper and clean before applying dye or stain. 3. Apply stain in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to attain correct color. 4. Scuff sand with 220 non-stearated sandpaper between application of application stain and first finish coat. 5. If wood is finished before installation, finish cut ends and other unfinished, exposed surfaces same as previously finished surfaces after installation of wood. B. Where back -priming is required, apply one coat of finish material. C. Architectural Woodwork Door Surfaces: 1. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges before faces. 2. Finish architectural woodwork doors with no hardware applied to doors. D. Softwood Components: Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood - 2 - 099324 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Where Douglas Fir serves as a component part (shelves, backs, etc) of hardwood cabinets, use same specification as for hardwood finish, but as sufficient 1:1 mix of sanding sealer / Mineral spirits with stain to make color of Pine or Douglas Fir grains approximate color of finish hardwood. 2. Coat interior surfaces of Drawers with one (1) coat high gloss urethane varnish. END OF SECTION nterior Clear -Finished Hardwood - 3 - 099324 BLANK PAGE )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 09 9413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and apply texturing on walls and ceilings as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900: Priming. 2. Section 09 9001: 'Common Painting And Coating Requirements': a. Pre -installation conference for Sections under 09 9000 heading 'Paints and Coatings'. 3. Section 09 9123: Finish painting. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Drywall Texture: Compound rolled, sprayed, or troweled onto sheetrock after taping and floating of joints is complete. Uses same material as joint compound, but thinned down with water and applied to wall surface: a. Orange Peel: Sprayed texture leaves light to heavy splatter on walls. Resembles peel of orange. If done with fine spray, can be one of the lightest, least noticeable of the texture styles. b. Skip Trowel - Texture is applied to walls with trowel. Trowel marks may be left on surface to give a rustic, hand crafted look. c. Smooth - Smooth application of texture over sheetrock wall that feathers out sheetrock joints, and creates even, non -textured wall. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 09 9001. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 09 9001, review following: a. Review control sample. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: Provide minimum of three (3) 24 inch (600 mm) square control samples on primed gypsum wallboard of 'light orange peel' texture to show possible variations. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Samples: 1. Before performing work of this Section, prepare control sample. 2. Architect will inspect control sample at pre -installation conference following preparation of control sample. When sample is approved, work of this Section may proceed. Approved sample will be kept at site at all times work of this section is being performed. iterior Textured Finishing - 1 - 099413 5074738 June 2012 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. b. U S Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria, field verify and match existing: a. Light Orange Peel. b. Skip Trowel. c. Smooth. C. Materials: 1. Class Two Quality Standards: See Section 01 6200. a. ProForm Perfect Spray EM/HF by National Gypsum. b. Sheetrock Wall & Ceiling Texture by U S Gypsum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION Rexburg 2, A. Location: 1. if room locations are not shown on Finish Schedule in Contract Drawings, apply texturing finish a' all rooms except Restrooms (if gypsum board finishing is required) , Mechanical and other Utility areas. If any question, contact Architect for direction. B. After gypsum board is taped, sanded, and primed, apply texture. Closely match samples accepted by Architect. END OF SECTION Interior Textured Finishing - 2 - 0994131 DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 1000 INFORMATION SPECIALTIES 101113 FIXED CHALKBOARDS 101116 FIXED MARKERBOARDS 101495 MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE 12000 INTERIOR SPECIALTIES 102113 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS able of Contents - 1 - Document 10 0000 BLANK PAGE 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 101113 FIXED CHALKBOARDS ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Chalkboards and specified hardware: Visual Display Board Type 1 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Chalkboards. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc., Norcross, GA www.porcelainenamel.com. a. PEI -1002, Manual and Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Writing Surfaces (Whiteboards and Chalkboards) 2002. SUBMITTALS Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. b. Printed cleaning instructions. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance instructions. 2) Printed cleaning instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturer Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturer's documentation: a) Manufacturer's product literature. b) Color selections. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Letter from Manufacturer certifying Contract Documents have been complied with and guarantee against faulty workmanship and materials for five years. 'ixed Chalkboards - 1 - 101113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. ADP Lemco Corporation, West Jordan, UT www,adplemco.com. B. Description: 1. Color: a. Dark Gray. C. Chalkboard: 1. Face: a. Face shall be steel, 28 ga (0.4 mm) minimum, coated two sides with fused ground coat, and, finished one side with vitreous porcelain enamel designed for use with chalk. b. Coating shall meet requirements of PEI -1002. 2. Core: a. Core shall be mat -formed particleboard. 1) 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick medium -density or 2) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick low-density minimum. 3. Backing: a. Backing shall be 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) minimum aluminum foil. 4. Trim: a. Extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum with satin etched, natural aluminum anodized finish. b. Extrusions shall match thickness of units without wedging. c. Round all sharp edges. d. 2 inch (50 mm) high map rail. 5. Map Clips: a. Manufacturer's standard. b. Provide map clips on chalkboards as follows: 1) 60 Inches (1 500 mm) And Shorter: Two clips. 2) Over 60 Inches (1 500 mm): Four clips. 6. Mounting Hardware: a. Suitable for wall conditions. D. Fabrication: 1. Prefabricate units at factory and ship to Project site in one piece, except for chalk trays. 2. Units shall be of first quality and lamination done by approved standards of industry. 3. Furnish printed cleaning instructions with each shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount boards square and level. 1. Shim as necessary to provide permanent installation and smooth operation. 2. Anchor boards securely to wall following Manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Anchor concealed hangers with screws at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. B. Mounting fasteners shall penetrate framing lumber or blocking 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum. Use toggle bolts or expansion bolts in masonry walls. C. After attaching map clips, apply permanently attached end cap or screw to prevent removal of map clips. Fixed Chalkboards - 2 - 1011131 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 END OF SECTION ixed Chalkboards - 3 - 101113 BLANK PAGE )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 101116 FIXED MARKERBOARDS ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Markerboard units: Visual Display Board Type 3. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish Markerboards. PART 2 of this Section establishes quality of materials for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc., Norcross, GA www,porcelainenamel.com. a. PEI -1002, Manual and Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Writing Surfaces (Whiteboards and Chalkboards) 2002. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Published installation instructions. b. Printed cleaning instructions. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Maintenance instructions. 2) Printed cleaning instructions. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturer Warranty. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturer's documentation: a) Manufacturer's product literature. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Letter from Manufacturer certifying Contract Documents have been complied with and guarantee against faulty workmanship and materials for five (5) years. ART 2 -PRODUCTS OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: ixed Markerboards I - 1 - 101116 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,1 1. Platinum Visual Systems, Corona, CA www.pvusa.com. B. Description: 1. Color: White. C. Markerboard: 1. Face shall be steel, 28 ga (0.4 mm) minimum, coated two (2) sides with fused ground coat, and finished one (1) side with vitreous porcelain enamel. 2. Coatings shall meet requirements of PEI -1002: a. All Rooms: 1) Coatings shall be for marker use. 3. Core shall be mat -formed particleboard. a. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick medium -density. b. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick low-density minimum. 4. Backing: a. Backing shall be 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) minimum aluminum foil. 5. Trim: a. Extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum with satin etched, natural aluminum anodized finish. b. Extrusions shall match thickness of units without wedging. c. Round all sharp edges. d. 2 inch (50 mm) high map rail. 6. Trays: a. Provide 2 inch (50 mm) radius rounded ends on marker trays. b. Marker trays with squared, sharp ends are not acceptable. 7. Map Clips: a. Manufacturer's standard. b. Provide two map clips on markerboards. 8. Mounting Hardware: a. Suitable for wall conditions. D. Fabrication: 1. Prefabricate units at factory and ship to jobsite in one piece, except for marker trays. 2. Units shall be of first quality and lamination done by approved standards of industry. 3. Furnish printed cleaning instructions with each shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount boards square and level. 1. Shim as necessary to provide permanent installation and smooth operation. 2. Anchor boards securely to wall following Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3. Anchor concealed hangers with screws at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. B. Mounting fasteners shall penetrate framing lumber or blocking 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum. Use toggle bolts or expansion bolts in masonry walls. C. After attaching map clips, apply permanently attached end cap or screw to prevent removal of map clips. END OF SECTION Fixed Markerboards 2 - 101116 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 101495 MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE ART1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Owner -furnished interior signs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 6400: Owner will furnish designated interior signs. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. ART 2 -PRODUCTS OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Four Approved Standard Interior Signs. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Visual Identity Office: a. Contact Information: 1) 50 E. North Temple St. Rm. 2350, Salt Lake City, UT 84150-3232. 2) Phone: 1-801-240-1302. 3) Fax: 1-801-240-5997. 4) vidoffice@Idschurch.org. 2. Room Signs: Molded clear acrylic sub -surface graphics sign with set -screw to attach to included mounting bracket. a. Provide tactile / braille features in signage. 3. Cabinet Door Signs: Flat clear acrylic sub -surface graphics sign with mounting adhesive in position. 4. Color: a. Background: Blue. b. Lettering: White. ART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Install interior signs square and plumb: 1. Room Signs: a. Install bracket using two screws. Use proper anchor for substrate. b. Attach sign to bracket using set -screw. c. Mount signs as described in Contract Drawings. 2. Cabinet Signs: a. Remove adhesive protective layer. b. Position sign correctly and apply to door. c. Roll sign to secure to door, taking care not to damage sign. d. Mount signs as described in Contract Drawings. END OF SECTION liscellaneous Interior Signage - 1 - 101495 BLANK PAGE 74138 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 10 2113 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS %RT1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install metal toilet compartments as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1100: Blocking in wood framing for compartment installation and door bumper. 2. Section 10 2813: Commercial Toilet Accessories. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM At 67-99(2009), 'Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.' b. ASTM B86 -09b, 'Standard Specification for Zinc and Zinc -Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die Castings.' SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Color selection. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet. b) Color selection. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle in compliance with Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty. fetal Toilet Compartments - 1 - 102113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Accurate Partitions Inc, Lyons, IL www.accuratepartitions.com. 2. AMPCO Products Inc, Miami, FL www.ampco.com. 3. Flush -Metal Partition Corp, Maspeth, NY www.flushmetal.com. 4. Global Steel Products Corp, Eastanollee, GA www.globalpartitions.com. 5. Hadrian Inc, Mentor, OH www.hadrian-inc.com. 6. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp, Freeport, NY www.knickerbockerpartition.com. 7. Metpar, Westbury, NY www.metpar.com. 8. Equal as Approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Toilet And Miscellaneous Partitions: 1. Floor -mounted, overhead -braced. 2. Panels: a. Galvanized bonderized steel sheets (minimum 0.00015 inch (0.004 mm) zinc coating). b. Edges bound interlocked with drawn molding welded on corners. c. Corners welded and ground smooth. d. Sound deadening honeycomb core. e. Provide wood blocking on all panels that have grab bars. f. Gauge: 1) Doors: 22 ga (0.08 mm) minimum. 2) Panels: 22 ga (one mm) minimum. 3) Pilasters: 20 ga (one mm) minimum. 4) Screens: 20 ga (one mm) minimum. 3. Posts: a. 20 ga (one mm) minimum of same construction and finish as panels. b. One per stall. 4. Headrails: a. Aluminum. b. 20 ga (one mm) minimum of same construction and finish as panels. c. Anti -grip design. d. One per stall. 5. Plinths: a. Type 304 stainless steel, Number 4 finish. b. 3 inch (76 mm) minimum high, secured with concealed clips. 6. Anchorages and fasteners: a. Concealed: Non -corrosive, protective finish. b. Tamper resistant screws. 7. Hardware: a. Each door: 1) Gravity type hinges with double handed, nylon bottom cam, adjustable for partial door closing position, bottom hinge finished flush with door bottom. 2) Sliding or concealed door bolt with emergency access. 3) Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. 4) Coat hook/ door bumper. b. Finish: Chrome plated. c. Meet requirements of ASTM B86, Alloy AG 40A. B. Urinal Partition: 1. Basic construction same as panels above, floor mounted. 2. Width to be 16 inches (400 mm) minimum. Metal Toilet Compartments - 2 - 10 2113 374738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 FINISHES A. Finish And Color: 1. Powder -coated paint finish. 2. Class One Color Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200. ART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Field verify dimensions. 2. Verify that necessary blocking has been installed in framed walls for partition installation and for place where coat hook / door bumper will strike wall. INSTALLATION A. Install pilasters rigid, plumb, and level. Anchor pilaster to floor with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum threaded studs in expansion shields embedded 2 inches (50 mm) into concrete slab below setting bed. B. Secure panels to walls with two stirrup brackets minimum attached near top and bottom of each panel. Use fasteners of length to provide one inch (25 mm) embedment into blocking or masonry. C. Secure overhead brace to face sheets with two fasteners minimum per face. Set door tops parallel with brace. Set door bottom 12 inches (300 mm) above floor. D. Plinth to be level with and snug to floor. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: Non -conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Replace damaged or severely scratched materials with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner. ADJUSTING A. Lubricate hardware as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return to nearly closed position. Aetal Toilet Compartments - 3 - 102113 Almond a. Accurate: 920 Almond b. Ampco: 466PC Porcelain c. Global: Almond 2103 d. Flush -Metal: 35 Beige or 70 Vanilla e. Hadrian: Almond 603 f. Knickerbocker: Almond 1111 g. Metpar: Almond 300 ART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Field verify dimensions. 2. Verify that necessary blocking has been installed in framed walls for partition installation and for place where coat hook / door bumper will strike wall. INSTALLATION A. Install pilasters rigid, plumb, and level. Anchor pilaster to floor with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) minimum threaded studs in expansion shields embedded 2 inches (50 mm) into concrete slab below setting bed. B. Secure panels to walls with two stirrup brackets minimum attached near top and bottom of each panel. Use fasteners of length to provide one inch (25 mm) embedment into blocking or masonry. C. Secure overhead brace to face sheets with two fasteners minimum per face. Set door tops parallel with brace. Set door bottom 12 inches (300 mm) above floor. D. Plinth to be level with and snug to floor. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work: Non -conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Replace damaged or severely scratched materials with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner. ADJUSTING A. Lubricate hardware as recommended by Manufacturer. B. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return to nearly closed position. Aetal Toilet Compartments - 3 - 102113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,! C. Perform final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware, and other operating parts of partition assembly just before Substantial Completion. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove protective masking. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings, and accessories. B. Touch-up minor scratches and other finish imperfections using materials and methods recommended by Manufacturer. END OF SECTION Metal Toilet Compartments - 4 - 102113 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 10 2813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Selected accessories for Rest Rooms and Mother's Room: a. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Container. b. Single Robe Hook. c. Mirrors. d. Grab Bars. e. Shelf. 2. Custodial Room accessories: a. Utility Shelf. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Soap dispensers, paper towel dispensers, and toilet tissue dispensers furnished and installed by FM Group. 2. Section 06 1100: Blocking. 3. Section 06 2001: Installation. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule showing items used, location where installed, and proper attaching devices for substrate. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Final, executed copy of Warranty. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty against rusting. ART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer List: a. A & J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY www.ajwashroom.com. b. American Accessories Inc (AAI), Denison, TX www.aaiusaonline.com. c. American Specialties Inc (ASI), Yonkers, NY www.americanspecialties.com. ommercial Toilet Accessories - 1 - 102813 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,11 d. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc, North Hollywood, CA www.bobrick.com or Bobrick Washroom Equipment of Canada Ltd, Scarborough, ON (416) 298-1611. e. Bradley Corp, Menomonee Falls, WI www.bradleycorp.com. f. General Accessory Manufacturing Co (GAMCO), Durant, OK www.gamcousa.com. B. Materials: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Rest Rooms: 1) Sanitar Na kin Dis osal Container: PL& J AAI ASI Bobrick BradleyGAMCO Bradley GAMCO U590 NM -10 0852 B-270 4781-15 ND -1 2) Sing! Robe Hook with Ex osed Fasteners: A & F ASII Bobrick Bradley GAMCO UX110B I OR -65153 I 73406 I B-671 9114 5153B 3) Mirrors: Glass with stainless steel channel frame with No. 4 Satin finish 4) 5) A & J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradle GAMCO U711 CA Series 1 0620 B-165 700 Series I C Series urao tsars: a) Concealed mount, 18 ga (1.27 mm), type 304 stainless steel, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter, and peened (non -slip) finish in configuration shown on Drawings. Shelf: 18 ea (1.27 mm). stainless steel with Nn. 4 Satin finish_ R innhps (i 5n mm\ W irl A & J AAI ASI Bobrick Bradlev GAMICO U775 WV -6 0692 B-296 756 S-6 b. Custodial Rooms: 1) Utility Shelf: Size as shown on Drawings. PUA & J 1 AAI 1 ASI T Bobrick Bradle GAMCO J13 I MN Series 1 1300 Series I B-224 Series 9933 Series US Series c. Mother's Rooms: 1) 24 inch by 60 inch (600 mm by 1 500 mm) mirror, of same type as specified for Rest Rooms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install using mounting devices proper for base structure. B. Where possible, mount like items in adjoining compartments back-to-back on same partition. END OF SECTION Commercial Toilet Accessories - 2 - 10 2813 DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 16000 ENTERTAINMENT EQUIPMENT 116144 PLATFORM CURTAINS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS able of Contents - 1 - Document 11 0000 BLANK PAGE 174738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 11 6144 PLATFORM CURTAINS ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install Platform proscenium drape as described in Contract Documents. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Inherently Flame Resistant: Material that meets requirements set forth in NFPA 701. Inherently flame resistant fabric is woven from fibers that are non-combustible for life of material. 2. Proscenium Drape: Curtain between audience and stage or platform. B. Reference Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 701-2010,'Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films'. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data: a. Color and style selections. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's Certificates of flame -proofing. 2. Qualification Statement: a. Fabricator / Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Manufacturer's and Fabric Supplier's literature or cut sheets for each element of system. b) Typewritten copy of operating instructions. c) Color and style selections. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Material used shall be inherently flame retardant with a flame spread rating meeting code requirements when tested in accordance with NFPA 701: a. Attach permanent tag to each panel attesting to flame retardant quality of material used. B. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator / Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: 'latform Curtains - 1 - 11 6144 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 4 a. Minimum three (3) satisfactorily completed installations of comparable quality, scope, simila size, and complexity in past two (2) years before bidding. b. Upon request, submit documentation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers / Suppliers: 1. Contact Information: a. Automatic Devices Cc (ADC), Allentown, PA www.automaticdevices.com b. H & H Specialties Inc, South EI Monte, CA www.hhspecialties.com. c. JB Martin, Leesville, SC www.jbmartin.com. d. KM Fabrics Inc, Greenville, SC (800) 845-1896 or (803) 295-2550. B. Materials: 1. Curtains: a. General: 1) Fabrics shall be inherently flame resistant or flame -proofed in compliance with New York Flame -Proofing Code or with local codes, whichever is most restrictive. 2) Use no less than 1/2 widths of material in fabricating curtains. b. Proscenium Drape: 1) Provide fullness equal to more than 1-1/2 times opening width. 2) Box pleated at top to 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) heavy-dutyjute webbing. 3) Arrange curtain so center of each pleat is provided with brass grommet and S -hook. Pleats and grommets to be 12 inches (305 mm) on center. 4) Side Hems: a) Center overlap edges shall be double faced 27 inches (685 mm). b) Off -platform edges shall lap 2-1/2 inch (64 mm). 5) Bottom Hems: a) 5 inch (125 mm) lap. b) Provide on drapes, 4 inches (100 mm), 8 ounce (227 gram) weights, sewn in separate reinforced pockets at corners and vertical hems. 6) Proscenium curtain shall be of width to provide 24 inches (610 mm) minimum on center! overlap and at least 24 inches (610 mm) offstage extension on each end. 7) Category Four Approved Patterns. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) JB Martin: Overture. b) KM Fabrics: Majestic. 8) Category Four Approved Colors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) JB Martin: 348 Ink. b) KM Fabrics: 4164 Ink Blue. 9) Category Four Approved Fabrics. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) 2703 Overature by JB Martin. b) Majestic by KM Fabrics. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set equipment so Platform is properly masked. END OF SECTION Platform Curtains - 2 - 11 6144 DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 2000 WINDOW TREATMENTS 122200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 6000 MULTIPLE SEATING 126113 UPHOLSTERED AUDIENCE SEATING 126713 PEWS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS able of Contents - 1 - Document 12 0000 BLANK PAGE 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 12 2200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES %RT1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install draperies, curtains, and hardware as described in Contract Documents. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Flame -proofing: Process of treating materials chemically so that they will not support combustion. 2. Inherently Flame Resistant: Material that meets requirements set forth in NFPA 701. Inherently flame resistant fabric is woven from fibers that are non-combustible for life of material. B. Reference Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 701-2010,'Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films'. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Flame -proofing literature. 2. Samples: a. 24 inch (600 mm) wide and 48 inch (1 200 mm) high sample including all specified elements of finished curtains, including flame retardant certification tag. Do not fabricate Project drapes until sample has been reviewed and approved by Architect. b. Submit sample with Product Data submittal. Sample will serve as standard by which to evaluate Project curtains. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Certificate of flame proofing. 2. Qualification Statement: a. Fabricator / Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Operating and maintenance instructions. b. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Fabric Supplier's literature or cut sheets on fabric. b) Curtain Rod Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets. c) Color and style selection. d) Certificate of flame -proofing. urtains And Drapes - 1 - 122200 5074738 June 2012 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Rexburg 2,i A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Material used shall be inherently flame retardant with a flame spread rating meeting code requirements when tested in accordance with NFPA 701. 2. Attach permanent tag to each panel attesting to flame retardant quality of material used. B. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator / Installer: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: a. Minimum three (3) satisfactorily completed installations of comparable quality, scope, S size, and complexity in past two (2) years before bidding. b. Upon request, submit documentation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers / Suppliers: 1. Carole, Augusta, GA www.carolefabrics.com. 2. Charles Samulsen, New York City, NY www.csamelson.com. 3. Conso / Wright, West Warren, MI www.conso.com. 4. Coral, Div Charles Samelson, New York City, NY www.coralofchicago.com. 5. Gabe Humphries, Div of Meyer Drapery Services Inc., Champaign, IL (800) 637-4885. 6. Graber Div of Springs Industries, Montgomery, PA www.graberblinds.com. 7. Hanes Fabric Co, Conover, NC www.hanesfabric.com. 8. InterSpec, Allenwood, NJ (800) 526-2800 or (732) 938-4114. 9. Kirsch Co, Freeport, IL www.kirsch.com. 10. Rockland Industries Inc, Baltimore, MD www.roc-lon.com. 11. Rowley Co, Gastonia, NC. www.rowleyco.com, B. Materials: 1. Fabric: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Casements: a) Handcart by Carole: White, Snow. b) Krafty or Dayton by Carole: White c) Layton by InterSpec: White. d) Snowbird by InterSpec: Ivory, White. 2) Opaques: a) 5th Avenue or Bourbon Street (off white) by Coral. b) Fayette, Rosette, or Dixie by Interspec: White. 3) Blackout Drapery. a) Liteless by Coral. b) FlameTrol 540 - White by Hanes. c) Roc -Lon Budget Blackout (3 -pass) FR, white/white or ivory/white by Rockland Industries. 2. Crinoline / Buckram: a. Heavy or Extra Heavy grade, 4 inches (100 mm) wide, woven permanent goods. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) BW74 by R H Rowley Co. 2) 61421 by Conso. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 3. Drapery Hooks: Stainless steel, standard 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) hook with pointed hook top. 4. Drapery Rods: a. Outside Mount: 1) Rods shall be sufficient width, window width plus 1/3, to allow drape to stack clear of window opening but no wider. This requirement may be modified as follows: Curtains And Drapes - 2 - 1222001 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a) Where Drawings detail differently. b) Where wall, cabinets, mechanical equipment, or other obstruction requires modification. c) Where symmetry of a room would indicate desirability of an exception. b. Traverse rods shall include wall or floor mounted tension pulleys for endless cord operation. c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Kirsch: a) 'Super Fine': Less than 15 feet (4.57 m) long. b) 'Architrac': 15 feet (4.57 m) long and longer. 2) Graber Super Heavy Duty 600 Series by Springs Industries. C. Fabrication: 1. Double top and bottom hems unless specifically specified otherwise. 2. Provide necessary weights at seam and side hems. 3. Fullness shall be minimum of 2-1/2 times width of space covered by drape. 4. Space pleats 4 inches (100 mm) maximum center of pleat to center of pleat. 5. Drapes shall have: a. Fabric inspected over back -lite table for flaws. b. Straight, even blind -stitched side and bottom hems. c. Seams hidden beside pleats. d. Joined seams serged and overcast with no puckering. e. 4 inch (100 mm) double bottom hems and headings. f. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) double side hem. g. 2 inch (50 mm) overlap, total of 4 inches (100 mm) on pair. h. Stack -off of 1/3 of window width. i. Specified woven, permanent crinoline / buckram used in heading. j. Seams match up on bottom hems. k. Corners of bottom hems closed with hand stitching. I. Pleats evenly spaced to size. m. Straight edge across top after pleating. n. Straight, even folds. o. Polyester thread matching fabric color for seams and hems. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION FABRICATORS A. Acceptable Fabricators: 1. Meet Quality Assurance Fabricator / Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. INSTALLATION A. Install tracks, wall or ceiling mount, with mounting device head no larger than No. 6, to yield direct withdrawal strength of 25 lbs (11 kg) minimum. B. Support spacing to be as recommended in Manufacturer's literature. C. Install blackout drapery as a separate drape on separate rod behind primary drape. CLEANING A. Tracks to be free of marring, scratches, and foreign material. ;urtains And Drapes - 3 - 122200 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, .i END OF SECTION Curtains And Drapes - 4 - 122200 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 12 6113 UPHOLSTERED AUDIENCE SEATING 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install upholstered audience seating shown on Rostrum. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance — Qualifications'. 3. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood' for arm rest finish. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1 st Edition, 2009. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completion of Upholstered Audience Seating. B. Sequencing: 1. Install Upholstered Audience Seating after the following as been completed: a. Adjacent walls and ceilings are finished and painted. b. Adjacent hardwood trim installed and finished. c. Carpet flooring has been installed. C. Scheduling: 1. Notify Manufacturer early in project schedule when Upholstered Audience Seating will be ready for installation. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: Jpholstered Audience Seating - 1 - 126113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: a) Owner will provide Control Sample from project for finish. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: Requirements of Section 01 6600 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Supervise unloading and handling. 2. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Deliver in Manufacturer's original, unopened package(s). b. Handling and unloading. c. Replace damaged materials at no cost to Owner. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Provide secure location protected from the weather and other trades. 2. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Protect Upholstered Audience Seating from damage during installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Manufacturer: 1. Category Two National Contract Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Model 41273, 21 inch (533 mm) wide by Irwin Seating, Grand Rapids, MI www.irwinseating.com. B. Materials: 1. Wood Arm Rests: a. Red Oak. b. Finishes: 1) Stain: a) Penetrating, non -fading sealer -stain hand wiped to obtain best possible uniform color. 2) Performance / Design Criteria: a) Factory -finish to match Owner provided sample as specified in Section 09 9324. 3) Match existing Project Control Sample a) Control Sample provided by Owner. 2. Upholstery Color And Pattern: a. Chatham Revival: 0604 Sapphire. b. Chatham Topography 54122: 0604 Sapphire. C. Seating: 1. Bookrack on every other chair. 2. Ergonomic substrate and foam type seat cushion. 3. Plastic laminate decorative insert in aisle standard. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Wood Arm Rests: a. Clear Finished Hardwood: Upholstered Audience Seating - 2 - 126113 074738 'ART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION June 2012 Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324. A. Demolition / Removal: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Removal and disposal of old Upholstered Audience Seating. INSTALLATION Rexburg 2, 5 A. Assemble and install Upholstered Audience Seating in accordance with Manufacturer's assembly and installation manual that shall be included with each shipment. Do not proceed without this manual. B. Punch holes through carpet with 1/2 inch (13 mm) hollow punch and drill guide holes for screws with 5/32 inch (4 mm) drill. CLEANING A. General: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Clean any soiling of Upholstered Audience Seating as recommended by Manufacturer or any surrounding areas caused by installation of Upholstered Audience Seating. B. Building Damage: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Installer responsible for repair of all damaged surfaces to their original condition from Upholstered Audience Seating installation. C. Waste Management: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Provide Dumpster as required in Section 01 7400. 2. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times. b. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials to Contractor provided Dumpster. PROTECTION A. General: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Upon completion of Upholstered Audience Seating installation, protect Upholstered Audience Seating from damage and replace or repair subsequent damage at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Jpholstered Audience Seating 3 - 126113 BLANK PAGE 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 12 6713 PEWS 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: Owner will furnish and install Pews. This Section establishes quality of materials and installation for information of Contractor, Architect, and Owner's Representatives. 2. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance —Qualifications. 3. Section 09 9324: 'Interior Clear -Finished Hardwood' for pew finish. REFERENCES A. Association Publications: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, 46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA www.awinet.org. a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the efforts of the various trades affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Coordinate completion of pews. B. Sequencing: 1. Install pews after the following as been completed: a. Adjacent walls and ceilings are finished and painted. b. Adjacent hardwood trim installed and finished. c. Carpet flooring has been installed. C. Scheduling: 1. Notify Manufacturer early in project schedule when pews will be ready for installation. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 1) Before performing work of this Section, prepare Control Sample, to match sample available from Owner, to be used as finishing standard for interior clear finished hardwood as specified in Section 09 9324. 2) Design Criteria: a) Provide 8 inch by 10 inch (200 mm by 255 mm) sample of Red Oak to match Owner provided stain color selected for Project. b) Control Sample will be used as performance standard for evaluating finish provided. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Samples: 1) Interior Hardwood for Transparent Finish: 'ews - 1 - 126713 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, a) Owner will provide Control Sample from project for finish. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: Requirements of Section 01 6600 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Deliver in Manufacturer's original, unopened package(s). b. Handling and unloading. c. Replace damaged materials at no cost to Owner. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Protect pews from damage during installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Form of Guarantee: <Insert Name and Address of Supplier >does hereby guarantee the furniture covered in your order of <Insert Date> and our order <Insert Order No.> against defects for 5 years, if equipment is left fastened to floor in building where our Supervisor and his erection crew installed it. If defects do show up, we will replace or repair the defective parts without cost to the Owner. This Warrantee does not cover damage to pews caused by undue exposure to the elements, by vandalism, or by any cause other than defects in workmanship or materials under ordinary usage. If this equipment is removed from building or taken up from floor and put back, this Warranty will be void. <Insert Name of Company> <Insert Duly Authorized Agent> PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Category Two National Contract Manufacturer. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: EDIT REQUIRED: Include only manufacturer who is to provide pews for Project, as directed by Project Manager. 1. Marshall Company, Payette, ID www.marshallpews.com. 2. Sauder Manufacturing Co, Archbold, OH www.sauderworship.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Wood Exposed To View: Solid FAS grade Appalachian grown oak with 6 percent maximum moisture content during construction and hand sorted for uniform texture and color matching. No mineral grains will be acceptable. b. Pew Type: 1) Upholstered Seat And Back. C. Materials: Pews - 2 - 12 6713' )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Red Oak. 2. Wood Thickness: a. Ends: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) minimum thickness. b. Supports: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum thickness. c. Unupholstered Backs: 4/4 inches (25 mm) thick minimum by 4-1/2 inches (113 mm) maximum width stock. d. Unupholstered Seats: 5/4 inches (32 mm) thick minimum by 4-1/2 inches (113 mm) maximum width stock. 3. Foam: 1.8 lbs per cu ft density polyurethane foam with minimum ILD of 45 Ib for seats and 32 lbs for backs. 4. Upholstery Color And Pattern: a. Chatham Revival 47002: 0604 Sapphire. b. Chatham Topography 54122: 0604 Sapphire. 5. Glue: U S Plywood JMK514, Prestoset, Weldwood, Perkins L-100, or Architect approved equal. 6. Hymn Book Racks: Of size to receive two hymn books. Provide one rack between each pair of supports. 7. Miscellaneous Hardware: Manufacturer to supply necessary screws, washers, and miscellaneous hardware for complete pew assembly and installation. D. Fabrication: 1. Pew Body: a. Assemble with specified lumber in random widths and lengths. b. Tongue and groove joints are preferred, however, butt joints with glue line rip saw are acceptable providing Manufacturer will guarantee satisfactory performance. c. Pew bodies 150 inches (3 750 mm) or less in length shall be one piece. Longer pews may be assembled with blind joint. Joint shall occur over support. 2. Pew Ends: a. Rift block construction is preferred, however, edge -glued construction is acceptable provided Manufacturer will guarantee satisfactory performance. b. Minimum Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). c. Rout end 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep to receive back and seat. d. Wedge and screw pew body to end. 3. Pew Supports a. Rift block or edge -glued construction of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum thickness. b. Terminate supports within 2 inches (50 mm) of cap rail. c. Seat and back shall be in full contact with support member so no wedging is required at seat and no molding is required to hide joint with pew back. d. 72 inches (1 800 mm) maximum spacing between supports. E. Finishes: 1. Stain: a. Description: 1) Penetrating, non -fading sealer -stain hand wiped to obtain best possible uniform color. b. Performance / Design Criteria: 1) Factory -finish to match Owner provided sample as specified in Section 09 9324. c. Match existing Project Control Sample. 1) Control Sample provided by Owner: a) Control Sample will be existing wood item from Project. d. Filler: Use of filler is not required if high quality finish can be achieved without it. e. Sealer: Apply one hot coat of lacquer sealer followed by hand sanding with No. 240 wet or dry paper. f. Apply three coats of lacquer using no reducer to thin material. Lightly sand between coats. g. Finish surface shall be free of skips, runs, sags, or lacquer dust. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Identification: 'ews - 3 - 126713 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, a. Permanently identify Manufacturer's name, address, model, and fabric color on under side c each pew. 2. Clear Finished Hardwood: a. Color matches Owner provided sample specified in Section 09 9324. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Demolition/ Removal: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Removal and disposal of old pews. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Attach securely to floor with concealed fasteners. Figure '8' clips or angles are not acceptable. B. Spacing and alignment shall be uniform and true. C. When installing over carpet, punch holes through carpet with hollow cutting tool. Do not drill. 3.3 CLEANING A. General: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Clean any soiling of pews as recommended by Manufacturer or any surrounding areas caused by installation of pews. B. Building Damage: 1. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. Installer responsible for repair of all damaged surfaces to their original condition from pew installation. C. Waste Management: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Provide Dumpster as required in Section 01 7400. 2. Owner -Furnished Product Manufacturer's Responsibility: a. All work areas are to be kept clean, clear and free of debris at all times. b. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials to Contractor provided Dumpster. 3.4 PROTECTION A. General: 1. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Upon completion of pew installation, protect pews from damage and replace or repair subsequent damage at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Pews 4 - 126713 DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING 220501 Common Plumbing Requirements 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Pipes and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220910 Demolition and Repair 221000 PLUMBING PIPES AND PUMPS 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221313 Facility Sanitary Sewers 22 1319 Facility Sanitary Sewer specialties 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224213 Commercial Water Closets and Urinals 224216 Commercial Lavatories END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - Division 22 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common requirements and procedures for plumbing systems. 2. Responsibility for proper operation of electrically powered equipment furnished under this Division. 3. Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division. 4. Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for plumbing systems penetrations as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment for plumbing systems installed under other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants used at building exterior. 4. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of plumbing items requiring field painting. 5. Division 26: Raceway and conduit, unless specified otherwise, and line voltage wiring. 6. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1) Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufacturer's catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. 2) Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. See Section 01 8113 for Sustainable Design Requirements for this Project. See individual Specification Sections in Division 22 for Submittals required. 2. Qualification Statement: a. Plumbing Subcontractor: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. b. Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. Common Plumbing Requirements - 1 - 220501 5074738 June 2012 Rexbur C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data (Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800): 1) At beginning of PLUMBING section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide master index showing items included: a) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical Engineer, General Contractor, and Plumbing subcontractor. b) Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include: (1) List of plumbing equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item. (2) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of plumbing equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance instructions. c) Provide operating instructions to include: (1) General description of fire protection system. (2) Step by step procedure to follow for shutting down system or putting system into operation. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copies of warranties required in individual Sections of Division 22. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Plumbing Codes applicable to Project. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in writing of such differences before performing work affected by such differences. 3. Identification: a. Motor and equipment nameplates as well as applicable UL / ULC and AGA / CGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner. B. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: 1. Plumbing Subcontractor: a. Company specializing in performing work of this section. 1) Minimum five (5) years experience in plumbing installations. 2) Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding. b. Upon request, submit documentation. 2. Installer: a. Licensed for area of Project. b. Designate one (1) individual as project foremen who shall be on site at all times during installation and experienced with installation procedures required for this project. c. Upon request, submit documentation. C. Sustainability Standards Certifications: 1. Sustainable Design Compliance: Common Plumbing Requirements - 2 - 220 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Submit all Sustainable Design Requirements to comply with Section 01 8113 for information needed by the Design Professional to demonstrate that particular credits have been achieved. In particular, credits that depend on knowing the cost and quantity of certain types of products cannot be achieved without obtaining that information from the Contractor. These include renewable content, locally sourced new products, and reused products. In addition, a form is provided for each installer to certify that they have not used adhesives, sealants, and for suppliers and installers to certify they have not used composite wood with prohibited VOC content. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. 2. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by Architect until installed. 2. Store items subject to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner. B. Special Warranty: 1. Guarantee plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. If plumbing sub -contractor with offices located more than 150 miles (240 km) from Project site is used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local plumbing sub -contractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty section of Operation And Maintenance Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Components shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance. B. Pipe And Pipe Fittings: 1. Weld -O -Let and Screw -O -Let fittings are acceptable. 2. Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project, except non-domestic made cast iron pipe and fittings by MATCO-NORCA are acceptable. C. Sleeves: Common Plumbing Requirements - 3 - 220501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburc 1. In Framing And Suspended Floor Slabs: Standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 ga (2 mm) galvanized sheet metal two sizes larger than bare pipe or insulation on insulated pipe. 2. In Concrete And Masonry: Sleeves through outside walls, interior shear walls, and footings shall be schedule 80 black steel pipe with welded plate. D. Valves: 1. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Drawings: 1. Plumbing Drawings show general arrangement of piping, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. 2. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over Plumbing Drawings. 3. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. B. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which plumbing work is dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction. 2. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available. 3. Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner. 4. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Changes Due To Equipment Selection: 1. Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or connections from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings showing proposed installations. 2. If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony with intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary. 3. Provide additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other equipment required for proper operation of systems resulting from selection of equipment. Common Plumbing Requirements - 4 - 220 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 4. Be responsible for proper location of rough -in and connections provided under other Divisions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to installer of electrical system. 2. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items and confirm that they are properly installed. B. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. C. Locating Equipment: 1. Arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 2. Adjust locations of pipes, equipment, and fixtures to accommodate work to interferences anticipated and encountered. 3. Install plumbing work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or structure. 4. Determine exact route and location of each pipe before fabrication. a. Right -Of -Way: 1) Lines that pitch shall have right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example, plumbing drains shall normally have right-of-way. 2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction: 1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings. 2) Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction. D. Penetration Firestops: 1. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at plumbing systems penetrations through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls. E. Sealants: 1. Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements of plumbing systems. 2. Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and ceilings. F. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus: 1. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper installation of plumbing systems. 2. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings: a. Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. Common Plumbing Requirements - 5 - 220501 5074738 June 2012 Rexbur( b. Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping specified, at connections to equipment and on bypasses. 1) Make connections of dissimilar metals with di -electric unions. 2) Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on both sides of traps. c. Do not use reducing bushings, bull head tees, close nipples, or running couplings. Street elbows are allowed only on potable water pipe 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and smaller. d. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained e. Install piping to insure noiseless circulation. I. Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final acceptance. 3. Do not install piping in shear walls. 4. Cut piping accurately to measurements established at site. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. 5. Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps and other equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged connections or disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if requested. 6. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. 7. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe: a. Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run. b. Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof. G. Sleeves: 1. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete slabs on grade. 2. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. Seal sleeves with specified sealants. Follow Pipe Manufacturer's recommendations for PEX pipe penetrations through studs and floor slabs. 3. Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) above floor finish in mechanical equipment rooms above basement floor. In other rooms, sleeves shall be flush with floor. 4. Sleeves through floors and foundation walls shall be watertight. H. Escutcheons: 1. Provide spring clamp plates where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and are exposed in finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain pattern and shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface. 3.4 REPAIR/ RESTORATION A. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it: 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. 2. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Common Plumbing Requirements - 6 - 220 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Perform tests on plumbing piping systems. Furnish devices required for testing purposes. B. Non -Conforming Work: 1. Replace material or workmanship proven defective with sound material at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Repeat tests on new material, if requested. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from each length of piping before installation: 1. After each section of piping used for movement of water or steam is installed, flush with clean water, except where specified otherwise. 2. Arrange temporary flushing connections for each section of piping and arrange for flushing total piping system. 3. Provide temporary cross connections and water supply for flushing and drainage and remove after completion of work. B. Clean exposed piping, equipment, and fixtures. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction of Owner: 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Stake Physical Facilities Representative in operation and maintenance of plumbing systems utilizing Operation And Maintenance Manual when so doing. 2. Conduct instruction period after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials. END OF SECTION Common Plumbing Requirements - 7 - 220501 -)tP:�OW )IAT}fie 5074738 June 2012 SECTION 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common hanger and support requirements and procedures for plumbing systems. Rexburg 2, 5 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting. 4. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilintl.com. b. Cooper B -Line, Highland, IL www.b-line.com. c. Unistrut, Wayne, MI www.tyco-unistrut.com. B. Materials: 1. Hangers, Rods, And Inserts a. Galvanized and UL approved for service intended. b. Support horizontal piping from hangers or on roller assemblies with channel supports, except where trapeze type hangers are explicitly shown on Drawings. Hangers shall have double nuts. 1) Support insulated pipes 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter and smaller with adjustable swivel ring hanger with insulation protection shield. Gauge and length of shield shall be in accordance with Anvil design data. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Swivel Ring Hanger: Anvil Fig. 69. (2) Insulation Protection Shield: Anvil Fig. 167. (3) Equals by Cooper B -Line. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 1 - 220529 5074738 June 2012 Rexburc ra 2) Support insulated pipes 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) in diameter and larger with clevis hanger or roller assembly with an insulation protection shield. Gauge and length of shield shall be according to Anvil design data. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Clevis Hanger: Anvil Fig. 260. (2) Roller Assembly: Anvil Fig. 171. (3) Insulation Protection Shield: Anvil Fig. 167. (4) Equals by Cooper B -Line. 3) Support uninsulated copper pipe 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter and smaller from swivel ring hanger, copper plated and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. Support non -copper uninsulated pipes from swivel ring hanger. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Swivel Ring Hanger For Copper Pipe: Anvil Fig. CT -69. (2) Swivel Ring Hanger For Other Pipe: Anvil Fig. 69. (3) Equals by Cooper B -Line. 4) Support uninsulated copper pipe 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) in diameter and larger from clevis hanger, copper plated hangers and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. Support non -copper uninsulated pipes from clevis hanger. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Clevis Hanger For Copper Pipe: Anvil Fig. CT -65. (2) Clevis Hanger For Other Pipe: Anvil Fig. 260. (3) Equals by Cooper B -Line. Support rods for sin le pipe shall be in accordance with following table: Rod Diameter Pipe Size 318 inch 2 inches and smaller 1/2 inch 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches 5/8 inch 4 to 5 inches 3/4 inch 6 inches 7/8 inch 8 to 12 inches d. Support rods for multiple pipe supported on steel angle trapeze hangers shall be in accordance with following table: 1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 MPa). e. Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Anvil Fig. 261. b) Equals by Cooper B -Line. f. Concrete Inserts: 1) Individual Inserts: a) Suitable for special nuts size 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) through 7/8 inch (22 mm) with yoke to receive concrete reinforcing rods, and with malleable iron lugs for attaching to forms. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Anvil Fig. 282. (2) Equals by Cooper B -Line. 2) Continuous Inserts: a) Class Two Quality Standard: Equal to Unistrut P-3200 series. g. Steel Deck Bracket: Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 2 - 220 Rods Number of Pipes per Han er for Each Pipe Size Number Diameter 21nch 2.5 Inch 31nch 41nch 51nch 61nch 81 2 3/8 Inch Two 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 1/2 Inch Three Three Two 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Six Four Three Two 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 2 5/8 Inch Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two T, 1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 MPa). e. Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Anvil Fig. 261. b) Equals by Cooper B -Line. f. Concrete Inserts: 1) Individual Inserts: a) Suitable for special nuts size 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) through 7/8 inch (22 mm) with yoke to receive concrete reinforcing rods, and with malleable iron lugs for attaching to forms. b) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Anvil Fig. 282. (2) Equals by Cooper B -Line. 2) Continuous Inserts: a) Class Two Quality Standard: Equal to Unistrut P-3200 series. g. Steel Deck Bracket: Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 2 - 220 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Class Two Quality Standard: Equal to Unistrut P1000 with clamp nut, minimum 6 inch (150 mm) length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Piping: 1. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using Unistrut and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork. Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed. b. Supports For Horizontal Piping: 1) Support metal piping at 96 inches (2 400 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1- 1/4 inches (32 mm) or larger and 72 inches (1 800 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) or less. 2) Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. c. Supports for Vertical Piping: 1) Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level. 2) Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported directly from building structure. 3) Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall. d. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports for Plumbing - 3 - 220529 }ONp"<. }_. xp)-•'e 5074738 June 2012 SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install identification of plumbing piping and equipment as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Rexburg 2, 5 A. Informational Submittals: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: 1) For paints, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 2) VOC Content of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the limits for VOC content and the limits for chemical components specified in Sections 09 9000 portions of the specifications. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Paint: a. One Coat Primer: 1) 6-2 Quick Drying Latex Primer Sealer over fabric covers. 2) 6-205 Metal Primer under dark color paint. 3) 6-6 Metal Primer under light color paint. b. Finish Coats: Two coats 53 Line Acrylic Enamel. c. Performance Standard: Paints specified are from Pittsburgh Paint & Glass (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA www.pittsburcihpaints.com or PPG Canada Inc, Mississauga, ON (800) 263-4350 or (905) 238-6441. d. Type Two Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200. 1) Paint of equal quality from following Manufacturers may be submitted for Architect's approval before use. Maintain specified colors, shades, and contrasts. a) Benjamin Moore, Montvale, NJ www.beniaminmoore.com or Toronto, ON (800) 304-0304 or (416) 766-1176. b) ICI Dulux, Cleveland, OH or ICI Paints Canada Inc, Concord, ON www.dulux.com. c) Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com. I. D. For Plumbing Pipes And Equipment - 1 - 220553 5074738 June 2012 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Painting: 1. Only painted legends, directional arrows, and color bands are acceptable. 2. Locate identifying legends, directional arrows, and color bands at following points on exposed piping of each piping system: a. Adjacent to each item of equipment. b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall. c. On each riser and junction. d. Every 25 feet (7.6 m) on long continuous lines. e. Stenciled symbols shall be one inch high and black. 3.2 ATTACHMENTS A. Schedules: 1. Pipe Identification Schedule: a. Apply stenciled symbols as follows: PieUse Abbreviation Domestic Cold Water CW Domestic Hot Water HW END OF SECTION Rexburc I. D. For Plumbing Pipes And Equipment - 2 - 22 0 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install insulation on hot and cold water lines, fittings, valves, and accessories as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install insulation on roof drain piping as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping. 2. Section 22 1400: Facility Storm Drainage Piping. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: 1) For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Armacell, Mebane, NC www.armaflex.com. b. Childers Products Co, Eastlake, OH www.fosteroroducts.com. c. IMCOA, Youngsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com. d. Johns -Manville, Denver, CO www.im.com. e. Knauf, Shelbyville, IN www.knauffibercllass.com. f. Manson, Brossard, PQ, Canada www.isolationmanson.com. g. Nomaco Inc, Yopungsville, NC www.nomacokflex.com. h. Owens-Corning, Toledo, OH www.owenscornincl.com. L Speedline Corp, Solon, OH www.si)eedlineovc.com. B. Materials: 1. Above Grade Metal Piping: a. Insulation For Piping: 1) Snap -on glass fiber or melamine foam pipe insulation, or heavy density pipe insulation with factory vapor jacket. 2) Insulation Thickness: Service Water Temperature Pipe Sizes Up to1-1/4In 1-1/2to2In Over 2In 170 - 180 Deg F One In 1-1/2 In 2 In Plumbing Piping Insulation - 1 - 220719 5074738 June 2012 Rexbur( 140 - 160 Deq F 1/2 In One In 1-1/2 In 45 - 130 Deg F 1/2 In 1/2 In One In 3) Performance Standards: Fiberglas ASJ by Owens-Corning. 4) Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Childers Products. b) Knauf. c) Manson. d) Owens-Corning. e) Johns -Manville. f) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. b. Fitting, Valve, And Accessory Covers: 1) PVC. 2) Performance Standard: Zeston by Johns -Manville. 3) Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Knauf. b) Speedline. c) Johns -Manville. d) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Below Grade Metal Piping: a. Insulation: 1) 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: a) SS Tubolit by Armacell. b) ImcoLock by Imcoa. c) Nomalock or Therma-Cel by Nomaco. b. Joint Sealant: 1) Category Four Acceptable Products. See Section 01 6200 for definition of Categories: a) Armacell520. b) Nomaco K -Flex R-373. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Above Grade Piping: 1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted. 2. Install insulation in manner to facilitate removal for repairs. Place sections or blocks so least possible damage to insulation will result from inspection or repairs of piping or equipment. 3. Piping up to 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) Diameter: a. Adhere 'factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap' smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with white vapor barrier adhesive. b. Adhere 3 inch (76 mm) wide self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints. 4. Piping 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) Diameter And Larger: a. Use broken -joint construction in application of two -layer covering. b. Fill cracks and depressions with insulating cement mixed to thick plastic paste. 1) Apply by hand in several layers to make up total specified thickness. 2) Final layer shall have smooth uniform finish before application of covering. 5. Fittings, Valves, And Accessories: a. Do not apply insulation over flanged joints or victaulic couplings until piping has been brought up to operating temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened. Insulate valves so wheel, stem, and packing nut are exposed. Plumbing Piping Insulation - 2 - 220 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 b. Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in. c. Piping Up To 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm) Diameter: 1) Cover insulation with one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to adjacent pipe covering. 2) Alternate Method: a) Insulate fittings, valves, and accessories with one inch of insulating cement and vapor seal with two 1/8 inch (3 mm) wet coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric extending 2 inches (50 mm) onto adjacent insulation. d. Piping 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) To 2 Inches (50 mm): 1) Insulate with hydraulic setting insulating cement or equal, to thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. 2) Apply final coat of fitting mastic over insulating cement. e. Piping 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) And Larger: 1) Insulate with segments of molded insulation securely wired in place and coated with skim coat of insulating cement. 2) Apply fitting mastic, fitting tape and finish with final coat of fitting mastic. 6. Pipe Hangers: a. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. b. Provide 16 ga (1.64 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) long galvanized shields at each pipe hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger. c. Provide 22 ga (0.85 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) long galvanized shield at each pipe hanger to protect insulation from crushing by Unistrut type hanger. 7. Protect insulation wherever leak from valve stem or other source might drip on insulated surface, with aluminum cover or shield rolled up at edges and sufficiently large in area and of shape that dripping will not splash on surrounding insulation. B. Below Grade Piping: 1. Slip underground pipe insulation onto pipe and seal butt joints. 2. Where slip-on technique is not possible, slit insulation, apply to pipe, and seal seams and joints. END OF SECTION Plumbing Piping Insulation - 3 - 220719 BLANK PAGE 5074/38 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 22 0910 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, and Section 22 0501 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Under this section remove obsolete piping and mechanical equipment and relocate, reconnect or replace existing piping affected by demolition or new construction. Remove concealed piping abandoned due to demolition or new construction, or cap piping flush with existing surfaces. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS A. All relocations, reconnections and removals are not necessarily indicated on the drawings. As such, the Contractor shall make adequate allowance in his proposal for this work as no extra charges will be allowed for these items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS A. Where existing piping must remain in service to supply occupied areas during construction, provide temporary piping, connections, and equipment to maintain service to such areas. All shall be performed in a neat and safe manner to prevent injury to the building or its occupants. 3.2 DRILLING, CUTTING, PATCHING A. All Required drilling, cutting, block-outs and demolition work required for the removal and/or installation of the mechanical system is the responsibility of this Contractor. B. No joists, beams, girders, trusses or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without written permission from the Architect. C. The patching, repair, and finishing to existing or new surfaces is the responsibility of this Contractor, unless specifically called for under sections of specifications covering these materials. D. Disconnect all equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Relocate any existing equipment that obstructs new construction. Demolition And Repair - 1 - 220910 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 3.3 EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN IN USE A. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, replace, extend, or repair piping and equipment to allow continued use of same. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REMOVED A. All obsolete materials, piping, and equipment shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site promptly. END OF SECTION Demolition And Repair 2 - 220910 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section. 2. Furnish and install potable water piping complete with necessary valves, connections, and accessories inside building and connect as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: 2. Section 22 0719: 1.2 REFERENCES Common Piping Requirements. Plumbing Piping Insulation. A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Sanitary Engineers: a. ANSI / ASSE 1017-2009, 'Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems.' 2. ASTM International: a. ASTM B88-09, 'Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.' b. ASTM F2389-10, 'Standard Specification for Pressure -rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems.' 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 03 3111. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Written report of sterilization test. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Aquatherm, Inc., Lindon, UT www.aguathermpir)e.com. b. Cash Acme, Cullman, AL www.cashacme.com Domestic Water Piping - 1 - 221116 5074738 June 2012 Rexbur! c. Cla-Val Company, Costa Mesa, CA or Cla-Val Canada Ltd, Beamsville, ON www.cla-val.com. d. Conbraco Industries Inc, Matthews, NC www.conbraco.com or Conbraco (Honeywell Ltd), Scarborough, ON (416) 293-8111. e. Hammond Valve, New Berlin, WI www.hammondvalve.com. f. Handy & Harmon Products Div, Fairfield, CT www.handvharmon.com or Handy and Harmon of Canada Ltd, Rexdale, ON (800) 463-1465 or (416) 675-1860. g. Harris Products Group, Cincinnati, OH www.harrisr)roductsgroul).com. h. Honeywell Inc, Minneapolis, MN www.honeywell.com. i. Leonard Valve Co, Cranston, RI www.leonardvalve.com. j. Milwaukee Valve Co, New Berlin, WI www.milwaukeevalve.com. k. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. I. Rehau, Leesburg, VA www.rehau-na.com. m. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com. n. Spence Engineering Co, Walden, NY www.sr)enceengineerin,.com. o. Symmons Industries, Braintree, MA www.symmons.com. p. Uponor Inc, Apple Valley, MN www.ul)onor-usa.com. q. Viega ProPress, Wichita, KS www.viega-na.com. r. Watts Regulator Co, Andover, MA www.wattsreo.com. s. Wilkins Operation, Paso Robles, CA www.zurn.com. t. Zurn PEX, Inc., Commerce, TX www.zurnpex.com. B. Materials: 1. Pipe: a. Copper: 1) Above -Grade: a) Meet requirements of ASTM B88, Type L. 2) Below -Grade: a) Meet requirements of ASTM B88, Type K. 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum under slabs. b) 2 inches (50 mm) And Smaller: Annealed soft drawn. c) 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) And Larger: Hard Drawn. 2. Fittings: a. For Copper Pipe: Wrought copper. 3. Connections For Copper Pipe: a. Above -Grade: 1) Sweat copper type with 95/5 or 96/4 Tin -Antimony solder, Bridgit solder, or Silvabrite 100 solder. Use only lead-free solder. 2) Viega ProPress System b. Below Grade: 1) Brazed using following type rods: a) Copper to Copper Connections: (1) AWS Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6 percent silver). (2) AWS Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15 percent silver). 2) Copper to Brass or Copper to Steel Connections: AWS Classification BAg-5 Silver (45 percent silver). 3) Do not use rods containing Cadmium. 4) Brazing Flux: a) Approved Products: (1) Stay -Silt' white brazing flux by Harris Product Group. (2) High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harmon. 5) Joints under slabs acceptable only if allowed by local codes. 4. Ball Valves: Domestic Water Piping - 2 - 221 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Use ball valves exclusively unless otherwise specified. Ball valves shall be by single manufacturer from approved list below. b. Valves shall be two-piece, full port for 150 psi (1.03 MPa) SWP. 1) Operate with flow in either direction, suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. 2) Body: Bronze, 150 psig (1.03 MPa) wsp at 350 deg F (177 deg C) and 400 psig (2.76 MPa) wog. 3) Seat: Bubble tight at 100 psig (0.69 MPa) under water. c. Class One Quality Standard: Nibco T585 or S585. 1) Equal by Conbraco'Apollo,' Hammond, Milwaukee, or Watts. d. PP -R piping if used: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) PP -R fusion -weld ball valves by Aquatherm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate cold water lines a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) from hot waterline. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Before pipes are covered, test systems in presence of Architect at 125 psig (0.86 MPa) hydrostatic pressure for 4 hours and show no leaks. 2. Disconnect equipment not suitable for 125 psig (0.86 MPa) pressure from piping system during test period. 3.3 CLEANING A. Sterilize potable water system with solution containing 200 parts per million minimum of available chlorine and maintaining pH of 7.5 minimum. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in manner approved by Architect. Allow sterilization solution to remain for 24 hours and open and close valves and faucets several times during that time. B. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 parts per million. C. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished. END OF SECTION Domestic Water Piping - 3 - 221116 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 221313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect as described in contract documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Sections Under 07 3000 Heading: Furnishing and installing of roof jacks and pipe flashing at roof. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of firestopping material. 3. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 03 3111. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / American Water Works Association: a. ANSI / AWWA C110-08, 'Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings.' b. ANSI/AWWA C111-07, 'Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.' c. ANSI/AWWA C115-05,'Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges.' d. ANSI/AWWA C116-09, 'Protective Fusion -Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service.' e. ANSI/AWWA C150-08, 'Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe.' f. ANSI/AWWA C151-09, 'Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.' g. ANSI/AWWA C153-06, 'Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.' 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. AWWA Manual M41, 'Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings.' 2009 edition. 3. ASTM International: a. ASTM A74-09, 'Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.' b. ASTM A888-09, 'Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.' c. ASTM C564-08, 'Standard. Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.' d. ASTM D2235-04, 'Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene -Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.' e. ASTM D2321-08, 'Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications.' Facility Sanitary Sewers - 1 - 221313 5074738 June 2012 Rexburc f. ASTM D2564 -04e1, 'Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems: g. ASTM D3034-08, 'Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.' h. ASTM F628-08, 'Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile -Butadiene -Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular Core.' I. ASTM F656-08, 'Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.' j. ASTM F891-07, 'Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core.' 4. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: a. CISPI Standard 301-04, 'Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe End Fittings for Sanitary & Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: 1) For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Brass & Iron (AB&I), Oakland, CA www.abifoundry.com. b. Clamp -All Corp, Haverhill, MA www.claml)all.com. c. Anaco-Husky, Corona, CA www.anaeo-husky.com. d. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.iosam.com. e. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.irsmith.com. I. MG Piping Products Co, Stanton, CA www.mocouoling.com. g. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Chicago, IL www.mifab.com. h. Mission Rubber Co., Corona, CA www.missionrubber.com. i. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. j. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.watts.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada www.wattscda.com. k. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA, CT www.zurn.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Minimum size of waste piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2 inches (50 mm). C. Materials: 1. Piping And Fittings: PVC Schedule 40 cellular core plastic pipe and pipe fittings meeting requirements of ASTM F891, joined using cement primer meeting requirements of ASTM F656 and pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2564. a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw. Facility Sanitary Sewers - 2 - 22 1; 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 2. Piping And Fittings: ABS Schedule 40 cellular core plastic pipe and pipe fittings meeting requirements of ASTM F628, joined with pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2235. a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw. 3. Fittings: a. P -Traps: 1) Trap shall have clean out plug if installed in other than slab on grade. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products. a) JR Smith: 7220 deep seal cast iron. b) Zurn: Zurn Z-1000. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 4. Cleanouts: a. Furnish wall cleanouts with chrome wall cover and screw. b. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Finish Floors: a) Josam: 56010. b) J. R. Smith: 4023. c) Mifab: C1100C-R-1. d) Wade: W-6000. e) Watts: CO -200-R. f) Zurn: Z-1402. 2) Resilient Flooring: a) Josam: 56010-12. b) J. R. Smith: 4140. c) Mifab: C1100C-T-1. d) Wade: W -6000-T. e) Watts: CO -200-T. f) Zurn: Z-1400. 3) Finished Wall: a) Josam: 58790. b) J. R. Smith: 4530. c) Mifab: C1460RD. d) Wade: W8560E. e) Watts: CO -460 -RD. f) Zurn: Z-1446. 4) Exposed Drain Lines: a) Josam: 58910. b) J. R. Smith: 4510. c) Mifab: C1460. d) Wade: W8560B. e) Watts: CO -460. f) Zurn: Z-1440. 5) General Purpose: a) Josam: 58900. b) J. R. Smith: 4400. c) Mifab: C1300 -MF d) Wade: W8550E. e) Watts: CO -380. f) Zurn: Z-1440. 6) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. Facility Sanitary Sewers - 3 - 221313 5074738 June 2012 Rexburl PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings. 2. Excavate to required depth and grade to obtain fall required. Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 1/4 inch (6 mm) fall in one foot (300 mm) in direction of flow. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying of pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. B. Thermoplastic Pipe And Fittings: 1. General: Piping and joints shall be clean and installed according to Manufacturer's recommendations. Break down contaminated joints, clean seats and gaskets and reinstall. 2. Above Grade: Locate pipe hangers every 4 feet (1.2 m) on center maximum and at elbows. 3. Below Grade: a. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2321. b. Stabilize unstable trench bottoms. c. Bed pipe true to line and grade with continuous support from firm base. 1) Bedding depth: 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm). 2) Material and compaction to meet ASTM standard noted above. d. Excavate bell holes into bedding material so pipe is uniformly supported along its entire length. Blocking to grade pipe is forbidden. e. Trench width at top of pipe: 1) Minimum: 18 inches (450 mm) or diameter of pipe plus 12 inches (300 mm), whichever is greater. 2) Maximum: Outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches (600 mm). f. Do not use backhoe or power equipment to assemble pipe. g. Initial backfill shall be 12 inches (300 mm) above top of pipe with material specified in referenced ASTM standard. h. Minimum cover over top of pipe not under building slab: 1) 36 inches (900 mm) before wheel loading. 2) 48 inches (1 200 mm) before compaction. C. Install piping so cleanouts may be installed as follows: 1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser. 2. At every 135 degrees of accumulative change in direction for horizontal lines. 3. Every 100 feet (30 meters) of horizontal run. 4. Extend piping to accessible surface. Do not install piping so cleanouts must be installed in carpeted floors. In such locations, configure piping so wall type cleanouts may be used. D. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no pressure or siphon condition on water seal. E. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Join lines together in fewest practicable numbers before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. Vent line terminations shall be: 1. 6 inches (150 mm) minimum above roof and 12 inches (300 mm) minimum from any vertical surface. Facility Sanitary Sewers - 4 - 221, 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 2. Same size as vent pipe. 3. In areas where minimum design temperature is below 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or where frost or snow closure may be possible: a. Vent line terminations shall be same size as vent pipe, except no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter. b. Vents shall terminate 10 inches (250 mm) minimum above roof or higher if required by local codes. Furnish and install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated structures as required under Sections 07 8400 and 22 0501. G. If test Tees are used for testing, plug Tees so wall finish can be installed. Do not leave as exposed cleanouts. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect before testing. 2. Thermoplastic Pipe System: a. Before backfilling and compacting of trenches, Fill waste and vent system with water to roof level or 10 feet (3 meters) minimum, and show no leaks for two hours. Correct leaks and defective work. b. After backfilling and compacting of trenches is complete but before placing floor slab, re -test as specified above. Uncover pipe and correct leaks and defective work. Re -backfill and compact and re -test. END OF SECTION Facility Sanitary Sewers - 5 - 221313 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 221319 FACILITY SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install miscellaneous sanitary sewer specialties as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 0501: Common Plumbing Requirements. 2. Section 22 1119: Domestic Water Piping Specialties. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. H -M Company, Cincinnati, OH www.draintroughs.com. b. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.iosam.com. c. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.irsmith.com. d. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Chicago, IL www.mifab.com. e. Proset Systems, Lawrenceville, GA www.prosetsystems.com. f. Scherping Systems, Winstead, MN www.scherpinqsystems.com. g. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co, Peculiar, MO www.siouxchief.com. h. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. i. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.watts.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada www.wattscda.com. j. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com. B. Components: 1. Drains And Drain Accessories: a. Floor Drain FD -1: 1) Approved types with deep seal trap and chrome plated strainer. 2) Trap guard by Proset Systems. Provide model number to match floor drain. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Josam: 30000 -50 -Z -5A. b) J. R. Smith: 2010-A. c) Sioux Chief: 832. d) Wade: 1100. e) Watts: FD -200-A. f) Zurn: Z-415. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Facility Sanitary Sewer Specialties - 1 - 221319 ) 9410;l )1;1(e �; 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 22 4213 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS AND URINALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: Sealants used between fixtures and other substrates. 2. Section 22 0501: Common Mechanical Requirements. 3. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Standard Brands, Piscataway, NJ www.americanstandard-us.com or American Standard Canada, Mississauga, ON www.americanstandard.ca. b. AMTC - Advanced Modern Technologies Corp, Woodland Hills, CA www.amtcori3oration.com. c. Bemis Manufacturing Co, Sheboygan Falls, WI www.bemismfg.com. d. Beneke by Sanderson Plumbing Products, Columbus, MS www.sppi.com. e. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co, Novi, MI or BrassCraft Canada Ltd, St Thomas, ON www.brasscraft.com. f. Chicago Faucet Co, Des Plaines, IL www.chicaciofaucets.com. g. _ Church Seat Co, Sheboygan Falls WI www.churchseats.com. h. Delany Flush Valves, Charlottesville, VA www.delanyproduct.com. I. Delta Faucet Co, Indianapolis, IN www.deltafaucet.com or Delta Faucet Canada, London, ON (519) 659-3626. j. Crane Plumbing, Evanston, IL www.craneplumbinq.com or Crane Canada Ltd, Plumbing Div, Montreal, PQ www.craneplumbing..ca. k. Dearborn Brass, Cleveland, OH www.dearbornbrass.com. I. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC, Woodridge, IL www.gerberonline.corn. m. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.iosam.com. n. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co, Montgomery, AL www.irsmith.com. o. Kohler Co Plumbing Div, Kohler, WI www.us.kohler.com. p. McGuire Manufacturing Co, Cheshire, CT www.mcquiremfg.com. q. Olsonite Corp, Newnan, GA www.olsonite.net or Olsonite Co Ltd, Tilbury, ON (519) 682-1240. r. Sloan Valve Co, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com. s. South Fork Manufacturing, Coalville, UT (801) 953-3001 www.dirt-arabber.com. t. Toto U.S.A., Inc., Morrow, GA www.totousa.com U. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. Commercial Water Closets and Urinals - 1 - 224213 5074738 June 2012 Rexbur( v. Zurn Commercial Brass, Sanford, NC www.zurn.com or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON (905) 795-8844. w. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www.zurn.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim, including trim behind custom casework doors, shall be chrome plated. C. Materials: 1. Water Closets: a. General: Maximum water usage of 1.6 gallons (6 liters) per flush. b. Standard Fixture: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Toto: 'Drake' CST744S. c. Handicap Accessible Fixture: 1) 18 inch (450 mm) maximum rim height. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Toto: 'ADA Drake' CST744SL 2. Urinals: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) American Standard: Washbrook 6501.010. 2) Gerber: Monitor 27-780. 3) Kohler: Barden K -4960 -ET. 4) Toto: UT447. 3. Water Closet Accessories: a. Seats: 1) Provide split front type with check hinge. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 Categories: a) Standard And Handicap Accessible Fixtures: b) Bemis: 1655SSC. c) Beneke: 527 SS. d) Church: 9500SSC. e) Kohler: K -4731-C. f) Olsonite: 95SSC. g) Toto SC534. b. Supply Pipe And Stop: 1) Provide chrome plated quarter -turn brass ball valve, stainless steel riser, and chrome -plated steel flange. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 Categories: a) McGuire: BV2166CC. b) Zurn: Z8804 CRO -PC. 4. Urinal Accessories: a. Carrier / Support: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 Categories: a) Josam. b) Jay R. Smith. c) Wade. b. Flush Valve: 1) Low flow, 1 gallon (4 liters) per flush maximum. 6200 for definitions of 12 inch (300 mm) braided 6200 for definitions of 6200 for definitions of Commercial Water Closets and Urinals - 2 - 224 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 2) Proximity sensor type. 3) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Delany: 11451-1-013. b) Delta: 81T231BTA. c) Gerber: 44-902. d) Moen: 8312 e) Sloan: 186 -SMO with override button. f) Zurn: ZR -6003 -AV with maintenance override button. c. Flush Valve Filter: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) SFDG1 'Dirt Grabber' by South Fork Manufacturing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with separate vent line. Do not circuit vent. B. Ensure provisions are made for proper support of fixtures and that rough -in piping is accurately set and protected from movement and damage. 1. Seal wall -mounted fixtures around edges to wall with sealant specified in Section 07 9213. 2. Attach wall -hung fixtures to carriers. 3. Support fixture hanger or arm free of finished wall. C. Adjust flush valves for proper flow. D. Unless otherwise noted, provide each individual fixture supply with chrome -plated stop valve with hand wheel. E. Install fixtures with accessible stop or control valve in each branch supply line. F. Mounting: 1. Urinals: a. Standard: 24 inches (610 mm) from floor to bottom lip. b. Handicap Accessible: 17 inches (432 mm) maximum from floor to bottom lip. G. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked securely to waste pipe. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. Caulk between fixtures and floor with sealant specified in Section 07 9213. Point edges. H. Flush Valve Filters: 1. Install in Delany, Sloan, and Zurn flush valves. 2. Install after water lines have been flushed out, but before turning water into flush valve. 3.2 CLEANING A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project. END OF SECTION Commercial Water Closets and Urinals - 3 - 224213 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 22 4216 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 9213: Sealants used between fixtures and other substrates. 2. Section 22 0501: Common Mechanical Requirements. 3. Section 22 1116: Domestic Water Piping. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Product Data for Credit WE 3: 1) Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. American Standard Brands, Piscataway, NJ www.americanstandard-us.com or American Standard Canada, Mississauga, ON www.americanstandard.ca. b. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co, Novi, MI or BrassCraft Canada Ltd, St Thomas, ON www.brasscraft.com. c. Brocar Products Inc, Cincinnati, OH www.brocar.com. d. CECO, Huntington Park, CA www.cecosinks.com. e. Chicago Faucet Co, Des Plaines, IL www.chicaclofaucets.com. f. Dearborn Brass, Tyler, TX www.dearbornbrass.com. g. Delta Faucet Co, Indianapolis, IN www.deltafaucet.com or Delta Faucet Canada, London, ON (519) 659-3626. h. EBC /Just Manufacturing Co, Franklin Park, IL www.iustmf-Q.com. i. Elkay Manufacturing Co, Oak Brook, IL www.elkay.com. j. Fiat Products, Evanston, IL www.craner)lumbinci.com or Fiat Products Ltd, Winnepeg, MB www.fiat.ca. k. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC, Woodridge, IL www.gerberonline.com. 1. Josam Co, Michigan City, IN www.iosam.com. m. Jay R. Smith Maufacturing Co, Montgomery, AL www.irsmith.com. n. Just Manufacturing Co, Franklin Park, IL www.iustsinks.com. o. Keeney Manufacturing Co, Newington, CT www.keeneymfg.com. p. Kindred USA, Midland, ON www.kindred-sinkware.com. Commercial Lavatories - 1 - 224216 5074738 June 2012 Rexburc q. Kohler Cc Plumbing Div, Kohler, WI www.us.kohler.com. r. McGuire Manufacturing Cc, Cheshire, CT www.mcauiremfa.com. s. Mifab Manufacturing Inc, Amherst, NY www.mifab.com. t. Moen Incorporated, North Olmsted, OH, or Moen Canada, Oakville, ON www.moen.com, u. Omni Flow Controls, Harbor City, CA www.chronomite.com or www,om niflowcontrols.com. v. Sloan Valve Cc, Franklin Park, IL www.sloanvalve.com. w. Speakman Company, New Castle, DE www.sr)eakmancomi)any.com. x. Stern -Williams, Shawnee Mission, KS www.sternwilliams.com. y. Symmons, Braintree, MA www.symmons.com. z. T & S Brass & Bronze Works Inc, Travelers Rest, SC www.tsbrass.com. aa. TrueBro Inc, Collierville, TN www.truebro.com. bb. Wade Div Tyler Pipe, Tyler, TX www.wadedrains.com. cc. Watts Drainage, Spindale, NC www.wattsdrainacle.com or Watts Industries, Burlington, ON, Canada www.wattscda.com. dd. Zurn Commercial Brass, Sanford, NC www.zurn.com or Zurn Industries Ltd, Mississuaga, ON (905) 795-8844. ee. Zurn Cast Metal, Erie, PA www,zurn.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim, including trim behind custom casework doors, shall be chrome plated. C. Components: 1. Lavatories And Fittings: a. Standard Self Supporting Lavatories: 1) Size: 20 by 18 inches (500 by 450 mm). 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) American Standard: Lucern 0355.012. b) Gerber: Monticello 11 12-654. c) Kohler: Greenwich K-2023. 3) Carrier / Support: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Josam: 17100. (2) Jay R. Smith: 0700. (3) Wade: 520-M36. b. Handicap Accessible Self Supporting Lavatories: 1) Size: 20 by 18 inches (500 by 450 mm). 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) American Standard: Lucern 0355.012. b) Gerber: Monticello 11 12-654. c) Kohler: Greenwich K-2023. 3) Carrier / Support: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (4) Josam: 17100. (5) Jay R. Smith: 0700. (6) Wade: 520-M36. c. Lavatory Fittings: 1) Faucet and Grid Strainer For Standard Sinks: Commercial Lavatories - 2 - 22 4: 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) American Standard: Monterrey Two -Handle Centerset Lavatory Faucet with Vandal -Resistant Wrist Blade handles and grid strainer drain 5502.140. (2) Chicago: 802CP with 327XCP. (3) Delta: 2529HDF. (4) Gerber: C4-44-412. (5) Kohler: K -7404-5A with K-7715 strainer. (6) Moen: 8215 with 14750 grid strainer. (7) Speakman: SC 3072. (8) T & S: B-0890 with B-0899 Grid Strainer. (9) Zurn: Z81104 with McGuire 155A Grid Strainer. 2) Faucet and Grid Strainer For Handicap Accessible Sinks: a) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) American Standard: Monterrey Two -Handle Centerset Lavatory Faucet with Vandal -Resistant Wrist Blade handles and grid strainer drain 5502.170. (2) Chicago: 802-317CP with K7715 strainer. (3) Delta: 2529HDF. (4) Gerber: CO -44-412. (5) Kohler: K -7404-5A with K-13885 strainer. (6) Moen: 8215 with14750 grid strainer. (7) Speakman: SC 3074. (8) T & S: B-0890 with B-0899 Grid Strainer. (9) Zurn: Z-81104 with McGuire 155A grid strainer. 3) Flow Control Fitting: a) Provide vandal -proof type in place of aerator. Flow shall be 1.5 gpm. b) Category Four Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Omni A-200 Series by Chronomite Laboratories. 4) Supply pipes with stops: a) Provide chrome plated quarter -turn brass ball valve, 12 inch long braided stainless steel riser, and chrome -plated steel flange. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) McGuire: BV2165CC. (2) Zurn: Z8804 LRQ-PC. 5) Trap: a) 17 gauge (1.4 mm) tube 'P' trap, chrome plated. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Dearborn. (2) Engineered Brass Company (EBC). (3) Keeney Manufacturing. (4) McGuire. (5) Zurn. 6) Safety Covers for Handicap Accessible Lavatories: a) Provide protection on water supply pipes and on trap. b) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: (1) Trapwrap by Brocar Products Inc. (2) Pro Wrap by McGuire Products. (3) Handi Lav -Guard by TrueBro. Commercial Lavatories - 3 - 224216 5074738 June 2012 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with separate vent line. Do not circuit vent. B. Ensure provisions are made for proper support of fixtures and that rough -in piping is accurately set and protected from movement and damage. Rexbur C. Seal wall -mounted fixtures around edges to wall and counter top fixtures to countertop with sealant specified in Section 07 9213. D. Unless otherwise noted, provide each individual fixture supply with chrome -plated stop valve with hand wheel. E. Install fixtures with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. F. Self -Supporting Lavatories: Install using carriers. Support carrier free of finished wall. G. Install Safety Covers on all under sink/ lavatories with exposed water supply pipes and traps. 3.2 CLEANING A. Palish chrome finish at completion of Project. END OF SECTION Commercial Lavatories - 4 - P2 4; DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 23 0501 Common HVAC Requirements 23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0800 Demolition and Repair 233000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3400 HVAC Fans 23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 01 0000 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common requirements and procedures for HVAC systems. 2. Responsibility for proper operation of electrically powered equipment furnished under this Division. 3. Interface with Testing And Balancing Agency. 4. Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division. 5. Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for HVAC system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Sleeves, inserts, and equipment for mechanical systems installed under other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants used at building exterior. 4. Section 07 9219: Quality of acoustical sealants. 5. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting. 6. Section 26 2913: Magnetic starters and thermal protective devices (heaters) not factory mounted integral part of mechanical equipment. 7. Division 26: Raceway and conduit, unless specified otherwise, line voltage wiring, outlets, and disconnect switches. 8. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1) Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufacturer's catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. 2) . Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, heating system, control panel, etc. Each diagram shall show locations of all control and operational components and devices. Mark correct operating settings for each control device on these diagrams. Common HVAC Requirements - 1 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. Include drawings showing electrical power requirements and connection locations. c. Drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components in panels and their function. d. Other shop drawings required by Division 23 trade Sections. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. See Section 01 8113 for Sustainable Design Requirements for this Project. See individual Specification Sections in Division 22 for Submittals required. 2. Qualification Statement: a. HVAC Firm: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. b. Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Architect or Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations and Maintenance Data (Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7800): 1) At beginning of HVAC section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide master index showing items included. a) Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical Engineer, General Contractor, and HVAC, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, and Temperature Control subcontractors. b) Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include: (1) List of HVAC equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item. (2) Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of HVAC equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions. (3) Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, location, and type and frequency of lubrication. (4) Manual for Honeywell T7350 thermostat published by Honeywell. c) Provide operating instructions to include: (1) General description of each HVAC system. (2) Step by step procedure to follow in putting each piece of HVAC equipment into operation. (3) Provide diagrams for electrical control system showing wiring of items such as smoke detectors, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copies of warranties required in individual Sections of Division 23. c. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturers documentation: a) Copies of approved shop drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: Common HVAC Requirements - 2 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Gas Ordinances applicable to Project. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in writing of such differences before performing work affected by such differences. 3. Sustainable Design Compliance: a. Submit all Sustainable Design Requirements to comply with Section 01 8113 for information needed by the Design Professional to demonstrate that particular credits have been achieved. In particular, credits that depend on knowing the cost and quantity of certain types of products cannot be achieved without obtaining that information from the Contractor. These include renewable content, locally sourced new products, and reused products. In addition, a form is provided for each installer to certify that they have not used adhesives, sealants, and for suppliers and installers to certify they have not used composite wood with prohibited VOC content. 4. Identification: a. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL / ULC and AGA / CGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner. B. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: 1. Company: a. Company specializing in performing work of this section. 1) Minimum five (5) years experience in HVAC installations. 2) Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding. b. Upon request, submit documentation. 2. Installer: a. Licensed for area of Project. b. Designate one (1) individual as project foremen who shall be on site at all times during installation and experienced with installation procedures required for this project. c. Upon request, submit documentation. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01: a. Stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by Architect until installed. b. Store items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, in dry, heated spaces. c. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. d. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 2. Protect bearings during installation. Thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner. Clearly record 'start-up' date of each piece of equipment on certificate. Common HVAC Requirements - 3 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 B. Special Warranty: 1. Guarantee HVAC systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. If HVAC sub -contractor with offices located more than 150 miles (240 km) from Project site is used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local HVAC sub -contractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty section of Operation And Maintenance Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Components shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance. B. Pipe And Pipe Fittings: 1. Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project. 2. Weld -O -Let and Screw -O -Let fittings are acceptable. C. Sleeves: 1. In Framing: Standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 ga (2 mm) galvanized sheet metal two sizes larger than bare pipe or insulation on insulated pipe. 2. In Concrete And Masonry: Sleeves through outside walls, interior shear walls, and footings shall be schedule 80 black steel pipe with welded plate. D. Valves: 1. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Drawings: 1. HVAC Drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. 2. Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over HVAC Drawings. 3. Because of small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. B. Verification Of Conditions: 1, Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction. 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. Common HVAC Requirements - 4 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available. 4. Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Changes Due To Equipment Selection: 1. Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or connections from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings, if requested by Architect, showing proposed installations. 2. If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony with intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary. 3. Provide any additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other additional equipment required for proper operation of system resulting from selection of equipment. 4. Be responsible for the proper location of roughing -in and connections provided under other Divisions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items and see they are properly installed. 2. Electrical: Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to installer of electrical system. 3. Testing And Balancing: a. Put HVAC systems into full operation and continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing. b. Make changes in pulleys, belts, fan speeds, and dampers or add dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Testing And Balancing Agency and at no additional cost to Owner. B. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. C. Locating Equipment: 1. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps, filters, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 2. Adjust locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, and equipment to accommodate work to interferences anticipated and encountered. 3. Install HVAC work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or structure. 4. Determine exact route and location of each pipe and duct before fabrication. a. Right -Of -Way: Common HVAC Requirements - 5 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Lines that pitch shall have right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example, steam, steam condensate, and drains shall normally have right-of- way. 2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction: 1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes and ducts as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings. 2) Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and devices as required to effect these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction. D. Piping: 1. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus. a. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. b. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. 1) Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. 2) Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping specified, at connections to equipment and on bypasses. a) Make connections of dissimilar metals with di -electric unions. b) Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on both sides of traps. 3) Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, bull head tees, close nipples, or running couplings. 4) Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. Provide drain valves at low points and manual air vents at high points in hot water heating and cooling water piping. 5) Install piping to insure noiseless circulation. 6) Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final acceptance. c. Do not install piping in shear walls. 2. Properly make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. b. Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps and other equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged connections or disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if requested. c. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. d. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe: 1) Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run. 2) Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof. 3. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on grade. Seal sleeves with specified sealants. a. Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) above floor finish in mechanical equipment rooms above basement floor. In other rooms, sleeves shall be flush with floor. Common HVAC Requirements - 6 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Sleeves through floors and foundation walls shall be watertight. 4. Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and are exposed in finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain pattern and shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface. 5. Remove dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from each length of piping before installation. a. After each section of piping used for movement of water or steam is installed, flush with clean water, except where specified otherwise. b. Arrange temporary flushing connections for each section of piping and arrange for flushing total piping system. c. Provide temporary cross connections and water supply for flushing and drainage and remove after completion of work. E. Penetration Firestops: Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at HVAC system penetrations through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls. F. Sealants: 1. Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements of HVAC systems. 2. Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and ceilings. 3.4 REPAIR/ RESTORATION A. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. 2. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Perform tests on HVAC piping systems. Furnish devices required for testing purposes. B. Non -Conforming Work: 1, Replace material or workmanship proven defective with sound material at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Repeat tests on new material, if requested. 3.6 SYSTEM START-UP A. Off -Season Start-up: 1. If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start- up of cooling systems. If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems. 2. Notify Owner seven days minimum before scheduled start-up. 3. Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system. Common HVAC Requirements - 7 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 4. At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily completed. B. Preparations that are to be completed before start up and operation include, but are not limited to, following: 1. Dry out electric motors and other equipment to develop and properly maintain constant insulation resistance. 2. Make adjustments to insure that: a. Equipment alignments and clearances are adjusted to allowable tolerances. b. Nuts and bolts and other types of anchors and fasteners are properly and securely fastened. c. Packed, gasketed, and other types of joints are properly made up and are tight and free from leakage. d. Miscellaneous alignings, tightenings, and adjustings are completed so systems are tight and free from leakage and equipment performs as intended. 3. Motors and accessories are completely operable. 4. Inspect and test electrical circuitry, connections, and voltages to be properly connected and free from shorts. 5. Adjust drives for proper alignment and tension. 6. Make certain filters in equipment for moving air are new and of specified type. 7. Properly lubricate and run-in bearings in accordance with Manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, and equipment. B. No more than one week before Final Inspection, flush out bearings and clean other lubricated surfaces with flushing oil. Provide best quality and grade of lubricant specified by Equipment Manufacturer. C. Replace filters in equipment for moving air with new filters of specified type no more than one week before Final Inspection. 3.8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruction Of Owner: 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Stake Physical Facilities Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation And Maintenance Manual when so doing: a. Minimum Instruction Periods: 1) HVAC: Eight (8) hours. 2) Temperature Control: Six (6) hours. 3) Refrigeration: Four (4) hours. b. Conduct instruction periods after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Cap or plug open ends of pipes Common HVAC Requirements - 8 - 230501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials. B. Do not operate pieces of equipment used for moving supply air without proper air filters installed properly in system. C. After start-up, continue necessary lubrication and be responsible for damage to bearings while equipment is being operated up to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Common HVAC Requirements - 9 - 230501 )-)0AoK )INCO: 5074738 June 2012 SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY Rexburg 2, 5 A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common hanger and support requirements and procedures for HVAC systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality and requirements for welding. 2. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 3. Sections Under 09 9000 Heading: Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting. 4. Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Class Two Quality Standard Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200: a. Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH www.anvilinti.com. b. Cooper B -Line, Highland, IL www.cooi)erbline.com. c. Erico International, Solon, OH www.erico.com. d. Hilti Inc, Tulsa, OK www.hilti.com. e. Minerallac, Hampshire, IL www.minerallac.com. I. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.suoerstrut.com. g. Unistrut, Wayne, MI www.unistrut.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: a. upport rods for single pipe shall be in accordance with following table: Rod Diameter Pipe Size 3/8 inch 2 inches and smaller 1/2 inch 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches 5/8 inch 4 to 5 inches 3/4 inch 6 inches 7/8 inch 8 to 12 inches Hangers and Supports for HVAC - 1 - 230529 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Support rods for multiple pipes supported on steel angle trapeze hangers shall be in accordance with following table: 1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 Mpa). C. Materials: 1. Hangers, Rods, Channels, Attachments, And Inserts: a. Galvanized and UL approved for service intended. b. Support horizontal piping from clevis hangers or on roller assemblies with channel supports, except where trapeze type hangers are explicitly shown on Drawings. Hangers shall have double nuts. c. Class Two Quality Standards: 1) Support insulated pipes with clevis hanger equal to Anvil Fig 260 or roller assembly equal to Anvil Fig 171 with an insulation protection shield equal to Anvil Fig 167. Gauge and length of shield shall be in accordance with Anvil design data. 2) Except uninsulated copper pipes, support uninsulated pipes from clevis hanger equal to Anvil Fig 260. Support uninsulated copper pipe from hanger equal to Anvil Fig CT -65 copper plated hangers and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. d. Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping: 1) Class Two Quality Standard: Anvil Figure 261. e. Furnace / Fan Coil Support Channel: 1) Class One Quality Standard: Unistrut P1000. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. f. Swivel Attachment: 1) Class One Quality Standard: Unistrut EM3127. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Piping: 1. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using support channels and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork. Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed. b. Supports For Horizontal Piping: 1) Support metal piping at 96 inches (2 400) mm on center maximum for pipe 1- 1/4 inches (32 mm) or larger and 72 inches (1 800 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch (28 mm) or less. 2) Support thermoplastic pipe at 48 inches (1 200 mm) on center maximum. 3) Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. c. Supports for Vertical Piping: Hangers and Supports for HVAC - 2 - 230529 Rods Number of Pipes per Han er for Each Pipe Size No. Diameter 2Inch 2.5 Inch 3Inch 14Inch 5Inch 6Inch 8 I 2 3/8 Inch Two 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1/2 Inch Three Three Two 0 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Six Four Three Two 0 0 0 2 5/8 Inch Nine Seven Five Three Two Two 0 2 5/8 Inch Twelve Nine Seven Five Three Two Tw 1) Size trapeze angles so bending stress is less than 10,000 psi (69 Mpa). C. Materials: 1. Hangers, Rods, Channels, Attachments, And Inserts: a. Galvanized and UL approved for service intended. b. Support horizontal piping from clevis hangers or on roller assemblies with channel supports, except where trapeze type hangers are explicitly shown on Drawings. Hangers shall have double nuts. c. Class Two Quality Standards: 1) Support insulated pipes with clevis hanger equal to Anvil Fig 260 or roller assembly equal to Anvil Fig 171 with an insulation protection shield equal to Anvil Fig 167. Gauge and length of shield shall be in accordance with Anvil design data. 2) Except uninsulated copper pipes, support uninsulated pipes from clevis hanger equal to Anvil Fig 260. Support uninsulated copper pipe from hanger equal to Anvil Fig CT -65 copper plated hangers and otherwise fully suitable for use with copper tubing. d. Riser Clamps For Vertical Piping: 1) Class Two Quality Standard: Anvil Figure 261. e. Furnace / Fan Coil Support Channel: 1) Class One Quality Standard: Unistrut P1000. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. f. Swivel Attachment: 1) Class One Quality Standard: Unistrut EM3127. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, Thomas & Betts. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Piping: 1. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. a. Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using support channels and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork. Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed. b. Supports For Horizontal Piping: 1) Support metal piping at 96 inches (2 400) mm on center maximum for pipe 1- 1/4 inches (32 mm) or larger and 72 inches (1 800 mm) on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch (28 mm) or less. 2) Support thermoplastic pipe at 48 inches (1 200 mm) on center maximum. 3) Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. c. Supports for Vertical Piping: Hangers and Supports for HVAC - 2 - 230529 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 e. 1) Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level. 2) Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported directly from building structure. 3) Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe: 1) Provide for expansion in every 30 feet (9 meters) of straight run. 2) Provide 12 inch (300 mm) offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports for HVAC - 3 - 230529 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 23 0800 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, and Section 23 0501 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Under this section remove obsolete piping and mechanical equipment and relocate, reconnect or replace existing piping affected by demolition or new construction. Remove concealed piping abandoned due to demolition or new construction, or cap piping flush with existing surfaces. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS A. All relocations, reconnections and removals are not necessarily indicated on the drawings. As such, the Contractor shall make adequate allowance in his proposal for this work as no extra charges will be allowed for these items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS A. Where existing piping must remain in service to supply occupied areas during construction, provide temporary piping, connections, and equipment to maintain service to such areas. All shall be performed in a neat and safe manner to prevent injury to the building or its occupants. 3.2 DRILLING, CUTTING, PATCHING A. All Required drilling, cutting, block-outs and demolition work required for the removal and/or installation of the mechanical system is the responsibility of this Contractor. B. No joists, beams, girders, trusses or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without written permission from the Architect. C. The patching, repair, and finishing to existing or new surfaces is the responsibility of this Contractor, unless specifically called for under sections of specifications covering these materials. Demolition and Repair - 1 - 230800 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 D. Disconnect all equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Relocate any existing equipment that obstructs new construction. 3.3 EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN IN USE A. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, replace, extend, or repair piping and equipment to allow continued use of same. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REMOVED A. All obsolete materials, piping, and equipment shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site promptly. END OF SECTION Demolition and Repair - 2 - 230800 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 23 3400 HVAC FANS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install exhaust fans as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3001: Common Duct Requirements. 2. Division 26: Control device and electrical connection. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Bear AMCA seal and UL label. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp, Muskogee, OK www.acmefan.com. 2. Breidert Air Products, Jacksonville, FL www.breidert.com. 3. Carnes Co, Verona, MI www.carnes.com. 4. Greenheck Corp, Schofield, WI www.greenheck.com. 5. Loren Cook Co, Springfield, MO www.lorencook.com. 6. PennBarry, Richardson, TX (215) 464-8900 www.l)ennbarry.com. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ceiling or Wall Mounted Exhaust Fans: 1. Acoustically insulated housings. Sound level rating of 4.6 sones maximum for fan RPM and CFM listed on Drawings. 2. Include chatterproof integral back -draft damper with no metal -to -metal contact. 3. True centrifugal wheels. 4. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing housing. 5. Suitably ground motors and mount on rubber -in shear vibration isolators. 6. Provide wall or roof cap, as required. 7. Class One Quality Standards: a. Greenheck SP. b. PennBarry Zephyr. 8. Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200. a. Acme, Breidert, Broan, Carnes, Cook -Gemini, Greenheck, PennBarry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchor fan units securely to structure or to curb. END OF SECTION HVAC Fans - 1 - 233400 BLANK PAGE 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install diffusers, registers, and grilles connected to ductwork as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 3001: General Duct Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Tools: Leave tool for removing core of each different type of grille for building custodian. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer Contact List: 1. Carnes Co, Verona, MI www.carnes.com. 2. J & J Register, Grand Rapids, MI www.iandireg.com. 3. Krueger Air System Components, Richardson, TX www.krueger-hvac.com. 4. Nailor Industries Inc, Houston, TX or Weston, ON www.nailor.com. 5. Price Industries Inc, Suwanee, GA www.price-hvac.com or E H Price Ltd, Winnipeg, MB (204) 669-4220. 6. Titus, Richardson, TX www.titus-hvac.com. 7. Tuttle & Bailey, Richardson, TX www.tutileandbailey.com. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Floor/ Supply & Return Grilles: 1. Finish: Clear anodized. 2. Supply registers to include OBD. 3. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a. Carnes: CCJB (with mitered corners welded on face and sanded). b. J & J: 2500 with Frame 10. c. Krueger: 1500F. d. Nailor: 49 -240 -FN -MM. e. Price: LBP -25B. f. Titus: CT -540. g. Tuttle & Bailey: LFD. Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles - 1 - 233713 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchor securely into openings. Secure frames to ductwork by using four sheet metal screws, one per side. Level floor registers and anchor securely into floor. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Set sidewall supply register blades at 15 degrees upward deflection. END OF SECTION Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles - 2 - 233713 DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 60000 ELECTRICAL 260501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 260519 LINE -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260613 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHT SCHEDULE 62000 LOW(LINE)VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 65000 LIGHTING 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - Document 26 0000 BLANK PAGE 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS rART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections. 4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchor bolts and templates for exterior lighting equipment bases. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 8400: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Provide following information for each item of equipment: 1) Catalog Sheets. 2) Assembly details or dimension drawings. 3) Installation instructions. 4) Manufacturer's name and catalog number. 5) Name of local supplier. b. Furnish such information for following equipment: 1) Sections 26 2417 / 8: Panelboards. 2) Section 26 2726: Wiring devices / Lighting control / Dimming equipment. 3) Section 26 2816: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 4) Section 26 5100: Interior lighting fixtures. 5) Section 26 5200: Emergency battery units. c. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports: Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations And Maintenance Manual Data: a. Modify and add to requirements of Section 01 7000 as follows: 1) Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment submitted under Product Data. 2) Include copy of approved shop drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: common Electrical Requirements - 1 - 260501 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available. 1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide competent instructor for three days to train maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instructior as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. PART2-PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough -in. a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections. B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architecl before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full -load nameplate current rating and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor. END OF SECTION Common Electrical Requirements 2 - 260501 5074738 June 2012 SECTION 26 0502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501 - Common Electrical Requirements 2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Rexburg 2, 5 A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways, conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform drilling, cutting, block -offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary portions of electrical system. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without prior written permission from Architect. B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re -used back to next active fixture, device, or junction box. C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION Electrical Demolition Requirements 1 260502 )zW,,Vjo S. )IACP: ;074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 0519 LINE -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES )ART 7 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 0933: Conductors and cables for temperature control system. 2. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts. )ART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEMS A. Line Voltage Conductors: 1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise. b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. 2. Insulation: a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C). c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes. 3. Colors: a. 208Y / 120 V System: 1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B. 3) Blue: Phase C. 4) Green: Ground. 5) White: Neutral. b. 480Y / 277 Volt System: 1) Brown: Phase A. 2) Orange: Phase B. 3) Yellow: Phase C. 4) Gray: Neutral. 5) Green: Ground. c. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color -coded as specified above. B. Line Voltage Cables: 1. Non -Metallic Sheathed Cable (NM) and Metal Clad Cable (MC) may be used as restricted below: a. Copper conductors Line -Voltage Conductors And Cables - 1 - 260519 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, b. Sizes #12 through #8 c. Use only in indoor dry locations where: 1) Not subject to damage. 2) Not in contact with earth. d. Not in concrete e. Is allowed by local codes. C. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non - hardening sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable. B. Line Voltage Conductors: 1. Install conductors in raceway where indicated on Drawings. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. 2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals: a. On three-phase, 4 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits. b. On single-phase, 3 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings. d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors. c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. C. Line Voltage Cables: 1. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting and numbering shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. 2. Support cables using approved staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings, spaced as required. 3. Where installing in framing, do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 4. Conceal cables within ceilings and walls of finished areas. Cables may be exposed in unfinished areas but not run on floors of mechanical equipment spaces or in such a way that they obstruct access to, operation of, or servicing of equipment. 5. Install exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 6. Keep cables 6 inches 150 mm minimum from hot water pipes. 7. Do not support cables from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. 8. Prohibited procedures: a. Boring holes for installation of cables in vertical truss members. Line -Voltage Conductors And Cables - 2 - 260519 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Notching of structural members for installation of cables. END OF SECTION _ine-Voltage Conductors And Cables - 3 - 260519 BLANK PAGE 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 0523 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install control -voltage electrical cables as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install building telephone / data system cables as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1000: EC will terminate building telephone cables at terminal board. 2. Section 23 0933: Cables for Temperature Control System. 3. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Control Voltage: 70 Volts and under. )ART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Alpha Wire Co, Elizabeth, NJ www.alphawire.com. b. Belden Wire & Cable Co, Richmond, IN www.belden.com. c. Liberty Wire & Cable, Colorado Springs, CO www.libertycable.com. d. West Penn Wire Corp, Washington, PA www.westpenn-cdt.com. B. Components: 1. Building Telephone / Data System Cables. a. CAT 6, 24 AWG, solid bare copper, four pair, UTP. b. Sheath Colors: 1) Telephone: White. 2) Data: Blue. c. Meet requirements of EIA / TIA 568 Standard. SART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Cables shall be continuous and without splices from source to outlet. 2. Conceal cables within ceilings and walls of finished areas. Cables may be exposed in unfinished areas but not run on floors of mechanical equipment spaces or in such a way that they obstruct access to, operation of, or servicing of equipment. 3. Run exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. Dontrol-Voltage Electrical Cables 1 - 260523 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 4. Keep cables 6 inches 150 mm minimum from hot water pipes. 5. Support cables using approved staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings spaced every 3 feet. 6. Where installing in framing, do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. Holes shall be one half inch diameter maximum. 7. Bundle only cables of same systems together. 8. Pulling cables into conduit: a. Do not pull cables until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling cables. c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. 9. Prohibited procedures: a. Boring holes for installation of cables in vertical truss members. b. Notching of structural members for installation of cables. B. Telephone / Data System Cables: 1. Install cable from terminal board to telephone outlets and make connections to telephone jacks. Punchdown all phone cables on a punchdown block at telephone terminal board and label cables to identify location served, arrange cables neatly on board. 2. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, install data cables from patch panel to data outlets and make connections to data jacks. Make connections at patch panel and install label on patch panel for each termination to identify location served. C. Sound And Video Systems Cables: 1. Label cables at each end with cable markers for use of sound system and video system installers 2. Run separate insulated No. 6 grounding conductor from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. 3. Extend cables 18 inches 450 mm from wall or ceiling at all outlets and speaker locations. Extend cables and grounding conductors to twice vertical length of cabinet at each cabinet location. 4. For cables not installed in raceway, do not run cables within 10 inches of line voltage conductors, raceways. Also, maintain 10 inches minimum between following exposed cable groups: a. Microphone cables. b. CAT -6, sound system control, telephone, video, or ATC cables. c. Loudspeaker cables. D. Telephone and Internet Service: EC shall and make all required arrangements, applications, labor and supervision to obtain Telephone and Internet service to this facility. EC shall obtain quantity of desired phone lines and preferred Internet Service Provider from Owner. Coordinate with local FM manager. END OF SECTION Control -Voltage Electrical Cables - 2 - 260523 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as excluded below. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 03 3111. PART 2 -PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Type One Acceptable Products: a. 'Cadweld' by Erico International, Solon, OH www.erico.corn. b. 'ThermOweld' by Continental Industries, Tulsa, NE www.conind.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes. C. Materials: 1. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation. 2. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for such use. 3. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices: Make by exothermic process. )ART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and placing concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding conductor installation. B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be contindous from terminal to terminal without splice. Provide grounding for following. 1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures. 2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures. 3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system. ;rounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems - 1 - 260526 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards. 5. Non -current -carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures. C. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6 inches 150 mm of point of entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and valves to assure electrical continuity. D. Provide concrete -encased electrode system by embedding 20 feet 6 000 mm minimum of No. 2/0 bar, copper conductor in concrete footing, 2 inches 50 mm minimum below concrete surface. Extend No. 2/0 copper conductor to main panel as shown on Drawings. E. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer supplying building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side of main service disconnect. F. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches 1 800 mm in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. G. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment enclosures. H. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground. 1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. 2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings. J. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet. K. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal frame with bolted solderless lug. L. Ground cabinet of transformers to conduit and ground wires, if installed. Bond transformer secondary neutral conductor to cabinet. . 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding conductor. END OF SECTION Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems - 2 - 260526 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions. 2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. 3. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to comply with telephone company requirements. 4. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company requirements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements. SART 2 - PRODUCTS SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Cooper B -Line, Highland, IL www.b-line.com. b. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com or Hubbell Canada Inc, Pickering, ON (905) 839-4332. c. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. d. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com or Thomas & Betts Ltd, Iberville, PQ (450) 347-5318. e. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. f. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, WV (800) 240-2601 or Walker Systems Inc / Wiremold Canada Inc, Fergus, ON (519) 843-4332. g. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com. B. Performance: 1. Design Criteria: All aspects of design of sound system have been included as requirements of Owner. Do not make changes to any aspects of installation, design, or equipment pertaining to sound system without Owner's approval through Architect and Sound Consultant. C. Materials: 1. Raceway And Conduit: a. Sizes: 1) 3/4 inch 19 mm for exterior use, unless indicated otherwise. 2) 1/2 inch 13 mm for interior use, unless indicated otherwise. b. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. 1) Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape. 2) Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), Flexible Steel Conduit, and Electrical Non - Metallic Tubing (ENT): iaceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems - 1 - 260533 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, a) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is: (1) Not subject to damage. (2) Not in contact with earth. (3) Not in concrete. b) For metal conduit systems, flexible steel conduit is required for final connections t( indoor mechanical equipment. 3) Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: a) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. 4) Listed, Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: a) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 31 inches 900 mm. 5) Pre -wired 3/8 Inch 10 mm Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches 1 800 mm. c. Prohibited Raceway Materials: 1) Aluminum conduit. 2) Armored cable type AC (BX) cable. 2. Raceway And Conduit Fittings: a. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. b. EMT: 1) Compression type. 2) Steel set screw housing type. c. PVC Conduit: 1) PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes. 2) PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. d. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. e. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. I. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper. g. Prohibited Fitting Materials: 1) Crimp -on, tap -on, indenter type fittings. 2) Cast set -screw fittings for EMT. 3) Spray (aerosol) PVC cement. 3. Outlet Boxes: a. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: 1) Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. 2) Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required. 3) Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. b. Non-metallic boxes may be used only for low voltage wiring systems. c. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be single device outlet boxes. d. HVAC Instrumentation And Control: 1) Junction boxes in mechanical equipment areas shall be 4 inches 100 mm square. 2) Boxes for remote temperature sensor devices shall be recessed single device. 3) Boxes for thermostats shall be 4 inches 100 mm square with raised single device cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems - 2 - 260533 i074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment. 2. Before rough -in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended. a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough -in. Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. 3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors. 4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions. B. General: 1. Sound and video system electrical components furnished and installed under this Section include following items: a. Metal equipment cabinet and control cabinets. b. Factory -fabricated speaker enclosures. c. Fittings. C. Conduit And Raceway: 1. Keep raceway runs 6 inches 150 mm minimum from hot water pipes. 2. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced. b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 3. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 4. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches 32 mm in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. 5. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 6. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches 50 mm in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush. 7. Installation In Framing: a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches 600 mm of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. b. Holes shall be one inch 25 mm diameter maximum. 8. Underground Raceway And Conduit: a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches 600 mm deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches 450 mm deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches 450 mm deep at point of exit from planting areas. 9. Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required. b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: 1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry. 2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood. 4) Metal screws on metal. 10. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems - 3 - 260533 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. c. Use of torches for bending PVC. d. Spray applied PVC cement. e. Boring holes in truss members. f. Notching of structural members. g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires. h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway. D. Telephone / Data Systems: 1. Install main service raceway as directed by Telephone Company. Leave pull wire in raceway. 2. Install raceway from terminal board to each telephone and data outlet as indicated on Drawings. E. Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover. 2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets. 4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two -gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Location: a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough -in. Distance of box from jamb shall be within 6 inches 150 mm of door jamb. b. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. c. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile. F. Support factory -fabricated speaker enclosures from structure or ceiling suspension system. END OF SECTION Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems - 4 - 260533 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 26 0613 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHT SCHEDULE 'ART 1 - GENERAL: Not Used 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used 'ART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, mount center of outlets or boxes at following heights above finish floor. Refer special conditions to Architect before rough -in and locate outlet under his direction. B. Mounting Heights: 1. HVAC: a. Temperature Control Junction Boxes: As indicated on Drawings. b. Thermostats: As indicated on Drawings. c. Remote Temperature Sensors: 1) Wall -Mounted 50 inches 1 250 min to top. d. Other Motor Disconnects: 60 inches 1 500 mm. e. Motor Controls: 60 inches 1 500 mm. 2. Plumbing: a. Electric Water Cooler Outlets: Mount so outlet and cord are hidden by water cooler. 3. Electrical: a. Distribution Panels: b. Receptacles: c. Wall Switches: d. Wall -Mounted Exit Lights: e. Emergency Lighting Units: 4. Communications a. Sound Distribution System Components: b. Satellite Distribution System Components: c. TV Distribution System Components: d. Computer and TV: e. Telephone / Data Terminal Boards: f. Telephones (wall type): g. Telephones (desk type): 72 inches 1 800 mm to top. 18 inches 450 mm. 42 inches 1 050 mm. 90 inches 2 250 mm. 60 inches 1 500 mm. As indicated on Drawings. As indicated on Drawings. As indicated on Drawings. 18 inches 450 mm. 72 inches 1 800 mm to top. 60 inches 1 500 mm. 18 inches 450 mm. END OF SECTION lectrical Equipment Mounting Height Schedule - 1 - 260613 3n¢er;`a�l;Z i�c`(`i�s )7473£3 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wiring devices complete with plates as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 'ART 2 -PRODUCTS COMPONENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Cooper Wiring Devices, Peachtree City, GA www.cooperwiringdevices.com. b. General Electric Industrial Systems, Charlotte, NC www.ge(ndustrial.com. c. Hubbell Building Automation, Austin, TX www.hubbell-automation.com. d. Hubbell Inc, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com or Hubbell Canada Inc, Pickering, ON (800) 263-4622 or (905) 839-4332. e. Hunt Control Systems Inc, Fort Collins, CO www.huntdimming.com. f. Intermatic Inc, Spring Grove, IL www.intermatic.com. g. Leviton Manufacturing Co, Little Neck, NY www.leviton.com or Leviton Manufacturing of Canada Ltd, Pointe -Claire, QB (800) 461-2002 or (514) 954-1840. h. Lightolier Controls, Dallas, TX www.loicontrols.com or Lightolier CFI, Lachine, QB (800) 565-5486 or(514)636-0670. i. Lutron Electronics Cc Inc, Coopersburg, PA www.lutron.com. j. Novitas Inc, Peachtree City, GA www.novitas.com. k. Ortronics, New London, CT www.ortronics.com. I. Paragon Electric Co Inc, Carol Stream, IL www.icca.invensys.com/paragon or Paragon Electric, Mississauga, ON (800) 951-5526 or (905) 890-5956. m. Pass & Seymour, Syracuse, NY www.passandseymour.com or Pass & Seymour Canada Inc, Concord, ON (905) 738-9195. n. Red Dot div of Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnbcom. o. Siemon Company, Watertown, CT www.siemon.com. p. Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. q. Suttle, Hector, MN www.suttleonline.com. r. Tork Inc, Mount Vernon, NY www.tork.com. s. Watt Stopper Inc, Santa Clara, CA www.wattstopper.com. 2. Product Options: a. Faces shall be nylon where available. b. Devices of single type shall be from same Manufacturer. c. Devices are listed as white. Use white devices on light colored walls and brown on dark walls. B. Switches: 1. Rectangular Face Designer Style: a. Category Four Approved Products. 1) 20 AMP, single pole: See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. Viring Devices - 1 - 262726 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, a) Cooper: DEC13120W. b) Hubbell: HBL2121 WA. c) Leviton: 5621-2W. d) Pass & Seymour: 2621-W. 2) Two Pole: a) Cooper: DECB220W. b) Hubbell: HBL2122WA. c) Leviton: 5622-2W. d) Pass & Seymour: 2622-W. 3) Three Way: a) Cooper: DEC13320W. b) Hubbell: HBL2123WA. c) Leviton: 5623-2W. d) Pass & Seymour: 2623-W. 4) Four Way: a) Cooper: DECB420W. b) Hubbell: HBL2124WA. c) Leviton: 5624-2W. d) Pass & Seymour: 2624-W. 5) Pilot Switch: a) Single Pole: (1) Cooper: 2221 PL. (2) Hubbell: HBL1221PL. (3) Pass & Seymour: PS20AC1-RPL. (4) Leviton: 1221 -PLR. b) Double Pole: (1) Cooper: 2222PL. (2) Hubbell: HBL1222PL. (3) Pass & Seymour: PS20AC2-RPL. (4) Leviton: 1222 -PL. 6) Lighted Toggle Switch: a) Single Pole: (1) Cooper: DECB1201-W. (2) Hubbell: HBL21211LWA. (3) Leviton: 5631-2W. (4) Pass & Seymour: 2625-W. b) Three Way: (1) Cooper: DECB320LW. (2) Hubbell: HBL21231WA. (3) Leviton: 5633-2W. (4) Pass & Seymour: 26266-W. 2. Standard Style: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) 20 AMP, single pole for furnace disconnect a) Cooper: 2221 V b) Hubbell: HBL1221-1 c) Pass & Seymour: 20AC1-I d) Leviton: 1221-21Exhaust Fan Timer Switches: a. Serving Area: 1) 0-60 minute, no hold position. 2) Approved Products: a) Intermatic: FD60MWC. b) Paragon: SWPD60M-W. c) Tork: A560MW. b. Font: 1) 0-4 Hour, no hold position. 2) Approved Products: a) Intermatic: FDHW. b) Tork: A504HW. c. Custodian Room: Wiring Devices - 2 - 262726 X74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 C. 1) 24 hour, in -wall, multiple automatic ON-OFF settings. 2) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) Intermatic: E1020. b) Tork: 701A. 4. Dimmer Switches: a. Vertical slide control with faceplate. b. Preset, ON-OFF switch, 1000VA. c. Approved Products: 1) Hubbell: AS101/AS1I. 2) Hunt: DAP -10 -IV. 3) Leviton: IP110-1 4) Lightolier: MP1000-I. 5) Lutron: N -1003P -IV. 6) Pass & Seymour: 91180-I. Receptacles: 1. Rectangular Face Designer Style: a. 15 AMP, specification grade, back and side wired, self grounding. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Cooper: 6262W. 2) Hubbell: HBL2152WA. 3) Leviton: 16252-W. 4) Pass & Seymour: 26252-W. 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): a. 15 AMP, specification grade. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Cooper: GF15W. 2) Hubbell: GF5252WA. 3) Leviton: 8599-W. 4) Pass & Seymour: 1594-W. Telephone Jacks: 1. Desk Type: a. 4 conductor, screw terminals, voice grade. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 1) Cooper: 3532-4W. 2) Leviton: 40249-W. 3) Pass & Seymour: TPTE1-W. 4) Suttle: 625134-4-85. 2. Wall Type: a. 4 conductor, screw terminals, voice grade. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 1) Cooper: 3521-4W. 2) Leviton: 40257-W. 3) Pass & Seymour: WMTE14-W. 4) Suttle: 630AC4-85. 3. Module Type: a. For use in data faceplates. b. 8 conductor, punch -down, voice grade. c. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Siemon: MX3-F-U3-02 6200 for definitions of Categories. 6200 for definitions of Categories. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. E. Data Jacks: 1. For use in data faceplates. 2. 8 conductor, punch -down T568B wiring configuration, CAT 6. 3. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Flat Jack: Siemon MX6-F02 b. Angled Jack: Siemon MX6-02 c. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Viring Devices - 3 - 262726 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, F. M Plates: 1. Standard Cover Plates: a. Office / Occupied Areas: 1) Nylon or high impact resistant thermoplastic. 2) Color shall match wiring device. b. All Other: Stainless Steel. c. Ganged switches shall have gang plates. d. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 1) Cooper. 2) Hubbell. 3) Leviton. 4) Pass & Seymour. 2. Data Faceplates: a. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Single Module: Siemon MX -FP -S-01-02. 2) Two Modules: Siemon MX -FP -S-02-02. 6200 for definitions of Categories. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. Occupancy Sensors: 1. Ceiling, ultrasonic type. a. Complete with sensor and combined relay / control transformer. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Leviton: a) Sensor: OSC10-U b) Relay/ Transformer: OSP20-OD) 2) Hubbell: a) Sensor: OMNI-US500. b) Relay/ Transformer: 120V: MP 120 A. 3) Novitas: a) Sensor: 01-083. b) Relay/ Transformer: 120 / 277 V, 13-0511. 4) Pass & Seymour: 120 V. a) Sensor: US1001. b) Relay/ Transformer: PWP120. 5) Tork: a) Sensor: SC20. b) Relay/ Transformer: 120V: TRP1. 6) Watt Stopper: a) Sensor: W -500A. b) Relay/ Transformer: 120V: B120E-P. 2. Wall switch, passive infrared type. a. Features include sensitivity and time delay adjustments. b. Manual ON / auto OFF capability. c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Leviton: ODS10-IDW. 2) Hubbell: LHIRSIW. 3) Sensor Switch: WDS-SA-V-W. 4) Square D: SLSPWS1277UW. 5) Watt Stopper: PW -100-W. H. Data Patch Panel: 1. Panel: a. Meet requirements of TIA / EIA 568 Standard. b. CAT 6, 48 ports groups in eight 6 -port modules, T568B wiring configuration, 19 inch 475 mm width. c. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Leviton: 69586-U48. 2) Ortronics: OR-PHD66U48. 3) Suttle: STAR19110C6-48. 2. Mounting Bracket: Wiring Devices - 4 - 262726 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Hinged, wall mounted, 19 inches wide by 5 inches deep. b. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Leviton: 49251-W62. 2) Ortronics: OR -604004068. 3) Suttle: 103131. Secondary Surge (Lightning) Arresters: 1. Protection from Category C level transient surges as defined in IEE / ANSI C62.11 and C62.41. UL approved for exterior application. 2. Parallel metal oxide varistors, MOV, from each line to ground. 120 / 240 VAC. UV resistant construction with epoxy encapsulation of electrical connections. 3. Include 1/2 inch mounting nipple and locknut. 4. Category Four approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. ASZ175132 by Cooper Power Systems. b. 91-15FCB001 by General Electric. c. AG2401C by Intermatic. d. 54175 -SSA by Leviton. e. SDSA1175 by Square D. 'ART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Install devices flush with walls, straight, and solid to box. B. Label dimmer switch groupings with 1/16 inch 1.5 mm thick laminated plastic composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved letter shall be 1/4 inch 6 mm high. C. Install secondary surge arrestor in knock -out of junction box installed on bottom of automatic sprinkler controller. END OF SECTION Niring Devices - 5 - 262726 BLANK PAGE D74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 'ART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install disconnects as described in Contract Documents, except those provided integral with equipment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Disconnects: Same as Manufacturer of Project's main panelboard. b. Fuses. 1) Cooper Bussmann, Ellisville, IL www.cooperbussmann.com. 2) Edison Fuse, Ellisville, IL (314) 391-3443. 3) Ferraz Shawmut, Newburyport, MA www.ferrazshawmut.com. 4) Littelfuse Inc, Des Plaines, IL www.littelfuse.com. B. Disconnects: 1. Heavy-duty quick -make, quick -break type, non-fused unless indicated otherwise. 2. Provide interlock to prevent opening of door when switch is in ON position. 3. Provide means to lock switch in OFF position with padlock. 4. Disconnects for motor circuits shall be horsepower rated. 5. Enclosures: a. Interior: NEMA / CEMA Type 1. b. Exterior: NEMA / CEMA Type 3R. 6. Fuses: a. Fuse fused disconnects with dual -element time delay fuses and equip with rejection type fuse holders. b. Fuses on Project shall be from single manufacturer. )ART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Label disconnects to indicate equipment served, such as Condensing Unit CU -1. Use 1/16 inch 1.5 mm thick laminated plastic composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved letters shall be 1/4 inch 6 mm high. Attach labels with screws. END OF SECTION nclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 1 - 262816 i- Ohl oIK. 3Ix z-; )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install lighting system as described in Contract Documents, complete with lamps. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 'ART 2 - PRODUCTS ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. Advance Transformer Co, Rosemont, IL www.advancetransformer.com. b. General Electric Lighting, Hendersonville, NC or General Electric Lighting Canada Inc, Mississauga, ON www.gelighting.com/na. c. Howard Lighting Products, Laurel, MS www.howard-ind.com. d. Novitas Inc, Peachtree City, GA www.novitas.com. e. Osram Sylvania, Danvers, MA www.sylvania.com or Osram Sylvania Ltd, Mississauga, ON (905) 673-6171. I. Philips Lighting Co, Somerset, NJ www.lighting.philips.com/nam or Philips Lighting Canada, Scarborough, ON (416) 292-3000. g. Universal Lighting Technologies, Nashville, TN www.universalballast.com. h. Venture Lighting International, Solon, OH www.venturelighting.com. i. Watt Stopper Inc, Santa Clara, CA www.wattstopper.com. j. Westinghouse Lighting Corp, Philadelphia, PA www.westinghouselightbulbs.com. 2. Product Options: When several lighting fixtures are specified by name for one use on Drawings, select any one of those specified. Do not mix fixtures from different manufacturers specified for one use. B. Materials 1. Lighting Fixtures: a. Type One Acceptable Products: 1) See Fixture Schedule on Drawings for acceptable manufacturers and models. 2) Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Fluorescent Ballasts: a. Energy saving electronic for T8 lamps. 1) Instant start. 2) Parallel circuit type. 3) Minimum power factor of 95 percent. 4) Maximum total harmonic distortion of 10 percent. 5) Operation of lamps in compliance with Lamp Manufacturer's recommendations. 6) Minimum starting temperature 0 deg F for T8 lamps. 7) Class A sound rating. 8) Transient protection in accordance with IEEE / ANSI C62.41-1984, Category A. 9) Comply with FCC 47CFR Part 18. 10) Ballast factor of 0.78. iterior Lighting - 1 - 265100 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 11) Maximum crest factor of 1.7. 12) Five year full replacement warranty including labor allowance for replacement. 13) Input voltage to match system voltage. 14) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) ROP-LWSC or VOP-LWSC by Advance. b) GE-MAX-L/ULTRA by General Electric. c) B-IUNVEL-A by Universal Lighting Technologies. d) QHE-UNV-ISL-SC by Osram / Sylvania. 3. Lamps: a. T8 Fluorescent Lamps: 1) Minimum initial output of 3100 Lumens. 2) Rated life of 24,000 hrs at 3 hrs per start for lamps operated on instant start ballasts. 3) Minimum CRI 85 4) Meet Federal TCLP criteria. 5) Category Four approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) General Electric. b) North American Philips. c) Osram / Sylvania. d) Westinghouse b. Other Lamps: 1) Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a) General Electric. b) North American Philips. c) Osram / Sylvania. d) Westinghouse C. Factory Assembly: 1. Fixtures shall be fully assembled complete with necessary wiring, sockets, lamps, reflectors, ballasts, auxiliaries, plaster frames, recessing boxes, hangers, supports, lenses, diffusers, and other accessories essential for complete working installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Sections under 09 5000 heading to obtain symmetrical arrangement of fixtures in acoustic tile ceiling. 2. Coordinate with Sections under 09 9000 heading to ensure that light coves are properly painted before installation of light fixtures. 3. In mechanical equipment rooms, coordinate locations of light fixtures with equipment locations to provide proper room illumination without obstruction. Suspend fixtures that must be mounted below pipes, ducts, etc, with chains or other Architect approved method. B. Securely mount fixtures. Support fixtures weighing 50 lbs 23 kg or more from building framing or structural members. C. Where fluorescent fixtures are shown installed end to end, provide suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit. D. Where recessed fixtures are to be installed, provide openings, plaster rings, etc, of exact dimensions for such fixtures to be properly installed. Coordinate fixture installation with ceiling type and thickness. Terminate circuits for recessed fixtures in an extension outlet box near fixture and connect with specified flexible conduit. Interior Lighting - 2 - 265100 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 ,2 ADJUSTMENT A. Repair scratches or nicks on exposed surfaces of fixtures to match original undamaged conditions. END OF SECTION nterior Lighting - 3 - 265100 DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 8000 IRRIGATION 328423 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS !9000 PLANTING 329001 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS 329113 SOIL PREPARATION 329119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 329120 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT 329223 SODDING 329300 PLANTS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 'able of Contents - 1 - Document 32 0000 BLANK PAGE 174738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 32 8423 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install planting irrigation system as described in Contract Documents complete with accessories necessary for proper function. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance — Qualifications. 2. Section 22 1116: Stop and waste valve. 3. Section 31 2323: Fill. 4. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 5. Section 32 9223: Sodding. 6. Section 32 9300: Plants. 7. Division 26: Controller conduit and power to controller. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Dielectric Fittings: Special type of fitting used between dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action from causing corrosion failure. 2. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote -control, signaling power -limited circuits. 3. Lateral Line: Downstream from electric control valves to pop-up spray heads and drip valve assemblies to emitters. Piping or tubing is under pressure during flow. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non -potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 4. Main Line: Downstream from point of connection to electric control valves. Piping is under water - distribution -system pressure when activated by master valve or hydrometer. In areas where potable or secondary water are used, pressure supply line shall be white. In areas where non - potable or reclaimed water are used, pressure supply line shall be purple. 5. Peak Flow: Maximum required flow for given month based on six (6) day week, nine (9) hour day watering window to be used for irrigation system design and to be used in hydraulic analysis. 6. Point of Connection: Location where meter for irrigation system is located. 7. SMART Controller: Irrigation clocks that automatically adjust irrigation run times in response to environmental changes using sensors and weather information to manage watering times and frequency. As environmental conditions vary, controller will increase or decrease irrigation. SMART Controllers have ability to turn off sprinklers automatically during rain, high wind or low temperature. 8. Static Water Pressure: Pressure at point of connection when system is not operable. 9. Two Wire Path: Conducts power to solenoid valves, and also conducts communications signals from Controller to each device on system. Sensors receive instructions to take readings, transmit data and perform other tasks; solenoid valves and other devices also receive commands from controller over same wires used to carry power to valves. 10. Working Pressure: Pressure at point of connection when system is operable. B. Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing): 1. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections to assure compliance to Contract Documents. lnderground Sprinklers 1 - 328423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 2. Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of component: and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards: 3. Installer: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 4. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for performing inspections or special inspections. 5. Owner's Representative: Owner's Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities Manager) who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner's approval or authorization. 6. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduc product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performanc( and compliance with industry standards. 7. Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for b; Owner. 8. Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for by Contractor. 9. Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections. 10. Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building materials and workmanship. 11. Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 12. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product, service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements. C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: I a. ASTM D2564 -04(2009)e1, 'Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems'. b. ASTM E329-11a:'Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing'. c. ASTM F656-10, 'Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poli (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings'. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Provide Coordination for required tests and inspections as described under Field Quality Control in Part 3 EXECUTION for the following: a. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide necessary manufacturer's field service. b. Pressure Test: In presence of Landscape Architect or designated Representative(s), provide pressure test. c. Substantial Completion Walkthrough: In presence of Landscape Architect or designated Representative(s), plan and provide walk through after completion of irrigation system. d. Irrigation Final Acceptance: In presence of Landscape Architect or designated Representative(s), plan and provide final walk through after completion of all work listed on Substantial Completion walk through list provided by Landscape Architect. e. Provide coordination with Landscape Architect for Owner provided Certified Water Audit. B. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in mandatory pre -installation conference: a. Irrigation Subcontractor's Representative and Foreman responsible for installation of irrigation system required to be in attendance. 2. Schedule pre -installation conference before irrigation system installation begins. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Landscape Architect or designated Representative will demonstrate or describe method to be used to maintain head spacing from concrete and to stabilize heads. Underground Sprinklers - 2 - 32 8423, X74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Within project site, provide one (1) installed example of each type of irrigation detail for review and approval by Landscape Architect and Owner prior to beginning site work. c. Review required tests and inspections. d. Review SMART Controller requirements. C. Sequencing: 1. Install sleeves before installation of cast -in-place concrete site elements and paving. Scheduling: 1. Notify Landscape Architect and Owner for Certified Water Audit to be completed before Landscape Final Acceptance. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. b. Parts list for operating elements of system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates: a. Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. 1) Upon acceptance of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed acceptance certificate. 2) Certificate will include name and signature of reviewer, reviewer's company, date of review, and reviewer's telephone number. 2. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Results of main line service pressure test before beginning work on system should be submitted as a report following testing and before burial of mainline. b. Provide following from Main Line Irrigation test and observation: 1) Record and submit documentation of Irrigation Main Line tests, issues, and measure taking to correct problems. 3. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed literature on operation and maintenance of operating elements of system. b. Instruction Manual: 1) Includes complete directions for system operation and maintenance, including winterizing, controller program worksheet and annual service and scheduling calendar based on local site specific conditions. c. Complete instructions on how to drain entire backflow preventer to prevent freezing. 4. Field Quality Control Submittal: a. SMART Controller Approved Distributor or Manufacturer: 1) Provide Church Controller Installation Checklist. 5. Qualification Submittals: a. Irrigation Subcontractor: 1) Company specializing in performing work of this section. 2) Minimum five (5) years experience in irrigation sprinkler installations. 3) Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed irrigation sprinkler installations in past three (3) years of projects similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding. 4) Agree to complete reporting documents, including: a) Use only certified installers for SMART controller technology. b) Use only approved Distributors for SMART controller system. c) Provide SMART Controller Instructional Training. d) Assist Landscape Architect in completing the Watering Schedule for Site Management Plan (SMP). 5) Upon request, submit documentation. b. Irrigation Installer: Jnderground Sprinklers - 3 - 328423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, j 1) Irrigation sprinklers shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum three (3) years experience in irrigation sprinkler installations similar in size, scope, and complexity. a) The same foreman or supervisor is required to attend pre -installation conference. 2) Use trained personnel familiar with required irrigation sprinkler procedures and with the. Contract Documents. 3) Upon request, submit documentation. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Maintenance Contracts: 1) See Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP) for Establishment Period Maintenance and Irrigation System Operation. b. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Include one copy in Operations and Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800. Also include one copy to be included in Site Management Plan. Include the following information: 2) Instruction Manual. 3) Manufacturer's printed literature. 4) Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system. 5) Manufacturer's parts list. 6) Freezing prevention instructions. 7) Controller Program Schedule: a) See Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP) for Watering Schedule. c. Warranty Documentation: 1) Manufacturer's extended Warranty for SMART Controller. d. Record Documentation: 1) Certificates: a) Acceptance certificate of irrigation system. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Pressure Test. b) Water Audit Report. c) Smart Controller completed checklist. 3) Record drawings: As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing to be submitted before final inspection, including: a) Detail and dimension changes made during construction. b) Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents. c) Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes, manual drains, quick -coupler valves, control wire runs not in mainline ditch, soil moisture sensors (if soil moisture sensor technology is selected for the site) and both ends of sleeves. d) Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above finish grade. e) Take and record dimensions at time of installation. f) Reduced copy of record drawings to 11 by 17 inches, with color key circuits and laminated both sides with 5 mil thick or heavier plastic. Mount on 12 x 18 inch hard board drilled with (2) two 1/2 inch holes at top of board and hang on hooks in Custodial Room or location designated by Owner's Representative. g) Two (2) additional reduced copies of record drawings to 11 by 17 inches, with color key circuits, unlaminated, and unmounted to be given to Owner's Representative. 4) Photographs: Provide photographs prior to burial of key elements including but not limited to: a) Valves. b) Drains. c) Hydrometer or flow sensor. d) Moisture sensors, if called for. 2. Final payment for system will not be authorized until Closeout Submittals are received and accepted by Architect and Landscape Architect. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Tools: Underground Sprinklers - 4 - 328423 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Furnish following items before Final Closeout Review: 1) One (1) heavy-duty key for stop and waste or main shut-off valve. 2) One (1) quick coupler key with brass hose swivel. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Work and materials shall be in accordance with latest rules and regulations, and other applicable state or local laws. 2. Nothing in Contract Documents is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. B. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to the following: 1. Installer Qualifications: a. General: 1) Perform installation under direction of foreman or supervisor with five (5) years minimum experience in sprinkling system installations. b. SMART Controller: 1) Factory trained certified personnel familiar with required irrigation system and SMART controller installation procedures. Follow requirements as described under Installers in PART 3 EXECUTION. C. Mockups: 1. Provide Mock -Ups of each detail within valve box at staging area for review by Landscape Architect prior to installation of irrigation system. 2. These mock-ups may be installed with or without solvent weld cement so that they can later be used in field. 3. Mock-ups shall include complete installation included filter fabric, gravel sump, equipment assembly, valve box placement and branding in conformance with these specifications. D. Testing and Inspection. 1. Owner will provide Certified Water Audit for complete system to determine zone precipitation rates and efficiency: a. See Section 01 1200: 'Multiple Contract Summary'. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Storage and handling during installation: protect materials from damage and prolonged exposure to sunlight. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Standard one (1) year guarantee stipulated in General Conditions Article 12.2 shall include: a. Filling and repairing depressions and replacing plantings due to settlement of irrigation system trenches. b. Adjusting system to supply proper coverage of areas to receive water. c. Ensuring system can be adequately drained. 2. SMART Controller: a. Provide Manufacturer's extended warranty for five (5) years to be free of design, materials and workmanship defects. Jnderground Sprinklers - 5 - 328423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturer Contact List: a. 3M, Austin, TX www.3m.com/elpd. b. Acclima, Inc. Meridian, ID www.acclima.com. c. Action Machining Inc, Bountiful, UT www.actionfilters.com. d. Amiad www.amiadusa.com. e. Apollo Valves by Conbraco Industries, Matthews, NC www.apollovalves.com. f. Carson Industries LLC, Glendora, CA www.carsonind.com. g. GPH Irrigation Products, Fontana, CA www.gphirrigation.com. h. Harrington Corporation (Harco), Lynchburg, VA www.harcofittings.com. I. Hunter Industries, San Marcos, CA www.hunterindustries.com. j. HydroPoint Data Systems, Inc., Petaluma, CA www.hydropoint.com. k. HydroRain, North Salt Lake, UT www.hydrorain.com. I. King Innovation, St Charles, MO www.kinginovation.com. m. IPS Corporation, Compton, CA www.ipscorp.com. n. Leemco, Colton, CA www.leemco.com. o. Netafim, Inc. www.netafimusa.com. p. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com. q. Northstar Industries, LLC, Methuen MA www.northstarind.com. r. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. Bountiful, UT www.orbitonline.com. s. Paige Electric, Union, NJ www.paigewire.com. t. Rain Bird Sprinkler Manufacturing Corp, Glendora, CA www.rainbird.com. u. Rain Master, Simi Valley, CA www.rainmaster.com. v. Salco by Weathermatic Irrigation Products, Garland, TX www.weathermatic.com. w. Toro Company, Irrigation Div, Riverside, CA www.toro.com. x. T. Christy Enterprises, Inc. (Christy's), Anaheim, CA www.tchristy.com. y. Valve and Filter Corporation, Arvada, CO www.valveandfilterlcom. z. Weathermatic Irrigation Products, Garland, TX www.weathermatic.com. B. Category Four Approved SMART Controller Distributors. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Design Criteria: a. Provide SMART Controller and all components from same Approved Distributor only. 2. Acclima, Inc. Meridian, ID www.acclima.com. a. Approved Distributor Contact Information: 1) First Contact: a) Brad Nuffer (208) 887-1470 brad@acclima.com. 2) Second Contact: a) Scott Anderson (208) 887-1470 scott@acclima.com. C. Materials: 1. Rock -Free Soil: a. Backfill soil around PVC pipe. b. Soil having rocks no larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension. 2. Pea Gravel: a. For use around drains, valves, and quick couplers. b. 1/2 inch maximum dimension, washed rock. 3. Sand: Fine granular material naturally produced by rock disintegration and free from organic material, mica, loam, clay, and other deleterious substances. 4. Native Material: Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over 1-1/2 inches. 5. Topsoil: Remove rocks, roots, sticks, clods, debris, and other foreign matter over 1-1/2 inches longest dimension encountered during trenching. 6. Pipe, Pipe Fittings, And Connections: a. General: Underground Sprinklers - 6 - 328423 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 1) Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with Manufacturer's name, size, schedule, type, and working pressure. 2) Pipe sizes shown on Drawings are minimum. Larger sizes may be substituted if at no additional cost to Owner. b. Piping: 1) Pressure Lines: Schedule 40 PVC. 2) Lateral Lines: Series SIDR 15 HDPE 3408 100 lbs Polyethylene unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 3) Backflow Assembly Piping: Galvanized steel. 4) Quick Coupler Piping: Galvanized steel. c. Fittings: Same material as pipe, except where detailed otherwise. 1) Fittings 3 inch or larger: Harco or Leemco of matching size. d. Sleeves: 1) Under Parking Area And Driveway Paving: Schedule 40 PVC Pipe. 2) All Other: Class 200 PVC Pipe. 3) Sleeve diameter shall be two times larger than pipe installed in sleeve. 7. Sprinkler Heads: a. Each type of head shall be product of single manufacturer. b. Shrub Head Bubblers: 1) As shown on drawings. c. Spray Heads in Shrub and Ground Cover Areas: 1) As shown on drawings. d. Spray Heads in Lawn Areas: 1) As shown on drawings. e. Stream Heads, 16 to 22 foot in Lawn and Shrub Areas: 1) As shown on drawings. f. Gear Driven Rotor Pop -ups: 1) As shown on drawings. 8. Sprinkler Risers: a. Stationary Spray Heads (Pre -Manufactured Swing Assemblies): 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rain Bird model SA125050. b) Bludock model BLJ-050-SS-12. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products a) Swing assembly shall be 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 12 inch NPT / Bludock. 3) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. b. Inlet Rotor Pop -Up Sprinklers: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) 3/4 inch inlet rotor pop-up sprinklers shall have an adjustable pre -assembled swing assembly riser. Swing assemblies shall be 3/4 inch x 12 inch and shall be threaded both ends. Swing assemblies shall be: (1) Rain Bird model TSJ-12075. (2) Blu-lock model BLJ-075-TT-12. b) 1 inch inlet rotor pop-up sprinklers shall have an adjustable pre -assembled double swing joint riser. Swing joints shall be 1 inch x 12 inch and shall be threaded both ends. Swing joint riser shall be: (1) Rain Bird TSJ-12. (2) Bludock model BLJ-1 00 -TT -1 2. c) Equal as approved by Architect before installation.. 2) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. c. Pop -Up Rotor Sprinkler Heads: 1) Pop-up rotor sprinkler heads shall have adjustable riser assembly, three (3) ell swing joint assembly, unless detailed otherwise on Drawings. a) These swing joint fittings shall be of schedule 40 PVC plastic and nipples schedule 80 gray PVC unless otherwise designated on Drawings. b) Horizontal nipple parallel to side of lateral line shall be 8 inches long minimum. c) All other nipples on swing joint riser shall be of length required for proper installation of sprinkler heads. d. Pop-up sprinkler heads, shrub spray heads, bubbler heads, and stationary spray sprinkler heads shall have risers made up one of the following ways: Jnderground Sprinklers - 7 - 328423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, i 1) Three (3) schedule 40 street ells or Marlex street ells connected to lateral tee to form a adjustable riser or pap -up riser as detailed. 2) Risers for sprinkler heads 14 inches long minimum and 24 inches maximum. a) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) Hunter: SJ series with barbed fittings. (2) Hydro -Rain: Blu-lack Swing pipe & fittings. (3) Rainbird: Swing Pipe with barbed fittings. (4) Toro: Super Funny Pipe with barbed fittings, SPFA-5125, SPFA-51275. b) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 9. Automatic Irrigation Controller And Control Wiring: a. SMART Controllers: 1) Category Three National Account Approved Product. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Acclima: Water on Demand Series. CS3500. (1) Soil Moisture Sensor: Model No. ACC-SEN-TDT. (2) Telephone Communication Connection. (3) Durable, weather resistant cabinet with locking key for outdoor installation. (4) All other components required for complete and operational system. (5) Site consultation. b. Automatic Rain Sensors (supplied by Approved Distributor): 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: MINI-CLIK, RAIN-CLIK, WRC, WRFC. b) Hydro -Rain: HRC -100 -RS -RF (wireless); HRC -100 -RS -HW (wired). c) Rainbird: RSD-BEx (w/bracket), WR2-RFC, WR2-RS. d) Toro: TWRS (wireless). e) Weathermatic: 955 Rain Sense. c. Control Wiring: 1) Two -Wire control wiring: a) Acclima system wiring: (1) Two -wire control wire shall be shall be OF -UL listed, color coded copper conductor direct burial size 12 for all hot and spare wires and direct burial size 12 for all common wires (unless noted differently). (2) Run 3 wires to every valve decoder, sensor and master valve. (3) For control wires on culinary system colors shall be 1 Red, 2 White, 3 Blue. (4) For control wires on secondary system colors shall be 1 Red, 2 White, 3 Purple. Do not use green color coded wire. (5) Control wires are to be twisted with three (3) complete twists per 1 foot. b) Acclima Telephone Wiring: (1) Provide Telephone line from hall telephone to controller. Connect to controller using standard telephone jack. Coordinate with Landscape Architect and Electrical Engineer. c) Acclima Waterproof Wire Connectors: (1) Control wire connections shall consist of a properly -sized wire nut inserted in a waterproof grease cap. (2) Type Two Acceptable Products: (a) Northstar Industries: Suresplice SK 14-12G. (b) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2) Traditional control wire shall be OF -UL listed, color coded PE insulated copper conductor direct burial size 14. For wire runs exceeding 3,3000 feet, use 12 AWG wire. Do not use green color coded wire. 3) Communication wire between controller and hydrometer (or flow meter / master valve) to be Paige Electric PE -393. Run underground communication wire in gray electrical conduit. a) Paige Electric Cadweld Connection. 4) Waterproof Wire Connectors: a) Control wire connections shall consist of a properly -sized wire nut inserted in a waterproof grease cap: b) Type Two Acceptable Products: (1) DBY or DBR by 3M. Underground Sprinklers - 8 - 32 8423 174738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 (2) 'One Step' 20111SP by King Innovation. (3) DB 57905, 57505 by Orbit. (4) Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. d. Conduit: Commercial grade grey conduit. Size as follows: 1) Two -Wire Wiring installed in 1 inch conduit. e. Lightning Arrestor: 1) Provide grounding and Lightning Arrestor(s) as required by Manufacturer. 10. Valves: a. Automatic Valves: 1) As shown on drawings. b. Isolation Valves: 1) As shown on drawings. c. Backflow Preventer: Make and Model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. d. Hydrometer: 1) As shown on drawings. e. Pressure Reducing Valve: Make and model shown on Drawings or as required by local code. f. Quick Coupling Valves and Keys: 1) As shown on drawings. 11. Valve Accessories: a. Valve manifolds: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products. a) Action Machining: 1800 Series, Models 18001, 18001-1-5, and 18001-2.0, 1, 1- 1/2, and 2 inch sizes. b) Hydro -Rain: HRM Series. c) Rainbird: MS Series. d) Equals as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. b. Valve Boxes And Extensions: 1) Lid Colors: a) Green: Lawn areas (potable and secondary water). b) Brown: Bare soil and rock areas (potable and secondary water). c) Purple: Reclaimed water. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rainbird: VB -STD, VB-JMB, VB-STDT or VB-JBMT Series, VB-STDP or VB- JMBP Series, VB -MAX series. b) Orbit: 53983, 53993, 53753, 53985, 53755, 53995 (with extension boxes). c) Carson Industries: Model 1419-12, Model 1419-18, Model 1730-18 Jumbo. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. c. Valve ID tags: 1) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Christy's: Stamped ID tag. b) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. d. Valve Box Supports: Standard size fired clay paving bricks without holes over compacted gravel base. 12. Drip System: a. Drip Valve Assembly: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) Hunter: PCZ 101 Series, ICZ 101 Series. b) Netafim: (1) Over 4 GPM: LVCZ10075-HF. (2) Under 4 GPM: LVCZ10075-LF. c) Rainbird: (1) Over 6 GPM: XCZ-150-PRB-COM series (15-40 gpm). (2) Over 4 GPM: XCZ-100-B COM series (3-20 gpm). (3) Under 4 GPM: XCZ-075-PRF series. d) Toro: DZK-EZF model. b. Distribution Tubing (from lateral lines to emitter): 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: a) GPH: GPST IH Series, pre -manufactured flexible riser w/fittings (size as requried). nderground Sprinklers - 9 - 328423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, b) Salco: PVC -AR flex hose with fittings. c) Rainbird: XT -700 with barbed fittings. d) Hunter: SJ Series with barbed fittings. e) Toro: 1/4 inch Blue Stripe. c. Drip Emitters 1) As shown on drawings. d. Valve Boxes: 1) Lid Colors: a) Green: Lawn areas (potable and secondary water). b) Brown: Bare soil and rock areas (potable and secondary water). c) Purple: Reclaimed water. 2) Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Rainbird 12 Inch Standard: VB -STD, VB-STDT, or VB-STDP Series. b) Hydro -Rain: ProSeries 12" Standard Series with extensions. c) Carson Industries 12 Inch Standard Series: Model 1419-12, Model 1419-18. d) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. 13. Solvent Cement: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1) Primer: a) Meet ASTM F656 standard and applicable sections of latest edition of 'Uniform Plumbing Code'. b) Meet NSF/ANSI standard for use on potable water applications. c) Low VOC emissions and compliant with LEED. d) Product: Weld -On P-70 primer by IPS. 2) PVC Solvent Cement: a) Heavy bodied, medium setting, high strength: (1) Meet ASTM D2564 standard and applicable sections of latest edition of 'Uniform Plumbing Code'. (2) Meet NSF/ANSI standard for use on potable water applications. (3) Meet CSA standards for use in pressure and non -pressure potable water applications. (4) Low VOC emissions and compliant with LEED. (5) Product: Weld -On 711 Low VOC PVC Cement by IPS. b) Flexible, medium bodied, fast setting, high strength (flexible pipe only): (1) Meet ASTM D2564 standard and applicable sections of latest edition of 'Uniform Plumbing Code'. (2) Meet NSF/ANSI standard for use on potable water applications. (3) Low VOC emissions and compliant with LEED. (4) Product: Weld -On 795 Low VOC Flex PVC Cement by IPS. 14. Other Components: a. Recommended by Manufacturer and subject to Architect's review and acceptance before installation. b. Provide components necessary to complete system and make operational. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Approved Irrigation System Installers: 1. Sprinkler contractor with a minimum of five years owning and operating a sprinkler installation company. 2. Equal approved by Architect and / or Landscape Architect before bidding. See Section 01 4301. B. Category Three National Account Approved SMART Controller Installers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories: 1. Provide Qualification documentation as described under Informational Submittals in Part 1 GENERAL: Underground Sprinklers - 10 - 328423 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 a. Acclima: Factory approved installer having completed Acclima certified contractor training (see www.Acclima.com for details). EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Perform pressure test at stub -out on main water line provided for irrigation system, or at near -by fire hydrant. 2. Notify Architect if pressures over 70 psi or under 55 psi are found to determine if some re -design of system is necessary before beginning work on system. PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protection Of In -Place Conditions: a. Repair or replace work damaged during course of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. If damaged work is new, installer of original work shall perform repair or replacement. b. Do not cut existing tree roots measuring over 2 inches in diameter in order to install irrigation lines. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Layout of Irrigation Heads: a. Location of heads and piping shown on Drawings is approximate. Actual placement may vary slightly as is required to achieve full, even coverage without spraying onto buildings, sidewalks, fences, etc. b. During layout, consult with Architect to verify proper placement and make recommendations, where revisions are advisable. c. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to avoid existing fixed obstructions. d. Make certain changes from Contract Documents are shown on record drawings. INSTALLATION A. Trenching And Backfilling: 1. Pulling of pipe is not permitted. 2. Excavate trenches to specified depth. Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction from bottom of trench. Separate out rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction uncovered in trenching operation from excavated material and remove from areas to receive landscaping. 3. Cover pipe both top and sides with 2 inches of rock -free soil as specified under PART 2 PRODUCTS. Remainder of backfill to topsoil depth as specified in Section 32 9119 using topsoil as specified in Section 32 9113. 4. Do not cover pressure main, irrigation pipe, or fittings until Architect has inspected and approved system. B. Sleeving: 1. Sleeve water lines and control wires under walks and paving. Extend sleeves 6 inches minimum beyond walk or pavement edge. Cover sleeve ends until pipes and wires are installed to keep sleeve clean and free of dirt and debris. 2. Position sleeves with respect to buildings and other obstructions so pipe can be easily removed. C. Grades And Draining: a. Install piping so system can be blown out with compressed air. b. Provide and install quick -coupling valve or valves in location for easy blowout of entire system as shown on drawings. D. Installation of Pipe: Jnderground Sprinklers 11 - 328423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, It 1. Install pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, install main lines and lateral lines connecting pop-up rotor and impact sprinklers with minimum cover of 18 inches based on finished grade. Install remaining lateral lines, including those connecting drip tubing, with minimum of 12 inches of cov� based on finish grade. 3. Install pipe and wires under driveways or parking areas in specified sleeves 18 inches below finish grade or as shown on Drawings. 4. Locate no sprinkler head closer than 12 inches from building foundation. Heads immediately adjacent to mow strips, walks, or curbs shall be one inch below top of mow strip, walk, or curb and have one to 3 inches clearance between head and mow strip, walk, or curb. 5. Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends before installation so unobstructed flow will result. 6. Make solvent weld joints as follows: a. Do not make solvent weld joints if ambient temperature is below 35 deg F. b. Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean, dry cloth and apply one coat of primer to each surface. c. Apply uniform coat of solvent cement to outside of pipe. d. Apply solvent cement to fitting in similar manner. e. Insert pipe completely into fitting. f. Give pipe or fitting quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make sure pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket. g. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure to PVC pipe. 7. Tape threaded connections with teflon tape. 8. If pipe is larger than 3 inches, install joint restraints wherever change of direction occurs on PVC main pressure lines. E. Control Valves And Controller: 1. Install valves in plastic boxes with reinforced heavy duty plastic covers. Locate valve boxes within 12 inches of sidewalks and shrub bed edges with tops at finish grade. Do not install more than two valves in single box. 2. Place pea gravel below bricks supporting valve boxes to depth of excavation. Set valve boxes over valve so all parts of valve can be reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with finish grade. Valve box cavity shall be reasonably free from dirt and debris. 3. Wiring: a. For two wire systems, install all wiring in conduit. b. Two Wire Path: 1) Total length of wire in system is limited to 10,000 ft; maximum distance from any system device to controller is 4000 ft. 2) Wire loops are permissible, but length of wire in loop is limited to 2000 ft. For normal installation, it is recommended that paired wire be installed with 1 in 5 foot twist to reduce effects of nearby noise sources on communications. 3) Heavy electromagnetic fields such as produced by overhead high tension power lines or near -by generator, transformers or large pump motors can interfere with data signals and generate communications errors over the cable. In such conditions, it is imperative that wire receive 1 in 5 foot twist when installed. c. For traditional wiring, tape control wire to side of main line every 10 feet. Where control wire leaves main or lateral line, enclose it in gray conduit. d. Use white or gray color for common wire and other colors for all other wire. Each common wire may serve only one controller. e. Run one spare control wire from panel continuously from valve to valve throughout system similar to common wire for use as a replacement if a wire fails. Spare wire shall be different color than other wires, except use of green wire is not acceptable. Mark spare control wire in control box as an unconnected wire. Extend spare control wires 24 inches and leave coiled in each valve box. f. Use waterproof wire connectors consisting of properly -sized wire nut and grease cap at splices and locate all splices within valve boxes. Soil Moisture Sensors: Underground Sprinklers - 12 - 328423 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 Install soil moisture sensors in a horizontal position as located on drawings, 3 to 4 inches deep. Install 6 inch round plastic junction box in direct line between valve box and sensor to protect the sensor wire connection and to locate the buried sensor. G. Backflow Preventer: 1. Install 24 inches minimum from structures or hardscaping. 2. When installed adjacent to any structure, mount test cocks on side away from structure. 3. After installation, remove handles and turn over to Owner together with extra maintenance materials. H. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Set sprinkler heads and quick -coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade. 2. Do not install sprinklers using side inlets. Install using base inlets only. 3. Set sprinkler heads at a consistent distance from existing walks, curbs, and other paved areas and to grade by using specified components or other method demonstrated in Pre -Construction Conference. Drip Assembly: 1. Install pipe providing for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Cut tubing square and remove burrs at cut ends. 3. Distribution tubing shall be between 14 inches minimum and 48 inches maximum long. Layout PVC lateral lines as necessary to keep distribution tubing lengths within specified tolerances. 4. Locate drip emitter on uphill side of plant within rootball zone. 5. Layout in-line tubing for trees as indicated on Drawings. Layout in-line tubing for shrubs and groundcovers so plants receive water within rootball zones. 6. Locate in-line tubing on top of soil but under bark mulch and filter fabric. 7. Staple in-line tubing to ground at 6 foot maximum intervals and within 12 inches of ends and intersections. 8. Assembly Using Solvent Weld Joints: a. Do not make solvent weld joint if ambient temperature is below 35 deg F. b. Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean, dry cloth. c. Apply uniform coat of PVC solvent cement to outside of pipe and inside socket of fitting. d. Insert pipe completely into fitting. e. Give pipe or fitting quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make sure pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket. f. Allow joints to set 24 hours minimum before applying pressure to pipe. 9. Assembly Using'Funny Pipe' Type Joints: a. Connect distribution tubing to lateral line using barbed ell fitting. b. Connect fitting to distribution tubing using straight barbed fitting with 1/2 inch threaded end. J. Before installation of sprinkler heads and drip emitters, open control valves and use full head of water to flush out system. K. Arrange valve stations to operate in an easy -to -view progressive sequence around building. Tag valves with waterproof labels showing final sequence station assignments. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Irrigation System: a. Pressure Test: 1) In presence of Landscape Architect, provide pressure test. Notify Landscape Architect two (2) working days minimum before conducting test. 2) Before backfilling main line, test pressure at 100 psi (690 kPA) minimum for two (2) hours minimum and make certain there are no leaks. b. Test report: ndergrcund Sprinklers -13- 32 8423 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1) Report of Pressure Test results along with photographs of testing process are to be - provided to Architect and Landscape Architect or his authorized representative at completion of testing. 2) Pressure test report shall be included in Operations and Maintenance Manual. c. Water Audit: 1) Certified Water Audit for complete system to determine zone precipitation rates and efficiency. 2) Provide report to Landscape Architect in clear and concise report. 3) Landscape Architect to combine auditor's report into watering schedule. 2. SMART Controller Testing: a. Use SMART Controller Installation Checklist to test system to verify the following: 1) Verify all aspects of SMART Controller installation checklist are complete. 2) Verify controller is installed correctly and will automatically adjust irrigation run times im response to environmental changes using sensor and weather information to manage watering times and frequency. 3. Pre -Substantial Inspection: a. Landscape Architect or designated representative(s) will inspect system to verify completeness approximately two (2) weeks prior to Substantial Completion. i b. Approval of irrigation system to be in writing. 4. Substantial Completion Walkthrough: a. Landscape Architect or designated representative(s) will inspect site and create list of non- conforming items to be resolved prior to Irrigation Final Acceptance. Date on this list will ac! as date of Landscape Substantial Completion. b. Installations completed after water source has been turned off for season, as determined byI Landscape Architect, will be inspected following spring after system can be checked for proper operation. 5. Irrigation Final Acceptance: a. Irrigation Final Acceptance will be awarded when all non -conforming work is brought into conformance and Water Audit has been performed. b. Landscape Architect will create signed certificate to be included in Operations and Maintenance Manual at completion of all non -conforming work. B. Non -Conforming Work: Non -conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is no limited to the following: 1. Underground Sprinkler System: a. Correct any work found defective or not complying with Contract Document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Adjust sprinkler heads to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without appreciable harm. Such lowering and raising of sprinkler heads shall be part of original contract with no additional cost to Owner. 2. Adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution and trim so spray does not fall on building. B. Watering Time: 1. Adjust watering time of valves to provide proper amounts of water to plants. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Training: 1. After system is installed and approved, instruct Owner's designated personnel in complete operation and maintenance procedures using the Meetinghouse Site Management Plan (MSMP) on new construction projects. 2. SMART Controller Training: Underground Sprinklers -14- 32 8423 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. Manufacturer's approved Distributor to instruct Owner's designated personnel in complete operation and maintenance of SMART Controller. b. Manufacturer's approved Distributor to review terms of Warranty, Maintenance procedures and contact information with Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION Jnderground Sprinklers - 15 - 328423 BLANK PAGE )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 32 9001 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for landscaping work. 2. Provide maintenance for new landscaping as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 4301: Quality Assurance —Qualifications. 2. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 3. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading' for landscaping and planting areas. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in mandatory pre -installation conference: a. Landscaping Foreman and those responsible for installation of landscaping to be in attendance. Include Landscape Subcontractor if available. 2. Schedule pre -installation conference as specified in Section 31 2213. 3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Establish responsibility for maintenance of new landscaping during all phases of construction period. b. Prepare typical landscape planting excavations and conduct percolation test to verify that water drains away as called for in Section 32 9300. Discuss results of percolation tests with Architect and Owner's representative. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Statement. See Section 01 4301 for qualifications: a. Landscape Subcontractor: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Landscape Architect or Owner. b. Installer: 1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Landscape Architect or Owner. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) At completion of landscape work, submit two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one (1) full year after contract maintenance period ends. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals: 1. Post -Emergent Weed Control: a. Products shall be recognized for intended use by AHJ. B. Qualifications: ;ommon Planting Requirements - 1 - 329001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1. Landscape Subcontractor. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following a. Company specializing in performing work of this section. b. Minimum five (5) years experience in landscaping installations. c. Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding. d. Upon request, submit documentation. 2. Installer: a. Planting shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum three (3) years experience in landscape installations similar in size, scope, and complexity. b. Foreman or supervisor required to attend pre -installation conference. c. Use trained personnel familiar with required planting procedures and with Contract Documents. d. Upon request, submit documentation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of Manufacturer. 2. Deliver sod, plants, trees, and shrubs in healthy and vigorous condition. 3. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store in location on site where they will not be endangered and where they can be adequately watered and kept in healthy and vigorous condition. 2. Protect materials from deterioration while stored at site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.1 POST -EMERGENT WEED CONTROL: A. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1. Enide by Upjohn. 2. Dymid by Elanco. 3. Treflan or Surflan by Dow Agrosciences. 4. Eptan by Syngenta. 5. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. Acceptable Installers: 1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspect site and Contract Documents to become thoroughly acquainted with locations of irrigation, ground lighting, and utilities. Common Planting Requirements - 2 - 329001 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 3 PREPARATION A. Before proceeding with work, verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Architect before proceeding with landscape work. 1. Plant totals are for convenience of Contractor only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. 2. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise. B. Protection: 1. Take care in performing landscaping work to avoid conditions that will create hazards. Post signs or barriers as required. 2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy rains, etc. Repair or replace damaged areas. 3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry. INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not plant trees and shrubs until major construction operations are completed. Do not commence landscaping work until work of Section 31 2216 and Section 32 8423 has been completed and approved. B. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. C. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal. E. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill or adverse drainage conditions, notify Architect before planting. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Architect will inspect landscaping installation approximately two (2) weeks before Substantial Completion. B. Non -Conforming Work. Non -conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following: 1. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears dead as directed by Architect within ten (10) days of notification and before Substantial Completion at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Replace damaged plantings at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Repair damage to irrigation, ground lighting, utilities, asphalt paving, concrete paving, concrete sidewalks, concrete curb and gutters and other items adjacent to landscaping caused by work of this Section or replace at no additional cost to Owner. CLEANING A. Waste Management: 1. Immediately clean up soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials. PROTECTION A. Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after planting is completed by placing adequate warning signs and barricades. :ommon Planting Requirements - 3 - 329001 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, B. Provide adequate protection of planted areas against trespassing, erosion, and damage of any kind. Remove this protection after Architect has accepted planted areas. 3.8 MAINTENANCE A. General: 1. Before beginning maintenance period, plants shall be in at least as sound, healthy, vigorous, anc in approved condition as when delivered to site, unless accepted by Architect in writing at final landscape inspection. 2. Maintain landscaping from completion of landscape installation to thirty (30) days after Substantial Completion Meeting. Areas sodded after November 1st will accepted the following spring approximately one month after start of growing season, May 1st or as determined by Architect, if specified conditions have been met. 3. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears unhealthy or non -vigorous as directed by Architect before end of maintenance period. Make replacements within ten (10) days of notification. Lawr that does not live and has to be replaced shall be guaranteed and maintained an additional thirty (30) days from date of replacement. B. Sodded Lawn: 1. Maintain sodded lawn areas until lawn complies with specified requirements and throughout maintenance period. 2. Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub -soil immediately under sod continuously moist 3 to 4 inches deep. 3. Cut grass first time when it reaches 3 inches high. Continue to mow at least once each week throughout maintenance period. Remove clippings. 4. Apply weed killer as necessary to maintain weed -free lawn. Apply weed killer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during calm weather when air temperature is between 50 and 80 deg F. 5. At end of thirty (30) day maintenance period, fertilize lawns as recommended in Section 32 9113. C. Trees, Shrubs, And Plants: 1. Maintain by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth. 2. Restore planting basins. 3. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical positions as required. 4. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 5. Provide supplemental water by hand as needed in addition to water from sprinkling system. END OF SECTION Common Planting Requirements - 4 - 329001 174738 June 2.012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform soil preparation work as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and apply soil amendments as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 9119: Landscape Grading' for landscaping and planting areas. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3). ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre -installation conference as specified in Section 31 2213. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Review soil amendments and fertilizer requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Product literature and chemical / nutrient analysis of soil amendments and fertilizers. 2. Samples: a. Sample of soil conditioner for approval before delivery to site. Include product analysis list. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit tests on imported and site topsoil by licensed laboratory before use, using Owner Form 'Topsoil Test Report': 1) Before use, topsoil shall meet minimum specified requirements and be approved by Architect. 2) If necessary, submit proposed amendments and application rates necessary to bring topsoil up to minimum specified requirements. b. Submit report stating location of source of imported topsoil and account of recent use. 2. Installer Reports: a. Delivery slips indicating amount of soil conditioner delivered to Project site. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: foil Preparation - 1 - 329113 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) 'Topsoil Test Report'. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil used in landscaped areas, whether imported, stockpiled, or in place, shall be fertile, loose, friable soil meeting following criteria: a. Chemical Characteristics: 1) Acidity / alkalinity range: pH 5.5 to 8.0. 2) Soluble Salts: less than 3.0 mmhos/cm. 3) Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR): less than 6.0. 4) Organic Matter: greater than one percent. b. Physical Characteristics: 1) Gradation as defined by USDA triangle of physical characteristics as measured by hydrometer. a) Sand: 15 to 60 percent. b) Silt: 10 to 60 percent. c) Clay: 5 to 30 percent. 2) Clean and free from toxic minerals and chemicals, noxious weeds, rocks larger than 1- 1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. 3) Soil shall not contain more than 2 percent by volume of rocks measuring over 3/32 inch in largest size. B. Soil Amendments: 1. Incorporate following soil amendments into topsoil used for Project: a. Acceptable Soil Amendments, Soil Conditioners, And Application Rates: 1) EPA Class 'A' co -compost or compost with SAR less than 3.0, EC less than 4.0, and CN ratio of 15 to 25:1 passing through 1/2 inch mesh screen: Apply at the rate of one part compost to three parts topsoil. 2) Obtain compost from Eco -Bark, Rexburg, Idaho. 3) Equals as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Soil Amendments: 1. Add specified soil amendments at specified rates to lawn areas. 2. Roto -till or otherwise mix amendments evenly into top 4 inches of topsoil. 3. Incorporate and leach soil amendments which require leaching, such as gypsum, within such time limits that soil is sufficiently dry to allow proper application of fertilizer and soil conditioners. I END OF SECTION ATTACHMENTS Soil Preparation - 2 - 329113 Iopsoil Testing Report "A Area Office DateI This form should be given to the person or lab doing the testing each time a soils test is requested. rchitect Instructions Architect is to determine, by investigation, quality and quantity of topsoil on a site before Owner's review. All information on this form must be provided. Horticultural topsoil test is required at each project site. Costs for testing and report will be paid by Owner. Provide copies of report to Landscape Architect and DTA Area Office. Contractor will test and provide results and recommendations for imported topsoil. Imported topsoil shall comply with project spe- cifications. Date Requested: By W hom: Contact Phone #: Soil Testing Laboratory Instructions 1. Al least two test samples shall be made of the topsoil on the project site and each anticipated topsoil source. If the site soil profile or borrow pit are not uniform, additional samples shall be taken. Uniform composite samples may also be used if properly acquired and documented. 2. The soil report must provide interpretation and recommenda- tions for soil amendments, fertilizers, and soil conditioners for use by the Architect and the Landscape Architect. These rec- ommendations should consider lawn areas as well as trees and shrubs, and appropriate times for fertilizing. SOIL SAMPLE LOG ;oil Sample No. I Description of location where sample was taken History of use of the soil :Asting Conditions Test Report ("Acceptable Levels" refers to the allowable soil specifications prior to being amended) SOIL TEST DATA Sample No. pH(1) EC(l) Mmhos/cm n) SARI') %Sand %Silt , / Clay Text(2) Class %13) OM N0344) ppm Pts) ppm K(s) ppm Fe(5) Ppm \cceptable5.5-8.0 Level(s) <3.0 <6.0 15-60 10-60 5-30 (2) >1.0 >20 >11 >730 >10 Saturated soil paste 1:1 soil:water method (please Indicate) ')Hydrometer method(Acceptable soil- sandA 5-60%, silt:l 0-60%, clay -5-30%) ')Potassium dichromate method (Walkey-Black) or loss of ignition `)Chromotropic acid method ')AB -DTPA method f other methods are used for NO3-N, P, K, and Fe, then note. INFILTRATION RATE 11 SOIL TESTING LABORATORY Documented Infiltration rate of test sample(s) Name: based on texture at 90 % relative density (to nearest 1/10th of an inch) Address: Sample No. Rate Inches/Hour Phone Number: Inches/Hour Fax Number: Inches/Hour Inches/Hour of Test Results: Soil Amendments, Fertilizer and Soil Conditioner— Recommendations: Term (5 Year) Fertilizer and Soil Conditioner — Recommendations: 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 'ART1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform topsoil placement and finish grading work required to prepare site for installation of landscaping as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 9113: 'Soil Preparation' for topsoil preparation and soil amendments. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft). ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 31 2213. SART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used )ART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 2216 are met. 2. Do not commence work of this Section until imported, stockpiled and in place topsoil are amended as specified in Section 31 9113. PREPARATION A. Protection Of In -Place Conditions: 1. Protect utilities and site elements from damage. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Disk, till, or aerate with approved agricultural aerator to depth of 6 inches. 2. Seven days maximum before beginning seeding and planting: a. Loosen area 4 inches deep, dampen thoroughly, and cultivate to properly break up clods and lumps. b. Rake area to remove clods, rocks, weeds, roots, debris or other material 1 inch or more in and dimension. _andscape Grading - 1 - 329119 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,j c. Grade and shape landscape area to bring surface to true uniform planes free from irregularities and to provide drainage and proper slope to catch basins. 3. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet from building or other permanent structures. Use hand held tillers for preparation of subsoil in areas closer then 6 feet. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: i 1. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet from building or other permanent structures. 2. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots. B. Finish Grade Tolerances (As shown on General Planting Details in Contract Documents): 1. Total topsoil depth of 5 inches minimum in lawn and groundcover planting areas. No topsoil as defined in this Section required over tree and shrub planting areas. 2. Finish grade of planting areas before planting and after addition of soil additives shall be specifie< distances below top of adjacent pavement of any kind: a. Ground Cover Areas: 2 inches below. b. Sodded Areas: 2 inches below, or so that sod will be 1" below measured to top of sod soil. c. Tree and Shrub Areas (not individual trees): 4 inches below, measured before placing rock mulch. C. Imported Topsoil: 1. Place tested and approved topsoil: a. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. b. Provide amounts as required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. c. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placemen) process. d. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. D. Stockpiled Topsoil: 1. Redistribute tested and approved existing topsoil stored on site as a result of work of Section 31 1413. a. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. b. Provide additional approved imported topsoil as required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. c. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement' process. d. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. E. In Place Topsoil 1. At locations where topsoil can remain in place and has been tested and approved, perform the following: a. Remove existing vegetation as required in preparation for new landscaping. b. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. c. Provide additional approved imported topsoil as required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. d. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement process. e. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. F. Grading: 1. Slope grade away from building for 12 feet minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch in 12 inches minimum unless otherwise noted. Landscape Grading - 2 - 329119 )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. High point of finish grade at building foundation shall be 6 inches minimum below finish floor level unless shown otherwise. b. Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Contract Documents by molding surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. c. Fill low spots and pockets with topsoil and grade to drain properly. G. Immediately before planting lawn and with topsoil in semi -dry condition, roll areas that are to receive lawn in two directions at approximately right angles with water ballast roller weighing 100 to 300 lbs, depending on soil type. 1. Rake or scarify and cut or fill irregularities that develop as required until area is true and uniform, free from lumps, depressions, and irregularities. PROTECTION A. After landscape areas have been prepared, take no heavy objects over them except lawn rollers. END OF SECTION -andscape Grading - 3 - 329119 BLANK PAGE )7473£3 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 32 9120 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform topsoil placement required for topsail grading as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements: 2. Section 31 1413: Stripping and storing of existing topsoil. 3. Section 31 2216: 'Finish Grading' for landscaping and planting areas. 4. Section 32 9001: 'Common Planting Requirements': a. Pre -installation conference held jointly with other common planting related sections. 5. Section 32 9113: 'Soil Preparation' for topsoil preparation and soil amendments. 6. Section 32 9121: 'Topsoil Grading'. REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557-09, 'Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft). ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre -installation conference as specified in Section 32 9001. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 32 9001, review the following: a. Review finish grade tolerance requirements. b. Review surface preparation requirements including disking, tilling, or aerating. >ART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used >ART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 2216 are met. 2. Do not commence work of this Section until imported, stockpiled and in place topsoil are amended as specified in Section 31 9113. 3. Receive approval from Landscape Architect of subgrade elevations prior to commencement of this Work. Topsoil Placement - 1 - 329120 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection Of In -Place Conditions: 1. Protect utilities and site elements from damage. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Surfaces to receive Imported and Stockpiled Topsoil: a. Disk, till, or aerate with approved agricultural aerator to depth of 6 inches. b. Place specified and approved topsoil on prepared surface. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: 1. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet from building or other permanent structures. Use hand held tillers for preparation of subsoil in areas closer than 6 feet. 2. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots. B. Topsoil Depth: 1. Total topsoil depth of 5 inches minimum in lawn and groundcover planting areas. 2. No topsoil as defined in this Section required over tree and shrub planting areas or native grass, shrub, or tree areas. C. Imported Topsoil: 1. Place tested and approved topsoil: a. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. b. Provide amounts as required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. c. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement process. d. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. Stockpiled Topsoil: 1. Redistribute tested and approved existing topsoil stored on site as a result of work of Section 31 1413. a. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. b. Provide additional approved imported topsoil as required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. c. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement! process. I d. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. E. In Place Topsoil: 1. At locations where topsoil can remain in place and has been tested and approved, perform the following: a. Remove existing vegetation as required in preparation for new landscaping. b. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials. c. Provide additional approved imported topsoil as required to bring surface to specified elevation relative to concrete site elements. d. Do not place topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement process. e. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. F. Grading: 1. Slope grade away from building for 12 feet minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch in 12 inches minimum unless otherwise noted. Topsoil Placement - 2 - 329120 074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 a. High point of finish grade at building foundation shall be 6 inches minimum below finish floor level unless shown otherwise. b. Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Contract Documents by molding surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. c. Fill low spots and pockets with topsoil and grade to drain properly. END OF SECTION Topsoil Placement - 3 - 329120 BLANK PAGE )74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,5 SECTION 32 9223 SODDING 'ART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sodded lawn as described in Contract Documents, B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 8423: Irrigation system. 2. Section 32 9001: Common Planting Requirements. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Crop Coefficients and Hydro -Zones: Crop coefficients (Kc) are used with ETo to estimate specific plant evapotranspiration rates. The crop coefficient is a dimensionless number (between 0 and 1.2) that is multiplied by the ETo value to arrive at a plant ET (ETc) estimate. Plants grouped by water needs, organized into one irrigation zone. 2. Eco -Region Irrigation Design: A bio -regional approach to irrigation and planting design that is relevant to the geographic area for which the planting plan and irrigation system is designed. These geographic areas are defined by the Environmental Protection Agency and have been modified by the LDS church into 15 geographical areas throughout North America, and the Hawaiian Islands. 3. Hardiness Zone: A hardiness zone is a more precisely geographically -defined zone within an Eco -Region in which a specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness, or ability to withstand the minimum temperatures of the zone. Hardiness Zones may be defined by one of two sources: a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map. Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by the architect through the planting and irrigation design process. 4. Hydro -Zone: Plants grouped by water needs (similar Crop Coefficients (Kc), organized into one irrigation zone. 5. Reference Evapotranspriation (ETo): The total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from the plant surface (transpiration) over some period. SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Written certification confirming lawn seed quality and mix. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Maintenance Contracts: 1) See Site Management Plan (SMP) for Establishment Period Maintenance. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: Sodding - 1 - 329223 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 1. Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod in accordance with requirements of Turfgrass Producers International (TPI) (formally American Sod Producers Association) Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting / Installing. 2. Schedule deliveries to coincide with topsoil operations and laying. Keep storage at job site to minimum without causing delays. a. Deliver, unload, and store sod on pallets within 24 hours of being lifted. b. Do not deliver small, irregular, or broken pieces of sod. B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Cut sod in pieces approximately 3/4 to one inch thick. Roll or fold sod so it may be lifted and handled without breaking or tearing and without loss of soil. 2. During wet weather, allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling. 3. During dry weather, protect sod from drying before installation. Water as necessary to insure vitality and to prevent excess loss of soil in handling. Sod that dries out before installation will be rejected. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Description: 1. Superior sod grown from certified, high quality, seed of known origin or from plantings of certified grass seedlings or stolons: a. Assure satisfactory genetic identity and purity. b. Assure over-all high quality and freedom from noxious weeds or an excessive amount of other crop and weedy plants at time of harvest. 2. Sod shall be composed of three varieties minimum of Kentucky Bluegrass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Sections 32 9113 and 32 9300 has been completed and approved. B. Tolerances: 1. Final grade of soil after sodding of lawn areas is complete shall be one inch below top of adjacent pavement of any kind measured to top of sod soil. C. Laying of Sod: 1. Lay sod during growing season and within 48 hours of being lifted. 2. Lay sod while top 6 inches of soil is damp, but not muddy. Sodding during freezing temperatures or over frozen soil is not acceptable. 3. Lay sod in rows perpendicular to slope with joints staggered. Buff sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife. 4. Lay sod flush with adjoining existing sodded surfaces. 5. Do not sod slopes steeper than 3:1. Consult with Architect for alternate treatment. D. After Laying of Sod Is Complete: 1. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicular to each other. 2. Repair and re -roll areas with depressions, lumps, or other irregularities. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade will not be permitted. Sodding - 2 - 329223 174738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 3. Water sodded areas immediately after laying sod to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 6 inches of topsoil. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Sodded areas will be accepted at Project closeout if: a. Sodded areas are properly established. b. Sod is free of bare and dead spots and is without weeds. c. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2 inches. 2. Sodded areas have been mowed a minimum of twice. END OF SECTION iodding 3 - 329223 BLANK PAGE 74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 SECTION 32 9300 PLANTS \RT1-GENERAL SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 9001: Common Planting Requirements. 2. Section 32 9113: Soil Preparation. 3. Section 32 9223: Sodding. REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Crop Coefficients and Hydro -Zones: Crop coefficients (Kc) are used with ETo to estimate specific plant evapotranspiration rates. Crop coefficient is dimensionless number (between 0 and 1.2) that is multiplied by ETo value to arrive at plant ET (ETc) estimate. Plants grouped by water needs, organized into one irrigation zone. 2. Eco -Region Irrigation Design: Bio -regional approach to irrigation and planting design that is relevant to geographic area for which planting plan and irrigation system is designed. These geographic areas are defined by Environmental Protection Agency and have been modified by the LDS Church into 15 geographical areas throughout North America, and Hawaiian Islands. 3. Hardiness Zone: Hardiness zone is more precisely geographically -defined zone within an Eco - Region in which specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness, or ability to withstand minimum temperatures of zone. Hardiness Zones may be defined by one of two sources: a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map. Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by Landscape Architect through planting and irrigation design process. 4. Hydro -Zone: Plants grouped by water needs (similar Crop Coefficients (Kc), organized into one irrigation zone. 5. Reference Evapotranspriation (ETo): Total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from plant surface (transpiration) over some period. B. Reference Standards: 1. American Nursery & Landscape Association / American National Standards Institute: a. ANLA / ANSI Z60.1-2004, 'American Standard for Nursery Stock.' SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: a. Bark top dressing mulch for approval before delivery to site. b. Rock mulch for approval before delivery to site. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Maintenance Contracts: 1) See Site Management Plan (SMP) for Establishment Period Maintenance. lants - 1 - 329300 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2,1 b. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Installer Instructions: a) Provide written instructions covering maintenance requirements by Owner for one, year beyond Contract maintenance period specified in Section 32 9001. c. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include final, executed copy of warranty. j 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. 2. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. 4. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. 5. Provide protective covering during delivery. B. Storage And Handling Requirements; 1. Handle balled stock by root ball or container. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. 2. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade and protect from weather and mechanical damage. 3. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, saw dust, or other acceptable material approved by Landscape Architect. Do not place on pavement. 4. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 5. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with fine spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in moist condition. Do not allow plant foliage to dry out. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide written warranties as follows: a. Guarantee shrubs, ground covers, and vines to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for 90 days minimum from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. b. Guarantee trees to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for one year from date landscape installation is accepted as complete. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Plants: 1. Conform to requirements of Plant List and Key on Contract Documents and to ANLA / ANSI Z60.1. 2. Nomenclature: a. Plant names used in Plant List conform to 'Standardized Plant Names' by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances, follow custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear tag showing genus, species, and variety of at least 10 percent of each species delivered to site. 3. Quality: a. Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, free from plant disease, insect pests or their eggs, noxious weeds, and have healthy, normal root systems. Container stock shall be well established and free of excessive root -bound conditions. b. Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery. Plants - 2 - 329300 X74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 c. Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect as to size, health, quality, and character. d. Bare root trees are not acceptable. e. Provide plant materials from licensed nursery or grower. 4. Measurements: a. Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with branches in their normal position as indicated on Contract Documents or Plant List. b. Measurement should be average of plant, not greatest diameter. For example, plant measuring 15 inches in widest direction and 9 inches in narrowest would be classified as 12 inch stock. c. Plants properly trimmed and transplanted should measure same in every direction. d. Measure caliper of trees 6 inches above surface of ground. e. Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted from Plant List, plant materials shall be normal stock for type listed. f. Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied, with prior written approval of Landscape Architect, and: 1) If complying with Contract Document requirements in all other respects. 2) If at no additional cost to Owner. 3) If sizes of roots or balls are increased proportionately. 5. Shape and Form: a. Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical for variety and species and conform to measurements specified in Plant List. b. Well grown material will generally have height equal to or greater than spread. However, spread shall not be less than 2/3's of height. ACCESSORIES A. Planting Mix: 1. Mixture of topsoil as specified in Section 32 9113 and compost as follows: a. EPA Class 'A' co -compost or compost with SAR less than 3.0, EC less than 4.0, and CN ratio of 15 to 25:1 passing through 1/2 inch mesh screen: Mix at the rate of one part compost to three parts topsoil. b. Obtain compost from Eco -Bark, Rexburg, Idaho. 1) Equals as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200. B. Fertilizer: 1. Fertilizer as recommended on 'Topsoil Testing Report'. C. Tree Stakes: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 2 inch diameter Lodgepole Pine. b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. D. Tree Staking Ties: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 32 inch Cinch -Tie tree ties by V.I.T. Products Inc, Escondido, CA www.vitproducts.com. b. Flex strap Tree Ties by Aquarius Brands Inc, Ontario, CA www.aquariusbrands.com. c. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. E. Pre -Emergent Herbicide: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Chipco Dimension Granular by The Andersons Inc, Maumee, IL www.andersonsinc.com. b. Elanco XL2G granular by Crop Data Management Systems, Marysville, CA www.cdms.net. c. Ronstar G granular by Bayer Crop Science, Monheim, Germany www.bayercropscience.com. d. Surflan AS liquid by United Phosphorous Inc, Trenton, NJ www.upi-usa.com. e. Oryzalin 4 A.S. liquid by FarmSaver, Seattle, WA www.farmsaver.com. Plants - 3 - 329300 5074738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, Weed Barrier: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. DeWitt 4.1 oz. 20 year woven polypropylene weed barrier. b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. G. Bark Top Dressing Mulch: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Fiber Mulch Fir Bark, available from Mt. West Bark, Rexburg, Idaho. H. Rock Mulch: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Rustic Gold, available from Wolverine Mulch, Idaho Falls, Idaho. b. Size: 1) No rock should be less than 3/4 inch in size. 2) For slopes 3:1 or less: Y-4". 3) For steep slopes greater than 3:1: 3"-4". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and site to Landscape Architect before proceeding with work of this Section. 2. Plant totals are for convenience only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Contract Documents. All planting indicated on Contract Documents is required unless indicated otherwise. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings: 1. Stake locations and outline areas. 2. Secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before planting. 3. Make minor adjustments as may be requested. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Section 32 9113 has been completed and approved. B. Excavation: 1. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting holes, Landscape Architect will select alternate locations. 2. Plant Excavation Size: a. Diameter: Twice diameter of root ball or container minimum. b. Depth: Equal to container or rootball depth. 3. Unless excavated material meets topsoil requirements as specified in Section 32 9113, remove from landscape areas and do not use for landscaping purposes. 4. Roughen sides and bottoms of excavations. 5. With approval of Landscape Architect, select five (5) typical planting excavations throughout site for drainage testing. a. Fill selected excavations with water and verify that water drains away at rate of 3 inches per hour minimum. Inform Landscape Architect in writing of excavations where water does not drain properly. Plants - 4 - 329300 D74738 June 2012 Rexburg 2, 5 b. Select three (3) excavations approximately 5 feet away from each non -draining excavation and repeat tests. Continue testing process until non -draining areas have been identified. c. In excavations located in identified non -draining areas, auger 6 inch diameter hole 4 feet deep in low point of each excavation and fill with gravel. d. Do not plant trees or shrubs in holes that do not properly drain. C. Planting: 1. Removing Binders And Containers: a. Remove top one / third of wire basket and burlap binders. b. Remove plastic and twine binders from around root ball and tree trunk. c. Remove wood boxes from around root ball. Remove box bottoms before positioning plant in hole. After plant is partially planted, remove remainder of box without injuring root ball. 2. Plant immediately after removing binding material and containers. Place tree and shrub rootballs on undisturbed soil. After watering and settling, top of tree root balls shall be approximately two inches higher than finished grade and trunk flare is visible. Shrub root balls shall be approximately one inch higher than finished grade 3. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. 4. Center plant in hole, remove remaining wire basket, and backfill with specified planting mix. Except in heavy clay soils, make ring of mounded soil around hole perimeter to form watering basin. 5. Add fertilizer in plant pit as per 'Topsoil Testing Report' and during proper season. 6. Fill landscape excavations with tamped planting mix and recommended fertilizer. Compact in 6 inch lifts. Settle by watering to ensure top of root ball is the specified distance higher than surrounding soil following compaction and settling. 7. Do not use muddy soil for backfilling. 8. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Landscape Architect. 9. Thoroughly water trees and shrubs immediately after planting. 10. At base of each tree, leave 36 inch diameter circle free of any grass. D. Supports for New Trees: 1. Provide new supports for trees noted on Contract Documents to be staked. a. Remove nursery stakes delivered with and attached to trees. b. Support shall consist of at least two (2) tree stakes driven into hole base before backfill so roots are not damaged. Place stakes vertically and run parallel to tree trunk. Install stakes so 3 feet of stake length is below finish grade. c. Deciduous Trees: 1) Place tree ties 6 to 12 inches below crotch of main tree canopy. Second set of tree ties may be required 18 to 24 inches above finish grade, if directed by Landscape Architect. 2) Remove tops of tree stakes so top of stake is 6 inches below main tree canopy to prevent damage to tree branches and canopy growth. d. Evergreen Trees: 1) Place tree ties 2/3's of height of tree up from root ball. 2. Staking and guying should allow some tree movement. Vines: 1. Remove from stakes, untie, and securely fasten to wall or fence next to which they are planted. Ground Covers: 1. Container -grown unless otherwise specified on Contract Documents. Space evenly to produce a uniform effect, staggered in rows and intervals shown. G. Post Planting Weed Control: 1. Apply specified pre -emergent herbicide to shrub and ground cover planting areas and grass -free areas at tree bases after completion of planting. 2. Areas shall be free of existing weed growth before application of herbicide. H. Weed Barrier Fabric: 1. After planting and application or herbicide in shrub beds, apply covering of specified weed barrier fabric. 2. Achieve 100 percent coverage over ground areas. ?tants - 5 - 329300